英语--英语专业八级考试模拟题

英语--英语专业八级考试模拟题 外语教育网>>TEM考试>>经典题库>> 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 01 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. In each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proof-read the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "/\" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. Classic Intention Movement In social situations, the classic Intention Movement is "the chair- grasp". Host and guest have been talking for some time, but now the host has an appointment to keep and can get away. His urge (1) to go is held in check by his desire not be rude to his guest. If he (2) did not care of his guests feelings he would simply get up out of (3) his chair and to announce his departure. This is what his body (4) wants to do, therefore his politeness glues his body to the chair (5) and refuses to let him raise. It is at this pint that he performs (6) the chair as about to push himself upwards. This is the first act (7) he would make if he were rising. If he were not hesitating, it (8) would only last a fraction of the second. He would learn, push, (9) rise, and be up. But now, instead, it lasts much longer. He holds his "readiness-to-rise" post and keeps on holding it. It is as (10) if his body had frozen at the get-ready moment. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages carefully and then write your answers on the space given. TEXT A A magazines design is more than decoration, more than simple packaging. It expresses the magazines very character. The Atlantic Monthly has long attempted to provide a design environment in which two disparate traditions —— literary and journalistic —— can co-exist in pleasurable dignity. The redesign that we introduce with this issue —— the work of our art director, Judy Garlan —— represents, we think, a notable enhancement of that environment. Garlan explains some of what was in her mind as she began to create the new design:" I saw this as an opportunity to bring the look closer to matching the elegance and power of the writing which the magazine is known for. The overall design has to be able to encompass a great diversity of styles and subjects —— urgent pieces of reporting, serious essays, lighter pieces, lifestyle-oriented pieces, short stories, poetry. We dont want lighter pieces to seem too heavy, and we dont want heavier pieces to seem too pretty. We also use a broad range of art and photography, and the design has to work well with that, too. At the same time, the magazine needs to have a consistent feel, needs to underscore the sense that everything in it is part of one Atlantic world. The primary typefaces Garlan chose for this task are Times Roman, for a more readable body type, and Bauer Bodoni, for a more stylish and flexible display type (article titles, large initials, and so on). Other aspects of the new design are structural. The articles in the front of the magazine, which once flowed into one another, now stand on their own, to gain prominence. The Travel column, now featured in every issue, has been moved from the back to the front. As noted in this space last month, the word "Monthly" rejoins "The Atlantic" on the cover, after a decade-long absence. Judy Garlan came to the Atlantic in 1981 after having served as the art director of several other magazines. During her tenure here the Atlantic has won more than 300 awards for visual excellence. from the Society of illustrators, the American Institute of Graphic Arts, the Art Directors Club, Communication Arts, and elsewhere. Garlan was in various ways assisted in the redesign by the entire art-department staff: Robin Gilmore, Barnes, Betsy Urrico, Gillian Kahn, and Lisa Manning. The artist Nicholas Gaetano contributed as well: he redrew our colophon (the figure of Neptune that appears on the contents page) and created the symbols that will appear regularly on this page (a rendition of our building), on the Puzzler page, above the opening of letters, and on the masthead. Gaetano, whose work manages to combine stylish clarity and breezy strength, is the cover artist for this issue. 11. Part of the new design is to be concerned with the following EXCEPT ______ A) variation in the typefaces. B) reorganization of articles in the front. C) creation of the travel column. D) reinstatement of its former name. 12. According to the passage, the new design work involves ______ A) other artists as well. B) other writers as well. C) only the cover artist. D) only the art director. 13. This article aims to ______ A) emphasize the importance of a magazine's design. B) introduce the magazine's art director. C) persuade the reader to subscribe to the magazine. D) inform the reader of its new design and features. TEXT B WHY SHOULD anyone buy the latest volume in the ever-expanding Dictionary of National Biography? I do not mean that it is bad, as the reviewers will agree. But it will cost you 65 pounds. And have you got the rest of volumes? You need the basic 22 plus the largely decennial supplements to bring the total to 31. Of course, it will be answered, public and academic libraries will want the new volume. After all, it adds 1,068 lives of people who escaped the net of the original compilers. Yet in 10 years time a revised version of the whole caboodle, called the New Dictionary of National Biography, will be published. Its editor, Professor Colin Matthew, tells me that he will have room for about 50,000 lives, some 13,000 more than in the current DNB. This rather puts the 1,068 in Missing Persons in the shade. When Dr Nicholls wrote to the Spectator in 1989 asking for names of people whom readers had looked up in the DNB and had been disappointed not to find, she says that she received some 100,000 suggestions. (Well, she had written to "other quality newspapers" too. ) As soon as her committee had whittled the numbers down, the professional problems of an editor began. Contributors didnt file copy on time; some who did sent too many: 50,000 words instead of 500 is a record, according Dr Nicholls. There remains the dinner-party game of whos out. That is a game that the reviewers have played and will continue to play. Criminals were my initial worry. After all, the original edition of the DNB boasted: Malefactors whose crimes excite a permanent interest have received hardly less attention than benefactors. Mr. John Gross clearly had similar anxieties, for he complains that, while the murderer Christie is in, Crippen is out. One might say in reply that the injustice of the hanging of Evans instead of Christie was a force in the repeal of capital punishment in Britain, as Ludovie Kennedy (the author of Christie entry in Missing Persons) notes. But then Crippen was reputed as the first murderer to be caught by telegraphy (he had tried to escaped by ship to America). It is surprising to find Max Miller excluded when really not very memorable names get in. There has been a conscious effort to put in artists and architects from the Middle Ages. About their lives not much is always known. Of Hugo of Bury St. Edmunds, a 12th-century illuminator whose dates of birth and death are not recorded, his biographer comments:" Whether or not Hugo was a wall-painter, the records f his activities as carver and manuscript painter attest to his versatility". Then there had to be more women, too (12 per cent, against the original DBNs 3), such as Roy Strongs subject, the Tudor painter Levina Teerlinc, of whom he remarks:" her most characteristic feature is a head attached to a too small, spindly body. Her technique remained awkward, thin and often cursory". Doesnt seem to qualify her as a memorable artist. Yet it may be better than the record of the original DNB, which included lives of people who never existed (such as Merlin) and even managed to give thanks to J. W. Clerke as a contributor, though , as a later edition admits in a shamefaced footnote, "except for the entry in the List of Contributors there is no trace of J. W. Clerke". 14. The writer suggests that there is no sense in buying the latest volume ______ A) because it is not worth the price. B) because it has fewer entries than before. C) unless one has all the volumes in his collection. D) unless an expanded DNB will come out shortly. 15. On the issue of who should be included in the DNB, the writer seems to suggest that ______ A) the editors had clear rules to follow. B) there were too many criminals in the entries. C) the editors clearly favoured benefactors. D) the editors were irrational in their choices. 16. Crippen was absent from the DNB ______ A) because he escaped to the U.S. B) because death sentence had been abolished. C) for reasons not clarified. D) because of the editors' mistake. 17. The author quoted a few entries in the last paragraph to ______ A) illustrate some features of the DNB. B) give emphasis to his argument. C) impress the reader with its content. D) highlight the people in the Middle Ages. 18. Throughout the passage, the writer's tone towards the DNB was ______ A) complimentary. B) supportive. C) sarcastic. D) bitter. TEXT C Medical consumerism —— like all sorts of consumerism, only more menacingly —— is designed to be unsatisfying. The prolongation of life and the search for perfect health (beauty, youth, happiness) are inherently self-defeating. The law of diminishing returns necessarily applies. You can make higher percentages of people survive into their eighties and nineties. But as any geriatric ward shows, that is not the same as to confer enduring mobility, awareness and autonomy. Extending life grows medically feasible, but it is often a life deprived of everything, and one exposed to degrading neglect as resources grow over-stretched and politics turn mean. What an ignominious destiny for medicine if its future turned into one of bestowing meagre increments of unenjoyed life! It would mirror the fate of athletics, in which disproportionate energies and resources —— not least medical ones, like illegal steroids —— are now invested to shave records by milliseconds And, it goes without saying, the logical extension of longevism —— the "abolition" of death —— would not be a solution but only an exacerbation. To air these predicaments is not anti-medical spleen —— a churlish reprisal against medicine for its victories —— but simply to face the growing reality of medical power not exactly without responsibility but with dissolving goals. Hence medicines finest hour becomes the dawn of its dilemmas. For centuries, medicine was impotent and hence unproblematic. From the Greeks to the Great War, its job was simple: to struggle with lethal diseases and gross disabilities, to ensure live births, and to manage pain. It performed these uncontroversial tasks by and large with meagre success. Today, with mission accomplished, medicines triumphs are dissolving in disorientation. Medicine has led to vastly inflated expectations, which the public has eagerly swallowed. Yet as these expectations grow un-limited, they become unfulfillable. The task facing medicine in the twenty-first century will be to redefine its limits even as it extend its capacities. 19. In the author's opinion, the prolongation of life is equal to ______ A) mobility. B) deprivation. C) autonomy. D) awareness. 20. In the second paragraph a comparison is drawn between ______ A) medicine and life. B) resources and energies. C) predicaments and solutions. D) athletics and longevism. TEXT D The biggest problem facing Chile as it promotes itself as a tourist destination to be reckoned with, is that it is at the end of the earth. It is too far south to be a convenient stop on the way to anywhere else and is much farther than a relatively cheap half-days flight away from the big tourist markets, unlike Mexico, for example. Chile, therefore, is having to fight hard to attract tourists, to convince travellers that it is worth coming halfway round the world to visit. But it is succeeding, not only in existing markets like the USA and Western Europe but in new territories, in particular the Far East. Markets closer to home, however, are not being forgotten. More than 50% of visitors to Chile still come from its nearest neighbour, Argentina, where the cost of living is much higher. Like all South American countries, Chile sees tourism as a valuable earner of foreign currency, although it has been far more serious than most in promoting its image abroad. Relatively stable politically within the region, it has benefited from the problems suffered in other areas. In Peru, guerrilla warfare in recent years has dealt a heavy blow to the tourist industry and fear of street crime in Brazil has reduced the attraction of Rio de Janeiro as a dream destination for foreigners. More than 150,000 people are directly involved in Chiles tourist sector, an industry which earns the country more than US950 million each year. The state-run National Tourism Service, in partnership with a number of private companies, is currently running a world-wide campaign, taking part in trade fairs and international events to attract visitors to Chile. Chiles great strength as a tourist destination is its geographical diversity. From the parched Atacama Desert in the north to the Antarctic snowfields of the south, it is more than 5,000km long. With the Pacific on one side and the Andean mountains on the other, Chile boasts natural attractions. Its beaches are not up to Caribbean standards but resorts such as Vina del Mar are generally clean and unspoilt and have a high standard of services. But the trump card is the Andes mountain range. There are a number of excellent ski resorts within one hours drive of the capital, Santiago, and the national parks in the south are home to rare animal and plant species. The parks already attract specialist visitors, including mountaineers, who come to climb the technically difficult peaks, and fishermen, lured by the salmon and trout in the regions rivers. However, infrastructural development in these areas is limited. The ski resorts do not have as many lifts as their European counterparts and part poor quality of roads in the south means that only the most determined travellers see the best of the national parks. Air links between Chile and the rest of the world are, at present, relatively poor. While Chiles two largest airlines have extensive networks within South America, they operate only a small number of routes to the US and Europe while services to Asia are almost non-existent. Internal transport links are being improved and luxury hotels are being built in one of its national parks. Nor is development being restricted to the Andes. Easter Island and Chiles Antarctic Territory are also on the list of areas where the Government believes it can create tourist markets. But the rush to open hitherto inaccessible areas to mass tourism is not being welcomed by everyone. Indigenous and environmental groups, including Greenpeace, say that many parts of the Andes will suffer if they become over-developed. There is a genuine fear that areas of Chile will suffer the cultural destruction witnessed in Mexico and European resorts. The policy of opening up Antarctica to tourism is also politically sensitive. Chile already has permanent settlements on the ice and many people see the decision to allow tourists there as a political move, enhancing Santiagos territorial claim over part of Antarctica. The Chilean Government has promised to respect the environment as it seeks to bring tourism potential. The Government will have to monitor developments closely if it is genuinely concerned in creating a balanced, controlled industry and if the price of an increasingly lucrative tourist market is not going to mean the loss of many of Chiles natural riches. 21. Chile is disadvantaged in the promotion of its tourism by ______ A) geographical location. B) guerrilla warfare. C) political instability. D) street crime. 22. Many of Chiles tourists used to come from EXCEPT ______ A) USA B) the Far East. C) western Europe. D) her neighbours. 23. According to the author, Chile's greatest attraction is ______ A) the unspoilt beaches. B) the dry and hot desert. C) the famous mountain range. D) the high standard of services. 24. According to the passage, in WHICH area improvement is already under way? A) Facilities in the ski resorts. B) Domestic transport system. C) Air services to Asia. D) Road network in the south. 25. The objection to the development of Chile's tourism might be all EXCEPT that it ______ A) is ambitious and unrealistic. B) is politically sensitive. C) will bring harm to culture. D) will cause pollution in the area. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passages followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Coloured Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 26. The main purpose of the passage is to ______ A. illustrate the features of willpower. B. introduce ways to build up willpower. C. explain the advantages of willpower. D. define the essence of willpower. Now, go through the text quickly and answer the question. Willpower isnt some immutable trait were either born with or not. It is a skill that can be developed, strengthened and targeted to help us achieve our goals. "Fundamental among mans inner powers is the tremendous unrealized potency of mans own will," wrote Italian psychologist Roberto Assagioli 25 years ago. " The trained will is a masterful weapon," added Alan Marlatt of the University of Washington, a psychologist who is studying how willpower helps people break habits and change their lives. "The dictionary defines willpower as control of ones impulses and actions. The key words are power and control. The power is their , but you have to control it." Here, from Marlatt and other experts, is how to do that: Be positive. Dont confuse willpower with self-denial. Willpower is most dynamic when applied to positive, uplifting purposes. Positive willpower helps us overcome inertia and focus on the future. When the going gets tough, visualize yourself happily and busily engaged in your goal, and youll keep working toward it. Make up your mind. James Prochaska, professor of psychology at the University of Rhode Island, has identified four stages in making a change. He calls them precontemplation (resisting the change), contemplation (weighing the pros and cons of the change), action (exercising willpower to make the change), and maintenance (using willpower to sustain the change). Some people are "chronic contemplators," Prochaska says. They know they should reduce their drinking but will have one more cocktail while they consider the matter. They may never put contemplation into action. To focus and mobilize your efforts, set a deadline. Sharpen your will. In 1915, psychologist Boyd Barrett suggested a list of repetitive will-training activities-stepping up and down from a chair 30 times, spilling a box of matches and carefully replacing them one by one. These exercises, he maintained, strengthen the will so it can confront more consequential and difficult challenges. New Jersey Sen. Bill Bradley was a basketball with the champion New York Knicks. On top of regular practice, he always went to the gym early and practised foul shots alone. He was determined to be the best form of the foul line. True to his goal, he developed the highest percentage of successful free throws on his team. Expect trouble. The saying "Where theres a will, theres a way" is not the whole truth. Given the will, you still have to anticipate obstacles and plan how to deal with them. When professor of psychology Saul Shiffman of the University of Pittsburgh worked with reformed smokers whos gone back to cigarettes, he found that many of them hadnt considered how theyd cope with the urge to smoke. They had summoned the strength to quit, but couldnt remain disciplined. The first time they were offered a cigarette, they went back to smoking. If youv given up alcohol, rehearse your answer for when youre offered a drink. If youre expecting to jog but wake up to a storm, have an indoor workout program ready. Be realistic. The strongest will may falter when the goal is to lose 50 pounds in three months or to exercise three hours a day. Add failure undercuts your desire to try again. Sometimes its best to set a series of small goals instead of a single big one. As in the Alcoholics Anonymous slogan "One day at a time," divide your objective into one-day segments, then renew your resolve the next day. At the end of a week, youll have a series of triumphs to look back on. Be patient. A strong will doesnt develop overnight. It takes shape in increments, and there can be setbacks. Figure out what caused you to backslide, and redouble your efforts. When a friend of ours tried to give up cigarettes the first time, she failed. Analyzing her relapse, she realized she needed to do something with her hands. On her second try, she took up knitting and brought out needles and yarn every time she was tempted to light up. Within months she had knitted a sweater for her husband —— and seemed to be off cigarettes for good. Keep it up. A strong will becomes stronger each time it succeeds. If youve successfully mustered the willpower to kick a bad habit or leave a dead-end job, you gain confidence to confront other challenges. A record of success fosters an inner voice of confidence that, in the words of Assagioli, gives you "a firm foot on the edge of the precipice." You may face more difficult tasks, but youve conquered before, and you can conquer again. 26. The main purpose of the passage is to ______ A) illustrate the features of willpower. B) introduce ways to build up willpower. C) explain the advantages of willpower. D) define the essence of willpower. TEXT F First read the question. 27. The message of the passage is that shares can now be sold ______ A. through the computer. B. in the shop. C. at the bank. D. through the mail. Now, go through the text quickly and answer the question. Investors seeking a cheap, no-frills way to sell privatisation shares need look no further than the post box. Most stockbrokers offer bargain-basement deals on postal trades. They are ideal for selling a small holding for the lowest possible commission. But the arrangements leave investors at the mercy of the Royal Mail and a seller will not know in advance how much a sale will produce. Data processing engineer Mark Stanistreet of Bradford sold by post after buying a few National Power and PowerGen shares when they were privatised. He says: "I didnt really know where to go to for help. An information slip with the shares gave details of Yorkshire Building Societys share shop service, which offered to sell for a flat fee of ?. "It was an ideal first step that showed me how easy and cheap it is to sell shares. I have been investing in a small way since then. "I use Yorkshires telephone service, which has a ? minimum fee." Many stock brokers offer postal deals as part of their usual dealing services, but clients may normally sell only big company or privatisation shares this way. ShareLinks minimum postal commission is 7.50, Skipton Building Societys is 9 and Nat Wests is 9.95. 27. The message of the passage is that shares can now be sold ______ A) through the computer. B) in the shop. C) at the bank. D) through the mail. TEXT G First read the question. 28. In the passage the authors attitude towards the subject under discussion is ______ A. factual. B. critical. C. favourable. D. ambiguous. Now, go through the text quickly and answer the question. With increasing prosperity, Western European youth is having a fling that is creating distinctive consumer and cultural patterns. The result has been the increasing emergence in Europe of that phenomenon well known in America as the "youth market." This is a market in which enterprising businesses cater to the demands of teenagers and older youths in all their rock mania and pop-art forms. In Western Europe, the youth market ma y appropriately be said to be in its infancy. In some countries such as Britain, West Germany and France, it is more advanced than in others. Some manifestations of the subject of organized consumer research and promotion. Characteristics of the evolving European youth market indicate dissimilarities as well as similarities to the American youth market. The similarities: The markets basis is essentially the same —— more spending power and freedom to use it in the hands of teenagers and older youth. Young consumers also make up an increasingly high proportion of the population. As in the United States, youthful tastes in Europe extend over a similar range of products —— records and record players, transistor radios, leather jackets and "way out." extravagantly styled clothing, cosmetics and soft drinks. Generally it now is difficult to tell in which direction trans-Atlantic teenage influences are flowing. Also, a pattern of conformity dominates European youth as in this country, though in Britain the object is to wear clothes that "make the wearer stand out." but also make him "in," such as tight trousers and precisely tailored jackets. Worship and emulation of "idols" in the entertainment field, especially the "pop" singers and other performers is pervasive. There is also the same exuberance and unpredictability in sudden fad switches. In Paris, buyers of stores catering to the youth market carefully watch what dress is being worn by a popular television teenage singer to be ready for a sudden demand for copies. In Stockholm other followers of teenage fads call the youth market "attractive but irrational." The most obvious differences between the youth market in Europe and that in the United States is in size. in terms of volume and variety of sales, the market in Europe is only a shadow of its American counterpart, but it is a growing shadow. But there are also these important dissimilarities generally with American youth market: In the European youth market, unlike that of that United States, it is the working youth who provides the bulk of purchasing power. On the average, the school-finishing age still tends to be 14 years. This is the maximum age to which compulsory education extends, and with Europes industrial manpower shortage, thousands of teenage youths may soon attain incomes equal in many cases to that of their fathers. Although, because of general prosperity, European youths are beginning to continue school studies beyond the compulsory maximum age, they do not receive anything like the pocket money or "allowances" of American teenagers. The European average is about 5 to 10 a month. Working youth, consequently, are the big spenders in the European youth market, but they also have less leisure than those staying on at school. who in turn have less buying power. 28. In the passage the author's attitude towards the subject under discussion is ______ A) factual. B) critical. C) favourable. D) ambiguous. TEXT H First read the question. 29. The passage mainly ______ A. discusses patterns in company car use. B. advertises famous British company cars. C. recommends inexpensive company cars. D. introduces different models of cars. Now, go through the text quickly and answer the question. Motorists would rather pay more tax than lose the place in the corporate pecking order conferred on them by their company cars. And is is the company car —— which accounts for half of all new motor sales each year —— which continues to be the key method of measuring your progress up the greasy pole. Although a Roll-Royce or Bentley is the ultimate success symbol, a Jaguar is still desired by most top directors, according to the survey by top peoples pay and perks experts at the Monks Partnership. About 40 per cent of company cars are perks rather than necessities for the job, even though the average company car driver with a 500cc engine is paying more than three times as much in tax compared to a decade ago. Average cash allowances for a company car rise from ?,500 for those whose job requires them to have four wheels, to ?,000 for chief executives. For company chairmen, the BMW 7 series and Jaguars Daimler Double Six top the list of favoured cars, with upper range Mercedes-Benz models close behind. The chief executives tastes follow a similar pattern with Jaguars Sovereign 4.0 litre and XJ6 3.2, Mercedes-Benzs 320/300 and the BMX 7-series proving most popular. Or other directors, the BMX 5 series is tops, followed by the Mercedes-Benz 200 series, jaguars XJ6 3.2 and the Rover 800 series. Senior managers favour the BMX 3 and 5 series, depending on their rank and company size. Sales representatives drive the 1.8 and 1.6 litre Ford Mondeos, Rover 200 and 400 series and Peugeots 405. Top of the prohibited list are sports cars and convertibles. But British policies are being relaxed, with64 per cent of companies offering Japanese cars. The practice of employees trading up making cash contribution to the value of the car they want is becoming more common, with some firms reporting take-up rates in excess of 70 per cent. 29. The passage mainly ______ A) discusses patterns in company car use. B) advertises famous British company cars. C) recommends inexpensive company cars. D) introduces different models of cars. TEXT I First read the questions. 30. _____ deals with Marxs intellectual impact. A. Chapter I B. Chapter II C. Chapter III D. Chapter IV 31. The chapter that discusses an important source of learning in high-technology industries is ______ A. Chapter III. B. Chapter IV. C. Chapter V. D. Chapter VI. 32. The role of market forces in innovative activities is addressed in ______ A. Part I. B. Part II. C. Part III. D. Part IV. Now, go through the text quickly and answer the questions. The book opens with a broad survey, in part I, of the historical literature on technical change. It attempts to provide a guide to a wide range of writings that illuminate technological change as a historical phenomenon. The first chapter discusses aspects of the conceptualization of technological change and then goes on to consider what the literature has had to say on (1) the rate of technological change, (2) the forces influencing its direction, (3) the speed with which new technologies have diffused, and (4) the impact of technological change on the growth in productivity. A separate chapter is devoted to Marx. Marxs intellectual impact has bee so pervasive as to rank him as a major social force in history as well as an armchair interpreter of history. Part II is, in important respects, the core of the book. Each of its chapters advantages an argument about some significant characteristics of industrial technologies. Chapter 3 explores a variety of less visible forms in which technological improvements enter the economy. Chapter 4 explicitly considers some significant characteristics of different energy forms. It examines some of the complexities of the long-term interactions between technological change and energy resources. Chapter 5, "On Technological Expectation," addresses an issue that is simultaneously relevant to a wide range of industries —— indeed, to all industries that are experiencing, or are expected to experience, substantial rates of technical improvement. The last two chapters of Part II are primarily concerned with issues of greatest relevance to high-technology industries. Chapter 6, "Learning by Using," identifies an important source of learning that grows out of actual experience in using products characterized by a high degree of system complexity. In contrast to learning by doing, which deals skill improvements that grow out of the productive process, learning by using involves an experience that begins where learning by doing ends. The final chapter in Part II, "How Exogenous Is Science?" looks explicitly at the nature of science technology interactions in high-technology industries. It examines some of the specific ways in which these industries have been drawing upon the expanding pool of scientific knowledge and techniques. The three chapters constituting Part III share a common concern with the role of market forces in shaping both the rate and the direction of innovative activities. They attempt to look into the composition of forces constituting the demand and the supply for new products and processes, especially in high-technology industries. Chapter 8 examines the history of technical change in the commercial aircraft industry over a fifty-year period 1925-1975. Finally, the two chapters of Part IV place the discussion of technological change in an international context, with the first chapter oriented toward its long history and second toward the present and the future. Chapter 11 pays primary attention to the transfer of industrial technology from Britain to the world-wide industrialization, because nineteenth-century industrialization was, in considerable measure, the story of the overseas transfer of the technologies already developed by the first industrial society. The last chapter speculates about the prospects for the future from an American perspective, a perspective that is often dominated by apprehension over the loss of American technological leadership, especially high-technology industries. By drawing upon some of the the distinctive characteristics of high-technology industries, an attempt is made to identify possible elements of a future scenario. 30. _____ deals with Marx's intellectual impact. A) Chapter I B) Chapter II C) Chapter III D) Chapter IV 31. The chapter that discusses an important source of learning in high-technology industries is ______ A) Chapter III. B) Chapter IV. C) Chapter V. D) Chapter VI. 32. The role of market forces in innovative activities is addressed in ______ A) Part I. B) Part II. C) Part III. D) Part IV. TEXT J First read the questions. 33. Who can enter the contest? A. Postgraduates. B. Undergraduates. C. Journalists. D. Teachers. 34. Which of the following entry rules is NOT correct? A. Submissions had been published within a specified period. B. No limits are set on content or length of the submission. C. Each entrant can submit no more than one entry. D. A cover letter by the entrant is required. Now, go through the text quickly and answer the questions. THE FIFTH ANNUAL NATION/I.F. STONE AWARD FOR STUDENT JOURNALISM ENTRY DEADLINE: JUNE 29,1994 PURPOSE: The Nation Institute/I.F. Stone Award recognizes excellence in student journalism. Entries should exhibit the uniquely independent journalistic tradition of I.F. Stone. A self-described "Jeffersonian Marxist," Stone combined progressive politics, investigative zeal and a compulsion to tell the truth a commitment to human rights and the exposure of injustice. As Washington editor of The Nation magazine and founder of the legendary I.F. Stones weekly, he specialized in publishing information ignored by the mainstream media (which he often found in The Congressional Record and other public Documents overlooked by the big-circulation dailies). ELIGIBILITY: The contest is open to all undergraduate students enrolled in a U.S. college. Articles may be submitted by the writers themselves or nominated by editors of student publications or faculty members. While entries originally published in student publication are preferred, all articles will be considered provided they were not written as part of a students regular course work. THE PRIZE: The article that, in the opinion of the judges, represents the most outstanding example of student journalism in the tradition of I.F. Stone will be published in a fall issue of The Nation. The winner will receive a cash award of 1,000.The Nation reserves the right to edit the winning article to conform to the space limitations of the magazine. Announcement of the winning article will be made in The Nation in the fall of 1994. DEADLINE; All entries must be postmarked by June 29,1994. ENTRY RULES: All entries must have been written or published between June 30, 1993 and June 29, 1994. Please send 2 photocopies. Each writer may submit up to three separate entries. A series of related articles will be considered as a single entry. Investigative articles are particularly encouraged. There are no restrictions as to scope, content or length. Accompanying material in support of entries is not required, but entrants are encouraged to submit a cover letter explaining the context of the submitted story, along with a brief biographical note about the author. Elaborate presentations are neither required nor desire. Entries will not be returned. Judges reserve the right to authenticate, accept or disallow entries at their discretion. The decision of the judges is final. All entries must include the writers school, home address and telephone number. ALL ENTRIES SHOULD BE SENT TO: NATION/STONE AWARD, C/O THE NATION INSTITUTE, 72 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK, NY 10011 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, PLEASE CALL (212) 463-9270. A PROJECT OF THE NATION INSTITUTE 33. Who can enter the contest? A) Postgraduates. B) Undergraduates. C) Journalists. D) Teachers. 34. Which of the following entry rules is NOT correct? A) Submissions had been published within a specified period. B) No limits are set on content or length of the submission. C) Each entrant can submit no more than one entry. D) A cover letter by the entrant is required. TEXT K First read the question. 35. According to the holiday advertisement, 939 is for a ______ A. two-week holiday in October. B. two-week holiday in November. C. three-week holiday in November. D. three-week holiday in October. Now, go through the text quickly and answer the questions. HAWAII What price paradise? Less than you could possibly imagine on this incredible value holiday with Page & Moy, the UKs No 1your operator to Hawaii. You can enjoy three weeks for the price of two at the Outrigger Village Hotel for just 899 during November or 939 in October. The Polynesians call Hawaii "paradise on earth". Youll soon see why, whilst enjoying the facilities of the Outrigger Village Hotel including pool, bars, restaurant and shopping arcade, and just a five minute walk from the legendary Waikiki beach. Life can be as busy or as relaxing as you like —— we can even help you create your own itinerary of excursions to the other islands, each stunningly beautiful but very different. To start your holiday you can choose a 2 night stay in San Francisco, Los Angeles or Las Vegas absolutely free. Join us in the tropical paradise of Hawaii —— 2 weeks from an unrepeatable price of 899 with a 3rd week free. THE PRICE INCLUDES 2 nights in San Francisco, Los Angeles or Las Vegas. Scheduled flights from London/ Manchester/ Birmingham. Transfers between airport and hotels (except Las Vegas). 14 nights accommodation in Hawaii —— 3rd week free. Traditional Lei greeting. Services of experienced local travel representatives. Free travel bag. Holiday Delay Insurance. 35. According to the holiday advertisement, '939 is for a ______ A) two-week holiday in October. B) two-week holiday in November. C) three-week holiday in November. D) three-week holiday in October. PART IV TRANSLATION SECTION A CHINESE TO ENGLISH: Translation the following underlined part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 来美国求学的中国学生与其他亚裔学生一样，大多非常刻苦勤奋，周末也往往会抽出一天甚至两天的时间去实验室加班，因而比起美国学生来，成果出得较多。我的导师是亚裔人， 嗜烟好酒，脾气暴躁。但他十分欣赏亚裔学生勤奋与扎实的基础知识，也特别了解亚裔学生 的心理。因此，在他实验室所招的学生中，除有一名来自德国外，其余五位均是亚裔学生。 他干脆在实验室的门上贴一醒目招牌：“本室助研必须每周工作七天，早10时至晚12时， 工作时间必须全力以赴。”这位导师的严格及苛刻是全校有名的，在我所呆的3年半中，共 有14位学生被招进他的实验室，最后博士毕业的只剩下5人。1990年夏天，我不顾别人劝 阻，硬着头皮接受了导师的资助，从此开始了艰难的求学旅程。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. Opera is expensive: that much is inevitable. But expensive things are not inevitably the province of the rich unless we abdicate societys power of choice. We can choose to make opera, and other expensive forms of culture, accessible t those who cannot individually pay for it. The question is: why should we? Nobody denies the imperatives of food, shelter, defence, health and education. But even in a prehistoric cave, mankind stretched out a hand not just to eat, drink or fight, but also to draw. The impulse towards culture, the desire to express and explore the world through imagination and representation is fundamental. In Europe, this desire has found fulfillment in the masterpieces of our music, art l, literature and theatre. These masterpieces are the touchstones for all our efforts; they are the touchstones for the possibilities to which human thought and imagination may aspire; they carry the most profound messages that can be sent from one human to another. PART V WRITING In the first part of your writing you should present your thesis statement, and in the second part you should support the thesis statement with appropriate details. In the last part you should bring what have written to a natural conclusion with a summary. Marks will be awarded for content, organization, grammar and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. Write your response on ANSWER SHEET FOUR. Some people hold that view that a students success in university study follows the same pattern as that of farming, which is characterized by the sowing the seeds, nurturing growth and harvesting the rewards process. Write an essay of bout 300 words on the topic given below to support this view with your own experience as a university student. SOWING THE SEEDS, NURTURING GROWTH AND HARVESTING THE REWARDS 02 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. When you say to your guest, "I hope you like it", he will probably think that ____. A) the food may not be very good. B) the food is very delicious. C) you are being polite. D) you are proud of the food. 2. Which of the following is not a simple, universal and socially neutral expression to use when drinking with someone? A) Salud. B) Prosit. C) Bon appetit. D) Skaal. 3. According to the author, the term "goodbye" is ____. A) formal and final, therefore very appropriate to use. B) often used for temporary affairs. C) bit of baby-talking. D) not very appropriate to use for temporary leave-taking. 4. According to Mr. Daniel Kane, ____ A) the English language is dying. B) other European languages are superior than English. C) English is better than any other language. D) English doesn't exactly help social contact. 5. The main idea of the passage is ____ A) English customs are changing all the time. B) English is more than deficient in its social contact expressions than other European languages. C) English cooking is the most notorious. D) There is a gap between English and other languages. SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. What's the relationship between the speakers? A) colleagues. B) friends. C) roommates. D) classmates. 7. What did Jane think of Potter's course? A) There are too many things to do. B) It's rubbish. C) It's entertaining. D) It's boring but very useful. 8. What did they think of Potter's fist lecture? A) over-detailed. B) interesting. C) overloading. D) boring. 9. What did the three speakers think of Potter's lecture dealing with the 18th century developments? A) Jane and Helen thought it was good but Brain didn't. B) All of them thought it was all right. C) None of them thought much of it. D) Helen and Brian liked it, but Jane thought it was too detailed and too formless. 10. What is the Union? A) The place where the Students' Union is located. B) A Department of the government. C) A place where they can have coffee. D) One of the states in U.S.A SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. Man is the only animal that laughs. But what is the (16) of laughter? One writer thought that it is to (17) others or to gain stature over them by humiliating them. Another writer in the 17th century thought we laugh at the (18) of the others. Laughter is defined as an emotional (19) It originated as a kind of semi verbalized social expression of (20) Everyone likes a good laughter because he brings (21) with him wherever he goes. We cannot think that it was (22) in the early days of mans evolution. A second stage of the (23) is that nature favors those capable of expressing their pleasure in laughter. The development of (24) undeniably is an indispensable factor in the (25) of mans capacity to think and establish a mastery of his environment. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. ( PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors .Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word: underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word: mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word: cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. One important outcome of the work on the expression of genes in developing embryos is sure to be knowledge that can help preventing birth defects. Just as promising (26) is the possibility of unraveling the complicated writing (27) of the brain. A mechanic gets valuable insight how an (28) automobile works by rebuilding car engines; similarly, neuroscientists can learn how the brain functions from (29) the way it is put together. The next step pursuing the (30) goal is to find out how the blueprint genes, the home box genes, control the expression of other genes that create the valves and piston of the working cerebral engine. The protein encoded by the latter genes could change the (31) stickiness of the cell surface, the shape of the cell or its metabolism to create the characteristic peculiar to, say, neurons or neural-crest cell. Surface proteins may be the (32) mechanism, whereby similar programmed cells stick together to form specific structures; they might also sense (33) the local environment to help the cell decide what is to do. Clarifying those mechanisms will engage the best talents in (34) embryology and molecular biology for some times to come. (35) What is perhaps the most intriguing question of all is if the brain is powerful enough to solve the puzzle of its own creation. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A Such joy. It was the spring of 1985, and President Reagan had just given Mother Teresa the Medal of Freedom in a Rose Garden ceremony. As she left, she walked down the corridor between the Oval Office and the West Wing drive, and there she was, turning my way. What a sight: a saint in a sari coming down the White House hall. As she came nearer, I could not help it: I bowed. "Mother", I said, "I just want to touch your hand." She looked up at me —— it may have been one of Gods subtle jokes that his exalted child spent her life looking up to everyone else —— and said only two words. Later I would realize that they were the message of her mission. "Luff Gott," she said. Love God. She pressed into my hand a poem she had written, as she glided away in a swoosh of habit. I took the poem from its frame the day she died. It is free verse, 79 lines, and is called "Mothers Meditation (in the Hospital)." In it she reflects on Christs question to his apostles: "Who do you say I am?" She notes that he was the boy born in Bethlehem," put in the manager full of straw„„ kept warm by the breath of the donkey," who grew up to be "an ordinary man without much learning." Donkeys are not noble; straw is common; and it was among the ordinary and ignoble, the poor and sick, that she chose to labor. Her mission was for them and among them, and you have to be a pretty tough character to organize a little universe that exists to help people other people arent interested in helping. Thats how she struck me when I met her as I watched her life. She was tough. There was the worn and weathered face, the abrupt and definite speech. We think saints are great organizers, great operators, great combatants in the world. Once I saw her in a breathtaking act of courage. She was speaker at the National Prayer Breakfast in Washington in 1995. All the Washington Establishment was there, plus a few thousand born-again Christians, orthodox Catholics and Jews, and searchers looking for a faith. Mother Teresa was introduced, and she spoke of God, of love, of families. She said we must love one another and care for one another. There were great purrs of agreement. But as the speech continued it became more pointed. She asked, "Do you do enough to make sure your parents, in the old peoples homes, feel your love? Do you bring then each day your joy and caring?" The baby boomers in the audience began to shift in their seats. And she continued. "I feel that the greatest destroyer of peace today is abortion," she said, and then she told them why, in uncompromising term. For about 1.3 seconds there was complete silence, then applause built and swept across the room. But not everyone: the President and the First Lady, the Vice President and Mrs. Gore, looked like seated statues at Madame Tussauds, glistening in the lights and moving not a muscle. She didnt stop there either, but went on to explain why artificial birth control is bad and why Protestants who separate faith from works are making a mistake. When she was finished, there was almost no one she hadnt offended. A US Senator turned to his wife and said, "Is my jaw up yet?" Talk about speaking truth to power! But Mother Teresa didnt care, and she wasnt afraid. The poem she gave me included her personal answers to Christs question. She said he is "the Truth to be told„„ the Way to be walked„„ the Light to be lit." She took her own advice and lived a whole life that showed it. 36. Who was the exalted child? A) Mother Teresa. B) the author. C) I. D) God. 37. Who raised the question "who do you say I am?" A) the apostle. B) Christ. C) Mother Teresa. D) she. 38. Which of the following is not a quality of Mother Teresa? A) tough. B) definite. C) ethereal. D) like a steam-roller. 39. Why did the President and the First Lady, the Vice President and Mrs. Gore look like seated statues at the Madame Tussaud's? A) Because they didn't love Madame Tussaud. B) Because they didn't like to move. C) Because they were VIP. D) Because they didn't quite agree with Mother Teresa over the issue of abortion. 40. According to Mother Teresa, abortion is ____ A) one of Protestant works. B) one of Protestant faith. C) one of the Truths. D) not one of Protestant works TEXT B Since the Titanic vanished beneath the frigid waters of the North Atlantic 85 years ago, nothing in the hundreds of books and films about the ship has ever hinted at a connection to Japan —— until now. Director James Camerons 200 million epic Titanic premiered at the Tokyo International Film Festival last Saturday. Among the audience for a glimpse of Hollywoods costliest film ever descendants of the liners only Japanese survivor. The newly rediscovered diary of Masabumi Hosono has Titanic enthusiasts in a frenzy. The document is scrawled in 4,300 Japanese character on a rare piece of RMS Titanic stationery. Written as the Japanese bureaucrat steamed to safety in New York aboard the ocean liner Carpathia, which rescued 706 survivors, the account and other documents released by his grandchildren last week offer a fresh —— and poignant —— reminder of the emotional wreckage left by the tragedy. Hosono, then 42 and an official at Japans Transportation Ministry, was studying railway networks in Europe. He boarded the Titanic in Southampton, en route home via the US. According to Hosonos account, he was awakened by a "loud knock" on the door of his second-class deck with the steerage passengers. Hosono tried to race back upstairs, but a sailor blocked his way. The Japanese feigned ignorance and pushed past. He arrived on deck to find lifeboats being lowered into darkness, flares bursting over the ship and an eerie human silence. He wrote:" Not a single passenger would howl or scream." Yet Hosono was screaming inside. Women were being taken to lifeboats and men held back at gunpoint. "I tried to prepare myself for the last moment with no agitation, making up my mind not to do anything disgraceful as a Japanese," he wrote. "But still I found myself looking for and waiting for any possible chance of survival." Then an officer shouted, "Room for two more!" Hosono recalled:" I myself was deep in desolate thought that I would no more be able to see my beloved wife and children." Then he jumped into the boat. When Hosono arrived in Tokyo two months later, he was met with suspicion that he had survived at someone elses expense. The culture of shame was especially strong in prewar Japan. In the face of rumors and bad press, Hosono was dismissed from his post in 1914. He worked at the office part-time until retiring in 1923. His grandchildren say he never mentioned the Titanic again before his death in 1939. Even then, shame continued to haunt the family. In newspapers, letters and even a school textbook, Hosono was denounced as a disgrace to Japan. Readers Digest reopened the wound in 1956 with an abridged Japanese version of Walter Loads best seller. A Night to remember, which described "Anglo-Saxons" as acting bravely on the Titanic, while "Frenchmen, Italians, Americans, Japanese and Chinese were disgraceful." Citing his fathers diary, one of Hosonos sons, Hideo, launched a letter-writing campaign to restore the family name. But nobody in Japan seemed to care. The diary resurfaced last summer. A representative for a US foundation that plans to hold an exhibition of Titanic artifacts in Japan next August found Hosonos name on a passenger list. A search led him to Haruomi Hosono, a well-known composer, and to his cousin Yuruoi, Hideos daughter. She revealed that she had her grandfathers dairy as well as a collection of his letters and postcards. "I was floored," says Michael Findley, cofounder of the Titanic International Society in the US "This is a fantastic, fresh new look at the sinking and the only one written on Titanic stationery immediately after the disaster." The information allows enthusiasts to rearrange some historical minutes, such as which lifeboat Hosono jumped into. More chilling, the account confirms that the crew tried to keep foreigners and third-class passengers on the ships lower deck, effectively ensuring their name. The diary cannot correct injustice, but Hosonos family hopes it will help clear his name. The Titanic foundation also hopes to capitalize on the diary and the movie to promote its upcoming exhibition. To that end, Haruomi Hosono, the composer, has been asked to give a talk at next months public premiere of Titanic! The diary cannot, of course, match Camerons fictionalized epic for drama and intrigue. But at least Masabumi Hosonos tale really happened. 41. ______ was among the descendants of the Liner's only Japanese survivor. A) Masabumi Hosono. B) Yuriko. C) Cameron. D) RMS. 42. Why was Masabumi denounced as a disgrace to Japan? A) Because he killed some people on the Titanic. B) Because he was then an official. C) Because he was dismissed from his ministry post. D) Because the culture of shame was too strong. 43. What important role did the diary really play? A) It corrected injustice. B) It was as vivid as the movie "Titanic". C) It proved what Masabumi said was true. D) It made the Japanese believe what Masabumi had said. TEXT C For years, Europeans have been using "smart cards" to pay their way through the day. They use them in shops and restaurants, plug them into pubic into telephones as and parking meters. In France smart cards cover anything from a bistro bill to a swimming-pool entry fee. In American, smart cards are not nearly so common —— only about 43,000 are now circulating in the US and Canada —— but Forrester Research of Cambridge, Mass., predicts that number will balloon to 4.7 million by the year 2002. What is a smart card, exactly, and how does it work? Also called a chip card because of the tiny microprocessor embedded in it, a smart card looks like the other plastic in your wallet. To make things more confusing, some smart cards pull double duty as regular ATM bank cards. The difference is that when you swipe your ATM (or debit) card at the grocery-store checkout, youre draining cash from your bank account. Smart cards, on the other hand, are worthless unless they are "loaded with cash value", pulled directly from your bank account or traded for currency. The chip keeps track of the amounts stored and spent. The advantage, in theory, is convenience: consumers bother less with pocket change and are able to use plastic even at traditionally cash-only vendors. The electronic transaction doesnt require a signature, a PIN number or bank approval. Downside: lose the card, lose the money. Most people are probably more familiar with stored-value cards equipped only with a magnetic strip, such as fare card issued to riders on the Washington metro or the New York City subway. The newer chip-enhanced versions, armed with more memory and processing power, have popped up in various places in the past years or so, from college campuses to military bases to sports stadiums. Other experiments are under way. A health-care claims processor in Indianapolis, Ind., hopes smart cards will streamline medical-bill payments. In Ohio, food-stamp recipients receive a smart card rather paper vouchers. Smart cards issued for general commerce are rarer, unless you happen to live in a place designated for a test run, such as Manhattans Upper West Side. But big bank and plastic-purveying kings Visa and MasterCard are hot for the idea, promising more extensive trials and more elaborate, multipurpose cards capable of rendering everything else you carry —— plastic, paper or coin—— superfluous. Todays smart cards may not be revolutionizing the way we buy the morning paper yet, but they could turn out to be right tool spur Internet commerce and banking. For the time being, though, smart cards are just another way to buy stuff. And it could be a while before even that catches on. Remember: some people still dont trust ATMs either. 44. Why are smart cards not nearly so common in American? A) Probably because American have got used to ATM bank cards or stored-value cards. B) Probably because American is too large. C) Probably because American like signature. D) Probably because American like paper vouchers. 45. The following are advantages of the chip card except that ____ A) consumers bother less with pocket change. B) the transaction doesn't require a signature, a PIN number. C) if you lose the card, you lose the money. D) it is more convenient. 46. The aim of the article is to ____ A) show how to use smart cards. B) show the difference between ATM card and chip card. C) how the smart cards have become popular. D) persuade Americans to use smart cards. TEXT D Paula Jones case against Bill Clinton is now, for all possible political consequences and capacity for media sensation, a fairy routine lawsuit of its kind. It does, however, have enormous social significance. For those of us who care about sexual harassment, the matter of Jones v. Clinton is a great conundrum. Consider: if Jones, the former Arkansas state employee, proves her claims, then we must face the fact that we helped to elect someone —— Bill Clinton —— who has betrayed us on this vital issue. But if she is proved to be lying, then we must accept that we pushed onto the public agenda an issue that is venerable to manipulation by alleged victims. The skeptics will use Jones case to cast doubt on the whole cause. Still, Ms Jones deserves the chance to prove her case; she has a right to pursue this claim and have the process work. It will be difficult: these kinds of cases usually are, and Ms. Jones task of suing a sitting president is harder than most. She does have one thing sitting on her side: her case is in the courts. Sexual-harassment claims are really about violations of the alleged victims civil rights, and there is no better forum for determining and assessing those violations —— and finding the truth —— than federal court. The judicial system can put aside political to decide these complicated issues. That is a feat that neither the Senate Judicial nor ethics committees have been able to accomplish—— witness the Clarence Thomas and Bob Packwood affairs. One lesson: the legal arena, not the political one, is the place to settle these sensitive problems. Some have argued that the people (the "feminists") who rallied around me have failed to support Jones. Our situations, however, are quite different. In 1991 the country was in the middle of a public debate over whether Clarence Thomas should be confirmed to the Supreme Court. Throughout that summer, interest groups on both sides weighed in on his nomination. It was a public forum that invited a public conversation. But a pending civil action —— even one against the president —— does not generally invite that kind of public engagement. Most of the public seems content to let the process move forward. And given the conundrum created by the claim, it is no wonder that many ("feminists" included) have been slow to jump into the Jones-Clinton fray. But people from all works of life remain open to her suit. We dont yet know which outcome we must confront: the president who betrayed the issue or the woman who used it. Whichever it is, we should continue to pursue sexual harassment with the same kind of energy and interest in eliminating the problem that we have in the past, regardless of who is the accused or the accuser. The statistics show that about 40 percent of women in the work force will encounter some form of harassment. We cant afford to abandon this issue now. 47. According to the passage, the Paula Jones' case was ____ A) nothing important. B) very significant. C) doubtful. D) vulnerable. 48. The federal courts are much better than the Senate Judicial or ethics committees in determining and assessing those violations because ____ A) the federal courts have much bigger power. B) the federal courts are forum for determining and assessing those violations. C) the federal courts are more impartial. D) the federal courts are political arena. 49. According to the passage, the issue of sexual harassment must be dealt with seriously because ____ A) the outcome is not known. B) most of the public is not content. C) many have been slow to jump into the Jones-Clinton fray. D) as many as 40% of women in the work force will encounter it. 50. According to the passage, sexual harassment is to ____ A) violate politics. B) violate the Supreme Court. C) cast doubt on the whole issue. D) violate civil rights. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. The passage mainly discusses ____ A. Flight International. B. world accidents. C. pilot error accidents. D. an aviation magazine. Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. Airplane crashes caused by pilot miscalculation during descent killed 640 people in 1997, more than in any previous year, according to a new report out last week. Flight International, a respected aviation magazine, said its survey showed such crashes remained the biggest cause of airline passenger deaths. Major airlines were still vulnerable to such accidents, despite improved technology, it said. The accidents, known officially as "controlled flights into terrain," or CFITs, happened in clouds or darkness, usually on the descent towards an airport. The crew members made a navigational error or descended too low, or both, so that the aircraft hit the ground without the crew realizing the danger. Special efforts had been made in recent years to reduce CFITs, Flight International said. "Although small carriers and non-passenger operations tend, in most year, to account for the majority of the CFIT accidents, major carriers are manifestly vulnerable," the magazine said. Flight International added that CFITs were thought to be responsible for the Korean Air Boeing 747 crash in Guam in August and the Garuda Airbus A300 accident in Sumatra, Indonesia, in September. Together, the accidents accounted for 462 deaths. The previous record for CFITs in a single year was 582 in 1989. The magazine said there were51 fatal airline accidents in 1997 resulting in 1,306 deaths. That compared with an annual average of 49 fatal accidents and 1,234 deaths for the preceding decade. Areas with normally good safety records such as Western Europe, Australia, North America and the Middle East had a safe year, Flight International said. Africa had no airline fatalities, and Latin America only one, but the southern part of the former Soviet Union, parts of Asia and the Asian Pacific regions fared less well. 51. The passage mainly discusses ____ A) Flight International. B) world accidents. C) pilot error accidents. D) an aviation magazine. TEXT F First read the questions. 52. The passage focuses on ____. A. the location of the valley. B. the temperature of the valley. C. the rivers, animals and plants of the valley. D. the general features of the valley. Now go through TEXT F quickly and answer question 52. Death Valley is an arid, depressed, desert region, southeastern California. It was given its name by one of 18 survivors of a party of 30 attempting in 1849 to find a shortcut to the California goldfield. Much of the valley is below sea level, and near Badwater at 86 meters below sea level, is the lowest point in the western hemisphere. Death Valley National Monument (established 1933) has an area of 8368.1 sq km and incorporates the valley and surrounding mountains. The valley is from 6 to 26 km wide and about 255 km long and is almost entirely enclosed by mountain ranges, volcanic in origin, bare and brilliantly colored. The Panamint Range on the west, which rises to a maximum altitude of 3367 m in Telescope Peak, shuts out the moist Pacific winds. On the east are the peaks of the Amargosa Range. The summer temperatures in Death Valley, one of the hottest regions known, exceed 51.7 C in the shade and rarely fall below 21.1 C. The National Weather Service recorded 56.7 C IN 1913, the highest temperature ever recorded in the US. Average rainfall in a normal year is less than 51 mm. Sandstorms and dust whirlwinds of several hours duration are common. Several watercourses enter the valley, among them the Amargosa River from the south and Furnace Creek from the east, but it is only after heavy rains, which are rare, that they contain water. The lowest parts of the valley floor are salt flats, devoid of vegetation; higher portions contain a mixture of sand and salt grains, occasionally forming dunes. The western side of the valley floor is bordered by stunted mesquite, and in a marsh in the northern section a growth of tall, coarse grass is found; the east and west slopes have a sparse vegetation of cacti and desert shrubs and grasses. Animal life is confined to a few species of desert reptiles, such as horned toads and lizards and such mammals are as rabbits, rats, and the desert bighorn sheep. Gold has been found in Death Valley, and silver, copper, and lead have been taken in paying quantities. The famous borax deposits of Death Valley were first mined in the 1880s. 52. The passage focuses on ____. A) the location of the valley. B) the temperature of the valley. C) the rivers, animals and plants of the valley. D) the general features of the valley. TEXT G First read the following question. 53. The primary purpose of the passage is to ____. A. discuss the Japanese Prime Minister. B. discuss the coined words in the recent Japanese language. C. deal with language problem. D. deal with word formation. Now go through TEXT G quickly and answer question 53. Japanese Prime Minister Keizo Obuchi was famous for making his own phone calls, ringing up advertisers, friends, politicians and people he read about in newspapers. He picked up his push-button phone —— called a "pushu-phone" in Japanese —— punched in the number and announced," This is Obuchi." After Obuchis habits became known, it wasnt long before someone coined the word "buchi-phones." So was born a Japanese word. More than 6,000 words and phrases are added to the language each year —— most of them short-lived —— and used in a stream so rapid that people complain they often cannot figure out what is being said. One word that is now acknowledged as a permanent part of the lexicon is "risutora", the Japanese version of "restructure". Its most common meaning here is to be fired or pressured to quit as a company downsizes. "He was restructured" is heard frequently these days. Teenagers are a major source of the linguistic additions, and, perhaps not surprisingly, adults say they are particularly difficult to understand. All teens seem to know that "one-girl", which translates as "one-cut", is a way of communicating with friends by cell phone without paying the phone company. The caller lets the receiving phone ring once, then cuts it off. The recipient sees the number that the call came from, recognizes a friend and perhaps sends a one-giri back. Many of these words are in English, often shortened and always pronounced according to the Japanese syllabic alphabet, which does not include, for example, "th" or any single consonant except "n.". The Japanese words derived from English are not always recognizable. "Game" is "geimu", "animation" is "anime". From "poketo (pocket)" and "monsuta (monster)" the Japanese took "poke" and "mon" to make, of course, "Pokemon". Fumio Inoue, professor of social linguistics at Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, said:" I do think that the number of new words reflects the degree of modernization of the culture. Thats the first reason. The second is that we have a precedent for absorbing language from others." The Japanese language is a mix of Chinese characters, words with Japanese roots and words from other language. The distinction between words that were originally Japanese and those that came from Western language is eroding. The Japanese word for "shame" is "shuchi". Young people are adding the English ending "less." So Japanese now say "shuchi-lesu" —— which is what many people seem so feel about twisting and stretching their language. 53. The primary purpose of the passage is to ____. A) discuss the Japanese Prime Minister. B) discuss the coined words in the recent Japanese language. C) deal with language problem. D) deal with word formation. TEXT H First read the following question 54. The novel "Generation X" was written mainly for ____. A. card games. B. economy. C. finance. D. younger generation. Now go through TEXT H quickly and answer question 54. Douglas Coupland coined not only the term for a generation with novel "Generation X" but others like "Mcjob" and "veal-fattening pen". All of them describe demoralizing prospects facing twenty-somethings. But he is growing up. At 38, 10 years after he penned his culture-defining novel, Coupland now has an agent and a new book, "Missing Wyoming", with the new publishers Knopf/Pantheon in the United States and Random House in Canada. But even though he is hurtling toward his 40s and has several books under his belt, he is still identified as the spokesman for careless twenty —— and thirty —— somethings drowning in consumerism. "Generation X" is a field guide to and for the vast generation born in the 1970s and the 1980s —— a generation that has been incorrectly labeled "postponed" and "indifferent". Its a fiction about a wildly speeding subculture with no place to go. "Its a calling card. It was written when the economy was really in the toilet, so a lot of the dialogue about identity got clumsily smashed together with financial futures and expectations", he said. But Coupland has not turned his back on directionless souls. The craving for spirituality and human connection live on in his latest novel. A smart, funny and fast-paced mystery with a heartfelt American romance at its core. "Missing Wyoming" is a tale of a has-been movie producer, John Johnson, and a former TV star and child beauty queen winner, Susan Colgate. Susan refuses to spend on more day peddling herself for cheesy TV sitcom parts and takes advantage of a very weird situation to disappear. John turns his back on a pleasure-seeking life making blockbuster action films. At a point in their lives when glamour and fame seem to be a thing of the past, both decide to disappear. Assisting Susan and John are a former beauty pageant mom, a pair of suburban intellects, a refugee, a variety of other 20th century Americans who all share the dream of one day taking center stage. In the novel they are lost souls looking for love in the celebrity-obsessed landscape of Los Angeles when they fatefully connect. Born on a Canadian NATO base in Badensollingen, Germany, the soft-spoken Coupland spends much of his time in relative solitude at his home in Vancouver, where he has lived most his life. Coupland says he is pleased the Generation X fame lives on in younger audiences because people have little guidance when it comes to steering through their terrible 20s. "Your 20s suck. I wish someone would have told me that. We prepare people in this culture how to do an algebraic equation but no one ever teaches you how to deal with loneliness and worrying", he said. "Id like to tell people in their 20s not to worry so much." Which is what he does through his novel that increasingly are reaching a younger readership —— as evidence by those who came to his reading at Torontos Glen Gould Theatre. "There are these kids who really identify with this stuff, which is so specific to my own life, and Vancouver. The fact that anyone can relate to it outside of my own group of friends really surprises me," Coupland said. "There again, I always assume that whatever book I am doing is going to be the one that no one understand". 54. The novel "Generation X" was written mainly for ____. A) card games. B) economy. C) finance. D) younger generation. TEXT I First read the following questions. 555. Which is not one of the 6 principles discussed in the book? A. living with integrity. B. building a great management team. C. inspiring employees to greatness. D. being married to their original spouse. 56. Thomas J. Neff and James M. Citrin are ____. A. persons whose job is to recruit staff. B. sociologists. C. CEO. D. leaders. Now go through TEXT I quickly and answer questions 55 and 56. What males a leader? Thats the question star headhunter Thomas J. Neff and James M. Citrin try to answer in their recent book, "Lessons from the Top: The Search for Americas Best Business Leaders." The six principles shared by top business leaders and discussed in the book are: Living with integrity, developing a winning strategy or "big idea", building a great management team, inspiring employees to greatness, creating a flexible and responsible organization and using reinforcing management systems. Citrin and Neff elaborated on the six principles in a recent Business Week interview. The most important one for business leaders is passion about what they are doing." The leaders we interviewed for the book loved to talk about their jobs." "Also, the high-level jobs today are so enormously demanding that successful executives mu;xt have a high energy level. They work an average of 65 hours per week. When the passion and drive ebb, thats when you know its time for that person to move on," said Neff. Top leaders are clear thinkers. They are focused, know where they are heading, and are able to communicate with a wide audience. Todays successful leaders know more about the team approach than did their predecessors. "It wasnt too many years ago that the dictatorial approach, the command-and-control management style, was accepted. Today, its more about working through people, being more of a leader and empowering other executives on the team to carry out the mission," said Neff. Citrin and Neff are not pretending to be sociologists, but it is clear that the dynamics of the labor market have given more power to talented employees. People in an organization often have the exact same information at about the same time as a person at the top. so no more can one tale for granted that information is power. People often say it is difficult to create a good balance between work and family. Some feel you can be successful in work or with your family, but not both. But the reality seems to be that a strong family life and success on the home front actually contribute to professional success. Many of the CEOs interviewed by Citrin talk about the role their spouses play in their success. Of the 50 interviewed in the work, 42 are still married to their original spouse —— a sharp contract with the national divorce rate in the United States. 55. Which is not one of the 6 principles discussed in the book? A) living with integrity. B) building a great management team. C) inspiring employees to greatness. D) being married to their original spouse. 56. Thomas J. Neff and James M. Citrin are ____. A) persons whose job is to recruit staff. B) sociologists. C) CEO. D) leaders. TEXT J First read the following questions. 57. Professional accreditation exists in the following fields or programs except ____ A. medicine. B. business. C. religion. D. engineering. 58. In what way can one find the best institutions in the USA? A. To define ones academic and career goals, as well as personal preferences about the campus environment. B. To check whether or not institutions are recognized by the COPA. C. To avoid institutions that seem too anxious to enroll foreign students. D. All of the above. Now go through TEXT J quickly and answer questions 57 and 58. A question that students often ask is, "How do I find the best institutions ?" Unfortunately, there are no simple answers. The first step is to define your academic and career goals, as well as personal preferences about the campus environment. Then find institutions whose goals and offerings most closely match your needs. A second step is to check whether or not institutions are recognized by the Council on Postsecondary Accreditation (COPA). Each year the American Council on Education publishes for COPA a list of all accredited institutions in the United states, called "Accredited Institutions of Postsecondary Education". While there may be institutions of high quality, questions should be raised about the acceptance of degrees by, and transfer of credits to and from accredited institutions, and whether or not unaccredited institutions meet the minimum standard of a COPA-recognized institution. Caution should be exercised and considerably more information should be requested from such institutions before enrolling. The United States does not have a ministry of education responsible for regulation of educational institutions. Instead, institutions agree to voluntary self-regulation in the process called accreditation. There are two types of accreditation: institutional and professional. Institutional accreditation refers to the institution as a whole. For conferring institutions institutional accreditation, COPA recognizes six accrediting agencies, as well as accrediting agencies for independent schools and religious colleges. Professional accreditation exists only in fields or programs where professional or occupational competence in the field is a major concern, such as medicine, engineering, business and law. Professional accrediting associations usually require that the entire institution be accredited before they will accredit a particular program. The importance of professional accreditation varies from field to field. Often professional accreditation applies only to the first professional degree. It is important to distinguish between accreditation and state authorization. State authorization or "state approval" may not involve regulation of quality at all, but simply indicate that an institution complies with financial and licensing regulations. Some states do not regulate educational institutions at all. A third step in seeking quality is to avoid institutions that seem too anxious to enroll foreign students. Unfortunately, there are some institutions in the United States that are more interested in the dollars of foreign students than in providing a good education. These institutions are not numerous, but there are enough that caution is necessary. Published rankings (assessments) of colleges and universities are available, but their usefulness varies. There is no "official" ranking of colleges and universities in the United states. Rankings according to competitiveness of admission (that is, the ration of the number of students who apply to the number admitted) are useful in giving an idea of the chances for admission. For other rankings, it is necessary to define your goals carefully, and to make sure that the criteria on which a ranking is based match your criteria for choosing institution. In the final analysis, finding the "best" institutions means finding the institutions that best meet your individual needs and interests. 57. Professional accreditation exists in the following fields or programs except ____ A) medicine. B) business. C) religion. D) engineering. 58. In what way can one find the best institutions in the USA? A) To define one's academic and career goals, as well as personal preferences about the campus environment. B) To check whether or not institutions are recognized by the COPA C) To avoid institutions that seem too anxious to enroll foreign students. D) All of the above. TEXT K First read the following questions. 59. The University of Swansea offers 470 degree courses for ____ A. undergraduates. B. postgraduates. C. both A and B. D. Chinese students. 60. According to the two Chinese students, Swansea is not considered as a ____ city. A. friendly. B. expensive. C. beautiful. D. safe. Now go through TEXT K quickly and answer questions 59 and 60. The University of Wales Swansea has a compact campus a couple of miles from the city center. There are over 10,700 registered students following courses din the arts and social studies, business, economics and law, engineering, heath science and science. The University of Swansea offers 470 degree courses available at undergraduates and postgraduate level. Tutors hold regular discussions with students in order to ensure that they are making satisfactory progress. Satisfactory progress means that a student must attend the required number of lectures and tutorials as well as complete all set assignments. The students must also have passed the assessment scheme appropriate to that module. If, at the end of a year of study, a student fails one or more of the examinations, permission may be given to re-sit in the following September before the beginning of the next session. However, there is no hard and fast rule governing permission to re-sit. Each individual case will be examined very carefully and all the factors, which have any bearing on the students work, including any relevant personal circumstances (such as illness), will be sympathetically taken into consideration. Each student must therefore aim to attain 120 credit points at the end of each year of study, in order to qualify to proceed, or in the case of final-year students, to be eligible to be considered for the award of a degree. Two girls, Sun Yuen Chai and Yau Pui Wah, are studying the MSc in Health Care Management. They are from Shanghai. Sun is 24 and Yau is 25. Sun Yuen Chai:" I chose Swansea because of the quality content of the course and also because of its reputation as a friendly and safe city. I was also impressed by their speed of response to my application. I had everything I need so quickly. I also love being right beside the sea. Yau Pui Wah:" Swansea is so beautiful, and so cheap compared to other UK cities. I found out about Swansea through the British Council and they offered the course I wanted. I love it and hope to stay to do a PhD. I recommend it to Chinese students". 59. The University of Swansea offers 470 degree courses for ____ A) undergraduates. B) postgraduates. C) both A and B D) Chinese students. 60. According to the two Chinese students, Swansea is not considered as a ____ city. A) friendly. B) expensive. C) beautiful. D) safe. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following passage into English. Write your translation on the Answer Sheet Three. 指南车（the compass vehicle) 相传是黄帝发明的，到汉代便有了制造指南车的正式 记载。指南车是中国古代科技成果的杰出典范，一向为国内外学者广泛重视。可惜，历史上 没有留下指南车的事物，后人只能根据各种史料的记载来研究它的结构和原理，并把他复原。 中国的一些著名学者都曾经致力于这项工作，30年代，王振铎先生就已复原出指南车的模 型。50年代，在他主持下，中国历史博物馆又再次复原了指南车。在国外，20年代英国已 有研究指南车的发表，英国博物馆也制作了指南车的模型。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following passage into Chinese. Write your translation on Answer Sheet Three. From this hill I have watched many moons rise. Each one had its own mood. There have been broad, confident harvest moons in autumn, shy, misty moons in spring; lonely, white winter moons rising into the utter silence of an ink-black sky and smoke-smudged orange moons over the dry fields of summer. Each, like fine music, excited my heart and then calmed my soul. Moon gazing is an ancient art. To prehistoric hunters the moon overhead was as unerring as heartbeat. They knew that every 29 days it became full-bellied and brilliant, then sickened and died, and then was reborn. They knew the waxing moon appeared larger and higher overhead after each succeeding sunset. They knew the waning moon rose later each night until it vanished in the sunrise. To have understood the moons patterns from experience must have been a profound thing. But we, who live indoors, have lost contact with the moon. The glare of street lights and the dust of population veil the night sky. Though men have walked on the moon, it grows less familiar. Few of us can say what time the moon will rise tonight. Still, it tugs at our minds. If we unexpectedly encounter the full moon, huge and yellow over the horizon, we are helpless but to stare back at its commanding presence. PART V WRITING Directions: Account for the boom in adult education and discuss the main reasons within 60 minutes. The length of your essay should be about 300 words. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. Adult Education Boom In the first part of your writing you should present a brief description of adult education boom and in the following part you should present the reasons with appropriate examples. In the last part you may state your own view on this topic. 03 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. Full details of births, marriages and deaths are recorded ____. A) by the United States Demographic yearbook B) by most underdeveloped countries C) by all full developed countries D) by the General Register office only 2. In the past centuries, ____. A) birth rates were high and death rates were low B) birth rates were low and so were death rates C) birth rates were and death rates were high D) birth rates were high and so were death rates 3. In the nineteenth century the population in the West ____. A) began to drop B) suddenly decreased C) was stabilized D) began to fluctuate 4. The economic conditions in a country with a low birth-rate and low death-rate would be of ____. A) low standards of living and no industry B) productive agriculture and a little industry C) low standards of living and efficient agriculture D) high standards of living and efficient industry 5. The talk mentions several ways in which population growth might be controlled. Which of the following is not one of these ways? A) industrialization and a higher standard of living B) an increase in the death-rate C) an increase in heath and hygiene D) birth control programs SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. Old Fred does something stupid because ____. A) he has some mental problems B) he is too old to know what he is doing C) he wants to have a good Christmas D) he has got into the habit of stealing 7. British police are not armed. The average policeman ____. A) doesn't really think about it B) dislike it very much C) worries about it greatly D) wants a reform 8. The interviewee feels that the English people love ____. A) violence B) compromise C) firearms D) police 9. Once a man ____. A) threatened the police B) took some hostages C) robbed a bank D) locked himself in a house 10. What was the most important factor in solving that man's problem? A) power B) skills C) patience D) weapons SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. Making Artificial Diamond Diamond are a form of (16), which is a very common element. Scientists began to make artificial diamonds from the (17) century. The first real success came in the laboratory of a (18). To make synthetic diamonds, what was needed was a pressure (19),and a (20) of between 2200 and 4400 F. Even with this equipment, scientists produced all sorts of (21), but no diamonds. The idea was then brought forward that perhaps the carbon needed to be dissolved in a (22), which helps a chemical reaction to take place more easily. Later, the carbon was mixed with (23). The pressure was bought up to 1,300,000 pounds to the square inch, and the temperature to (24). At last, a number of shiny crystals were produced, which were analyzed both chemically and under (25), and there was no longer room for doubt. They were not like diamonds. They were diamonds. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors. Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3) exhibit Vitamins, like minerals, are chemicals. There is absolutely not difference in the chemical structure (26) of the nature vitamin C and the chemical structure (27) of the synthetic vitamin C. Also, while most sub- stances are harmless at very low level of intake, all (28) substance —— even the elements that are essential to life —— can be dangerous if you overdo them. Take water for example. Six or eight glasses a day will keep your body in good fluid balance. But you can also be drown (29) in it. Some people argue that individuals vary greatly (30) in their need for nutrients, it cannot necessarily be stated any given amount is too much; that is all (31) relative. But since there is little solid information on what is the optimal intake of any essential nutrient in healthy individuals, it would be impossible to give guidelines that take these proportional needs into the (32) account. Just as with other drugs, the relation to (33) different vitamin dosages varies, with some people better able than others to tolerate large amounts. While we do know that very specifically what the toxic level (34) is for vitamins A and D, we are far less sure about vitamin E, even though it, too, is fat-soluble, and we still dont understand the water-soluble vitamin, the C (35) and the B groups, which the body cant store. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A Art of Middle Ages In the art of the Middle Ages, we never encounter the personality of the artist as as individual; rather it is diffused through the artistic genius of centuries embodied in the rules of religious art. Art of the Middle Ages is first a sacred script, the symbols and meanings o which were well settled. The circular halo placed vertically behind the head signifies sainthood, while the halo impressed with a cross signifies divinity. By bare feet, we recognize God, the angels, Jesus Christ and the apostles, but for an artist to have depicted the Virgin Mary with bare feet would have been tantamount to heresy. Several concentric, wavy lines represent the sky, while parallel lines water or the sea. A tree, which is to say a single stalk with two or three stylized leaves, inform us that the scene is laid on earth. A tower with a window indicates a village, and, should an angel be watching from depicted with curly hair, a short beard, and a tonsure, while Saint Paul has always a bald head and a long beard. A second characteristic of this iconography is obedience to a sacred mathematics. "The Divine Wisdom," wrote Saint Augustine, "reveals itself everywhere in numbers", a doctrine attributable to the neo —— Platonists who revived the genius of Pythagoras. Twelve is the master number of the Church and is the product of three, the number of the Trinity, and four, the number of material elements. The number seven, the most mysterious of all numbers, is the sum of four and three. There are the seven ages of man, seven virtues, seven planets. In the final analysis, the seven-tone scale of Gregorian music is the sensible embodiment of the order of the universe. Numbers require also a symmetry. At Charters, a stained glass window show the four prophets, Isaac, Ezekiel, Daniel, and Jeremiah, carrying on their shoulders the four evangelists, Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. A third characteristic of art is to be a symbolic language, showing us one thing and inviting us to see another. In this respect, the artist was called upon to imitate God, who had hidden a profound meaning behind the literal and wished nature itself to be a moral lesson to man. Thus, every painting is an allegory. In a scene of the final judgment, we can see the foolish virgins at the left hand of Jesus and the wise at his right, and we understand that this symbolizes those who are lost and those who are saved. Even seemingly insignificant details carry hidden meaning: The lion in a stained glass window is the figure of the Resurrection. These, then, are the defining characteristics of art of the Middle Ages, a system within which even the most mediocre talent was elevated by the genius of the centuries. The artists of the early Renaissance broke with traditional at their own peril. When they are not outstanding, they are scarcely able to avoid insignificance and banality in their religious works, and, even when they are great, they are no more than the equals of the old masters who passively followed the sacred rules. 36. What does the circular halo placed behind the head signify in the art of the Middle Ages? A) divinity B) sainthood C) God D) sky 37. Which of the following statements is NOT true about the characteristics of the art of the Middle Ages? A) It follows a kind of mathematics. B) It's religious art, employing symbols to convey its meanings. C) Art becomes an allegory, beyond each painting some profound meanings are hidden. D) Art of the Middle Ages embodies the personality of the artist in a diffused way. 38. How does the writer value art of the Middle Ages? A) The art of the Middle Ages is elevated by its religious and sacred facet. B) Artists of the Middle Ages were absolutely talented. C) The art of the Middle Ages formed its own unique system. D) The religious works in the Middle Ages reached unparallel height in art. TEXT B "The US economy is rapidly deteriorating," says Mr. Grannis. "The odds of a recession are now very high, perhaps by the end of the year." There are already some signs that important pillars are weakening. Consumer confidence has fallen for the past two months. The housing sector, which has been buoyant, is starting to sink. Corporate profits are falling. Some analysts are especially concerned over the sharp fall of commodity prices. They believe it represents the threat of deflation, it could cause a global slowdown. "The Fed will have to act forcefully to arrest the deflationary forces," says Robert Lamorte, chairman of Behavioral Economics, a consulting firm is San Diego. But other counter that the central bank doesnt need to intervene. They argue the Fed should wait to see real data before acting. "The fundamentals are better than the stock market reflects", says Peter Kretzmer, an economist at Nations-Banc Montgomery Security. Indeed, President Clinton tried to do his part to calm the market during his trip to Moscow, citing the strong job market and balanced budget. "We believe our fundamental economic policy is sound," he said. His comments echoed statements by Peter Rubin in Washington. Some numbers do continue to reflect a strong economy. On sep. 1, the Conference Board released its index of leading indicators. The index rose 0.4 percent, prompting the business organization to predict that the nations output should increase at a moderate pace for the rest of 1998. The group sees little risk of recession in the near term. But what has changed is the global economy. Japan and the rest of Asia are in recession. The woes are spreading to Latin America. "Im now convinced we are going to have a global economic recession," says Sung Won Sohn, chief economist at Norwest Corp, a Minneapolis-based bank. But, he added, its not certain the US will slide into a period of negative growth. He rates the risk of recession at only 10 to 15 percent. "We will be responding to the world economic situation rather than leading it." he says. Still, Fed watchers dont think the central bank will act to try to save the world. "Its inconceivable the Fed could make much difference in Asia, Russia, or Latin America," says Lyle Gramley, a former Fed governor. After the last stock market crash, in 1987, the Federal Reserve acted quickly to provide liquidity to the markets and to lower interest rates. But the economy is in better shape this time. The banking sector is stronger and the financial markets have been able to respond the enormous trading volume. "It is not the Feds job to manage the stock market," says Mr. Kretzmer. But the Fed will keep a close watch on Wall Street. If the market were to shave another 1,500 points off the Dow by the end of September, "then the Fed would think about lowering interest rates," says Mr. Gramley. In his view, the Feds main concern will be the impact of a sliding market on consumer confidence. Since 40 percent of the nation has investments in the stock market, any prolonged slide might make individuals feel less wealthy. They would cut back on vacations and "splurge" purchases. He expects the central bank to watch the next consumer confidence surveys and housing statistics closely. 39. What did President Clinton try to do during his trip to Moscow? A) to pacify the market B) to make a speech on American economy. C) to intervene D) to cooperate with Russian to pursue sustainable development. 40. What is the Fed's main concern according to Mr. Gramley? A) to provide liquidity to the market B) to keep a close watch on Wall Street, if there is a stock market crash, it will lower interest rates C) to observe the influence of a sliding market on consumer confidence and give a timely response D) to prevent the stock market from sliding too much 41. Which of the following is the most appropriate title for this passage? A) Threat of Deflation in US. B) Economic Situation in US. C) Where US Economy is Heading. D) The Sign of Recession in US Economy. TEXT C I cry easily. I once burst into tears when the curtain came down on the Kirov Ballets "Swan Lake". I still choke up every time I see a film of Roger Bannister breaking the "impossible" four minute mark for the mile. I figure I am moved by witnessing men and women at their best. But they need not be great men and women, doing great things. Take the night, some years ago, when my wife and I were going to dinner at a friends house in New York city. It was sleeting. As we hurried toward the house, with its welcoming light, I noticed a car pulling out from the curb. Just ahead, another car was waiting to back into the parking space —— a rare commodity in crowded Manhattan. But before he could do so another car came up from behind, and sneaked into the spot. Thats dirty pool, I thought. While my wife went ahead into our friends house. I stepped into the street to give the guilty driver a piece of my mind. A man in work clothes rolled down the window. "Hey," I said, "this parking space belongs to that guy," I gestured toward the man ahead, who was looking back angrily. I thought I was being a good Samaritan, I guess —— and I remember that the moment I was feeling pretty manly in my new trench coat. "Mind your own business!" the driver told me. "No," I said. "You dont understand. That fellow was waiting to back into this space." Things quickly heated up, until finally he leaped out of the car. My God, he was colossal. He grabbed me and bent me back over the hood of his car as if I was a rag doll. The sleet stung my face. I glanced at the other driver, looking for help, but he gunned his engine and hightailed it out of there. The huge man shook his rock of a fist of me, brushing my lip and cutting the inside of my mouth against my teeth. I tasted blood. I was terrified. He snarled and threatened, and then told me to beat it. Almost in a panic, I scrambled to my friends front door. As a former Marine, as a man, I felt utterly humiliated. Seeing that I was shaken, my wife and friends asked me what had happened. All I could bring myself to say was that I had had an argument about a parking space. They had the sensitivity to let it go at that. I sat stunned. Perhaps half an hour later, the doorbell rang. My blood ran cold. For some reason I was sure that the bruiser had returned for me. My hostess got up to answer it, but I stopped her. I felt morally bound to answer it myself. I walked down the hallway with dread. Yet I knew I had to face up to my fear. I opened the door. There he stood, towering. Behind him, the sleet came down harder than ever. "I came back to apologize," he said in a low voice. "When I got home, I said to myself, what right I have to do that? Im ashamed of myself. All I can tell you is that the Brooklyn Navy Yard is closing. Ive worked there for years. And today I got laid off. Im not myself. I hope youll accept my apology." I often remember that big man. I think of the effort and courage it took for him to come back to apologize. He was man at last. And I remember that after I closed the door, my eyes blurred, as I stood in the hallway for a few moments alone. 42. On what occasion is the author likely to be moved? A) A young person cheated of the best things in life. B) A genius athlete breaks a world record. C) A little girl suffers from an incurable disease. D) When the curtain comes down on a touching play. 43. What does "dirty pool" at the end of the second paragraph mean? A) Improper deeds B) Bribery C) Chicanery D) Dirty transaction 44. Why didn't the writer's wife and friends ask him what had happened? A) They sensed that something terrible happened, they didn't dare to ask. B) They were afraid that the writer might lose face if they asked. C) They'd like to let it be for it was not their business. D) They tried to calm the writer in this way. 45. What touched the writer in the end? A) The big man's courage to admit his mistake. B) The big man's sincerity and confession. C) The big man's wretched experience. D) The man at his best. Text D It used to be said that English people take their pleasure sadly. No doubt this would still be true if they had any pleasure to take, but the price of alcohol and tobacco in my country has provided sufficient external causes for melancholy. I have sometimes thought that the habit of taking pleasure sadly has crossed the Atlantic, and I have wondered what it is that makes so many English-speaking people somber in their outlook in spite of good health and a good income. In the course of my travels in the American I have been impressed by a kind of fundamental malaise which seems to me extremely common and which poses difficult problems for the social reformer. Most social reformers have held the opinion that, if poverty were abolished and there were no more economic insecurity, the millennium would have arrived. But when I look at the face of people in opulent cars, whether in your country or in mine, I do not see that look of radiant happiness which the aforesaid social reformers had led me to expect. In nine cases out of ten, I see instead a look of boredom and discontent and an almost frantic longing for something that might tickle the jaded palate. But it is not only the very rich who suffer in this way. Professional men very frequently feel hopeless thwarted. There is something that they long to do or some public object that they long to work for. But if they were to indulge their wishes in these respects, they fear that they would lose their livelihood. Their wives are equally unsatisfied , for their neighbor, Mrs. So-and-So, has gone ahead more quickly, has a better car, a larger apartment and grander friends. Life for almost everybody is a long competitive struggle where very few can win the race, and those who do not win are unhappy. On social occasions when it is de rigueur to seem cheerful, the necessary demeanor is stimulated by alcohol. But the gaiety does not ring true and anybody who has just one drink too many is apt to lapse into lachrymose melancholy. One finds this sort of thing only among English-speaking people. A Frenchman while he is abusing the Government is as gay as a lark. So is an Italian while he is telling you how his neighbor has swindled him. Mexicans, when they are not actually starving or actually being murdered, sing ad dance and enjoy sunshine and food and drink with a gusto which is very rare north of the Mexican frontier. When Andrew Jackson conquered Pensacola from the Spaniards, it was Sunday. She pointed out the scandal to her husband, who decreed that cheerfulness must cease forthwith. And it did. When I try to understand what it is that prevents so many American from being as happy as one might expect, it seems to me that there are two causes, of which one goes much deeper than the other. The one that goes least deep is the necessity for subservience in some large organization. If you are an energetic man with strong views as to the right way of doing the job with which you are concerned, you find yourself invariable under the orders of some big man at the top who is elderly, weary and cynical. Whenever you have a bright idea, the boss puts a stopper on it. The more energetic you are and the more vision you have, the more you will suffer from the impossibility of doing any of the things that you feel ought to be done. When you go home and moan to your wife, she tells you that you are a silly fellow and that if you became the proper sort of yes—— man your income would soon be doubled. If you try divorce and remarriage it is very unlikely that there will be any change in this respect. And so you are condemned to gastric ulcers and premature old age. It was not always so. When Dr. Johnson complied his dictionary, he compiled it as he thought fit. When he felt like saying that oats is food for men in Scotland and horses in England, he said so. When he defined a fishing-rod as a stick with a fish at one end and a fool at the other, there was nobody to point out to him that a remark of this sort would damage the sale of his great work among fishermen. But if, in the present day, you are (let us say) a contributor to an encyclopedia, there is an editorial policy which is solemn, wise, and prudent, which allows no room for jokes, no place for personal preferences and no tolerance for idiosyncrasies. Everything has to be flattened out except where the prejudices of the editor are concerned. To these you must conform, however, little you may share them. And so you have to be content with dollars instead of creative satisfaction. And the dollars, alas, leave you sad. This brings me to major cause of unhappiness, which is that most people in America act not on impulse but on some principle, and that principles upon which people act are usually faxed upon a false psychology and a false ethic. There is a general theory as to what makes for happiness and this theory is false. Life is concerned as a competitive struggle in which felicity consists in getting ahead of your neighbor. The joys which are not competitive are forgotten. Now, I will not for a moment deny that getting ahead of your neighbor is delightful, but it is not the only delight of which human beings are capable. There are innumerable things which are not competitive. It is possible to enjoy food and drink without having to reflect that you have a better cook and better wine merchant than your former friends whom you are learning to cold-shoulder. It is possible to be fond of your wife and your children without reflecting how much better she dressed than Mrs. So-and-So and how much better they are at athletic than the children of that old stick-in-the-mud Mr. Such-and-Such. There are those who can enjoy music without thinking how cultured other ladies in their womens club will be thinking them. There are even people who can enjoy a fine day in spite of the fact that the sun shines on everybody. All these simple pleasures are destroyed as soon as competitiveness gets the upper hand. But it is not only competitiveness that is the trouble. I could imagine a person who has turned against competitiveness and can only enjoy after conscious rejection of the competitive element. Such a person, seeing the sunshine in the morning, says to himself, "Yes, I may enjoy this and indeed I must, for it is a joy open to all." And however bored he may become with the sunshine he goes on persuading himself that he is enjoying it because he thinks he ought to. "But," you will ask, "are you maintaining that our actions ought to be governed by moral principles?" Are you suggesting that every whim and every impulse should be given free rein? Do you consider that if So-and-Sos nose annoys you by being too long, that gives you a right to tweak it?" "Sir," you will continue with indignation," your doctrine is one which would uproot all the sources of morality and loosen all the bonds which hold society together. Only self-restraint, self-repression, iron self-control make it possible to endure the abominable beings among whom we have to live, No, sir! Better misery and gastric ulcers than such chaos as your doctrine would produce. I will admit at once that there is force in this objection. I have seen many noses that I should have liked to tweak, but never once have I yielded to the impulse. But this, like everything else, is a matter of degree. If you always yield to impulse, you are mad. If you never yield to impulse, you gradually dry up and very likely become mad to boot. In a life which is to be healthy and happy, impulse, though mot allowed to run riot, must have sufficient scope to remain alive and to preserve that variety and diversity of interest which is natural to a human being. A life lived on a principle, no matter what, is too narrowly determined, too systematic and uniform, to be happy. However much you care about success, you should have times when you are merely enjoying life without a thought of subsequence. However proud you may be, as president of a womens club, of your impeccable culture, you should not be ashamed of reading a low-brow book if you want to. A life which is all principle is a life on rail. The rails may help toward rapid locomotion, but preclude the joy of wandering. Man spent some million years wandering before he invented rails, and his happiness still demands some reminiscence of the earlier ages of freedom. 46. In the writer's opinion, in England alcohol and tobacco may ____. A) make people indulge in pleasures B) lead to despondency C) pose touchy problems for social reformers D) throw a heavy burden on the country's welfare program 47. What opinions do most social reformers hold? A) Once poverty were rooted out, people would really enjoy their lives B) If economic security were obtained, one would grow fidgety and berserk. C) An ideal society is the one in which all the people were no longer afraid of poverty. D) Great happiness and human perfection could be arrived at if and only if people learned to be content. 48. Who are easy to feel melancholy according to the writer? A) Mexicans B) professional C) English-speaking people D) B and C 49. What is the man cause of unhappiness for many Americans in the writer's view? A) Life is a long competitive struggle, very few lucky people can win the race and attain happiness. B) Lack of freedom and stimuli makes people unsatisfied with life. C) People tend to act on dubious principles. D) People's obsession of getting ahead of their neighbors. 50. What solution does the writer suggest to dispel melancholy mood? A) cultivate wide interest B) balance impulse and principle C) strive for success and enjoy its gain D) A and B SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. What is this passage mainly about? A. The tradition of folk art, especially clay modeling in China. B. The origin of clay modeling and its development. C. "Clay-Figurine" Zhang. D. modern clay modeling in China Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. Clay modeling is a folk art popular in both rural and urban areas. Colored clay figures are put on sale in cities, and at country fairs on the Spring Festival and other traditional festivals. Today workshops and enterprises have been established specializing in this kind of folk art. The Clay modeling of Beijing, Tianjin, Jiangsu and Wuxi each has its own style and characteristics. In Tianjin, everybody knows the name "Ni Ren Zhang" ("clay-figurine" Zhang). Traditionally, clay modeling was only a source of childrens toy, but thanks to the efforts of "Clay-figurine" Zhang, clay modeling has become a respectable art, and some of his products are among the treasures in Beijings museums and the China Art Gallery. The name "clay-figurine" Zhang is used to refer to Zhang Mingshan (1826-1906) who was the fist person to make colored clay figurines in Tianjin. He transformed clay modeling into an art. People later began to use the name to refer to the Zhang family. Mow people sometimes use it to refer to the workshop which was set up in 1959 and which has more than forty craftsmen whose surnames are not Zhang. Tianjin clay figurines are characterized by a sense of motion. All the figures look vivid and lifelike. Some of the themes are taken from legends and myths while others are taken from everyday life. Now, Zhang Naiying, the fifth generation of the Zhang family, has made a breakthrough. He combined clay modeling and modern sculpture to create eighty colored clay figurines based on the centimeters in height, but each had its unique posture, clothing, and facial expressions. Clay figurines have been popular in Wuxi, Jiangsu Province, for more than six hundred years. Today multi-colored clay figurines made in Wuxi stand on desks or in shops around the world. They are called Ah Fu. "Fu" in Chinese used means fortune, and "Ah" is a meaningless auxiliary sound. The name was first used by local people to describe cherubic children. Now it refers to all clay figurines made in Wusi, especially those made at the Wuxi Clay Fifurine Mill. Today Ah Fu comes in more than a hundred designs: children in various postures, Lao Shouxing (an old man of longevity), historical and legendary figures, and animals of all kinds. All these clay figurines are made of dark clay from the foot of the Hui Hills near the city of Wuxi. The products of the Wuxi Clay Figurine Mill enjoy a wide market. Ah Fu figurines are sold not only in Wuxi but also in shops in more than fifty countries. Businessmen from the United States, Canada, Japan, Eastern Europe and South-east Asia buy wholesale from the mill. The mill pays great attention to training young apprentices. The young people are each assigned to a master craftsman. New recruits have to spend all their time learning the basic skills, and at the same time, take related cultural courses. Now the former apprentices have become the main force in the mill. Many of them have gone abroad on several occasions to be demonstrate their clay modeling skills. 51. What is this passage mainly about? A) The tradition of folk art, especially clay modeling in China. B) The origin of clay modeling and its development. C) "Clay-Figurine" Zhang. D) modern clay modeling in China TEXT F First read the questions. 52. The following letter _____ A. is a letter attached to a revised manuscript. B. is to respond to the suggestions of the editor-in-chief of the magazine Biochemical et Biophysica Acta. C. is intended to explain ones views in his original manuscript. D. is intended to persuade the editor of a scientific magazine into publishing an article. Now go through Text F quickly to answer question 52. December 27,1973 Deitorial Secretariat Biochimica et Biophysica Acta P.O. Box 1345 Amsterdam The Netherlands Re: Art No. RP P-1265 Dear sir, Thank you for your kind letter of December 11, 1973. We are happy to know that our paper entitled "Purification of Clostridium perfringens phospholipas C (@-toxin) by affinity chromatography on agarose-liked egg-yolk lipoprotein" (Art no.RPP-1265) will be acceptable. We have tried to shorten and revise the manuscript in line with the suggestion made by one of the of the reviewers and yourself. I am enclosing duplicate copies of the revised version. In answer to the questions raised by the reviewer, we must admit that we have not tested for lipase activity known to exist in culture of this organism. However, since our purified phospholipase C was found homogeneous by various criteria, we believe contamination with lipase, if there is any, is likely to be slight. In any case, we will test for lipase activity as soon as poddible. As to the second question, we realized that the lipoprotein in affinity adsorbent was attacked by the enzyme to a small extent; a minute amount of phosphorycholine was always detected in the break-through peak. As reported, however, the same column can be repeatedly (at least four times) without losing its affinity for the enzyme. We still do not know whether or not all of the multiple forms of enzyme are artifacts formed exclusively during isoelectric focusing. But some evidence is now available for the presence of at least two forms of enzyme, which are separable by methods other than isoeletric focusing, i.e. CM —— or DEAE —— Sephadex chromatography (unpublished data). The clarification of this question is now in progress in our laboratory. We have accepted all the suggestions penciled in by the reviewer on the original manuscript; the abbreviation SDC has been avoided. Through these revision we have succeeded in shortening the manuscript by two pages in total, although the page numbers have been kept unchanged. In the revised manuscript we have put the reference numbers in the right order as requested. We would like, however, to keep the designation of the figures as it was, since we believe the suggestion may be based on a misunderstanding on the part of reviewers. As suggested, we have improved the description of the essential step involved in preparation of the affinity adsorbed (page 6,5th line from the bottom of the original manuscript) as follows:" by centrifuging the mixture at 13,000g for 15 min. to discard the precipitate. I hope that these revisions and the shortened text are satisfactory and that the revised version will be acceptable for publication in Biochimica et Biophysica Acta. I also hope the revised manuscript will reach you before January 1. Sincerely yours, Nobuo Ogata, M.D. Enclosure: MS in duplicate No/th 52. The following letter _____ A) is a letter attached to a revised manuscript. B) is to respond to the suggestions of the editor-in-chief of the magazine Biochemical et Biophysica Acta. C) is intended to explain one's views in his original manuscript. D) is intended to persuade the editor of a scientific magazine into publishing an article. TEXT G First read the question. 53. Which of the following is the most suitable title? A. key to economic prosperity B. source of High Productivity C. elements in efficient management D. efficient of use of resource Now go through Text G quickly to answer question 53. A high volume of production, that is, coupled with efficient production methods, is a major key to economic prosperity. This is both at the macro level of nation, and at the micro level of the individual. Technically, productivity is an estimate of work output, being measured as production per production unit per unit of time. An example of this is output per worker per hour. It is a measure of the efficiency of use of resources. Under normal conditions, a high level of output per production unit allows a high level of consumption, so that such a society, be it large or small, can enjoy a high standard of living. Just as the individual with a high productivity is usually economically successful, so a nation with high productivity is likely to demonstrate comparative economic prosperity. High productivity depends on a combination of factors, of which the most important are as follows. individual productivity; incentives; appropriate capital equipment; market size individual productivity The productivity of the individual depends on both his ability and his desire to do the job. The former ability depends, in turn, on native ability and on training. The latter varies with incentive. The more complicated a job becomes, the more training is necessary to ensure efficient operation. Thus, developing training programs within production units is one important factor in the maintenance of high individual productivity. Moreover, the establishment of good general and specific education programs if essential to the maintenance of efficiency and contemporary practices in production. This is particularly true at managerial levels. The quality of management has a large significance to productivity since management teams are responsible for keeping equipment up to date, deciding production methods, developing marketing programs, fostering good relations between employers and employees, establishing good working conditions and installing incentives. incentives Incentives to efficiency at the individual and small group level can take various forms. Financial gain is one of the most common and also one of the most effective. However, others such as good working conditions, employee benefits and a positive social environment in the work place are important considerations. At the production unit level, whether it be a small workshop or a large factory, competition provides a serious incentive. When a company has a monopoly or a protected niche for its operation, a general lassitude can delay replacement of aging equipment, allow loss of vigor in marketing, and permit slackness in individual behaviors. Thus, a certain amount of competition is useful to keep a company at the forefront of production efficiency. capital equipment Appropriate capital equipment implies, in term of efficiency, having equipment which optimizes the output of items produced per dollar input. Generally, this means regular updating of all equipment, from production machinery to hand tools to office instrumentation. However, modernization incurs expenditure. If such spending is very large, it may be considered as a form of saving. Such investment spending may, under some circumstances delay a rise in standard of living. This could be because of preferred production of industrial products over consumer products and a reduction in consumer spending, because of deferred wage increase. So capital expenditure which will cause increased production in the future, can be considered as an enforced saving with a view to achieving a higher standard of living at a later date. market size As the quality of production increases, it is usually possible to reduce the cost of production per item. Thus, with very large production runs, the cost per item may be vastly reduced and profit per item will consequently be greater. Such as economy of scale is dependent on the accessibility of a large enough to justify the enormous but necessary start-up costs, Estimation of the market size may determine that the production must be distributed regionally, nationally or even world wide. It is clear that the supply side of the economy is the basis of economic viability. This applies to highly industrialized nations where labor is expensive and the tendency is towards technical specialization. It also applies to less developed nations where there is an abundance of labor. In all cases a balance exists between production costs and profits available in the product market. 53. Which of the following is the most suitable title? A) key to economic prosperity B) source of High Productivity C) elements in efficient management D) efficient of use of resource TEXT H First read question 54. 54. This passage aims to ____. A. give 20 tips for the perfect father-to-be B. demonstrate 20 practical advices to the father-to-be C. explain the trial and happiness fathers experience. D. illustrate a successful birthing class and advices offered by the instructor. Now go through Text H quickly to answer question 54. It was sipper day in birthing class and I was to provide the class a model demonstration. Gently I lifted the rubber baby doll, supporting its head with my forearm. The instructor smiled and told me that it was a good position —— if I wanted to put the diaper on the babys head. My wife and I are experiencing our first baby in September and Im finding fatherhood isnt coming very naturally. Im a 38-year-old journalist, more accustomed to whining politicians than crying babies. A white back, I sent an e-mail to a friend, a father of two teenagers, suggesting half-jokingly that he send me advice. He responded with a wonderful "Top 10" list of fatherhood tips. I started thinking: If I reached out to other friends, I could probably compile a pretty useful list of advice for a new father. So I sent a batch of e-mail. What follows is 20 of their responses. None of it is expert advice. These are just a bunch of guys who have children ranging from toddlers to teens and have learned about fatherhood through trial and often error. Their advice is sometimes practical, sometimes philosophical, occasionally contradictory and always heart-felt. 1. If you haven't bought that new set of golf clubs before the baby is born, you can forget about it for the next 30 years. 2. Things you cannot do enough of: hold, hug or kiss the baby. Take the baby out for walks or drives. 3. Never swear or fight in front of the baby. (There will be plenty of temptation for both. Just wait. 4. Help out. Even being the main breadwinner does not compensate for the much harder job of staying home with the baby. 5. Live in a small house where you can interact with the kids. Dont let their rooms become their universe. 6. You can never invest enough in their self-esteem. 7. Encourage children to share. 8. Read to your children every night. Choose something slightly above their own reading level, because that will require explanations, and conversations will flow from that. 9. Immediately correct them if they are being mean or cruel, if they lie or steal, but let them figure some things out for themselves, even if they draw the wrong conclusions. 10. Teach by example: If you want kids to be loving, be loving. If you want them to respectful, be respectful. If you want them serene, be serene. 11. Help them with their homework. 12. Whisper in their ears before they go to bed at night, "think scholarship„„think scholarship." 13. Dont pressure them. They have enough pressure at school. 14. Dont get angry if they spill things or break things. However, be strict if they insist on doing something that puts them in danger. 15. Dont compare them with other children. 16. Never be afraid of say youre sorry. There will be times when youll be unjust in how you discipline your kids; or youll say something hurtful. Tell them you have blown it. Tell them you love them. And ask for forgiveness. 17. Dont make promises you cant keep. Or threat. 18. Dont teach by talking. If your kid think talking with Dad means a lecture, rather than an effective exchange of thoughts and feeling, they wont want to talk to you. And they wont listen, wither. 19. Dont hit your children. If you cant make them understand without violence, find out what youve doing wrong. 20. Discuss serious subjects with them. You will be pleasantly surprised. They will be too. 54. This passage aims to ____. A) give 20 tips for the perfect father-to-be B) demonstrate 20 practical advices to the father-to-be C) explain the trial and happiness fathers experience. D) illustrate a successful birthing class and advices offered by the instructor. TEXT I First read the question. 55. When will the "youngsters Wind Band Music Festival" be held? A. 2 pm, June 12 B. 7:30 pm, June 9,10 C. 8 am-11:30 am, 2 pm-5 pm, June 12 D. June 10-11 56. The Exhibition Gallery of Chinese Traditional Painting Research Institute is hosting ____. A. an ink painting show B. a landscape painting show C. a calligraphy show D. a show of works by some famous artists. Now go through Text I quickly to answer question 55 and 56. CONCERTS British conductor —— David Lockington from the United Kingdom will lead the China Broadcasting Symphony Orchestra here in Beijing. Starting early on the cello, Lodkington studied cello and conducting at Yale University in the United States after graduating from Cambridge University in England. In June he became conductor of the Grand Rapid Symphony Orchestra. Pianist Zhu Tong from Taiwan will be the soloist in the concert. Program: "Fantasy on a Theme of Thomas Tallis" by Williams, "Piano Concert Op 16" by Grieg, "Spain" by Charier, "Romeo and Juliet Suite" by Prokofiev. Time: 7:30 pm, June 9,10 Place: Beijing Concert Hall, 1 Beixinghuajie Tel: 6605-5812 Rigoletto —— A concert opera, "rigoletto" will be illustrated by the opera troupe and chorus of China National Opera Ballet Theatre. Gao Weichun will conduct. Lei Keyong will provide narration. Time: 2 pm, June 12 Place: Beijing Concert Hall, 1 Beixinhuajie Tel: 6605-5812 For Strauss —— To commemorate the 100th anniversary of the death of Richard Strauss, a comprehensive concert will be highlight the great masters orchestral and vocal works. Program: Overture to "Die Fledermaus" and Strauss waltzes, polkas and marches. Time: 7:30 pm, June 12 Place: Century Theatre, 40 Liangmaqiaolu Tel: 6466-3311 Plucked string —— The graceful Chinese ancient plucked string instruments will be played by musicians of the Central Orchestra of Traditional Music. In ancient pieces like "Floral Moonlit Night in a River in Spring" and "Flowing Water", pipa and quqin were used to be played by scholars, intellectuals or concubines. Program: "Generals Order", an ancient guzheng piece, "Camel bells on the Silk Road", a daruansolo and "The Beautiful Africa", a dulcimer solo. Time: 7:30 pm, June 12 Place: Minzu Concert Hall, 15 Xiaoyinglu, Chaoyang District Tel: 6491-9081 Traditional instruments —— Musicians from the China Film Symphony Orchestra will display the cream of traditional Chinese instrumental music. The instruments include dizi, guzheng, pipa, erhu, xiao and ruan. Time: 7:30 pm, June 19 Place: Beijing International Art Palace, Art Salon of Crowne Plaza Beijing, 48 Wangfujing Dajie Tel: 6513-3388 ext 1209 Wind bands —— A "youngsters Wind Band Music Festival" will be staged by some 30 amateur wind bands from more than 30 primary and middle schools in China. Organized by China Childrens Center and Dunshan Youngsters Arts Training Center, both Chinese and foreign youngsters are welcome to attend the concert, free of charge. Program: "Carmen Fantasy", "Going Home", "Poland Waltz", "The Blue Danube", "William Tell", "Sound of Music" and "The National Anthem of China". Time: 8 am —— 11:30 am, 2 pm —— 5 pm, June 12 Place: Chaoyang Stadium, Liulitun Xikou, Yaojiayuanlu, Chaoyang District Tel: 6559-9310 EXHIBITIONS Oil paintings —— The Wan Fung Art Gallery is holding an oil painting exhibition entitled "Inner Feeling". On show are dozens of oil paintings created by young and middle-aged painters including Lao Dao, Xin Yi, Han Xuejun and Zeng Chuangxing. Time: 9 am-7 pm, till June 15 Place: 136 Nachizi Dajie, Dongcheng District Tel: 6523-3320 Japanese art—— The Palace Museum will host the Kicho Art Exhibition from Japan. Kicho, an aristocratic tradition in Japan, was a woven cloth partition used for interior decoration among royal families in the Heian era (794-1190). It is now a traditional art in Japan which enjoys a high reputation around the world. Sponsored by the Palace Museum and the Yanazaki Junzo Kicho Institute of Japan, the exhibition will display 50 reproductions from the Heian Era. The Yanazaki Junzo Kicho Institute is famed in Japan for handmade kichos. Its kichos have been collected by galleries and museums around the world. Time: 9 am —— 4 am, until June 10 Place: 4 Jingshan Qianjie, Dongcheng District Tel: 6523-7344 Traditional scenes —— The Exhibition Gallery of Chinese Traditional Painting Research Institute is hosting an ink painting show. The displayed works, created by such artists of the institute as Liu Boshu, Li Lingyun, Wang Yingchun and Deng Lin, feature figures, landscapes, flowers and birds, as well as calligraphy. Time: 9 am —— 4 pm, until June 10 Place: 54 Xisanhuan Beilu, Haidian District Tel: 6841-1369 Stage Camille —— The Hong Kong Ballet perform the ballet adapted from this famous work of Alexander Dumas. The novel of the title was published in 1848 and had been adapted into film, ballet and opera. Time: 7:30 pm, June 10-11 Place: Century Theater, 40 Liangmaqiaolu, Chaoyang District Tel: 8425-2256 Ballet on ice —— The St Petersburg State Ice Ballet is to bring the three greatest of Tchaikovskys ballets: "Swan Lake", "The Nutcracker" and "sleeping beauty". Time: "The Nutcracker", 7:30 pm, June 10; "Sleeping Beauty", 7:30 pm, June 11; "Swan Lake", 7:30 pm, June 12. Place: Beizhan Theatre, 135 Xiwai Dajie, Xicheng District Tel: 6835-1383 In this family —— The China National Youth Theater will present a new drama about an intellectuals family. The father and mother devoted their youth to the Daqing oilfields, but the new generation of the family thinks differently. The conflicts reflect different values of two generations, while the experiences of the family members mirrors 50 years development of this century. Time: 7:30 pm, until 12 Place: Haidian Theater, 84 Haidianlu, Huangzhuang, Haidian District Tel: 6255-8026 55. When will the "youngsters' Wind Band Music Festival" be held? A) 2 pm, June 12 B) 7:30 pm, June 9,10 C) 8 am-11:30 am, 2 pm-5 pm, June 12 D) June 10-11 56. The Exhibition Gallery of Chinese Traditional Painting Research Institute is hosting ____. A) an ink painting show B) a landscape painting show C) a calligraphy show D) a show of works by some famous artists. TEXT J First read the question. 57. The in-house technique developed and used by Venter is to _____. A. to discover new genes B. to decode for the first time the genome of a living organism C. to spread up his research D. to isolate the DNA of the organism 58. Why is Venter criticized and doubted? A. His goal is to ambitious to be achieved by the end of 2001. B. There are loopholes in his technique. C. US 300 million is far from being ample for such an ambitious research. D. All of above. Now go through Text G quickly to answer question 57 and 58. ROCKVILLE, Maryland —— A pioneer of genetic research, 52-year-old biologist Craig Venter is challenging what he sees as the ultimate frontier of the discipline —— mapping the human genome. His announcement in May 1998 that he would complete the process by the end of 2001 at a cost of US 300 million drew considerable skepticism. For numerous colleagues, deciphering the totality of the genetic instructions necessary for the creation and running of the human body in only three years and with so little money is nothing short of science fiction. But Venter stands by his bold ambition and is determined to achieve his goal. "We are very confident we can complete the full genome sequence by the end of 2001", he said in an interview. "We cannot be absolutely confident because this is the biggest project that anybody has ever tried in biology. But we are very confident." In order to take on the financial and organizational might of the public sector, which is chasing the same goal, Venter and his firm Calera Genomic are using an in-house technique development by Venter to speed them on their way. This technique was born when Venter was an ocscure researcher at the government-funded National Institute of Health (NIH) in the 1980s, attempting to discover new genes. Rather than continue with the method of relying on chance to unearth genes, he decided instead to follow the gene trail by way of DNA, the molecule that transmits genetic information to cells. The procedure was a success and very quickly Venter was expanding the known gene library to include information on hundreds of new ones he had discovered. However, his technique has detractors, and his determination to patent his discoveries has added even more. His boss at the time, the Nobel Prize laureate James Watson, described his ambition as "sheer lunacy." Thus with a band of faithful followers, including his scientist wife Claire Fraser, Venter slammed the public sector door behind him and founded his own research center, The Institute for Genomic Research, with an ambitious aim: to decode for the first time the genome of a living organism, the bacteria that causes meningitis, Haemophilus influenza. With his eye on speed, Venter innovated to cut corners. Where tried and trusted techniques of gene sequencing dictate orderly process, Venter isolated the DNA of the organism, scrambled it and used a computer to reassemble the resulting puzzle. His method worked. In 1995, the 1.8 million letters of the entire genetic coke of the organism were published . "That was major breakthrough," said Fraser. "What we have shown is „„ our approach can be used on virtually any genome and is one that will save a great deal of time and money." Here again, the critics were vocal, suggesting that his technique lacked rigor. "There will be a lot of holes," said Michael Waterson, a leader of the government-sponsored genome project. "Their book of life will need a lot of further editing." 57. The in-house technique developed and used by Venter is to _____. A) to discover new genes B) to decode for the first time the genome of a living organism C) to spread up his research D) to isolate the DNA of the organism 58. Why is Venter criticized and doubted? A) His goal is to ambitious to be achieved by the end of 2001. B) There are loopholes in his technique. C) US' 300 million is far from being ample for such an ambitious research. D) All of above. TEXT K First read the question. 59. What is the cornerstone of writing according to the writer? A. conciseness B. clarity C. coherence D. continuity 60. Whats the main difference between persuasive writing and information writing? A. The writer of persuasive writing has to persuade readers as well as impart information. B. Concerned with affecting readers view, persuasive writing calls for special planning. C. The interest of the readers must be stimulated in persuasive writing. D. Readers are easy to follow the flow of persuasive writing. Now go through Text K quickly to answer question 59 and 60. Some principles for business writing Attitude: The writers point of view. The writer always has a point of view and it should be reflected in information writing. It may affect the readers point of view, but that is not the purpose. Here, the writers point of view provides clarity to the communication. Furthermore, it offers a personal approach to the communication —— naturalness. Courtesy and tact are also a part of the writers point of view. Sincerity reflects a quality that is very important for developing the readers opinion of the writers credibility. Clarity: The cornerstone of writing. Clarity is reflected in the writers knowledge of the subject. Placing the information in simple, short sentences for efficient comprehension is vital. Selecting words for specific meaning and eliminating ambiguity are essential. The vocabulary must be familiar to the reader, taking into consideration the readers background and experience with the subject of the communication. Clarity is also reflected in the organizational ability of the writer. If the writer creates a workable organization, the reader will be able to grasp the communication quickly and accurately. Conciseness: Respecting the readers time. Unnecessary detail is the constant plague of written business communications. The details are too many and, quite often, unnecessary. Much valuable time is wasted for readers by writers who are careless about brevity. Repetition has a place in writing, and it belongs in the summary of written communications. Often writes repeat the same ideas from paragraph to paragraph. Coherence: The writers organizational flow. All ideas should have some order. When order is established, the reader immediately begins to comprehend. If ideas are structured in time-order sequence, ascending or descending pattern, in a cause-and-effect, or in problem-and-solution structure, the essence of the message flows. It is easy to follow the relationship of multiple ideas in a simple communication. Some guidelines for persuasive writing Sometimes writing is a way of negotiation. You need take a position and give enough evidence to persuade your clients to accept your point of view, and take action. Writing persuasively is challenging for the business professional. Whether it is to be a memo, a formal letter, a report, or a elaborate contract, the writer must take time to analyze the intended readers. A clear understanding of writing to communication is necessary in order to recognize the difference with influencing the readers point of view. This could range from stimulating the reader to make a change in attitude, to coercing the reader to accept an issue. It takes more strategic planning for the writer to create a persuasive argument on paper. Stimulating interest: Starting on the right foot. The opening paragraph in written persuasion must get things off on the right foot. The interest of the reader must be stimulated by the introduction. It the writer has some notion of the readers attitude on the subject, it is much easier to stimulate interest. The conclusion, which normally comes at the end of a written communication, should appear right in the opening. By starting off with the conclusion, the reader will know immediately where the writer is aiming. This will eliminate any hidden fears, confusions, or possible misinterpretation on the part of the reader. This immediately places emphasis on clarity at the very beginning of the communication. Continuity: Establishing organizational flow. As in information writing, persuasive writing must have an organizational flow. By taking the topic and structure it into a sequence, the writer will be sure that the reader is able to follow the flow. Order of important is an excellent way to structure the ideas in a persuasive communication. By starting with the most important idea and moving to the least important, the writer is setting up priorities and emphasis. In this manner, it is very easy for the reader to understand the rationale for the writer. Cause and effect is another pattern of organization easy for the reader to follow and be influenced by. The writer can carefully establish all of the causes and then, one by one, describe each effect. This makes it very easy to show the relationship between cause and effect. It is the established relationship between the two that appears logical to the reader and that creates the positive attitude necessary for persuasion. Problem and solution as an organizational pattern works very much like cause and effect, in that the relationship between the two is important. The solution, if it does eliminate the problem, in a practical, workable, or desirable manner, will gain strong acceptance from the reader. Chronological, topical, and spatial patterns of organization can all be used in persuasive writing, these depend on the relationship of the subject to the reader. Need/satisfaction is another common structural pattern, and it works well in persuasive writing, in this pattern, the writer establishes a need for the reader, and once this has been clearly explained, an idea is presented that will satisfy that need. Once the need is met, the writer can then set up some plan of action that will explain how this satisfaction will take place and offer benefits to the reader. Credibility: A must for the writer and the content. As the writer presents conclusions, their justification must be established. This justification is accomplished by presenting good evidence in an organized structure that will support the conclusions. 59. What is the cornerstone of writing according to the writer? A) conciseness B) clarity C) coherence D) continuity 60. What's the main difference between persuasive writing and information writing? A) The writer of persuasive writing has to persuade readers as well as impart information. B) Concerned with affecting readers' view, persuasive writing calls for special planning. C) The interest of the readers must be stimulated in persuasive writing. D) Readers are easy to follow the flow of persuasive writing. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following underlined part of the text into English. Write your translation on the Answer Sheet. 毕竟是中秋了，夜凉如水，不一会儿就觉得衣服有点儿潮湿，不知道是露水，是潮水的水气，还是神话中的仙水。不知不觉已到了半夜一点钟，慢慢地听到远处有细细的声音，人 们一个个从地上爬起来。大家都屏住气，用眼睛向钱塘江的水天分界处瞧去。 这时，潮水 越来越大了，天边一根银色的线条，一会儿变成黑色，一会儿又变成白色，渐渐地排山倒海 般由远向近而来。由于夜静，这潮水确实是比白天的的大，真如千军万马，两个人面对面讲 话都听不到。不知道由于心理作用还是事实如此：夜潮的潮头也高，排列夜整齐；潮水到镇 海宝塔下，竟成了一跟笔直的线，象受检阅的部队，整齐极了，人们还舍不得离开，一直看 它急流直下。这是钱塘江对岸的一排信号灯全亮了，真是夜潮更比日潮奇。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on Answer Sheet. On each side of a bright river he saw rise a line of brighter palaces, arched and pillared, and inlaid with deep red porphyry, and with serpentine; along the quays before their gates were riding troops of knights, noble in face and form, dazzling in crest and shield; horse and man one labyrinth of quaint color and gleaming light —— the purple, and silver, and scarlet fringes flowing over the strong limbs and clashing mail, like sea-waves over rock at sunset. Opening on each side from the river were gardens, courts, vine; leaping of fountains through buds of pomegranate and orange; and still along the garden-paths, and under and through the crimson of the pomegranate shadows, moving slowly, groups of the fairest women that Italy ever saw —— fairest, because purest and most thoughtful; trained in all high knowledge, as in all courteous art —— in dance, in song, in sweet wit, in lofty learning, in loftier courage, in loftiest love —— able alike to cheer, to enchant, or save, the souls of men. Above all this scenery of perfect human life, rose dome and bell-tower, burning with white alabaster and gold: beyond dome and bell-dome the slopes of mighty hills, hoary with olive far in the north, above a purple sea of peaks of solemn Apennine, the clear, sharp-cloven Carrara mountains sent up their steadfast flames of marble summit into amber sky; the great sea itself, scorching with expanse of light, stretching from their feet to the Gorgonian isles. PART VI WRITING Directions: There are many differences between human beings and animals. Write an essay of about 300 words presenting some main differences within 60 minutes. The differences between human beings and animals In the first part of your writing you should present your thesis statement and in the following parts you should support the thesis statement with appropriate details or examples. Marks will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instruction may result in loss of marks. 04 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. The rules for the first private library in the US were drawn up by ____ A) the legislature. B) the librarian. C) John Harvard. D) the faculty members. 2. The earliest public library was also called a subscription library because books ____ A) could be lent to everyone. B) could be left by book stores. C) were lent to students and the faculty. D) were lent on a membership basis. 3. Which of the following is NOT stated as one of the purposes of free public libraries? A) To provide readers with comfortable reading rooms. B) To provide adults with opportunities of further education. C) to serve the community's cultural and recreational needs. D) to supply technical literature on specialized subjects. 4. The major difference between modern private and public libraries lies in ____ A) readership. B) content. C) service. D) function. 5. The main purpose of the talk is ____ A) to introduce categories of books in US libraries. B) to demonstrate the importance of US libraries. C) to explain the roles of different US libraries. D) to define the circulation system of US libraries. SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. Nancy became a taxi driver because ____ A) she owned a car. B) she drove well. C) she liked drivers' uniforms. D) it was her childhood dream. 7. According to her, what was the most difficult about becoming a taxi driver? A) The right sense of direction. B) The sense of judgment. C) The skill of maneuvering. D) The size of vehicle. 8. What does Nancy like best about her job? A) Seeing interesting building in the city. B) Being able to enjoy the world of nature. C) Driving in unsettled weather. D) Taking long drives outside the city. 9. It can be inferred from the interview that Nancy is a(n) ____ mother. A) uncaring B) strict C) affection D) permissive 10. The people Nancy meets are ____ A) rather difficult to please. B) rude to women drivers. C) talkative and generous with tips. D) different in personality. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. On Public Speaking When people are asked to give a speech in public for the first time, they usually feel terrified no matter how well they speak in informal situations. In fact, public speaking is the same as any other form of (16) that people are usually engaged in. Public speaking is a way for a speaker to (17) his thoughts with the audience. Moreover, the speaker is free to decide on the (18) of his speech. Two key points to achieve success in public speaking: —— (19) of the subject matter. —— good preparation of the speech. To facilitate their understanding, inform your audience beforehand of the (20) of your speech and end it with a summary. Other key points to bear in mind: —— be ware of your audience through eye contact. —— vary the speed of (21) —— use the microphone skillfully to (22) yourself in speech. —— be brief in speech; always try to make your message (23) Example: the best remembered inaugural speeches of the US presidents are (24) once. Therefore brevity is essential to (25) of a speech. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors .Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3) exhibit The grammatical words which play so large a part in English grammar are the most part sharply and obviously different from the lexical words. A rough and ready difference which may seem the most obvious is that grammatical words have "less (26) meaning", but in fact some grammarians have called them (27) "empty" words as opposed in the "full" words of vocabulary. But (28) this is a rather misled way of expressing the distinction. Although a (29) word like the is not the name of something as man is, it is very far away from being meaningless; there is a sharp difference in (30) meaning between "man is vile" and "the man is vile", yet the is the single vehicle of this difference in meaning. (31) Moreover, grammatical words differ considerably among (32) themselves as the amount of meaning they have even in the lexical sense. Another name for the grammatical words has been (33) "little words". But size is by no meaning a good criterion for distinguishing the grammatical words of English, when we consider (34) that we have lexical words as go, man, say, car. Apart from this, however, there is a good deal of truth in what some people (35) say: we certainly do create a great number of obscurity when we omit them. This is illustrated not only in the poetry of Robert Browning but in the prose of telegrams and newspaper headlines. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A Human cognition In developing a model of cognition, we must recognize that perception of the external world does not always remain independent of motivation. While progress toward maturity is positively correlated with differentiation between motivation and cognition, tension will, even in the mature adult, militate towards a narrowing of the range of perception. Cognition can be seen as the first step in the sequence events leading from the external stimulus to the behavior of the individual. The child develops from belief that all things are an extension of its own body to the recognition that objects exist independent of his perception. He begins to demonstrate awareness of people and things which are removed from his sensory apparatus and initiates goal-directed behaviors. He may, however, refuse to recognize the existence of barriers to the attainment of his goal, despite the fact that his cognition of these objects has been previously demonstrated. In the primitive beings, goal-directed behavior can be very simple motivated. The presence of an attractive object will cause an infant to reach for it; its removal will result in the cessation of that action. Studies have shown no evidence of the infants frustration; rather, it appears that the infant ceases to desire the object when he cannot see it. Further indications are that the infants attention to the attractive object increase as a result of its not being in his grasp. In fact, if he holds a toy and another is presented, he is likely to drop the first in order to clutch the second. Often, once he has the one desired in his hands, he loses attention and turns to something else. In adult life, mere cognition can be similarly motivational, although the visible presence of the opportunity is not required as the instigator of response. The mature adult modifies his reaction by obtaining information, interpreting it, and examining consequences. He formulates a hypothesis and attempts to test it. He searches out implicit relationships, examines all factors, and differentiates among them. Just as the trained artist can separate the value of color, composition, and technique, while taking in and evaluating the whole work, so, too, the mature person brings his cognitive learning strengths to bear in appraising a situation. Understanding that cognition is separate from action, his reaction are only minimally guided from conditioning, and take into consideration anticipatable events. The impact of the socialization process, particularly that of parental and social group ideology, may reduce cognitively directed behavior. The tension thus produced, as for instance the stress of fear, anger, or extreme emotion, will often be the overriding influence. The evolutionary process of development from body schema through cognitive learning is similarly manifested in the process of language acquisition. Auditing develop first, reading and writing much later on. Not only is this evident in the development of the individual being from infancy on, but also in the development of language for humankind. Every normal infant has the physiological equipment necessary to produce sound, but the child must first master their use for sucking, biting, and chewing before he can control his equipment for use in producing the sounds of language. The babble and chatter of the infant are precursors to intelligible vocal communication. From the earlier times, it is clear that language and human thought have been intimately connected. Sending or receiving messages, from primitive warnings of danger to explaining creative or reflective thinking, this aspect of cognitive development is also firmly linked to the needs and aspirations of society. 36. How does the child develop his perception? A) Strong motivations give rise to perception. B) He holds the conviction that thing around him parts of extended body and later on gives it up. C) Parents and teachers play a key role in his development of cognition. D) He believes that objects around him independent of his perception. 37. What stimulates adults' motivational cognition? A) Predictable presence of opportunities. B) Visible signs of opportunities. C) Instigators. D) Approachable information. 38. What is the influence of socialization process? A) It may produce tension. B) It may produce extreme emotion. C) It may reduce one's cognitively guided behaviors. D) A, B, and C 39. What links cognitive development to the needs of society? A) Practical purpose. B) Natural human cognitive development. C) Language. D) Sending or receiving messages. TEXT B Pollution Is a Dirty Word Consume, consume, consume! Our society is consumer oriented-dangerous so. To keep the wheels of industry, we manufacture consumer goods in endless quantities, and, in the process, are rapidly exhausting our resources. But this is only half the problem. What do we do with manufactured products when they they are worn out? They must be disposed of, but how and where? Unsightly junkyards full of rusting automobiles already surround every city in the nation. Americans throw away 80 billion bottles and cans each year, enough to build more than ten stacks to the moon. There isnt room for much more waste, and yet the factories grind on. They cannot stop because everyone wants a job. Our standard of living, one of the highest in the world, requires the consumption of manufactured products in ever-increasing amounts. Man, about to be buried in his own waste, is caught in a vicious cycle. "Stop the world, I want to get off," is the way a popular song put mans dilemma. It wasnt always like this. Only 100 years ago man lived in harmony with nature. There werent so many people then and their wants were fewer. Whatever wastes were produced could be absorbed by nature and were soon covered over. Today this harmonious relationship is threatened by mans lack of foresight and planning, and by his carelessness and greed, for man is slowly poisoning his environment. Pollution is a "dirty" word. To pollute means to contaminate —— to spoil something by introducing impurities which make it unfit or unclear to use. Pollution comes in many forms. We see it, we smell it, taste it, drink it, and stumble through it. We literally live in and breathe pollution, and, not surprisingly, it is beginning to threaten our heath, our happiness, and our very civilization. Once we thought of pollution as meaning simply smog —— the choking, stinging, dirty air that hovers over cities. But air pollution, while it is still the most dangerous, is only one type of contamination among several which attack the most basic life function. Through the uncontrolled use of insecticides, man has polluted the land, killing the wildlife. By dumping sewage and chemical into rivers and lakes, we have contaminated our drinking water. We are polluting the oceans, too, killing the fish and thereby depriving ourselves of an invaluable food supply. Part of the problem is our exploding population. More and more people produce more wastes. But this problem is intensified by our "throw-way" technology. Each year American dispose of 7 million autos, 20 million tons of waste paper, 25 million pounds of toothpaste tubes and 48 million cans. We throw away gum wrappers, newspapers, and paper plates. It is no longer fashionable to reuse anything. Today almost everything is disposable. Instead of repairing a toaster or a radio, it is easier and cheaper to buy a new one and discard the old, even though 95 percent of its parts may still be functioning. Baby diapers, which used to be made of paper:" Wear it once and throw it away," will be the slogan of the fashion conscious. Where is this all to end? Are we turning the world into a gigantic dump, or is there hope that we can solve the pollution problem? Fortunately, solutions are in sight. A few of them are positively ingenious. Take the problem of discarded automobiles, for instance. Each year over 40,000 of them are abandoned in New York City alone. Eventually the discards end up in a junkyard. But card are too bulky to ship as scrap to a steel mill. They must first be flattened. This is done in a giant compressor which can reduce a Cadillac to the size of a television set in a matter of minutes. Any leftover scrap metal is mixed with concrete and made into exceptionally strong bricks that are used in buildings and bridges. Mans ingenuity has come to his rescue. What about water pollution? More and more citied are building sewage-treatment plants. Instead of being dumped into a nearby river or lake. sewage is sent through a system of underground pipes to a giant tank where the water is separated from the solid material called sludge, is converted into fertilizer. The sludge can also be made into bricks. Controlling air pollution is another crucial objective. Without food, man can live about five weeks; without water about five days. Without air, he can only live five minutes, so pure air is a must. Here the wrongdoer is the automobile. Where there is a concentration of automobiles, as in our big cities, air pollution is severe. It is important to see that our cars are equipped with pollution-control devices. Such devices effectively reduce the harmful gases emitted from the engine. Power plants, factories, and apartment buildings can also avoid air pollution. When possible they should use clean fuels like gas and oil. And the smokestacks of these buildings should be equipped with filters and other smoke-reduction devices. Can we eliminate pollution altogether? Probably not. Modern man pollutes with everything he does, so total elimination would require drastic measures. Every power plant would have to shut down. Industries would have to close. We would have to leave all our automobiles in the garage. Every bus and truck and airplane would have to stop running. There would be no way to bring food to the cities. There would be no heat and light. Under these conditions, our population would die in a short time. Since such a drastic solution is impossible, we must employ determined public action. We can reduce pollution, even if we cant eliminate it altogether. But everyone must do his part. Check your car to see if the pollution-control device is working. Reduce your use of electricity. Is air conditioning really necessary? Dont dump garbage or other waste on the land or in the water. Demand that government take firm action against polluters. We can have a clean world, we can do nothing. The choice is up to you. 40. Which of the following statement is Not a cause of pollution mentioned in the passage? A) pollution explosion. B) too much consumption. C) It is out-dated to rescue things. D) high unemployment rate. 41. which of the following statements is Not a suggested solution to air pollution? A) building sewage-treatment plants. B) strict restriction on the discharge of polluted water to rivers or lakes nearby. C) using gigantic tanks to separate solid materials from water. D) setting up underground sewage system to purify water. 42. What does this passage mainly address? A) the severity of pollution nowadays. B) pollution and its solution. C) universal concern over environment. D) consumption and pollution. TEST C Not often in the story of mankind does a man arrive on earth who is both steel and velvet, who is as hard as rock and soft as drifting fog, who knows in his heart and mind the paradox of terrible storm and peace unspeakable and perfect. Here and there across centuries come reports of men alleged to have these contrasts and the incomparable Abraham Lincoln, born 150 years ago this day, is an approach if not a perfect realization of this character. In the time of the April lilacs in the year 1865, Lincolns death, the casket with his body was carried northwest a thousand miles and the American people wept as never before. During the four years he was President, he at times, especially in the first three months, took to himself the powers of a dictator. He commanded the most powerful armies then assembled in modern warfare. He enforced and cruised conscription of soldiers for the first time in American history. And under imperative necessity, he abolished the writ of habeas corpus. He directed politically and spiritually the wild, massive turbulent forces let loose in Civil War, a war truly as time has shown, of brothers. He argued and pleaded for compensated emancipation of the slaves. The slaves were property. They were on the tax books along with horses and cattle, the valuation of each slave written next to his name on the tax assessors books. And failing to get action of compensated emancipation; he took the only other course. As a Chief Executive having war powers he issued the paper by which he declared the slaves to be free under military. People, people in many other countries take Lincoln now for their own. He belongs to them. He stands for decency, honest dealing, plain talk and funny stories. Look where he came from, dont you know he was a struggler and wasnt he a kind of tough struggler? All his life right up to the finish. Something like that you can hear in a nearby neighborhood and across the seas. Millions there are who take Lincoln as a personal treasure. He had something they would like to see spread everywhere all over the world. Democracy we cant find the words to say exactly what it is, but he had it. In his blood and bones he carried it. In the breath of his speeches and writings it is there. Popular government, republican institutions government where the people had the say so, one way or another telling there elected leaders what they want. He had the idea, he embodied it. Its there in the lights and shadows of his personality. A mystery that can be lived but never fully spoken in words. Today, when we say perhaps that well assured and most enduring memory onto Lincoln is invisibly there today tomorrow and for a long long time yet to com. It is there in the hearts of the lovers of liberty. Men and women this country has always had them in crises. Men and women who understand that wherever there is freedom, there have been those who have fought, toiled and sacrificed for it. I thank you. 43. What does the author suggest as far as Abraham Lincoln's characteristics are concerned? A) indefinable peace B) admirable perfect C) paradox of extremes D) stern but approachable 44. Why do millions of people take Lincoln as a personal treasure? A) He embodies decency, honest dealing, plain talk and a lot of other admirable qualities. B) He is the kind of tough strugglers whom common people respect and love. C) He stands for democracy. D) all of the above. 45. Which of the following statement can Not be deduced from this passage? A) He declared to free the slaves when he was a Chief Executive. B) He persistently carried out ideas in his mind. C) He is beloved as the embodiment of freedom and democracy. D) Though admired by people, he took high-handed measures as a dictator. TEXT D Lets Help Eliminate Workplace Anger "How many of you have been angry at least once today？" asked the conductor of an anger-management seminar. According to an article The New York Times, most of those in the room raised their hands." The fact is," the seminar leader continued," people get angry an average of 10 to 14 times a day. But anger is especially endemic to work. If you have a jib, youre guaranteed to get angry." Up would have gone my hand, had I been in the room and heard that last mark. And I would have respectfully disagreed. Although some statistics indicate that the number of on-the-job flare-ups has increased in recent years, to hold onto the nation that workplace anger is therefore guaranteed is counterproductive. It leaves one with the impression that any efforts to remain even-tempered at work are, at best, only a bandit. Anger-management experts do offer a few common-sense guidelines to minimize work related anger: dont let it fester; dont look for snubs in what are purely innocent incidents; dont get caught up in other peoples gripes; if you start to lose control, take a break. I would add, pray. Instead of sitting there fuming over some encounter, why not use the time to listen for Gods thoughts, his messages to you? To be sure, they will snuff out the heat of anger and bring calmness, clarity, and healing. "For I know the thoughts that I think toward you, saith the Lord, thoughts of peace, and not of evil, to give you an expected end" Better still, one can act preemptively to prevent a volatile atmosphere on the job. A good start is to consider that the people we work with —— whether its the person at the desk across from ours or the president of the company —— are not what we see on the surface. If we take it for granted that our coworkers are so many individuals composed merely of an assortment of physical and emotional characteristics, then our overall expectations on the job, as well as our concern for the well-being of those we work with, are limited. But our true nature isnt the sum of material and sometimes fiery emotional elements. Each one of us is Gods child. Everyones true selfhood comes from this one source —— God, divine Spirit —— and is therefore purely good and spiritual. "Man (including woman) is the offspring, not of the lowest, but of the highest qualities of Mind," wrote Mary Baker Eddy, author of "Science and Health with Key to the Scriptures". This divine Mind, or God, is expressing in each of us these "highest qualities" as our real nature, respectfully and loving, and revealing our actual relation to one another as sons and daughters of God. What we should be counting on at work, then, or anywhere else where people come into contact with one another, is an atmosphere in which everyone feels upheld by Gods thoughts of peace. In this atmosphere, solid relationships develop and solution appear even in situations where it was believed that none were possible. So, instead of bracing for a showdown with a fellow worker, you can arrive at work filled with the conviction that you and your colleagues, clients, and customers are all inherently good-natured —— God-natured —— the offspring of a totally loving creator. Youre certain to have higher expectations, more compassion, more patience. A real peacemaker attitude. This is doing more than managing work-related anger. This is helping to eliminating it. 46. What does the sentence "But anger id especially endemic to work" in the fist paragraph mean? A) anger for sure would cause harm to one's work. B) anger is as inevitable in workplace as indispositions to a person. C) anger can threaten one's position in a workplace. D) anger is like an indisposition, it is unavoidable but insignificant. 47. What's the meaning of the first sentence in the second paragraph "Up would have gone my hand"? A) would have raised my hand. B) would have vetoed the proposal by raising my hand. C) would have strongly opposed to the view. D) would have disagreed aired my own view. 48. What guidelines do the anger-management experts offer to subside workplace anger? A) calm down and try to solve the problem. B) take a breath begin to lose control. C) divert your attention to pleasant things. D) all of the above. 49. What does the author of "Science and Heath" try to convey readers in the book? A) man is created by God with divine qualities. B) human beings' real nature is as respectful as God. C) we are all offspring of God, our relationship with others are that of brotherhood or sisterhood, so there's no reason for conflicts. D) all of the above points. 50. what's the main idea of this passage? A) we should spare no efforts to eliminate workplace anger. B) pray can help minimize work-related anger. C) the Christian atmosphere in which everyone feels as equal sons and daughters of God should be advocated to reduce work-place anger. D) among various solution to workplace anger, resorting to peace by virtue of Christian belief is most efficient. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. The purpose of this passage is to _____ A. enunciate the impact of both climate change and policies on different interest groups. B. explore the reason for divergent attitudes towards the environmental issue. C. depict the picture of the present international environmental and economic situation. D. explain the interaction between environment and economy. Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 31. The Plants Players Both climate change and policies to minimize its effects have enormous environmental implications. The costs of climate change will vary widely from country to country. Developed countries are responsible for over two thirds of past emissions and some 75 percent of current emissions, but they are best positioned to protect themselves from damage. Developing countries tend to have low per capita emissions, are in great need of economic development and more vulnerable to climate-change impacts. These difference have helped to shape the position that Government take in international talks. The key players are: The European Union: In general, EU supported binding targets and timetable for emissions reduction. Other countries did not agree. The European Union also supported allowing countries to adhere to joint targets. This now affects the internal discussion between the EUS poorer members, who argue for higher emissions quotas within any future overall EU target, and the richer members, who would have to reduce their emissions further to compensate for this. The Jusscanz countries —— the non —— EU developed-countries —— including Japan, the United States, Switzerland, Canada, Australia, New Zealand and Norway. The non-European members of this group tend to share a concern for a more "flexible" approach to limiting greenhouse gas emissions. Despite what has been called the "creative ambiguity" of the final text, it is almost universally interpreted as committing developed countries to make a sincere effort to return their greenhouse gas emissions to 1990 level by 2000. When the Clinton Administration came into office in 1993, it softened the United States line and explicitly announced the United States intension to pursue stabilization. Countries with economies in transition. The industrialized countries of Central and East Europe and the former Soviet Union are significant emitters of greenhouse gases. However, due to the economic slump following 1990 levels through 2000. Afterwards, however, their economies and emissions levels are expected to revive. The group of 77 and China. Developing countries work through the Group of to develop common positions on emission-reduction commitments and financial and technological transfers. However, the G77 does not always present a united front, owing to the widely differing of its members. For example, China and other enormous coal resources that vital to their economic development. African countries tend to focus on vulnerability and impacts. Many of the Asian economic "tigers" have concerns about the possibility of being the next in line for emissions reduction targets. Countries with large forestry sectors and sensitive to the implications of developing forests as carbon "sinks". The association of small island states. They are particularly vulnerable to the risk of sea-level rise and therefore strongly support rapid action to reduce emissions. The organization of petroleum exporting countries. OPEC members tend to be concerned about the likely impact on their economies if other countries reduce their use of oil. Saudi Arabia, Kuwait and others have emphasized the existence of scientific, uncertainty and argued that the process should move forward cautiously. Business. The first business groups to attend talks as observers represented energy-intensive firms concerned about the negative economic implications. More recently, other business sectors have started to follow the process more closely, including the insurance sector, which sees itself as vulnerable to increased storms and other possible climate change impacts, and clean energy firms that see market opportunities. Environmentalists, Green groups have been active in the climate change arena since the very beginning. Many are active in lobbying delegates and the media and produce newsletters during international meetings. The majority are from developed countries, although constant efforts are made to promote the participation of more nongovernmental organizations from developing countries. Local authorities. Many cities around the world have launched climate change plans that are even more ambitious than their than those of their national Governments. Urban governments are critically important because of their role in managing energy utilities, public transport and other emissions-producing activities of the public sector. Mayors and other urban leaders joined together in an association to present their views at related meeting. 51. The purpose of this passage is to _____ A) enunciate the impact of both climate change and policies on different interest groups. B) explore the reason for divergent attitudes towards the environmental issue. C) depict the picture of the present international environmental and economic situation. D) explain the interaction between environment and economy. TEXT F First read the questions. 52. Quite probably the following passage is from ____ A. an article in a scholarly magazine. B. a doctoral dissertation. C. a literature review on Austen. D. an autobiography. 53. What does Austens self-effacing anonymity suggest according to the authors remark? A. It suggests Austens introvert character. B. It shows her polite manners. C. It hints at her rejection of the outside world. D. It hints at her pretension. Now go through Text F quickly to answer question 32 and 33. Jane Austen Not a few of Jane Austens personal acquaintances might have echoed Sir Samual Egerton Brydges, who noticed that "she was fair and handsome, slight and elegant, but with cheeks a little too full," while "never suspecting she was an authoress." For this novelist whose personal obscurity was more than that of any other famous writer was always quickly to insist either on complete anonymity or on the propriety of her limited craft, her delight in delineating just "3 or 4 families in a country village". With her self-deprecatory remarks about her inability to join "strong manly, spirited sketches, full of Variety and Glow" with her "little bit (two inches wide) of Ivory", Jane Austen perpetuated the belief among her friends that her art was just an accomplishment "by a lady", if anything "rather too light and bright and sparkling". In this respect she resembled one of her favorite contemporaries, Mary Brunton, who would rather have "glide through the world unknown " than been "suspected of literary airs —— to be shunned, as literary women are, by the more pretending of their own sex, and abhorred, as literary women are, by the more pretending of the other! —— my dear. I would sooner exhibit as a ropedancer." Yet, decorous though they might first seem, Austens self-effacing anonymity and her modest description of her miniaturist art also imply a criticism, even rejection, of the world at large. For, as Gaston Bachelard explains, the miniature "allows us to be world conscious at slight risk". While the creators of satirically conceived diminutive landscapes seem to see everything as small because they are themselves so grand, Austens analogy for her art metaphorically, as her critics would too, in relation to female arts severely devalued until quite recently (for painting on ivory was traditionally a "ladylike" occupation), Austen attempted through self-imposed novelistic limitations to define a secure place, even as she seemed to admit the impossibility of actual inhabiting such a small apace with any degree of comfort. And always, for Austen, it is women because they are too vulnerable in the world at large —— who must acquiesce in their own confinement, no matter how stifling it may be. 52. Quite probably the following passage is from ____ A) an article in a scholarly magazine. B) a doctoral dissertation. C) a literature review on Austen. D) an autobiography. 53. What does Austen's self-effacing anonymity suggest according to the author's remark? A) It suggests Austen's introvert character. B) It shows her polite manners. C) It hints at her rejection of the outside world. D) It hints at her pretension. TEXT G First read the question. 54. The purpose of this article is to _____ A. make an advertisement for the new Underwater World Aquarium in Beijing. B. introduce the new aquarium in Beijing. C. introduce aquariums around the world. D. briefly describe the origin and the development of aquariums. Now go though Text G to answer question 34. A Talk Through A World Underwater In Beijing The new Underwater World Aquarium in Being uses the latest technology to enable visitors to walk though the tanks under the water, and view the fish without getting wet. The US 11 million (RMB 91 million) project enables visitors to see thousands of tropical fish swimming around and over them in their natural habitat, unfazed by the hundreds of human eyes watching them. The shell to house the saltwater aquarium has been constructed under an artificial lake in the suburbs of Beijing by the New Zealand company Richina Pacific which has also bought the rights to operate the aquarium. The opening was planned for late 1997. What New Zealand marine engineer/designer Ian Mellsop calls "the age of aquariums" has come to Beijing after being tested in major aquariums around the world. The technology for the heavy wrap-around acrylic viewing tunnel was developed for Kelly Tarltons Underwater World in Auckland, New Zealand. It has since been used in aquarium in Australia, Singapore, Hong Kong, Scotland and now in China. Mellsop says the acrylic tunnel technology opened the way for visitors to walk through an undersea world, rather than simply watching from behind flat panels. It was born, not from some "eureka-like" design discovery, but from Mellsops ever practical drive to reduce costs. The tunnel idea was not new. Straight tunnels had been around since the early 1980s. They were employed in the United States the year before Kelly Tarltons Underwater World opened, with horizontal panels forming the tunnel and a moving walkway carrying visitors down the middle of this tunnel. Kelly Tarltons Underwater World was conceived as an aquarium using straight tunnels, with concrete junction boxes to link them. But Mellsop had found a way to "bend" two-meter diameter concrete pipes and gluing them. Mellsop did some pricing and experimenting and discovered it would be feasible and cheaper to cut and join the acrylic panels themselves, and to use the acrylic pipe itself to turn corners, rather than simply leading the pipe into concrete junction boxes which would act as corners. In using this new method, Mellsop found the idea that would take the aquarium world by storm. "We realized we could make the tunnel meander wherever we wanted it to on the ocean floor," he says. The challenge was to get the tunnel the right size: too and viewers would lose the effect of being underwater; too tight and it would distort the undersea world and create a claustrophobic effect. "We still think that what we did back then is optimal," says Mellsop, referring to the tanks and tunnels under Aucklands Tamaki Drive. Reducing the cost of aquariums created a big for these educational and entertainment centres and counties began to demand aquariums for themselves. Aquariums had once been the preserve of public authorities because of throe huge cost, but they now became viable as paying attractions run by private operators. Instead of the 100 million or so that it was costing to build the big Japanese and American aquariums, because an acrylic tunnel is stronger than a flat panel, requiring less plastic, less concrete, less engineering, as well as providing a much closer experience of undersea life. Although the tunnel have not changed much, there have been advances in other areas, says Mellsop, notably in the life support systems for the marine life. He cites the companys Ellesmere Port Underwater World in Beijing as a good example of cutting-edge aquarium technology. It will be the largest aquarium in the UK "and I hope the best in the world". His most novel assignment was the building of a small aquarium for the Sultan of Brunei. It was situated in a night club at the Royal Brunei Polo Club guest house number four. There seems no end to the possibilities. Mellsop likens aquariums to zoos, with the potential for at least one in every major city in the world. The zoo analogy fits the visitor profile for underwater world: all ages, all types of people. "To heck with virtual reality," says Mellsop," Weve got actual reality, real fish and people just love it." 54. The purpose of this article is to _____ A) make an advertisement for the new Underwater World Aquarium in Beijing. B) introduce the new aquarium in Beijing. C) introduce aquariums around the world. D) briefly describe the origin and the development of aquariums. TEXT H First read the questions. 55. What is the bees great contribution to mankind? A. they can provide mankind honey which is valuable nutrition. B. pollination benefits mankind most. C. beekeeping is a very profitable business which enables a great number of people earn a living. D. the bee is a significant node in the chain of ecological system. 56. Why does the author mention the womens liberation movement? A. to make a comparison between the womens liberation movement and bees female monarchy society. B. to draw an analogy. C. to defend womens liberation movement with the example of bees female dominating culture. D. to illustrate an unparallel example for womens liberation movement. Now go through Text H quickly to answer question 35 and 36. A lush spring and summer are certain to bring acute frustrations and violent twinges of conscience farmers and gardeners, for if they dont use harmful insecticides, they may have fewer flowers, fruits, vegetables, or fodder —— temporarily; if they do use such insecticides, they may have no honeybees —— permanently. On balance, however, the latter is by far the greater evil, for pollination is the bees greatest gift to mankind, greater than the honey in the honeycomb; if the bees are eradicated, man will surly face disasters worse than army worms, Japanese beetles, or crab grass. Beekeeping was practically unknown in the Western Hemisphere until after the first European settlers arrived. The earliest reference to beekeeping here come from Virginia, where beekeeping was practical apiary in 1622; however, by 1640 Newbury, Massachusetts, and a fine municipal apiary, and in 1641 bee colonies in New England were selling for five pounds a piece, the equivalent of fifteen days labor by a skilled craftsman. Today, the New England honey crop, for example, total more than a million pounds of honey from approximately 38,000 colonies; this, however, represent only a relatively small part of Americans nearly five million colonies, most of which are now in the South and the West. Will there continue to be that many colonies? Already about a half million colonies have been destroyed by poisonous insecticides, and all over the country entomologists and ecologists are deeply worried about the loss of honeybees and the threat of dwindling food supplies as there pollinations are killed off. Imagine pollinating a ten-acre field with clumsy fingers. It takes a busy bee about seven seconds per sip, and a minimum of a 15,000 bees per acre can handle the job with dispatch daily, hence, producers of vast acreage of fruits, vegetables, and fodders plants rent hives of bees in the springtime to do the work which neither man nor machine can duplicate. Although bees have been in existence for millions of years and wild honey was sought by the most primitive man, it was only five or six thousand years ago that bees began to be cultivated and "managed " in apiaries. They became so precious to the Egyptian economy, in fact, that the pharaohs forbade the removal of any of them. Finally, after several unsuccessful bee nappings, St. Sossima managed to smuggle out ten honeybees and a queen in a hollow reed, and legend holds that all the honeybees now registered and "managed" are descendants of these Egyptian bees. Beekeeping is not without its hazards, however; in fact, Jay Mc Donough of Connecticut found that it can be rather disconcerting for the beginner. Several years ago, with his wife and two young daughters, Jay bought a fine old house, cleared land for an organic vegetable garden, and ordered a supply of bees for pollination purposes. He originally assumed he wanted the bees only for pollination, but the family soon discovered the advantages of a ready supply of honey and beeswax. At the outset, however, like any inexperienced beekeeper, Jay learned the hard way. His first three pounds of bees, shipped from Georgia with the queen-to-be carefully boxed separately and surrounded with honey-candy which would later be eaten off by her subjects when released her for her duties, arrived early one morning just as Jay, a first officer and copilot for Trans World Airlines, was due to leave for a six-day flight. At that juncture, he did not realize that bees caged for a relatively long journey have only vengeance on their minds. Nighttime, when bees are ready for bed, is the only time to release them, so that their queen with relative calm and enthusiasm, they will establish proper housekeeping arrangement. Time was pressing, however; so Jay carefully shook the caged bees into their new hive, deposited the unsuspecting queen in the midst of everything, and departed. Angry and disgruntled, the bees promptly tore into the queens retreat, stung her to death in reprisal for her mismanagement, and flew around confusedly. Fortunately, a local beekeeper who inspects registered bees came by that first day, learned of the palace revolt, and quickly introduced one of his own queens, successfully establish her on the throne before further damage occurred. In a few days she was laying from 2000 to 3000 eggs per day, and now there are several hives operating on the Mc Donough place. Beekeepers in general are outspoken critics of the wanton use of insecticides, and Olympio Cartinelli, also of Connecticut, is no exception, for not long ago Mr. Cartinellis fifteen colonies of honeybees were destroyed in a single day by a neighbors use of sprays to control the army worms in his cornfield. The whole family grieved over the loss of their hard-working friends, and so, in fact, did the neighbor because the bees had been pollinating other producing fields of his and the yield was sharply reduced. The bees invaluable aid to man is , of course, merely a side effect from the bees point of view, the bees main purpose in life being the production of honey food for herself and royal jelly for her queen; nursing feeding, and protecting the babies; and tolerating a few necessary males, the drones. Incidentally, the womens liberation movement would do well to study bee culture for pointers; the little honey-makers have the girl backed right the map when it comes to organization, sharply defined responsibilities, and control of males in a female monarchy. Whats more, the bees obviously know something we dont: we are aware that royal jelly has unique life-giving qualities, but cannot exactly define or reproduce it in a test tube. The praise and respect accorded bees by those who know and appreciate them is perhaps best summarized by Francis H. Mattutat, president of a firm which deals in bulk honey: "Bees are the only creatures that have come on the earth to bring creativity, without destructive side effect. They proliferate without upsetting other life cycles. In taking pollen and nectar to create honey, they render a greater service to plants, animals, and humanity. They set an example of instant justice, too. When in anger, confusion, of self-defense a bee stings its adversary, it instantly destroys itself. The use of its stinger id a one-time protest. Giving more than it takes, the bee is probably the most useful creature on earth." 55. What is the bee's great contribution to mankind? A) they can provide mankind honey which is valuable nutrition. B) pollination benefits mankind most. C) beekeeping is a very profitable business which enables a great number of people earn a living. D) the bee is a significant node in the chain of ecological system. 56. Why does the author mention the women's liberation movement? A) to make a comparison between the women's liberation movement and bees' female monarchy society. B) to draw an analogy. C) to defend women's liberation movement with the example of bees' female dominating culture. D) to illustrate an unparallel example for women's liberation movement. TEXT I First read the question. 57. Who are addressed in this article? A. common people who wish to grasp the knack for saving money. B. the young bread-earners who always live beyond their means. C. prudent new arrivals from Asia. D. families that lack financial strategy. Now go though Text I quickly to answer question 37. Willie Huang, a certified financial planner with American Express Financial Advisors, Inc. in Queen, New York, himself an immigrant from Taiwan, regularly advises recent arrivals from Asia. He says they often make the same mistakes. After evaluating the Tsang assets, Huang praised their knack for saving money. "Their ability to live within their means is excellent," he says, comparing them favorable with some of his native-born U.S. clients who are deep in credit-card debt. But Huang found several dangerous flaws in the familys financial strategy. His advice: Invest more aggressively. Huang asserts the couple needs to invest in the stock market, the only place where they can find the growth they need to be able to retire comfortably. He wants the Tsangs to put some of their money into growth-oriented mutual funds, but like many Asian immigrants, Eric has watched friends and family lose money on the Hog Kong stock market. He prefers to bet his familys future on real estate and restaurants over which he has more control. Huang reluctantly recommends certificates of deposit, bank tome deposits that offer a much smaller return —— around 5% vs. average long-term returns of double that for growth tock funds. His plan: Keep a third of the 18,000 of saving in a checking account as a cash reserve. Put the other 12,000 in bank CDs. Get good heath coverage. Eric has looked into competitive health care plans and found that for a family of four the monthly cost would be between 600 and 800 —— too much, he decided. Most new Asian immigrants dont carry heath insurance, notes Sher Sparano, president of benefits Advisory Service, Inc. in Queen, New York. Sparano suggests that Eric look into the New York State Heath Insurance Partnership Plan for small business owners. This state plan subsidizes up to 45% of the cost of health care premiums of an employees or owner (and their families) of a participating small business. For a family of six (which Eric can claim because his parents are dependents), an applicants like Eric with no more than 47,708 in income would have to pay only 18751 a month. Purchase disability insurance. In the case of a catastrophic accident or illness, Eric would not qualify for federal social security disability payments since he has worked less than 10 years in the U.S. If permanently disabled, he would prove an unbearable drain on his family, which could not survive on Rebeccas 8,400 salary. Huang advises the family to immediately look for a disability insurance policy for Eric is guaranteed renewable and non-cancelable. Price: 100 a month for coverage that would would pay 1,500 a month in case Eric is disabled. Replace your life insurance policy. Many Asian immigrants buy life insurance, but usually the wrong kind. "Erics policy needs to be restructured to better cover the family for about the same amount theyre now spending per month," advises Huang. Erics coverage should be raised to 350,000 because he is the primary breadwinner. The policy for the children should be scraped because they are a poor way to save. Eric is still against stocks and is not convinced that CDs are a good idea either. "I have a business to run," he says." What if I need emergency money for the restaurant?" He is, however, very interested in disability insurance and the heath insurance plan, particularly since the latter will cover his parents. As for the life insurance advice, he says he wants to study it a bit more before making a decision. 57. Who are addressed in this article? A) common people who wish to grasp the knack for saving money. B) the young bread-earners who always live beyond their means. C) prudent new arrivals from Asia. D) families that lack financial strategy. TEXT J First read the questions. 58. Whats the text mainly about? A. Chinas cinema in modern times. B. the development of Chinese film. C. the origin and development of Chinas cinema. D. major film made in China. 59. When was the film the North Is Ours produced? A. after the victory of the Anti-Japanese War. B. when the Yanan Film Group was founded. C. immediately before the founding of the Peoples Republic of China. D. during the Anti-Japanese War. Now go though Text J to answer question 38 and 39. The cinema was introduced into China at the end of the 19th century. On August 11,1896, a Western film was shown in Shanghai. It was the first film shown in China. In 1950, a photo studio in Beijing made the first Chinese film which was only a collection of scenes from a Beijing opera based on the classical novel The romance of the Three Kingdoms. In the early thirties, under the leadership of the Chinese Communist Party, film personnel in the Kuomintang ruled areas produced many progressive and revolutionary films such as Spring Silkworms, Plunder of Peach and Plum, Three Modern Women, The Great Road, Song of the Fishermen, and Crossroad. These films reflect the realities of society and the wishes of the people. During the Anti-Japanese War, many progressive films were made in the Kuomintang controlled areas. Among them were Defend Our Land, The March of Victory, The North Is Ours, Sons and Daughters of China, and The snowy Taihang Mountains. The films reflect the peoples demand for resistance against Japan. After the victory of the Anti-Japanese War, the Kuomintang reactionaries established their monopoly of the film industry. In spite of the oppression and persecution by the Kuomintang, progressive film-makers, led by the underground Party organizations, produced a group of excellence film. Remote Love, Along the Songhua River, Eight Thousand Li of Cloud and Moon, and The Spring of River Flows East are all about the peoples life or struggles during the War of Resistance against Japan. Myriads of Lights and Crows and Sparrows depict the peoples sufferings under the the rule of the Kuomintang. In the liberated areas, the founding of the Yanan Film Group marks the starting point of the peoples film industry. This group, established under the direct leadership of the Communist Party in 1938, shot valuable documentaries which include Yanan and the Eighth Route Army, Dr. Norman Bethune, and Nanniwan. In 1946, the Yanan Film Studio was found. The newsreel Defend Yanan and the Shanxi-Gansu-Nigxia Border Areas, produced by the studio, recorded part of the liberation War. In October, 1946, the Northeast Film Studio was established in the Northeast Liberation War. Its main production were seventeen newsreels entitled The Democratic Northeast. Many films made before the founding of the Peoples Republic of China have strong points and qualities which contemporary film-makers should study and develop. Many old progressive films adopted a realistic style; therefore they reflect Chinese society and the lives the people and shoe sympathy for the oppressed and exploited. Early film-makers were clear about the purpose of their work: to make the plot development, customs and habits, language and acting their films conform to the taste of the audience. It is obvious that the pioneers of Chinas progressive films made great contributions to the development of Chinas film industry. 58. What's the text mainly about? A) China's cinema in modern times. B) the development of Chinese film. C) the origin and development of China's cinema. D) major film made in China. 59. When was the film the North Is Ours produced? A) after the victory of the Anti-Japanese War. B) when the Yan'an Film Group was founded. C) immediately before the founding of the People's Republic of China. D) during the Anti-Japanese War. TEXT K First read the questions. 60. Which of the following statements is true according to the text? A. James Michener enjoyed donating, because he had no offspring. B. James Michener set a good example for other philanthropists, for he was imaginative and had his unique style C. Shortly before his death, he revealed a hidden regret that he would rather have all the money he had donated back. D. His largest donation went to the Texas center for writers, because he was a successful writer himself while many others struggled on their way. Now go though Text K quickly to answer question 45. A Joyful philanthropist In his long writing life, James Michener aimed to donate at least 90 percent of what he earned from his 43 novels. He seems to have more than made his goal; at his death, in October, 1997, his assets were estimated at least less than US 10 million. He had given away US 117 million. Michener makes a good example for other philanthropists, not just in how much he gave, but in his style of giving. The writer worked hard at doing good, following up his donation to see how the money was used. He gave to things for which he had a passion, and he had a lot of fun in doing so. Michener was 90 when he died. He was on Fortune magazines list of Americas top 25 philanthropists —— the only writer in a crowd of tycoons. Asked, shortly before his death, whether he ever wished he had his millions back, he said sure, so that he could have the pleasure of giving then away again. Too often, says Nelson Aldrich, editor of The American Benefactor, a magazine about philanthropists, the rich give without much imagination. "They give to the college they went to, and the hospital where theyll die, "Aldrich says." And most of the rich are stingy; few give even as much as 10 percent, the traditional tithe. They hold on the myth of not dipping into capital." Michener did, in fact, give to his college —— US7.2 million to Swarthmore, in Pennsylvania. He called it a repayment for the US 2,000 basketball scholarship they gave him in 1925. As he wrote to the college president, in 1969,"Coming as I did from a family with no income at all, and with no prospects whatever, college was the narrow door that led from darkness into light." His will leaves almost everything to Swarthmore, including future royalties from his books. (He had no family to leave his money to; although he was married three times, he had no children. His third wife, Mari Sabusawa Michener, died in 1994.) Michener always described himself as a foundling, born in New York City and raised by Mable Michener, a Quaker widow, in Doylestown, Pennsylvania. She lived, he said, by taking in other peoples children and other peoples laundry. For his last 15 years, Michener lived modestly in Austin, Texas, where he had moved to write the 1,000-page saga Texas. Each of his big bestsellers, including Texas, Hawaii and Covenant, made about US 5 million. And there were 20 of them. Whats more, he still collected royalties from the musical and movie South Pacific, which was inspired by his first book, Tales of the South Pacific, written when he was 40. Frail from kidney disease in his last years, Michener was pretty much confined to a declining chair in a small study, simply decorated. There were few personal possessions besides some photos of himself and his last wife, and an unframed, faded poster of Tahiti. A source of pleasure and company in those years was the Texas Center for writers. His largest gist, totaling US 64.2 million, went to the University of Texas, with US 18 million going to found and support the writers center. He got a lot back, he said —— "You meet bright people, you can consult with anybody there, and there are 23 libraries on campus." Every year Michener would meet with the 10 incoming students, one by one, and he went out with them every fall to the Salt Lick barbecue restaurant. He often ate at the college cafeteria, center director James Magnuson recall. He enjoy their barbecue chicken special. His gift to the Texas Center included hundreds of modern American paintings worth a total of US31 million. His US 25 million collection of Japanese prints had already been donated to Honolulus city art gallery. (He lived there for seven years while writing Hawaii, the 1959 book that set the pattern for his later, exhaustively researched bestseller.) His next largest gift was 11.5 million to two museums and the library in his hometown of Doylestown. Micheners smaller gift also reveal a lot about where his affections lay. And they reveal that it was a very good thing to have James Michener working in your vicinity. While researching Alaska, for example, he lived in a log cabin near the tiny Sheldon Jackson College in Stika (student population: 233) He used the campus library and set and talked to students in the cafeteria. After he left he gave the college US 750,000 for scholarship. After living in Houston to write Space, he endowed a college scholarship fund for children of NASA employees pursuing careers in science or engineering. Since 1982, 73 scholarships have been given out. After wring Centennial, on the setting of the West, Michener donates US50,000 to help pay for the Nebraska National Trails Museum. The University of Miami, where Michener did his research for Caribbean, got US1 million for a writing program for graduate students, especially those from the islands. Similarly, after Michener finishing Poland, Michener established a US400,000 fund to support young Polish writers. Michener considered himself a professional writer, not an author;" author" stuck him as a pretentious term. Like his writing, his philanthropy was intended to educate; thus his support of colleges, libraries and museums. Michener was generous to writers whose books were very difficult from his. For example, he endowed a US30,000-a-year fellowship at the University of Houston named for Donald Barthelme, a nobly surreal and sophisticated fiction writer. Michener endowed eight fellowships a year for graduates of the University of Iowa Writers Workshop, where the books produced tend to be slimmer, subtler and moodier than the typical Michener. The money was to support the young poets and novelists for a year while they struggled to get published. Frank Conroy, workshop director, remembers, "It wasnt just a case of, heres a some money, go and do good." He was a man who knew it was not easy to do good. You have to think, and think hard, to do good." Finally, Michener gave generously to the one kind of writer he would never be-an impoverished one. The Authors League Fund, the charitable arm of the Authors Guild and the Dramatists Guild, received US1.2 million over 10 years from Michener to help authors who were old and sick, without income or health insurance. Two months before he died, Michener wrote a note to Herbert Mitgang, director of the Fund. As Mitgang unfolded the letter, he discovered a cheque for US 125,000 for the fund. Writing that cheque and tucking it into the envelope must have been a satisfying gesture, and fun. 60. Which of the following statements is true according to the text? A) James Michener enjoyed donating, because he had no offspring. B) James Michener set a good example for other philanthropists, for he was imaginative and had his unique style C) Shortly before his death, he revealed a hidden regret that he would rather have all the money he had donated back. D) His largest donation went to the Texas center for writers, because he was a successful writer himself while many others struggled on their way. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following passage into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET. 我接触过不少老人，其中有的是我的好朋友，只要一见面，就会天南地北，无所不谈。从这些老人的谈话中，我感到他们常常为“闲得无聊”而发愁。这些老人的空闲时间特别多， 同外边接触的机会又比较少，常常会被忙碌的晚辈忘记。不少年轻人，在家中可以同朋友和 同事们兴致勃勃的谈个不休，却把自己的长辈丢在一边；有时老人偶儿插上几句，就会受到 很不礼貌的责备。我们不理解老人喜欢家里热闹的心情，更不理解这种冷漠的态度会使老人 多么伤心。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following text into Chinese. Write your translation on the ANSWER SHEET. American is presently going through the beginning of a national debate over various components of its international role, for example the proposition that the United States is the only remaining superpower. That may be true in the military sense. On the other hand, the issues susceptible to solution by military action are in decline. In many other areas, the world is becoming much more evenly balanced. Indeed, we are now living in a world composed of six or seven major global players with comparable capacities to shape events outside the field of nuclear arms. In such an international order, there are only two roads to stability: one is hegemony based on one countrys dominance; the other is equilibrium, which is another way of describing the notorious balance of power. Unfortunately, too many Americans tend to reject both approaches. The American public seems determined to reject the role of global policeman which hegemony implies, and which runs counter to the moral convictions of the American people. But balance of power or equilibrium has also been historically rejected as a source of endless tensions. At crucial periods such as in deciding to enter the two world wars to preserve the global balance of power, Americans have been prepared to overcome their prejudice. In other words, American is in the process of learning —— and it is not quite there yet —— that the emerging world order will have to be based on some concept of equilibrium. PART V WRITING Directions: For this part you are allowed 60 minutes to write an essay on this topic. Give your view on this by writing an essay of about 300 words. What are the qualifications for a good youth of today? In the first part of your writing you should present your thesis statement and in the second part you should support the thesis statement with appropriate reason. Marks will be awarded for content, organization as well as for syntactic variety and appropriate word choice. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. 05 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. "____ had it not for the courage of a minor chieftain ____" means ____ A) thanks to B) in spite of C) but for D) because of 2. Shaka was inhuman because ____ A) he made himself King of the Zulus B) he gave special privileges to his bodyguard C) he set standards he could not keep himself D) he had no respect for human life 3. "All those who had failed to be present at the funeral ____" means ____. A) all who had not come B) all who had not been able to come C) all who had not brought presents D) all who had not announced their arrival 4. Shaka's orders were "little less than a sentence of national starvation because ____. A) the Zulus were not lazy to cultivate anything but grain B) the Zulus were already on a diet C) the Zulus' food consisted mainly of grain and milk products. D) the Zulus had nothing else to eat 5. To challenge the King's wishes at such a moment was ____. A) to want to die at once B) to beg to be killed at once C) to run the risk of being killed on the spot D) to ask for a quick and painless death SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. A particular way to deal with aggressive children is to ____. A) give them severe punishment B) tell them to behave themselves C) organize them to fight D) send some of them to prison 7. The boxing competition was to ____. A) train them to be professional boxers B) teach them to follow rules C) give them some physical exercise D) cultivate their sense of competition 8. What did one of the boys do? A) He killed his cat. B) He cut off his dog's ears. C) He hurt another boy. D) He blinded his cat. 9. Some children are aggressive because ____. A) they are from very poor families B) their parents are usually aggressive C) they want to show they are strong D) they are longing for attention 10. In this special school, there are usually ____ children in a class. A) 5 or 6 B) 30 or 40 C) 7 to 10 D) 13 to 14 SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. Sports In Britain There are 3 major (16) sports in Great Britain. They are football, Cricket, and Rugby. Football, or soccer, is the most popular. Football matches are shown on the BBC on (17) evenings around 10 oclock. Some football grounds will have crowds more than (18). Professional teams are organized into four (19) in England and 2 in Scotland. At the end of the season, some teams are (20), and some are (21) Recently, some clubs are always in (22) trouble. Rugby was first played at a famous public school called (23). Rugby is played all over Britain. It has been described as "a game designed for hooligans but played by gentlemen". Cricket seems more peaceful and is played in (24). Some of the countries of the (25) send national teams to play each other. This is called A Test Match, which can go on for 5 days. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors. Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. The telephone system is a circuit-switched network. For much of the history of the system, when you placed (26) a call, you were renting a pair of copper wires that ran continuously from your telephone to the other partys phone. You had excluding use of those wires during the (27) call; when you hung up, they were rented to someone else. Today the transaction is more complicated. (your call may well possess a fiber-optic cable or a satellite with hundreds of other calls), but more conceptually the system (28) still works the same way. When you dial the phone, you get a private connection of one other party. This is an alternative network architecture called (29) packet switching, in which all stations are always connected to the network, but they receive only the messages addressed to them. It is as if your telephone was always tuned in to (30) thousands of conversations going on the wire, but you (31) heard only the occasional word intended to you. Most (32) computer networks employ packet switching, because it is more efficient than circuit switching when traffic is heavy. It seems reasonable the existing packet-switched (33) network will grow, and new one may be created; they could (34) well absorb traffic that would otherwise go to the telephone system and thereby reduce the need for telephone numbers. (35) 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A The House of Lords has a charm few people seem able to resist. The more cut-off it becomes from everyday life, the greater its attraction for weary businessmen and politicians. On the road outside the word "Peers" is painted across the car-park in large white letters. Inside a tall ex-Guardsman directs you through the vaulted entrance hall, past a long row of elaborate gothic coat-hooks, each one labeled, beginning with the royal dukes —— one of the many features of the building reminiscent of a school. Upstairs you come to a series of high, dark rooms, with gothic woodwork and carved ceilings. A life-size white marble statue of the young Queen Victoria watches elderly peers sitting at tables writing letters on gothic writing paper. Doors lead off to long dining-rooms, one for guests, another for peers only and to a large bar looking over the river, which serves drinks all day and sells special "House of Lords" cigarettes. Other closed doors are simply marked "Peers" —— an embarrassing ambiguity for lady peers, for "peers" can mean the Lords equivalent of "gentle-men". There is an atmosphere of contented old age. The rooms are full of half-remembered faces of famous men or politicians one had —— how shall one put it —— forgotten were still around. There is banter between left-wing peers and right-wing peers and a great deal of talk about operations and ailments and nursing homes. Leading off the man ante-room is the chamber itself —— the fine flower of the Victorian romantic style. It is small, only eighty feet long. Stained glass windows shed a dark red light, and rows of statues look down from the walls. On either side are long red-leather sofas with dark wooden choir stalls at the back. Between the two sides is "the Woolsack", the traditional seat of the Lord Chancellor, stuffed with bits of wool from all over the Commonwealth. At the far end is an immense gold canopy, with twenty-foot high candlesticks in the middle, the throne from which the monarch opens Parliament. Leaning back, on the sofa, whispering, putting their feet up, listening, fumbling with papers, making notes or simply sleeping, are the peers. On a full day, which is rear, you can see them in their groups: bishops, judges, industrial peers. But usually there is only a handful of peers sitting in the room, though since peers have been paid three guineas for attending, there are often an average of 110 peers in an afternoon. In the imposing surroundings it is sometimes difficult to remember how unimportant the Lords are. The most that the Lords can do now is delay a bill a year, and any "money bill" they can delay for only a month. Their main impact comes from the few inches of space in next mornings papers. The Prime Minister can create as many peers as he likes and, though to carry out the threat would be embarrassing, the nightmare is real enough to bring the peers to heel. 36. The author feels that House of Lords is ____ A) delightful, but out of touch with the modern world. B) remote from daily life and rather tired. C) a place that businessmen and politicians like resting in. D) an excellent resting place for politicians and businessmen. 37. Many members of the House of Lord are ____ A) well-known politicians and famous TV personalities. B) distinguished and celebrated politicians. C) notorious and remarkable men. D) men who have dropped out of the world in which they became well-know. 38. The only real influence the peers have now is ____ A) to delay money bills for one year if they don't agree with them. B) if their speeches affect pubic opinion through the newspapers. C) that they can make the Prime Minister nervous if they threaten not to agree to his bills. D) they can refuse to accept any government act for one year. TEXT B With its common interest in lawbreaking but its immense range of subject-matter and widely-varying method of treatment, the crime novel could make a legitimate claim to be regarded as a separate branch of the traditional novel. The detective story is probably the most respectful (at any in the narrow sense of word) of the crime species. Its creation is often the relaxation of University dons, literary economists, scientists or even poets. Fatalities may occur more frequently and mysteriously than might be expected in polite society, is familiar to us, if not from our own experience, at least in the newspaper or the lives of friends. The characters, though normally realized superficially, are as recognizable human and consistent as our less intimate associates. As story set in a more remote environment, African jungle or Australian bush, ancient China or gas-lit London, appeals to our interest in geography or history, and most detective story writers are conscientious in providing a reasonably authentic background. The elaborate, carefully-assemble plot, despised by the modern intellectual critics and creators of significant novels, has found refuge in the murder mystery, with its sprinkling of clues, its spicing with apparent impossibilities, all with appropriate solutions and explanations at the end. With the guilt of escapism from Real Life nagging gently, we secretly revel in the unmasking of evil by a vaguely super-human sleuth, who sees through and dispels the cloud of suspicion which has hovered so unjustly over the innocent. Though its villain also receives his rightful deserts, the thriller presents a less comfortable and credible world. The sequence of fist fights, revolver duels, car crashes and escaped from gas-filled cellars exhausts the reader far more than than the hero, who, suffering from at least two broken ribs, one black eye, uncountable bruises and a hangover, can still chase and overpower an armed villain with the physique of a wrestler. He moves dangerously through a world of ruthless gangs, brutality, a vicious lust for power and money and, in contrast to the detective tale, with a near-omniscient arch-criminal whose defeat seems almost accidental. Perhaps we miss in the thriller the security of being safely led by our imperturbable investigator past a score of red herrings and blind avenues to a final gathering of suspects when an unchallengeable elucidation of all that has bewildered us is given justice and goodness prevail. All that we vainly hope for from life is granted vicariously. 39. The crime novel may be regarded as ____ A) a not quite respectable form of the conventional novel. B) not a true novel at all. C) related in some ways to the historical novel. D) an independent development of the novel. 40. The passage suggests that intellectuals write detective stories because ____ A) the stories are often in fact very instructive B) they enjoy writing these stories. C) the creation of these stories demands considerable intelligence. D) detective stories are an accepted branch of literature. 41. Which of the following is mentioned in the passage as one of the similarities between the detective story and the thriller? A) both have involved plots. B) both are condemned by modern critics. C) both are forms of escapist fiction. D) both demonstrate the triumph of right over wrong. 42. In what way are the detective story and the thriller unlike? A) in introducing violence B) in providing excitement and suspense C) in appealing to the intellectual curiosity of the readers D) in ensuring that everything comes tight in the end. TEXT C In most of the human civilization of which we have any proper records, youth has drawn on either art or life for models, planning to emulate the heroes depicted in epics on the shadow —— play screen or the stage, or those known human beings, fathers or grandfathers, chiefs or craftsmen, whose every characteristic can be studied and imitated. As recently as 1910, this was the prevailing condition in the United States. If he came from a non-literate background, the recent immigrant learned to speak, move, and think like an American by using his eyes and ears on the labor line and in the homes of more acculturated cousins, by watching school children, or by absorbing the standards of the teacher, the foreman, the clerk who served him in the store. For the literate and the literate children of the non-literate, there was art —— the story of the frustrated artist in the prairie town of the second generation battling with the limitations of the first. And at a simpler level, there were the Western and Hollywood fairy tales which pointed a moral but did not, as a rule, reach table manners. With the development of the countermovement against Hollywood, with the efflorescence of photography, with Time-Life-Fortune types of reporting and the dead-pan New York manner of describing the life of an old-clothes dealer in a forgotten street or of presenting the "accurate", "checked" details of the lives of people whose eminence gave at least a sort of license to attack them, with the passion for "human documents" in Depression days —— a necessary substitute for proletarian art among middle-class writers who knew nothing about proletarians, and middle-class readers who needed the shock of verisimilitude —— a new era in American life was ushered in. It was the era in which young people imitated neither life nor art nor fairy tale, but instead were presented with models drawn from life with minimal but crucial distortions. Doctored life histories, posed carelessness, "candid" shots of people in their own homes which took hours to arrange, pictures shot from real life to script written months before supplemented by national polls and surveys which assured the reader that this hobby socks did indeed represent a national norm or a growing trend —— replaced the older models. 43. This article is based on the idea that ____ A) people today do not look for models to imitate. B) whom we emulate is not important. C) people generally pattern their lives after models. D) heroes are passed. 44. Stories of the second generation battling against the limitation of the first were often responsible for ____ A) inspiring literate immigrants. B) frustrating educated immigrants. C) preventing the assimilation of immigrants. D) instilling into immigrants an antagonistic attitude toward their forebears. 45. The counter movement against Hollywood was a movement ____ A) toward fantasy. B) against the teachings of morals. C) towards realism. D) away from realism. 46. The author attribute the change in attitude since 1920 to ____ A) a logical evolution of ideas. B) widespread of moral decay. C) the influence of the press. D) a philosophy of plenty. TEXT D During the holiday I received no letter from Myrtle and when I returned to the town she had gone away. I telephoned each day until she came back, and then she said she was going to a party. I put up with her new tactics patiently. The next time we spent an evening together there was no quarrel. To avoid it I took Myrtle to the cinema. We did not mention Haxby. On the other hand it was impossible to pretend that either of us was happy. Myrtles expression of unhappiness was deepening. Day by day I watched her sink into a bout of despair, and I concluded it was my fault —— had I not concluded it was my fault, the looks Myrtle gave me would rapidly have concluded it for me. The topic of conversation we avoided above all others was the project of going to America. I cursed the tactlessness of Robert and Tom in talking about it in front of her before I had had time to prepare her for it. I felt aggrieved, as one does after doing wrong and being found out. I did not know what to do. When you go to the theatre you see a number of characters caught in a dramatic situation. What happens next? They then everything is changed. My life is different I never have scenes, and I if I do, they are discouragingly not dramatic. Practically no action arises. And nothing what so ever is changed. My life is not as good as a play. Nothing like it. All I did with my present situation was try and tide it over. When Myrtle emerged from the deepest blackness of despair —— nobody after all, could remain there definitely —— I tried to comfort her. I gradually unfolded all my plan, including those for her. She could come to America, too. She was a commercial artist. She could get a job and our relationship could continue as it was. And I will not swear that I did not think:" And in America she might even succeed in marrying me." It produced no effect. She began to drink more. She began to go to parties very frequently; it was very soon clear that she had decided to see less of her. I do not blame Myrtle. Had I been in her place I would have tried to do the same thing. Being in my place I tried to prevent her. I knew what sort of parties she was going to: they were parties at which Haxby was present. We began to wrangle over going out with each other. She was never free at the times I suggested. Sometimes, usually on a Saturday night, she first arranged to meet me and then changed her mind. I called that rubbing it in a little too far. But her behavior, I repeat, perfectly sensible. By seeing less of me she stood a chance of finding somebody else, or of making me jealous, or of both. Either way she could not lose. 47. When Myrtle was avoiding the author he ____ A) saw through her plan and behave calmly. B) became angry and could not put her out of his mind. C) was worried and uncomprehending. D) decided that he could not bear the way she treated him. 48. The author felt guilty and angry because ____ A) his friends had discovered that he had not told Myrtle anything. B) Tom and Robert had told Myrtle about their plans. C) Myrtle had found out their plans when Tom and Robert talked. D) he had told Myrtle their plans before Tom and Robert mentioned them. 49. The author complains that his life was not like a play in which ____ A) the characters solve their problems by violence. B) the violence that follows action solves their problems. C) the action that follows quarrels solves their problems. D) the characters solved their problems in spite of violence. 50. The real reason why Myrtle was angry and upset was that ____ A) she had never wanted to go to America with the author. B) the author would not agree to take her as his wife. C) she did not want him to go to America with his enemies. D) she did not want to be felt behind in America. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. What is the authors main purpose in the passage? A. to point out the importance of recent advances in archaeology. B. to describe an archaeologists education. C. to explain how archaeology is a source of history. D. to encourage more people to become archaeologist. Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. Archaeology is a source of history, not just a humble auxiliary discipline. Archaeological data are historical documents in their own right, not mere illustrations to written texts. Just as much as any other historian, an archaeologist studies and tries to reconstitute the process that has created the human world in which we live —— and us ourselves in so far as we are each creatures of our age and social environment. Archaeological data are all changed in the material world resulting from human action or, more succinctly, the fossilized results of human behavior. The sum total of these constitute what may be called the archaeological record. This record exhibits certain peculiarities and deficiencies the consequences of which produce a rather superficial contrast between archaeological history and the more familiar kind based upon written records. Not all human behavior fossilizes. The words I utter and you hear as vibrations in the air are certainly human changes in the material world any may be of great historical significance. Yet they leave no sort of trace in the archaeological records unless they are captured by a Dictaphone or written down by a clerk. The movement of troops on the battlefield may "change the course of history", but this is equally ephemeral from the archaeologists standpoint. What is perhaps worse is that most organic materials are perishable. Everything made of wood, hide, wool, linen, grass, hair, and similar materials will decay and vanish in dust in a few years or centuries, save under very exceptional conditions. In a relatively brief period the archaeological record is reduced to mere scraps of stone, bone, glass, metal, and earthenware. Still modern by a few lucky finds from peat bogs, deserts, and frozen soils, is able to fill up a good deal of the gap. 51. What is the author's main purpose in the passage? A) to point out the importance of recent advances in archaeology. B) to describe an archaeologist's education. C) to explain how archaeology is a source of history. D) to encourage more people to become archaeologist. TEXT F First read the questions. 52. The main subject of the passage is ____ A. famous mathematicians. B. mathematical education. C. tiling the plane. D. irregular polygons. Now go through TEXT F quickly and answer question 52. Marjorie Rice was an unlike candidate for the role of mathematical innovator. She had no formal education in mathematics save a single course required for graduation from high school in 1931. Nonetheless, in 1975 she took up a problem that professional mathematicians had twice left for dead, and showed how much life was in it still. The problem was tessellation, or tiling of the plane, which involves taking a single closed figure —— a triangle, for example, or a rectangle —— and kitting it together with copies of itself so that a plane is covered without any gaps or overlap. A region of this plane would look rather like a jigsaw puzzle whose pieces are all identical. Rice worked primarily with polygons, which consist only of straight lines. More specifically, she worked with convex polygons, in which the line joining any two points on the polygon lies entirely within the polygon itself or on one of its edges. (A five-pointed star, for example, does not qualify as a convex polygon.) By the time Rice took up tiling, its basic properties had been established. Obviously, any square can tile the plane, as many kitchen floors have demonstrated. Equilateral triangles are also a fairly clear-cut case. There is one other regular polygon (a polygon whose angles, and sides, are equal) that can tile the plane: the hexagon. This fact was building their honeycombs. And what of irregular polygons? As it turns out, any triangle or quadrilateral, no matter how devoid of regularity, will tile the plane. On the other hand, no convex polygon with more than six sides can do so, and the three classes of convex hexagons that can were uncovered by the end of the First World War. So the only real question lest by the time Marjorie Rice began her work was which convex pentagons tile the plane. 52. The main subject of the passage is ____ A) famous mathematicians. B) mathematical education. C) tiling the plane. D) irregular polygons. TEXT G First read the following question. 53. What is the passage mainly about? A. faint dwarf stars. B. the evolutionary cycle of the Sun. C. the Suns fuel problem. D. the dangers of invisible radiation. Now go through TEXT G and answer question 53. When we accept the evidence of our unaided eyes and describe the Sun as a yellow star, we have summed up the most important single fact about it —— at this moment in time. It appears probable, however, that sunlight will be the color we know for only a negligibly small part of the Suns history. Stars, like individuals, age and change. As we look out into space, we see around us stars at all stages of evolution. There are faint blooded dwarfs so cool that their surface temperature is a mere 4,000 degrees Fahrenheit, there are searing ghosts blazing at 100,000 degrees Fahrenheit and almost too hot to be seen for the great part of their radiation is in the invisible ultraviolet range. Obviously, the "daylight" produced by any star depends on its temperature, today (and for ages to come) our Sun is at about 10,000 degrees Fahrenheit and this means that most of the Suns light is concentrated in the yellow band of the spectrum falling slowly in intensity toward both the longer and shorter light waves. That yellow "hump" will shift as the Sun evolves and the light of day will change accordingly. It is natural to assume that as the Sun grows older and uses up its hydrogen fuel —— which it is now doing at the sparkling rate of half a billion tons a second —— it will become steadily colder and colder. 53. What is the passage mainly about? A) faint dwarf stars. B) the evolutionary cycle of the Sun. C) the Sun's fuel problem. D) the dangers of invisible radiation. TEXT H First read the following question. 54. Which of the following would be the best title for the passage? A. the evolution of dance in the twentieth century. B. artists of last century. C. natural movement in dance. D. a pioneer on modern dance. Now go through TEXT H quickly and answer question 54. Many artists late in the last century were in search means to express their individuality. Modern dance was one of the ways some of these people sought to free their creative spirit. At the beginning there was no exacting technique, no foundation from which to build. In later years trial, innovators even drew from what they considered the dread ballet, but first they had to discard all that was academic to that the new could be discovered. The beginning of modern dance were happening before Isadora Duncan, but she was the first person to bring the new dance to general audiences and see it accepted and acclaimed. Her search for natural movement form sent her to nature. She believed movement should be as natural as the swaying of the trees and the rolling of the sea, and should be in harmony with the movements of the Earth. Her great contributions are in three areas. First, she began the expansion of the kinds of movements that could be used in dance. Before Duncan danced, ballet was the only type of dance performed in concert. In the ballet the feet and legs were emphasized, with virtuosity shown by complicated, codified positions and movements. Duncan performed dance by using all her body in the freest possibly way. Her dance stemmed from her soul and spirit. She was one of the pioneers who broke tradition so others might be able to develop the art. Her second contribution lies in dance costume. She discarded corset, ballet shoes, and stiff costumes. There were replaced with flowing Grecian tunics, bare feet, and unbound hair. She believed in the natural body being allowed to move freely, and her dress displayed this ideal. Her third contribution was in the use of music. In her performances she used the symphonies of great masters, including Beethoven and Wagner, which was not the usual custom. She was as exciting and eccentric in her personal life as in her dance. 54. Which of the following would be the best title for the passage? A) the evolution of dance in the twentieth century. B) artists of last century. C) natural movement in dance. D) a pioneer on modern dance. TEXT I First read the following questions. 55. From the passage we know that Washington is ____ A. a place about 50 kilometers east of Manassas. B. a place 48 kilometers west of Manassas. C. the place where the biggest battle reenactment will take place. D. the place where the first major battle of the American Civil War tool place on July 21, 1861. 56. From the passage we know that to commemorate the first major battle of the American Civil War people have been organizing reenactments since ____ A. 1861. B. the 1960s. C. the 1860s. D. 125 years ago. Now go through TEXT I quickly and answer questions 55 and 56. For four days in hilly fields near this country town, thousands of men will wear brocaded wool uniforms in the summer heat, smoke smelly cheroots by camp fires, pitch canvas tents, eat dried beef —— and wage war. Some 5,000 weekend warriors plan to reenact the first major battle of the American Civil War not far from where it took place 48 kilometers west of Washington 125 years ago. The American Civil War Commemorative Committee of Culpeper, Virginia, the events sponsor, bills this as the biggest battle reenactment ever held in the United States. While the real north-south clash was fought out in one day, on July 21, 1861, the replay will stretch out over four, including preliminary encampment, from July 17 to 20. Those arranging the return of the first battle of Manassas, as southerners call it —— the Battle of Bull Run to Northerners —— expect over 50,000 Civil War buffs to watch the fighting roll across a 200-hectare tract. Some 15,000 artillery shells and a half million rounds of small arms ammunition will be fired in the mock battle. A special effects company is arranging to set off explosions across the landscape, Hollywood war-film fashion, in counterpoint to thunderous fire cannons some of which were used in the original battle. Jack Thompson, a director of the sponsoring committee, says dozens of mock Civil War military units have been created since interest was fanned in the 1960s when reenactments took place on a smaller scale to commemorate the wars centenary. He said these groups, mostly in the south but with delegations from areas as far off as Scotland, Ireland and West Germany, strive to duplicate the uniforms, weapons and lifestyles of 1860s. Organizer Nancy Niero says everything has to be original, or reproduced as precisely as possible. Most authentic Civil War uniforms are too worn, too delicate or too small to fit the modern man, but some of the distinctive originals have been lovingly preserved and now serve as models for exact replicas. Cheating will be barred. That means a ban on using any any sort of clothing, equipment, food or drink which did not exist during the real Civil War. Smokers, for instance, must shun cigarettes. Canned beer, soda and pre-packed food are all out, but a spokesman said:" I guess if anyone gets hurt, well use antibiotics. We wont use leeches." 55. From the passage we know that Washington is ____ A) a place about 50 kilometers east of Manassas. B) a place 48 kilometers west of Manassas. C) the place where the biggest battle reenactment will take place. D) the place where the first major battle of the American Civil War tool place on July 21, 1861. 56. From the passage we know that to commemorate the first major battle of the American Civil War people have been organizing reenactments since ____ A) 1861. B) the 1960s. C) the 1860s. D) 125 years ago. TEXT J First read the following questions. 57. Surgeons in the early years of this century, compared with modern ones, ____ A. had less to learn about surgery. B. needed more knowledge. C. could perform every operation known today. D. were more trusted by their patients. 58. Today, compared with 1910 ____ A. five times fewer patients die after being operated on. B. 20% fewer of all operation patients die. C. 20% of all operation patients recover. D. operation death have increased by 20%. Now go through TEXT J quickly and answer questions 57 and 58. The need for a surgical operation, especially an emergency operation, almost always comes as a severe shock to the patient and his family. Despite modern advances, most people still have an irrational fear of hospitals and anesthetics. Patients do not often believe they really need surgery —— cutting onto a part of the body as opposed to treatment with drugs. In the early years of this century there was little specialization in surgery. A good surgeon was capable of performing almost every operation that had been devised up to that time. Today the situation is different. Operations are now being carried out that were not even dreamed of fifty years ago. The heart can be safely opened and its valves repaired. Clogged blood vessels can be cleaned out, and broken ones mended or replaced. A lung, the whole stomach, or even part of the brain can be removed and still permit the patient to live a comfortable and satisfactory life. However, not every surgeon wants to, or is qualified to carry our every type of modern operation. The scope of surgery had increased remarkably in this century. Its safety has increased too. Deaths from most operations are about 20% of what they were in 1910 and surgery has been extended in many directions, for example to certain types of birth defects in newborn babies, and, at the other end of the scale, to life-saving operations for octogenarian. The hospital stay after surgery has been shortened to as little as a week for most major operations. Most patients are out of bed on the day after an operation and may be back at work in two or three weeks. Many developments in modern surgery are almost incredible. They include the replacement of damaged blood vessels with simulated ones made of plastics; the replacement of heart valves with plastic substitutes; the transplanting of tissues such as the lens of the eye; the invention of artificial kidney to clean the blood of poisons at regular intervals and the development of heart and lung machined to keep patients alive during very long operations. All these things open a hopeful vista for the future of surgery. One of the most revolutionary areas of modern surgery is that of organ transplants. Until a few years ago, no person, except an identical twin, was able to accept into his body the tissues of another person without reaction against them and eventually killing them. Recently, however, it has been discovered that with the use of x-rays and special drugs, it is possible to graft tissues from one person to another which will survive for periods of a year or more. Kidneys have been successfully transplanted between non-identical twins. Heart and lung transplants have been reasonably successful in animals, though rejection problems in humans have not yet to be solved. Spare parts surgery, the simple routine replacement of all worn-out organs by new ones, is still a dream of the distant future. As yet, surgery is not ready for such miracles. In the meantime, you can be happy if your doctor says to you, "Yes, I think it is possible to operate on you for this condition." 57. Surgeons in the early years of this century, compared with modern ones, ____ A) had less to learn about surgery. B) needed more knowledge. C) could perform every operation known today. D) were more trusted by their patients. 58. Today, compared with 1910 ____ A) five times fewer patients die after being operated on. B) 20% fewer of all operation patients die. C) 20% of all operation patients recover. D) operation death have increased by 20%. TEXT K First read the following questions. 59. The art of cutting and polishing precious stones remained crude until ____ A. the fourteenth century. B. the fifteenth century. C. the sixteenth century. D. the seventeenth century. 60. Zaire produces ____ A. 70% of all diamonds sold. B. 70% of industrial diamonds sold. C. 70% of all precious stones sold. D. 70% of the worlds blue-white diamonds. Now go though TEXT K quickly and answer questions 59 and 60. Some of the earliest diamonds known came from India. In the eighteenth century they were found in Brazil, and in 1866 huge deposits were found neat Kimberley in South Africa. Though evidence of extensive diamond deposits has recently been found in Siberia, the continent of Africa still produces nearly all the worlds supply of these stones. The most valuable diamonds are large individual crystals of of pure crystalline carbon. Less perfect forms, knows as boart and carbonado are clusters of tiny crystals. Until diamonds are cut and polished, they do not sparkle like those you see on a ring —— they just look like small, blue-gray stones. In a rather crude form, the cutting and polishing of precious stones was an art known to the Ancient Egyptians, and in the Middle Ages it became widespread in north-west Europe. However, a revolutionary change in the methods of cutting and polishing was made in 1476 when Ludwig Van Berquen of Bruges in Belgium invented the use of a swiftly revolving wheel with its edge faced with fine diamond powder. The name boart is given to this fine powder as well as the natural crystalline material already mentioned. It is also given to badly flawed or broken diamond crystals, useless as jewels, that are broken into powder for grinding purposes, the so-called industrial diamonds. Diamond itself is the only material hard enough to cut and polish diamonds —— though recently, high-intensity light beams called lasers have been developed which can bore holes in them. It may be necessary to split or cleave the large stones before they are cut and polished. Every diamond has a natural line of cleavage, along with it may be split by a sharp blow with a cutting edge. A fully cut brilliant diamond has 58 facts, or faces, regularly arranged. For cutting or faceting, the stones are fixed onto copper holders and held against a wheel, edged with a mixture of oil and fine diamond dust, which is revolved at about 2,500 revolutions a minute. Amsterdam and and Antwerp, in Holland and Belgium respectively, have been the center of the diamond cutting and polishing industry for over seven centuries. The jewel value of brilliant diamonds depends greatly on their color, or water as it is called. The usual color of diamonds are white, yellow, brown, green, or blue-white; the blue-white brilliants are the stones of the finest water and so command the highest prices. During their formation some diamonds absorb metallic oxides from the surrounding rocks and take on their color. Thus black, red and even bright pink diamonds have occasionally been found. The trade in diamonds is not only in the valuable gem stones but also in the industrial diamonds mentioned above. Zaire produces 70% of such stones. They are foxed into the rock drills used in mining and civil engineering, also for edging band saws for cutting stone. Diamond-faced tools are used for cutting and drilling glass and fine porcelain, and for dentists drills. They are used as bearings in watches and other finely balanced instruments. Perhaps you own some diamonds without knowing it —— in your wristwatch. 59. The art of cutting and polishing precious stones remained crude until ____ A) the fourteenth century. B) the fifteenth century. C) the sixteenth century. D) the seventeenth century. 60. Zaire produces ____ A) 70% of all diamonds sold. B) 70% of industrial diamonds sold. C) 70% of all precious stones sold. D) 70% of the world's blue-white diamonds. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following text into English. Write your translation on Answer Sheet Three. 奥林匹克运动会可以追溯到古代。古希腊人喜欢各种运动，因为运动能使身体强健。他们每四年举行一次运动会，成千上万的人聚集在辽阔的草原上，欣赏来自希腊各地的成人和 儿童的竞技。运动项目有赛跑，摔交，跑马，战车比赛等等。有成人的比赛项目，也有儿童 的比赛项目。 在大部分比赛中，成人和儿童都穿得很少或者不穿衣服，却在身上涂油。奖 品是用野生橄榄树叶作成的花冠。谁只要能戴上一只花冠，那就是无上的光荣。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on Answer Sheet Three. Three years ago, a group of plant scientists led by Ilya Raskin, at Du Ponts agricultural laboratory in Delaware, discovered a surge of salicylic and in the voodoo lily the day before flowering. Using a sensitive analytical technique, they discovered that the level of salicylic acid in the plant leapt almost 100 times and triggered the explosion of respiration. This established salicylic acid as a powerful chemical signal, albeit in a rather quirky plant. But what role might salicylic acid have in less exotic plants? Plants have a kind of "immune system" with which they fight diseases. When fungi, bacteria or viruses infect a plant, they often trigger a signal which travels to uninfected leaves where it stimulates the production of disease-fighting protein. This mechanism of disease resistance, and the signal which prepares the plants defenses, had been a mystery to biologists. A promising clue came to light, however, in 1979. Raymond White at Britains Rothamsted research station was able to prevent tobacco mosaic viruses from multiplying by injecting the infected plants with aspirin. The aspirin appeared to trigger the production of a group of diseases-fighting proteins. Building on this and his own discovery with the voodoo lily, Raskin continued the work with graduate student Jocelyn Malamy and her colleagues at Rutgers University, New Jersey. They measured the levels of salicylic acid in tobacco plants that were infected with mosaic virus. Before any signs of infection or resistance were detected, salicylic acid levels surged almost five-fold throughout the plants. This surge then set off the manufacture of the disease-fighting protein. PART V WRITING Direction: Small kindness is always neglected in our society. Some people prefer to do big kindness. What is your idea on this topic? On small kindness Write an essay of about 300 words on the above topic within 60 minutes. In the first part you should present the definition of small kindness. In the following parts you should state your opinion and support it with appropriate examples. In the last part you draw a conclusion. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instruction may result in a loss of marks. 06 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. What is the percentage that the Mediterranean has of the world's sea surface? A) 1.5% B) 1% C) 2% D) 3% 2. Which parts of the Mediterranean are the worst? A) The coast between Barcelona and Greek. B) The Tyrrhenrian Sea between Sardinia, Sicily and the West Italian coast. C) The Israeli/Lebanon coast. D) Cannes and Tel Aviv. 3. According to the speaker, the dirtiest rivers are ____ A) the Llobregat in Spain. B) the Adige and the Tiber in Italy. C) the Nile. D) the Po and the Phone. 4. In the next twenty years, the number of holiday-makers is expected to be ____ A) 100 million. B) 150 million. C) 200 million. D) 300 million. 5. The purpose of the article is ____ A) to warn that the pollution of the Mediterranean is hardly inevitable. B) to provide specific information about the pollution of the Mediterranean. C) to warn holiday-makers of the risks they will run if they tour the Mediterranean shores. D) to show that the Mediterranean has become another dead sea. SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. Who are the speakers? A) Salesmen. B) Editors. C) Cooks. D) Advertising agents. 7. What products are they talking about? A) Kitchen. B) Deep-freezer. C) Mobility units. D) Cake mixer. 8. What is the relationship between the two speakers? A) Employer and employee. B) Salesman and customer. C) Advertiser and customer. D) Colleagues. 9. How is the kitchen different from all other kitchens on the market? A) It is easier to clean and repair. B) It is non-fixed and flexible. C) All its units are of the same height. D) Its chopping board is nearer to the sink. 10. What can you infer from the conversation? A) Terry knows less about kitchen than Joyce. B) Joyce knows more about kitchen than Terry. C) Terry knows more about kitchen than Joyce. D) Terry knows as much about the kitchen as Joyce. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. Sleepwalking The strange behavior of sleepwalkers have puzzled police, perplexed scientist and fascinated writers for centuries. There is an early (16) record of a somnambulist who wrote a novel in his sleep. The worlds (17) sleepwalker was supposed to have been an Indian, who walked 16 miles along a dangerous road. Sleepwalking is a (18) reality. What is certain about sleepwalking is that it is a symptom of (19), which is a usually the (20) result of guilt, nervousness, worry or some other emotional (21). One of the most common beliefs of sleepwalking is that it is dangerous or even (22) to waken the sleepwalkers. But this is one of the two mistaken beliefs. The other is that sleepwalkers are (23) to injury. Authorities on sleepwalking think that people will not do anything against their own moral (24). They also think sleepwalking itself is nothing to become alarmed about, but what may be very serious are the (25) that causes it. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors .Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit The German poet and polymath Johann Wolfgang von Goethe pondered the question of how organisms develop in his scientific studies of form and structure immature plants and animals, a field he found and named morphology. His search for a single basic body plan (26) across all life-forms led him to think about the prevalence of repeating (27) segments in body structures. The spinal columns of fish, reptiles, (28) birds and mammals, for instance, all are made of long strings of (29) repeated vertebrae. Among invertebrates the growth of virtually identical segments is how striking: in earthworms, for example, even (30) internal organs are repeated in serial segments. Likewise, the abdomen of flies and other insects are segmented, as are the (31) successive wormlike articulations in crabs, shrimps and other crustaceans. To Goethe the evidence suggested that nature takes a building-block approach to generate life, repeating a basic element (32) again and again to arrive at a complicated organism. The only glaring (33) hole he could see in the theory was the apparent lack of sort of (34) segmentation in the vertebrate heads. In 1790 he hypothesized that (35) spinal vertebrate is modified during the development to form the skull. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A It is now June 1567. Two months previously the explosion to Kirk OField, which awakened Edinburgh, startled courts as far away as Rome. In the flash of gunpowder, England, France, and the Holy See received a pin-sharp picture of Scotland which shook even the hardened nerves of the sixteenth century. The Queens consort murdered. The Queen implicated. The Earl of Bothwell more than implicated. Talk of love between them. No one minded murder in the sixteenth century; it was a good old Scottish custom, and elsewhere it was recognized as a political expedient. No one regretted the end of the miserable Darnley, a poor drunken coward; but what stirred the conscience of the age was the news that the Queen of Scotland was ready to bring her husbands murderer not to the gallows but to her bed. Even Elizabeth, who was not Marys best friend, became human and wrote to her "dear cousin" imploring her to see justice done. But no: Mary Queen of Scots was fated to think the cup of sorrow to the very end. Has any woman lived more violently, yet more mysteriously —— for we shall never know her heart —— than Mary in the last six months before Carberry Hill? There is the amazing evening in Edinburgh, when, surrounded by armed men, the lords of Scotland sign Bothwells document naming himself the Queens suitor. There is the astonishing holdup outside Edinburgh with the Queen. What can we make of it? Was she his victim or did he fly to his brutality as to a stronghold? There is the silent ten-day honeymoon at Holyrood Palace in Edinburgh; the angry murmur of the common people. Then, as if the drama had not been exhausted, we see Mary in flight, riding through the night disguised as a boy. She and her strong man ride out to meet her nobles at Carberry Hill. There is no battle; Bothwell offers to fight any man of equal rank in the opposing army. Even hang fire. Marry will not hear of Bothwells fighting. Why? Surely because she loves him? She learns that the nobles are resolved on his death. Her heart is set on securing his escape. They say farewell, in great pain and anguish and with many long kisses. The lords escort her to Edinburgh, where a man cries out for her death. There is a terrible glimpse of her at a window, her hair about her shoulders, crying and appealing to the crowds to save her. The next day she is taken to Loch Leven, to a castle on an island. Marys long captivity had begun. 36. Mary's husband, Lord Darnley, had been ____ A) killed in the explosion at Kirk O'Field. B) told to wake up all the people of Edingburgh. C) startled by the explosion at Kirk O'Field. D) stabbed by the people of Edingburgh. 37. It was reported all over Europe that the Queen of Scotland ____ A) knew nothing about the murder but wanted to marry Bothwell. B) knew about the murder, which Bothewell had organized. C) had carried the gunpowder, because she hated her husband. D) had been asked by Bothwell to murder Darnley. 38. The author says that we shall never understand ____ A) why Mary was such an unlucky and unhappy woman. B) why Mary was violent and mysterious. C) Mary's motives for her action. D) the reason why Mary fell in love with Bothwell. 39. Mary was taken back to Edinburgh by the nobles and ____ A) put to death by her own people. B) rescued by the people of Edinburgh. C) thrown straight into prison. D) later taken to a very secure prison. TEXT B "Scotland Yards top fingerprint expert, Detective Chief superintendent Gerald Lambourne had a request from the British Museums Prehistoric department to force his magnifying glass on a mystery somewhat outside my usual beat." This was not a question of Whodunit, but Who Was It. The blunt instruments he pored over were the antlers of red deer, dated by radio-carbon examination as being up to 5 000 years old. They were used as mining picks by Neolithic man to hack flints and chalk, and the fingerprints he was looking for were of our remote ancestors who had last wielded them. The antlers were unearthed in July during the British Museums five-year-long excavation at Grimes Graves, near Therford, Norfolk, a 93-acre site containing more than 600 vertical shafts in the chalk some 40 feet deep. From artifacts found in many parts of Britain it is evident that flint was extensively used by Neolithic man as he slowly learned how to farm land in the period from 3 000 to 1 500 B.C. Flint was especially used for ax-heads to clear forests for agriculture, and the quality of the flint on the Norfolk site suggests that the miners there were kept busy with many orders. What excited Mr. G. de G. Sieveking, the museums deputy director of the excavations, was the dried mud still sticking to some of them. "Our deduction is that the miners coated the base of the antlers with mud so that they could get a better grip," he says. "The exciting possibility was that fingerprints left in this mud might at last identify as individuals as people who have left few relics, who could not read or write, but who may have had much more intelligence than had been supposed in the past." Chief Superintendent Lambourne, who four years age had "assisted" the British Museum by taking the fingerprints of a 4 000-year-old Egyptian mummy, spent two hours last week examining about 50 antlers. On some he found minutes marks indicating a human hand——that part of the hand just below the fingers where most pressure would be brought to bear the wielding of a pick. After 25 years specialization in the Yards fingerprints department, Chief Superintendent Lambourne knows all about ridge structures——technically known as the "tri-radiate section". It was his identification of that part of the hand that helped to incriminate some of the Great Train Robbers. In 1995 he discovered similar handprints on a bloodstained tee-maker on a golf-course where a woman had been brutally murdered. They eventually led to the killer, after 4 065 handprints had been taken. Chief Superintendent Lamboure had agreed to visit the Norfolk site during further excavations next summer, when it is hoped that further hand-marked antlers will come to light. But he is cautious about the historic significance of his findings. "Finger prints and hand prints are unique to each individual but they can tell nothing about the age, physical characteristics, even sex of the person who left them," he says. "Even the finger prints of gorilla could be mistaken for those of a man. But if a number of imprinted antlers are recovered from given shafts on this site I could at least determine which antlers were handled by the same man, and from there might be deduced the number of miners employed in a team." "As as indication of intelligence I might determine which way up the miners held the antlers and how they wielded them." To Mr. Sieveking and his museum colleagues any such findings will added to their dossier of what might appear to the layman as trivial and unrelated facts but from which might emerge one day an impressive new image of our remote ancestors. 40. What was the aim of the investigation referred to in the passage? A) To provide some kind of identification of a few Neolithic men. B) To find out more about the period when the antlers were used. C) To discover more about the purpose of the antlers. D) To learn more about the types of men who used them. 41. What had been the principal use of the antlers? A) To obtain the material for useful tools. B) To prepare the fields for cultivation. C) To help in removing trees and bushes so that land could be cultivated. D) To make many objects useful in everyday life. 42. The idea that mud was applied to the antlers deliberately was ____ A) the result of an inspired guess. B) a possibility based on reasoning from facts. C) an obvious conclusion. D) a conclusion based on other similar cases. 43. The Museum's deputy director is very interested in the prints because ____ A) useful facts about this remote period can be learned from them. B) they are valuable records of intelligent but illiterate people. C) very few objects of this remote period have been found. D) the antlers serve as a link with actual people who lived at that time. TEXT C The conflict between good and evil is a common theme running through the great literature and drama of the world, from the time of ancient Greeks to all the present. The principle that conflict is the heart of dramatic action when illustrated by concrete examples, almost always turn up some aspect of the struggle between good and evil. The idea that there is neither good not evil —— in any absolute moral or religious sense —— is widespread in our times. There are various relativistic and behaviorist standards of ethics. If these standards even admit the distinction between good and evil, it is as a relative matter and not as whirlwind of choices that lies at the center of living. In any such state of mind, conflict can at best, be only a petty matter, lacking true university. The acts of the evildoer and of the virtuous man alike become dramatically neutralized. Imagine the reduced effect of Crime and Punishment or the Brothers Karamazoc had Dostoevsky thought that good and evil, as portrayed in those books, were wholly relative, and if he had had no conviction about them. You cant have a vital literature if you ignore or shun evil. What you get then is the world of Pollyanna, goody-goody in place of the good. Cry, The Beloved Country is a great and dramatic novel because Alan Paton, in addition to being a skilled workman, sees with clear eyes both good and evil, differentiates them, pitches them into conflict with each other, and takes sides. He sees that the native boy Absalom Kumalo, who has murdered, cannot be judged justly without taking into account the environment that has had part in shaping him. But Paton sees, too, that Absalom the individual, not society the abstraction, committed the act and is responsible for it. Mr. Paton understand mercy. He knows that this precious thing is not evoked by sentimental impulse, but by a searching examination of the realities of human action. Mercy follows a judgment; it does not precede it. One of the novels by the talented Paul Bowles, Let It Down is full of motion, full of sensational depravities, and is a crashing bore. The book recognizes no good, admits no evil, and is coldly indifferent to the moral behavior of its characters. It is a long shrug. Such a view of life is non-dramatic and negates the vital essence of drama. 44. In our age, according to the author, a standpoint often taken in the area of ethics is the ____ A) relativistic view of morals. B) greater concern with religion. C) emphasis on evil. D) greater concern with universals. 45. The author believes that in great literature, as in life, food ad evil are ____ A) relative terms. B) to be ignored. C) constantly in conflict. D) dramatically neutralized. 46. When the author uses the expression "it is a long shrug" in referring to Bowles's book, he is commenting on the ____ A) length of the novel. B) indifference to the moral behavior of the characters. C) monotony of the story. D) sensational depravities of the book. 47. In the opinion of the author, Cry, The Beloved country is a great and dramatic novel because of Paton's ____ A) insight into human behavior. B) behavioristic beliefs. C) treatment of good and evil as abstractions. D) willingness to make moral judgments. TEXT D Although Boud and I had fought and quarreled unceasingly throughout childhood, by the time she was eighteen and I was fifteen we had, surprisingly, become good friends. Boud had grown from a giant-sized schoolgirl into a huge and rather alarming debutante. She was generally out to shock, and in this she succeeded. I applauded her outrages, roared when she stole some writing paper from Buckingham Palace and wrote to all her friends on it, cheered when she took her pet rat to dances. But she was bored and restless. She was casting about for something more exciting, more intriguing than the London season offered —— something forbidden by our parents. Dianas house seemed like a good beginning, for we had been forbidden to visit her when, after a few years of marriage, she and Bryan were divorced. We had been excluded from the dreadful row that followed their separation; we knew only that unutterable shame and disgrace had been brought by Diana on the family. Needless to say, this only made Diana more glamorous in our eyes. Bound began to visit Diana and at her house she met Sir Oswald Mosley, whom Diana later married. Mosleys career had led him through the Conservative Party, the Labor Party and the New Party, a venture that had lasted only a year despite backing by the Daily Mail. He was now busily engaged in organizing the British Union of Fascists, which Boud immediately joined. "Dont you long to join too, Decca? Its such fun," she begged, waving her brand new black shirt at me. "Shouldnt think of it. I hate the beastly Fascists. If you are going to be one, Im going to be a Communist, so there!" In fact, this declaration was something more than a mere automatic taking of opposite sides to Boud. The little I knew about the Fascists repelled me. I took out a subscription to the Daily Worker, bought volumes of Communist literature and literature I supposed to be Communist, put up some home-made hammer and sickle flags and bought a small bust of Lenin for a shilling in a second-hand shop. My Communist library was catholic indeed, and many of the authors would no doubt have been amazed to find themselves included. It included not only works by Lenin Stalin but also by Bertrand Russell, the Webbs and George Bernard Shaw. The result of all this was that I greatly increased my knowledge of modern English literature and progressive thought. We divided our room down the middle, and each decorated her own side with flags and photographs, sometimes having pitched battles with books and records until Nanny came in to tell us to stop the noise. Yet, once, we teamed up in our own version of the United Front; we each stole five founds from the Conservative father to send to our respective parties. 48. When her sister shocked people, the author was ____ A) horrified and told her to stop. B) jealous of her sister's anger and theft. C) an approving and encouraging audience. D) very anxious to do the same sort of thing. 49. The author decided to be a Communist because she ____ A) only wanted to annoy her sister, who had joined the Fascists. B) was already fully in sympathy with revolutionary view. C) did not like what little she knew about Fascism. D) already felt a sympathy with its ideas and was now pushed into declaring them. 50. The two sisters ____ A) hated each other because they disagreed on politics. B) still fought often but had moments of forgetting politics. C) came to physical blows over their different politics. D) submerged their personal differences in their political quarrels. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. With what topic is the passage primarily concerned? A. The founding of Congress. B. The congressional process of making laws. C. The division of power in Congress. D. The factors involved in the election of congressional members. Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. The constitutional requirements for holding congressional office in the United States are few and simple. They include age (twenty-five years of age for the House of Representatives, Thirty for the Senate); citizenship (seven years for the House, nine years for the Senate); and residency in the state from which the officeholder is elected. Thus, the constitutional gateways to congressional office holding are fairly wide. Even these minimal requirements, however, sometimes arouse controversy. During the 1960s and 1970s, when people of the post-Second War "baby boom" reached maturity and the Twenty-sixth Amendment (permitting eighteen year olds to vote) was ratified, unsuccessful efforts were made to lower the eligible age for senators and representatives. Because of Americas geographic mobility, residency sometimes is an issue. Voters normally prefer candidates with long-standing ties to their states of districts. In his 1978 reelection campaign, for instance, Texas Senator John Tower effectively accused his opponent, Representative Robert Krueger, of having spent most of his life "overseas or in the East" studying or teaching —— a charge taken seriously in Texas. Well-known candidates sometimes succeed without such ties. New York voters elected to the Senate Robert F. Kennedy (1965-1968) and Daniel Patrick Moynihan (1977) even though each had spent much of his life elsewhere. While members of the House of Representatives are not bound to live in the district from which they are elected, most do so prior to their election. In the seat, the "one person, one vote" rule does not apply. Article I of the Constitution assures each state, regardless of population, two Senate seats, and Article V guarantees that this equal representation cannot be taken away without the states consent. The founders stipulated that senators be designed by their respective state legislatures rather than by the voters themselves. Thus, the Senate was designed to add stability, wisdom, and forbearance to the action of the popularly elected House. This distinction between the two houses was eroded by the Seventeenth Amendment (1913), which provided for the direct population election of senators. 51. With what topic is the passage primarily concerned? A) The founding of Congress. B) The congressional process of making laws. C) The division of power in Congress. D) The factors involved in the election of congressional members. TEXT F First read the questions. 52. Which of the following is the best title for this passage? A. A Long Flight. B. Women in Aviation History. C. Dangers Faced by Pilots. D. Women Spectators. Now go though TEXT F quickly and answer question 52. The sooner had the first intrepid male aviator safely returned to Earth, it seemed that women, too, were smitten by an urge to fly. From mere spectators they became willing passengers and finally pilots in their own right, plotting their skills and daring line against the hazards of the air and the skepticism of their male counterparts. In doing so, they enlarged the traditional bounds of a womens world, won for their sex a new sense of competence and achievement, and contributed handsomely to the progress of aviation. But recognition of their abilities did not come easily. "Men do not believe us capable." the famed aviator Amelia Earhart once remarked to friend "Because we are women, seldom are we trusted to do an efficient job." Indeed old attitudes died hard: when Charles Lindbergh visited the Soviet Union in 1938 with his wife, Anne —— herself a pilot and gifted proponent of aviation —— was astonished to discover both men and women flying in the Soviet Air Force. Such conventional wisdom made it difficult for women to raise money for the up-to-date equipment they needed to compete on an equal basis with men. Yet compete they did, and often they triumphed dandily despite the odds. Ruth Law, whose 590-mile flight from Chicago to Hornell, New York, set a new nonstop distance record in 1918, exemplified the resourcefulness and grit demanded of any woman who wanted to fly. And when she addressed the Aero club of America after completing her historic journey, her plainspoken words testified to a universal human motivation that was unaffected by gender: "My flight was done with no expectation of reward," she declared, "just for the love of accomplishment." 52. Which of the following is the best title for this passage? A) A Long Flight. B) Women in Aviation History. C) Dangers Faced by Pilots. D) Women Spectators. TEXT G First read the following question. 53. What is the main idea of the passage? A. Bees communicate with each other by dancing. B. Animals have internal steering devices. C. The Sun is necessary for animal navigation. D. The Earths magnetic fields guide pigeons home. Now go through TEXT G quickly and answer question 53. Researchers have found that migrating animals use a variety of inner compasses to help them navigate. Some steer by the position of the Sun. Others navigate by the stars. Some use the Sun as their guide during the day, and then switch to star navigation by night. One study shows that the homing pigeon uses the Earths magnetic fields as a guide in finding its way home, and there are indications that various other animals, from insects to mollusks, can also make use of magnetic compasses. It is of course very useful for a migrating bird to be able to switch to magnetic compass when clouds cover the Sun; otherwise it would just have to land and wait for the Sun to come out again. Even with the Sun or stars to steer by, the problems of navigation are more complicated than they might seem at first. For example, a worker honeybee that has found a rich source of nectar and pollen flies rapidly home to the hive to report. A naturist has discovered that the bee scout delivers her report through a complicated dance in the hive, in which she tells the other workers not only how far away the food is, but also what direction to fly in relation to the Sun. But the Sun does not stay in one place all day. As the workers start out to gather the food, the Sun may already have changed its position in the sky somewhat. In later trips during the day, the Sun will seems to move farther and farther toward the west. Yet the worker bees seem to have no trouble at all in finding the food source. Their inner clocks tell them just where the Sun will be, and they change their course correspondingly. 53. What is the main idea of the passage? A) Bees communicate with each other by dancing. B) Animals have internal steering devices. C) The Sun is necessary for animal navigation. D) The Earth's magnetic fields guide pigeons home. TEXT H First read the following question. 54. The passage supports which of the following conclusion? A. By the 1930s jazz was appreciated by a wide audience. B. Classical music had a great impact on jazz. C. Jazz originated in New Orleans in the early nineteenth century. D. Jazz band were better known in Europe than in the United States. Now go through TEXT G quickly and answer question 54. The fist jazz musicians played in New Orleans during the early 1900s. After 1917, many of the New Orleans musicians moved to the south side of Chicago, where they continued to play their style of jazz. Soon Chicago was the new center for jazz. Several outstanding musicians emerged as leading jazz artists in Chicago. Daniel Louis "Satchmo" Armstrong, born in New Orleans in 1900, was one. Another leading musician was Joseph "King" Oliver, who is also credited with having discovered Armstrong, who was in New Orleans, to join his band. In 1923 King Olivers Creole Jazz Band under Louis Armstrong also made the first important set of recording by a Hot Five and Hot Seven bands recordings of special note. Although Chicagos South Side was the main jazz center, some musicians, in New York were also demanding attention in jazz circles. In 1923 Fletcher Henderson already had a ten-piece band that played jazz. During the early 1930s, the number of players grew to sixteen. Hendersons band was considered a leader in what some people have called the Big Band Era. By the 1930s, big bands were the rage. Large numbers of people went to ballroom to dance to jazz music played by big bands. One of the most popular and a very famous jazz band was the Duke Ellington band. Edward "Duke" Ellington was born in Washington, D.C. in 1899, and died in New York City in 1974. He studied the piano as a young boy and later began writing original musical compositions. The first of Ellingtons European tours came in 1933. He soon received international fame for his talent as a band leader, composer, and arranger. Ten years later, Ellington began giving annual concerts at Carnegie Hall in New York City. People began to listen to jazz in the same way that they had always listened to classical music. 54. The passage supports which of the following conclusion? A) By the 1930's jazz was appreciated by a wide audience. B) Classical music had a great impact on jazz. C) Jazz originated in New Orleans in the early nineteenth century. D) Jazz band were better known in Europe than in the United States. TEXT I First read the following question. 55. The U.N. came into existence fully in ____ A. 1942. B. 1944. C. 1945. D. 1940. 56. United Nations Day is celebrated on ____ A. 24 October. B. 24 April. C. 26 October. D. 25 June. Now go through TEXT I quickly and answer questions 55 and 56. In one very long sentence, the introduction to the U.N. Charter expresses the ideals and the common aims of the people whose governments joined together to form the U.N. "We the peoples of the U.N. determined to save succeeding generations from the scourge of war which twice in our lifetime had brought untold suffering to mankind, and to reaffirm faith in fundamental rights, in the dignity and worth of the human person, in the equal rights of men and women and of nations large and small, and to establish conditions under which justice and respect for the obligations arising from treaties and other sources of international law can be maintained, and to promote social progress and better standards of life in large freedom, and for these ends, to practice tolerance and live together in peace with one another as good neighbors, and to unite our strength to maintain international peace and security, and to ensure, by the acceptance of principles and the institution of methods, that armed force shall not be used, save in the common interest, and to employ international machinery for the promotion of economic and social advancement of all peoples, have resolved to combine our efforts to accomplish these aims." The name "United Nations" is accredited to U.S. President Franklin D. Roosevelt, and the first group of representatives of member states met and signed a declaration of common intent on New Years Day in 1942. Representatives of five powers worked together to draw up proposals completed at Dumbarton Oaks in 1944. These proposals modified after deliberation at the conference on International Organization in San Francisco which began in April 1945. Poland, not represented at the conference signed the Charter later and was added to the list of original members. It was not until that autumn, however, after the charter had been ratified by China, France, the U.S. S. R, the U.K., and the U.S. and by a majority of the other participants that the U.N. officially came into existence. The date was 24 October, now universally celebrated as United Nations Day. The essential functions of the U.N. are to maintain international peace and security, to develop friendly relations among nations, to cooperate internationally in solving international economic, social, cultural and human problems, to promote respect for human rights and fundamental freedoms and to be a center for coordinating the actions of nations on attaining these common ends. No country takes precedence over another in the U.N. Each members rights and obligations are the same. All must contribute to the peaceful settlement of international disputes, and members have pledged to refrain from the threat or use of force against other states. Though the U.N. had no right to intervene in any states internal affairs, it tries to ensure that non-member states act according to its principles of international peace and security. U.N. members must offer every assistance in an approved U.N. action and in no way assist states against which the U.N. is taking preventive or enforcement action. 55. The U.N. came into existence fully in ____ A) 1942. B) 1944. C) 1945. D) 1940. 56. United Nations Day is celebrated on ____ A) 24 October. B) 24 April. C) 26 October. D) 25 June. TEXT J First read the following questions. 57. Silk worms were introduced into Europe by ____ A. two Justinian monks. B. two countries of Constantinople. C. two Persian Monks. D. two Egyptian priests. 58. People began making shoes for each foot ____ A. in Roman Times. B. in the Middle Ages. C. in the eighteenth century. D. in the nineteenth century. Now go through TEXT quickly and answer questions 57 and 58. Cotton was not exported to Europe until the eighth century A.D. It was brought to Spain then by the Moors of North Africa. The Europeans liked the textile and began to make cotton cloth. By the fifteenth century, the cotton industry had spread from Spain to central Europe and the Low countries. When Columbus arrived in the West Indies, he found the Indians wearing cotton clothes. Pizarro, the Spanish conqueror of Peru, found that the Incas were growing cotton for use in the making of clothes. Magellan found the Brazilians swinging in cotton hammocks. And Cortes was so impressed by the beauty of the cotton tapestries and rugs that the Aztecs made, that he sent some of them as presents to King Charles II of Spain. The Chinese were the first people to make silk clothing, and for more than 2000 years, they were the only people in the world who knew how to make silk. The Chinese guarded the secret of their silk manufacture carefully. Their merchants grew rich in the silk trade with other Asian countries and Europe. Silk, in fact, was so expensive that it was known as the "cloth of king". During the region of Emperor Justinian of Constantinople, two Persian monks who lived in China brought silk worms to Europe. In the years that followed, Western Europeans learned how to grow silkworms and use the silk from the cocoons. Silk is still one of the most useful textile in clothing manufacture because of its extremely strong fibers. A thread of silk is two-thirds as strong as an iron wore of the same size and so smooth that dirt cannot cling to it easily. Two hundred years ago, most of the people of the world had little or no clothing. Clothing was taken care of very carefully and handed down from parents to children. Many people never owned a new garment in their lives, and except for the rich, no on had more than one outfit of clothes at a time. Primitive man made shoes long before he made permanent records on clay tablets or parchment scrolls. For many centuries, the shoemaker was interested only in covering the foot. Although he used fancy leathers and decorated shoes in many ways, he paid little attention to the fit of a shoe. In fact, it was only after 1850 that someone hit upon the idea of making different-shaped shoes for the left and the right foot. 57. Silk worms were introduced into Europe by ____ A) two Justinian monks. B) two countries of Constantinople. C) two Persian Monks. D) two Egyptian priests. 58. People began making shoes for each foot ____ A) in Roman Times. B) in the Middle Ages. C) in the eighteenth century. D) in the nineteenth century. TEXT K First read the following questions. 59. Scurvy is a disease which causes ____ A. loss of blood. B. swollen limbs. C. exhaustion. D. bright red spot on the flesh. 60. The disease "beriberi" ____ A. kills large numbers of western peoples. B. is a vitamin deficiency disease. C. is transmitted by diseased rice. D. can be caught from diseased chickens. Now go through TEXT K quickly and answer questions 59 and 60. In the early days of sea travel, seamen on ling voyages lived exclusively on salted meat and biscuits. Many of them died of scurvy, a disease of the blood which causes swollen gums, livid white spots on the flesh and general exhaustion. On one occasion, in 1535, an English ship arrived in Newfoundland with its crew desperately ill. The mens lives were saved by Iroquois Indians who gave them vegetable leaves to eat. Gradually it came to be realized that scurvy was caused by some lack in the sailors diet and Captain Cook, on his long voyages of discovery to Australia and New Zealand, established the fact that scurvy could be warded off by the provision of fresh fruit for the sailors. Nowadays it is understood that a diet which contains nothing harmful may yet result in serious disease if certain important elements are missing. These elements are called "vitamin". Quite a number of such substances are known and they are given letters to identify them A, B, C, D, and so on. Different diseases are associated with deficiencies of particular vitamins. Even a slight lack of Vitamin C, for example, the vitamin most plentiful in flesh and vegetables, is thought to increase significantly our susceptibility to colds and influenza. The vitamins necessary for a healthy body are normally supplied by a good mixed diet, including a variety of fruit and green vegetables. It is only when people try to live on a very restricted diet, say during extended periods of religious fasting, or when trying to lose weight, that it is necessary to make special provision to supply the missing vitamins. Another example of the dangers of a restricted diet may be seen in the disease known as "beriberi", which used to afflict large numbers of Eastern peoples who lived mainly on rice. In the early years of this century a Dutch scientist called Eijkman was trying to discover the cause of beriberi. At first he thought it was transmitted by a germ. He was working in a Japanese hospital where the patients were fed on rice which had had the outer husk removed from the grain. It was thought this would be easier for weak sick people to digest. Eijkman thought his germ theory was confirmed when he noticed the chickens in the hospital yard, which were fed on scraps from the patients plates, were also showing signs of the disease. He then tried to isolate the germ he thought was causing the disease but his experiments were interrupted by a hospital official, who decreed that the huskless polished rice, even though left over by the patients, was too good for chickens. It should be recooked and the chickens fed on cheap, coarse rice with the outer covering still on the grain. Eijkman noticed that the chickens began to recover on the new diet. He began to consider the possibility that eating unmilled rice somehow prevented or cured beriberi——even that a lack of some ingredient in the husk might be the cause of the disease. Indeed this was the case. The element needed to prevent beriberi was shortly afterwards isolated from rice husks and is now known as vitamin B. The milled rice, though more expensive was in fact perpetuating the disease the hospital was trying to cure. Nowadays, this terrible diseases is much less common thanks to our knowledge of vitamins. 59. Scurvy is a disease which causes ____ A) loss of blood. B) swollen limbs. C) exhaustion. D) bright red spot on the flesh. 60. The disease "beriberi" ____ A) kills large numbers of western peoples. B) is a vitamin deficiency disease. C) is transmitted by diseased rice. D) can be caught from diseased chickens. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following underlined part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 尊老爱幼的优良传统在海外华人中一直保持着。不论是单个儿的华人家庭，还是华人集中居住的区域，人们都把尊敬老人，爱护幼小看作自己民族的美德，并希望它世世代代发扬 下去。根据1982年新加坡对5538民老人的调查，有88%的老人与亲人同住；1983年新加坡 对3000民妇女的调查，97%认为子女有奉养年老体弱的父母，89%反对子女将父母送老 人院照顾。这很好地说明了“父母养育子女，子女孝敬父母”这一优良传统观念在海外华人 中的深远影响。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. As we drove to New Yorks tenement district my mind went back to the years when I had known Benny Cremona. He had a one-chair barbershop in the neighborhood, where I was born and brought up. In that brawling neighborhood, a tough tenement jungle, a cockpit of different nationalities and customs and feuds, Mr. Cremonas barbershop was an oasis of beauty and good will. He scorned the usual barbershop trappings of those days: the racy calendars, the crime-and-sex gazettes. "The way Im working," he would say, "Im always looking down at heads. A mans got to have something to look up to, too." When we youngsters had our hair cut we gazed on reproductions of the Mona Lisa, the Winged Victory, the Adoration of the Magi, Michelangelos David. We learned who Dante was, and Shakespeare, by hearing for the first time the splendid, gleaming lines of poetry. Mr. Cremona was a round butter-ball of a man with an enormous, flowing black mustache, and he acted our everything he told us. He was versatile with his scissors. They might be a conductors baton, the brush between Rembrandts fingers, or —— as he pirouetted in a Shakespearean duel —— a rapier. PART V WRITING Directions: Some people think money is all powerful. What is your opinion about it? Write an essay of about 300 words within 60 minutes. Is Money all powerful? In the first part you should clearly state your opinion about this topic and in the following parts you should support your opinion with appropriate detail or examples. Marks will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. 07 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet . SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. About ____of American school-age children are taught at home. A) 1/10 B) 1/20 C) 1/30 D) 1/40 2. Creg Colfax is studying ____at Harvard University. A) maths B) medicine C) science D) language 3. David Colfax believes that some school teachers ____ A) do not work hard. B) do not have academic qualifications. C) do not respect kid's self-esteem. D) do not teach up-to-date knowledge. 4. Home-schoolers are academically ____ school children. A) more successful than B) less successful than C) as successful as D) no information 5. According to Howard Carol, the major disadvantage of home-schooling is that ____ A) the parents are not competent. B) the students can not have the full range of curriculum. C) the students are denied something they may need in future. D) It is usually not easy for students to get appropriate materials and the new technology. SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. What's the relation between Julia and Roger? A) Friends. B) Colleagues. C) Husband and wife. D) Landlord and tenant. 7. Why does Roger dislike living in the city? A) Because he likes traveling. B) Because he does not like the house and neighbors in the city. C) Because he works near the country. D) Because he has a romantic attitude. 8. Where is Roger living now? A) In London. B) In New York. C) In Boston. D) In Manchester. 9. Where is Julia possibly going to live? A) Manchester. B) Colchester. C) London. D) New York. 10. What does Roger want to buy? A) A new car. B) A sailing-boat. C) A trailer. D) A surf-board. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. The History of American Indians When Europeans discovered the Western hemisphere, they discovered a race of people. (16)called them Indians. I shall have something to say about their (17) and early history, the (18) for them of European settlement in the New World, the part they have played in American history, their number, distribution and condition today. Most scholars believe that the homeland of the Indians was eastern Asia. They migrate to North American along a land (19) from Siberia to Alaska. The Indians were a (20) people. They lived in (21), spoke many languages, and gained their living in different ways. (22) revolutionized their hunting and warfare. Whiskey corrupted them. (23) changed the lives of some Indians. The Indians were under pressure to take (24) in the great French and British War of the eighteen century. The Indians made many efforts to prevent the advance of the frontier. In (25), a great uprising against the British began under a Michigan Indian leader. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors .Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit Literature is a means by which we know ourselves. By it we (26) meet future selves, and recognize past selves; against it we match our present self. Its primary function is to validate and re-create the self in all its individuality and distinctness. In doing so, it cements a sense of relationship between the self and the otherness of the book, and allows us a notion of ourselves as sociable. Its shared knowledge is vicarious experience; by this means we enlarge our understandings (27) of what it means to be human, of the corporate and independent (28) nature of human society. The act of reading the book marks both our difference in and our place in the human fabric. The more we read, (29) the more we are. In the act of reading silently we are alone from the (30) book, separate from ones own immediate surroundings. Yet in the (31) act of reading we enter other minds and other places, enlarge our (32) dialogue with the world. Thus paradoxically, while disengaging from the immediate we are increasing its scope. In silence, reading activates a deeply creative function of consciousness. We are deeply committed to the narrative which we coexist while engaged in (33) reading. All kinds of present physical discomfortness may be (34) unnoticed while we are reading, and actual time is replaced by narrative time. To imaginatively enter a fictional world by reading it (35) is then both a liberation from self and an expansion of self. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A Some people have drawn the conclusion from Bowlbys work that children should be subjected to day care before the age of three because of the parental separation it entails, and many people do believe this. But there are also arguments against such a strong conclusion. It has been argued that an infant under three who is care for outside the home may suffer because of the separation from his parents. The British psychoanalyst John Bowlby maintains that separation from the parents during the sensitive "attachment" period from birth to three may scar a childs personality and predispose to emotional problems in later life. But traditional societies are so different from modern societies that comparisons based on just one factor are hard to interpret. Firstly anthropologists point out that the secluded love affair between children and parents found in modern societies does not usually exist in traditional societies. For example, we saw earlier that among the Ngoni the father and mother of a child did not rear their infant alone —— far from it. But bowlbys analysis raises the possibility that early day care had delayed effects. The possibility that such care might lead to, say, more mental illness or crime 15 or 20 years later can only be explored by the use of statistics. Statistical studies of this kind have not yet been carried out, and even if they were, the results would be certain to be complicated and controversial. Secondly, common sense tells that day care would not be so widespread today if parents, caretakers or pediatricians found that children had problems with it. But tests that have had to be used to measure this development are not widely enough accepted to settle the issue. Thirdly, in the last decade, there have been a number of careful American studies of children in day care, and they have uniformly reported that day care had a neutral or slightly positive effects on childrens development. But whether the long-term effects, parents sometimes find the immediate effects difficult to deal with. At the age of three or three and a half almost all children find the translation to nursery age, and this is undoubtedly why more and more parents make use of child care at this time. Children under three are likely to protest at leaving their parents and show unhappiness. The matter, then, is far from clear-cut, though experience and available evidence indicate that early care is responsible for infants. 36. John Bowlby believes that separation from parents from birth to three ____. A) is wholesome for a child's development. B) may cause a child to suffer for lack of parental attention. C) may overshadow a child's personality and cause emotional problems. D) can help a child to develop an independent character. 37. The consequence of parental separation can be explored by ____. A) statistical studies B) long-term studies C) close observation D) All of above 38. What's the result of American studies of children in day care in the last decade? A) Day care had a neutral or more or less positive effect on children's development. B) The effects of parental separation was hard to deal with. C) The transition to nursery at three was easy due to day care the children received. D) Early care was reasonable for babies. TEXT B We recognize visual form only by means of light, we recognize the existence of light only by means of form, and we further recognize that color is an effect of light in relation to form and its inherent texture. In nature, light creates color; in painting, color creates light. In symphonic painting, color is the real building medium. "When color is richest, form is fullest." This declaration of Cézannes is a guide for painters. Swinging and pulsating from and its counterpart, resonating space, originate in color intervals. In a color interval, the finest differentiations of color function as powerful contrasts. A color interval is comparable to the tension created by a form relation. What a tension signifies in regard to form, an interval signifies in regard to color; it is a tension between colors that makes color a plastic means. A painting must have form and light unity. It must light up from the inside through the intrinsic qualities which color relations offer. It must not be illuminated from the outside by superficial effects. When it lights up from the inside, the painted surface breathes, because the interval relations which dominate the whole cause it to oscillate and to vibrate. A painted surface must retain the transparency of a jewel which stands as a prototype of exactly ordered form, on the one hand, and as a prototype of the highest light emanation on the other. The Impressionists led painting back to the two-dimensionality in the picture through the creation of a light unity, whereas their attempt to create atmosphere and spatial effectiveness by means of color, resulted in the impregnation of their works with the quality of translucence which became synonymous with the transparency of the picture plane. Light must not be conceived as illumination —— it forces into the picture through color development. Illumination is superficial. Light must be created. In this matter alone is the balance of light possible. The formation of a light unity becomes identified with the two-dimensionality of the picture. Such a formation is based on comprehension light complexities. Color unity, in the same matter, is identified with the two-dimensionality of the picture. It results from color tensions created by color intervals. Thus the end product of all color intervals is two-dimensionality. Spatial and formal unity and light and color unity create the plastic two-dimensionality of the picture. Since light is best expressed through differences in color quality, color should not be handled as a tonal gradation, to produce the effect of light. The psychological expression of color lies in unexpected relations and associations. 39. What would be an appropriate title for this selection? A) On Light and Color B) The Expression of Color and Light by Impressionists C) Visual Effects in Painting D) The Formation of a Light Unity and a Color Unity 40. What does the writer mean by form and light unity? A) A painting is lit up from the outside. B) A painting lights up through the qualities that color relations offer. C) The painting's surface breathe and vibrate D) The interval color relations dominate the painting. 41. What cause the plastic two-dimensionality of a picture? A) Unexpected relations and associations. B) Spatial and formal unity. C) Light and color unity. D) B and C TEXT C Eliots interest in poetry in about 1902 with the discovery of Romantic. He had recalled how he was initiated into poetry by Edward Fitzgeralds Omar Khayyam at the age of fourteen. "It was like a sudden conversion", he said, an "overwhelming introduction to a new world of feeling." From then on, till about his twentieth year of age (1908), he took intensive courses in Byron, Shelley, Keats, Tennyson, Rossetti and Swinburne. It is, no doubt, a period of keen enjoyment„„At this period, the poem, or the poetry of a single poet, invades the youthful consciousness and assume complete possession for a time„„The frequent result is an outburst of scribbling which we may call imitation„„It is not deliberate choice of a poet to mimic, but writing under a kind of daemonic possession by one poet. Thus, the young Eliot started his career with a mind preoccupied by certain Romantic poets. His imitative scribbling survives in the Harvard Eliot Collection, a part of which is published as Poems Written in Early Youth. "A Lyric" (1905), written at Smith Academy and Eliots first poem ever shown to anthers eye, is a straightforward and spontaneous overflow of a simple feeling. Modeled on Ben Johnson, the poem expresses a conventional theme, and can be summarized in a single sentence: since time and space are limited, let us love while we can. The hero is totally self-confident, with no Prufrockian self-consciousness. He never thinks of retreat, never recognizes his own limitations, and never experiences the kind of inner struggle which will so blight the mind of Prufrock. "Song: When we came home across the hill" (1907), written after Eliot entered Harvard College, achieved about the same degree of success. The poem is a lovers mourning of the loss of love, the passing of passion, and this is done through a simple contrast. The flowers in the field are blooming and flourishing, but those in his lovers wreath are fading and withering. The point is that, as flowers become waste then they have been plucked, so love passes when it has been consummated. The poem achieves an effect similar to that of Shelleys "when the lamp is shattered". The from, the dictation and the images are all borrowed. So is the carpe diem theme. In "Song: The Moonflower Opens" (1909), Eliot makes the flower —— love comparison once more and complains that his love is too cold-hearted and does not have "tropical flowers/With scarlet life for me". In these poem, Eliot is not writing in his own right, but the poets who possessed him are writing through him. He is imitating in the usual sense of the word, having not yet developed his critical sense. It should not be strange to find him at this stage so interested in flowers: the flowers in the wreath, this mornings flowers, flowers of yesterday, the moonflower which opens to the moth —— not interested in them as symbols, but interested in them as beautiful objects. In these poems, the Romantics did not just work on his imagination; they compelled his imagination to work their way. Though merely fin-de-siécle routines, some of these early poems already embodied Eliots mature thinking, and forecasted his later development. "Before Morning" (1908) shows his awareness of the co-habitation of beauty and decay under the same sun and the same sky. "Circles Palace" (1909) shows that he already entertained the view of women as emasculating their male victims or sapping their strength. "On a Portrait" (1909) describes women as mysterious and evanescent, existing "beyond the circle of our thought". Despite all these hints of later development, these poems don not represent the Eliot we know. Their voice is the voice of tradition and their style is that of the Romantic period. It seems to me that the early Eliots connection with Tennyson is especially interesting, in that Tennyson seems to have foreshadowed Eliots own development. 42. Eliot was wrapped up in ____when he began to write poems. A) Edward Fitzgerald's poems B) Romantic poets C) Classical literature D) Romantic literature 43. Which of the following statement is NOT true of Eliot's first poem? A) It was written at Smith Academy. B) It was modeled on Ben Johnson. C) It was included in Poems Written in Early Youth. D) It expresses the theme that a common person's mind is loaded with inner struggle. 44. Which of the following is NOT Eliot's poem? A) "Song: When we came home across the hill" B) "Song: The Moonflower Opens" C) Fin-de-siécle D) "before Morning" 45. The article is primary concerned with ____ A) comparing the early poems by Tennyson and Eliot. B) illustrating Eliot's talent as a young artist. C) introducing some background knowledge of Eliot. D) representing Eliot's early style and his connection with Romantic poets. TEXT D The bizarre antics of sleepwalkers have puzzled police, perplexed scientists, and fascinated writers for centuries. There is an endless supply of stories about sleepwalkers. Person have been said to climb on steep roofs, solve mathematical problems, compose music, walk though plate glass windows, and commit murder in their sleep. How many of these stories have a basic in fact, and how many are pure fakery? No one knows, but if some of the most sensational stories should be taken with a barrel of salt, others are a matter of record. In Revere, Massachusetts, a hundred policemen combed a waterfront neighborhood for a lost boy who left his home in his sleep and woke up five hours later on a strange sofa in a strange living room, with no idea how he had gone there. There is an early medical record of a somnambulist who wrote a novel in his sleep. And the great French writer Voltaire knew a sleepwalker who once got our of bed, dressed himself, made a polite bow, danced a minuet, and then undressed and went back to bed. At the university of Iowa, a student was reported to have the habit of getting up in the middle of the night and walking three-quarters of a mile to the Iowa River. He would take a swim and then go back to his room to bed. The worlds champion sleepwalker was supposed to have been an Indian, Pandit Ramrakha, who walked sixteen miles along a dangerous road without realizing that he had left his bed. Second in line for the title is probably either a Vienna housewife or a British farmer. The woman did all her shopping on busy streets in her sleep. The farmer, in his sleep, visited a veterinarian miles away. The leading expert on sleep in American claims that he had never seen a sleepwalker. He is Dr. Nathaniel Kleitman, a physiologist at the University of Chicago. He is said to know more about sleep than any other living man, and during the last thirty-five years had lost a lot of sleep watching people sleep. Says he, "Of course, I know that there are sleepwalkers because I have read about them in the newspapers. But none of my sleepwalkers ever walked, and if I were to advertise for sleepwalkers for an experiment, I doubt that Id get many takers." Sleepwalking, nevertheless, is a scientific reality. Like hypnosis, it is one of those dramatic, eerie, awe —— inspiring phenomena that sometimes border on the fantastic. It lends itself to controversy and misconceptions. What is certain about sleepwalking is that it is a symptom of emotional disturbance, and that the only way to cure it is to remove the worries and anxieties that cause it. Doctors say that somnambulism is much more common than is generally supposed. Some have set estimated that there are four million somnambulists in the United States. Others set the figure even higher. Many sleepwalkers do not seek help and so are never put on record, which means that an accurate count can never be made. The simplest explanation of sleepwalking is that it is the acting out of vivid dream. The dream usually comes from guilt, worry, nervousness, or some other emotional conflict. The classic sleepwalker is Shakespeares Lady Mac Beth. Her nightly wanderings were caused by her guilty conscience at having committed murder. Shakespeare said of her, "The eyes are open but their sense is shut." The age-old question is: Is the sleepwalker actually awake or asleep? Scientists have decided that he is about half-and-half. Like Lady Mac Beth, he had weighty problems on his mind. Dr. Zelda Teplitz, who made a ten-year study of the subject, say, "Some people stay awake all night worrying about their problems. The sleepwalker thrashes them out in his sleep. He is awake in the muscular area, partially asleep in the sensory area." In other words, a person can walk in his sleep, move around, and do other things, but he does not think about what he is doing. There are many myths about sleepwalkers. One of the most common is the idea that its dangerous or even fatal to waken a sleepwalker abruptly. Experts say that the shock suffered by a sleepwalker suddenly awakened is no greater than that suffered in waking up to the noise of an alarm clock. Another mistaken belief is that sleepwalkers are immune to injury. Actually most sleepwalkers trip over rugs or bump their heads on doors at some time or other. What are the chances of a sleepwalker committing a murder or doing something else extraordinary in his sleep? Some cases of this have been reported, but they very rarely happen. Of course the few cases that are reported receive a great deal of publicity. Dr. Teplitz say, "Most people have such great inhibitions against murder or violence that they would awaken —— if someone didnt waken them." In general, authorities on sleepwalking agree with her. They think that people will not do anything in their sleep that is against their own moral code. As for the publicized cases, Dr. Teplitz points out, "Sleepwalking itself is dramatic„„sleepwalkers can always find an audience. I think that some of their tall tales get exaggerated in the telling." In her own file of case histories, there is not one sleepwalker who ever got beyond his own front door. Parent often explain their childrens —— or their own —— nocturnal oddities as sleepwalking. Sleepwalking is used as an excuse for all kinds of irrational behavior. There is a case on record of a woman who dreamed that her house was on fire and flung her baby out of the window. Dr. Teplitz believes that this instance of irrational behavior was not due to somnambulism. She believes the woman was seriously deranged or insane, not a sleepwalker. For their own protection, chronic sleepwalkers have been known to tie themselves in bed, lock their doors, hide the keys, bolt the windows, and rip up all sorts of gadgets or wake themselves if they should get out of bed. Curiously enough, they have an uncanny way of avoiding their own traps when they sleepwalk, so none of their tricks seem to work very well. Some sleepwalkers talk in their sleep loudly enough to wake someone else in the family who can then shake them back to their senses. Children who walk in their sleep usually outgrow the habit. In many adults, too, the condition is more or less temporary. If it happens often, however, the sleepwalker should seek help. Although sleepwalking itself is nothing to become alarmed about, the problems that cause the sleepwalking may be very serious. 46. What does the phrase "taken with a barrel of salt" mean at end of the second paragraph? A) inconceivable B) unbelievable C) suspected D) implausible 47. Who was supposed to be the world's champion sleepwalker? A) The man walked sixteen miles along a dangerous road. B) The boy walked five hours in his sleep. C) The student habitually walked to the Iowa River and swam in his sleep. D) The man danced a minuet in his sleep. 48. What is true of sleepwalking according to the passage? A) It is caused by emotional conflict or guilty conscience. B) It is the acting out of a vivid dream. C) Somnambulists are asleep during their sleepwalking. D) It is dangerous to waken a sleepwalker. 49. Dr. Zelda Teplitz ____ A) studied sleepwalking for at least ten years. B) concluded that sleepwalkers are partially asleep in their sensory area. C) maintained that it is a mistaken belief that sleepwalkers are immune to injury. D) A and B 50. The writer makes it obvious that ____. A) sleepwalkers are often awakened by dangers B) the underlying cause of sleepwalking is more serious than sleepwalking itself C) most sleepwalkers are deranged or insane D) All of the above. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. Whats this passage about? A. An Egyptian architect says design can heal the sick. B. The contents of a science-fiction by an Egyptian writer. C. The development of bio-geometry in Egypt. D. The potential therapeutic effects of patterns. Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. Cairo —— Imagine a world where the sick would be healed by geometrical shapes engraved on anything from jewellery to mobile phones. Science-fiction, you might think, but an eminent Egyptian architect says channeling energy through a prism of powerful patterns has powerful therapeutic effects. "It sounds strange, doesnt it, but by applying certain geometrical design to the sick, I have developed a way to enhance the bodys energy field," 54-year-old Ibrahim Karim told reporters. Karim, an architectural adviser to government ministries, became a household name in Egypt after appearing on a popular TV program in April. Since then, he says, he has been inundated by thousands of letters, faxes, e-mails, and telephone calls inquiring into his unusual line of research. Karim says he spent 25 years developing his "science" of "bio-geometry", which he traces to in ancient Egypt. "My work began as a way to cancel the potentially harmful effects of unchecked energy fields due to architectural design, but later expanded to cover almost spheres of life." By using a series of 500-odd symbols on plates about an inch (2.5) square, Karim claims to provide "complementary medicine" for a wide variety of ailments. "On all my decorative diagrams, or bio-signatures, each point corresponds to particular organs and will modify energy fields around them„„like electricity runs through wires," he says. At their villa in the affluent Cairo suburb of Maadi, Karim and his wife Rawya run the Bio-geometrical Institute, giving lectures in the history of geometrical shapes and helping those who seek their assistance. His claims have attracted much interest in Egypt where alternative medicine in vogue using among the wealthy and trendy. But some scientists are skeptical and the Health Ministry had warned the public against using Karims designs for medical purposes. "If were going to use (Karims method) for medical purposes then it should be developed into an approved science first," former Health Minister Ibrahim Badran told a seminar. Like most who visit the center, Hesham Fattouh, a 24-year-old engineering student with a low platelet count, had some reservations about the healing power of shapes. But having already undergone a US 25,000 course of treatment in the United States and had his spleen removed to no avail, he decided to try Karims method. "When I met Ibrahim, he put a ring on my finger with a design print on it, then he gave me a medallion. At first I thought it was strange, but after all Id been thought, I was prepared to give it a go," he said. Overnight his platelet count went up to 35,000, claimed, and in four more days it soared to 250,000. Karim envisions a day when his bio-geometrical designs will be manufactured and sold or distributed worldwide. "These designs can be mass produced and printed on everything from gold to plastic and will be distributed to the world," he days. "Everybody should have the opportunity to wear my protective designs." 51. What's this passage about? A) An Egyptian architect says design can heal the sick. B) The contents of a science-fiction by an Egyptian writer. C) The development of bio-geometry in Egypt. D) The potential therapeutic effects of patterns. TEXT F First read the questions. 52. Which of the following statement is NOT true according to the text? A. Beethoven began to receive formal musical instruction at nine. B. His mothers death had great influence on him. C. "Choral", one of the most glorious symphonies, was dedicated to Napoleon. D. Bach had also deep influence on Beethoven. 53. When did Beethovens mother die? A. In 1787 B. In 1792 C. In 1779 D. In 1826 Now go through TEXT F quickly to answer question 52 and 53. The indisputable giant of the early Romantic period of classical music was Ludwing van Beethoven. Beethovens life spanned the period of the late eighteenth century to the early nineteenth century, a time of political and social revolution in the Western world. Beethoven was the personification of the modern artist: he felt himself the equal of royalty, and this belief was echoed in his music. Of Flemish descent, Beethoven was born in Bonn, Germany on December 16 or 17, 1770. His mother was a cook and his father a menial musician who was also drunkard. He started to receive formal musical instruction in 1779, and after only three years became deputy court organist and a member of the court orchestra. A year later his first composition was published. In 1787 he set out for Vienna to meet Mozart. Within two weeks of his arrival, his mother fell ill and he hurried back to Bonn. She died in the same year, and her death affected Beethoven very deeply. In 1792 he returned to Vienna, never to see Bonn again. Soon after, Beethoven made his entrance into the cultured middle class, and through his patron Count Waldstein, into the world of the nobility. He was in great demanded as a performer and a teacher. In spite of this success, however, Beethoven was known as an eccentric. He changed domiciles on the average of once a month, and he could not get along with his servant. Moreover, his personality was touched by paranoia —— he often felt harassed by unfounded suspicions. These emotions were intensified by his gradual loss of hearing. While Beethovens life was overridden with his deafness, this misery drove the man to despair, but not the composer. In the first two decades of the nineteenth century he composed a vast amount of music. He was under the patronage of Archduke Rudolph, Prince Joseph Max Lobkowitz and Prince Ferdinand Kinsky, all of whom guaranteed him an annual salary so he could devote his entire time to composing —— on the condition that he not leave Vienna. Beethoven was thus in the unheard of position of complete independence from any employment or commission. The musician and composer were no longer servants of the court; they were the equal of noblemen. This artistic freedom, however, did not free him from mundane problems. Often his patrons did not pay him on time, and the publishers of his compositions frequently sent his royalties late. Moreover, after the death of his brother Karl, he was appointed guardian of his nephew which brought him much vexation and grief. He had long and bitter quarrels with the boys mother whom he considered unfit to raise the child. In spite of the adversity in his personal life, Beethoven produced some of his greatest works during this time. Many of his piano sonatas were composed in these years, each of which he dedicated to patrons and friends. In these works he drew on forms used by earlier composers while exploring new depths of emotions. Sorrow, passion and fanfare were hallmarks of his music. Moreover, he was drawn to subjects of epic or heroic grandeur. The most glorious of his symphonies, the "Eroica", was originally dedicated to Napoleon. On hearing that he had crowned himself emperor, however, Beethoven changed the dedication to read, "To the memory of a great man." He was also a master of the fugue and canon, undoubtedly because of the influence of J.S. Bach. He said of the Baroque master: "He should not be called Bach ("brook" in German) but Meer (sea)." Toward the the end of Beethovens life, his deafness was total. One can only marvel at fact that he produced so much music which he never heard. His last symphony, the "Coral", reflects the strength of his spirit. In the last movement the chorus and soloists join the orchestra in a grand finale based on Schillers poem "Ode to Joy". When Beethoven conducted this work in Vienna he was totally deaf. After one particular passage there was thunderous applause. Unaware of the adulation, he continued conducting. One of the singers pulled his sleeve and pointed to the audience. He then turned and bowed. In 1826 Beethovens chronic poor health took a turn for the worse. He developed pleurisy, and later pneumonia. His last days were wracked with suffering until finally, on March 26, 1827, he died. The funeral of this musician giant was attended by twenty thousand people. 52. Which of the following statement is NOT true according to the text? A) Beethoven began to receive formal musical instruction at nine. B) His mother's death had great influence on him. C) "Choral", one of the most glorious symphonies, was dedicated to Napoleon. D) Bach had also deep influence on Beethoven. 53. When did Beethoven's mother die? A) In 1787 B) In 1792 C) In 1779 D) In 1826 TEXT G First read the question. 54. Who is Dolly? A. A scientist in Chicago. B. A member of the U.S. National Bioethics Advisory Committee. C. A Scottish researcher at Edinburghs Roslin Institute. D. The first animal cloned from the cells of an adult. Now go through TEXT G quickly to answer question 54. From the slave drones of Huxleys Brave New World to the hollow-headed replicates of Helenes Time Enough for Love and the production-line Hitler of The Boys from Brazil, clones get a bad press. Yet, in the real world, we encounter clones al the time. Identical twins are genetic replicas of each other. And so, for that matter, are some oranges. All the worlds navel oranges come from a single cutting. But it is the laboratory-made clones that upset people. Chicagos Dr Richard Seed found that out when he proposed establishing a chain of fertility clinics that would clone man in His image, such man-made creation was merely our latest step towards becoming God. Howls of outrage echoed from Washington to China. It was the latest eruption in a debate that has been simmering ever since Scottish researchers at Edinburghs Roslin Institute announced the cloning of a lamb called Dolly. Scientists have been cloning frogs and mice since 1952, but Dolly was the first animal to be cloned from the cells of an adult, rather than an embryo or fetus. This was a necessary step in the institutes plan to mass-produce transgenic animals. These include cows and sheep that have been implanted with human genes for such medically useful items as ant thrombin III, an anti-cloning protein genes for heart patients, or Factor IX, a clotting protein for hemophiliacs. The proteins are discharged in their milk. The animals also include donor organ pigs whose tissues are compatible with human tissue. To many non-scientists, Dollys cloning raised the specter of human cloning. The Pope promptly called for a worldwide ban on human cloning. The U.S. National Bioethics Advisory Committee also recommended a ban —— for safety reasons, such as the risk to clone children from cancer-causing mutations in government-funded research on human cloning and put a bill before Congress proposing to outlaw such research for five years. A U.S. opinion poll found 90 percent opposition to human cloning. By the end of 1997, the 40-nation Council of Europe had imposed the first legal binding international ban on human cloning. Cloning had also been criticized for its effects on the experimental animals. At birth, lambs and calves cloned from embryos can be twice the usual size, creating considerable stress on the surrogate mother. Transgenic animals can experience unpleasant in their growth rates, physical condition or behavior. The "Beltsville pig", for instance, was created by the U.S. Department of Agriculture at Beltsville, Maryland, to produce human growth hormone. The pig grew all right, but suffered severely from bone and joint problems. There is also the question of premature ageing. Do cloned animals wear out faster? Genes trend to accumulate wear and tear with age. This may mean that 18-month-old Dolly really had the genes and physiology of an eight-year-old. If so, will she age and die faster than her non-cloned pals? The scientists are watching closely. Right now, cloning research is continuing at speed. Researchers know how to grow human tissue cloned from aborted fetuses, keeping it alive in laboratories as a potentially inexhaustible source of replacement tissue to graft onto sick people. One U.S. company, Reprogenesis, claims to have induced the growth of nipples on breast tissue. It aims to make silicon implants obsolete within five years. Some gene therapy researchers are even predicting that, within 10 to 20 years, the biggest taboo for genetic researchers——permanent alternation of human gene line —— will be an accepted medical practice. "Gremlin intervention" is already used on mice to alter genes in the sperm and egg cells. It is dome by implanting cloned tissue in the developing embryo. For all frenzied activity and gung-ho talk, it may be some time before we see the promise of the new techniques. And those hordes of identical people swarming across the continents? They are unlikely to happen. Right now, the techniques are still very costly and very inefficient. Noting that Dolly was the only one of 277 cloned eggs to survive, Jim Mc Whir of the Roslin Institute says that, for now, human cloning "is completely impracticable, especially considering that its much pleasanter making children in the classical way". And, even if it does become less costly and more efficient in future, who could really want to change that? 54. Who is Dolly? A) A scientist in Chicago. B) A member of the U.S. National Bioethics Advisory Committee. C) A Scottish researcher at Edinburgh's Roslin Institute. D) The first animal cloned from the cells of an adult. TEXT H First read the questions. 55. This passage can be categorized as ____. A. narration B. argumentation C. exposition D. objective description 56. What conclusion have many folklorists arrived at? A. The early account of folk customs are unreliable. B. Folklore is the means by which people try to relieve themselves of pain and tedium and to comprehend the world. C. The participants were not aware of the significance of their customs. D. The participants were not intelligent enough to recognize the value of their own customs. Now go through TEXT H quickly to answer question 55 and 56. One of the greatest problems in assessing most accounts of folk customs is that they trend to give only antiquarys point of view. After all, to most observers, the people they were looking at were simple and illiterate, unmindful of the true significance of the customs they had preserved. Why question them at length if they didnt understand the essential nature of what they were doing? So a folklorist is likely to emphasize aspects of a tradition which reflect his or her own interests or which fit in with preconceived ideas, while possibly ignoring or giving only passing mention to aspects which may, in fact, be of equal importance. One aspect which generally gets left out of accounts is the viewpoint of the participants themselves: For instance, why they indulge in a particular activity at a particular time of year or of their lives and what feelings they experience while doing so. And now, ideas deriving from folklore studies are so widespread that they may easily have become an integral part of the attitudes of the participants in a custom. So the folklorist is rather like a man staring at a scene in a mirror who must be aware, to fully understand that scene, that his own reflection is a major part of what he is looking at. It is, however, also true to say that many contemporary students of folklore are fully aware of the problems which beset their enquires. Like true scientists they draw their conclusions by looking at available evidence, rather than selecting evidence which fits in with existing theories. Some have also looked away from the "obviously" ancient and turned their attention to folklore where it thrives, in the social life of modern cities, in industry and sport etc. They may, for example, end up looking at the lore of the motor car, or of popular music, and at customs which, though they have no hints of paganism, nevertheless have much in common with older activities which do. Many folklorists have gradually come to the conclusion that folklore is not necessarily a thing of past, a relic of ancient and outmoded ways of thinking, but the means by which people try to make sense of the world (or to confront its lack of sense) and try to alleviate boredom and suffering. 55. This passage can be categorized as ____. A) narration B) argumentation C) exposition D) objective description 56. What conclusion have many folklorists arrived at? A) The early account of folk customs are unreliable. B) Folklore is the means by which people try to relieve themselves of pain and tedium and to comprehend the world. C) The participants were not aware of the significance of their customs. D) The participants were not intelligent enough to recognize the value of their own customs. TEXTI First read the question. 57. What does this text touch on? A. The classification of taxation. B. The nature and purpose of taxation. C. The history of legislation. D. The functions of taxation. Now go through TEXT I quickly to answer question 57. In modern economies taxes are the most important source of governmental revenue. They are compulsory levies that are regularly imposed and, as a rule, not designated for a special purpose; they are regarded as a contribution to the general revenue pool from which most government expenditures are financed. Taxes differ from other sources of revenue in that they are unrequited —— i.e., they are not paid in exchange for some specific thing, such as the sale of public property or the issue of public debt. While taxes are presumably collected for the sake of the welfare of taxpayers as a whole, the liability of the individual taxpayer is independent of any benefit received. Tax legislation customarily distinguishes between the tax object and the tax base. The tax object may consist of goods, transactions (e.g., sales, purchases of real estate, imports, etc.), or sums of money (e.g., income, net wealth, inheritances). The tax base is the physical unit or monetary amount to which the tax rate is applied. For example, a levy on automobiles (the tax object) may use as the tax base the weight of the automobile, its horsepower, its age, its value, etc. Similarly, the property tax may be based on gross value or rental; an excise duty on sugar may be levied as a percentage of the retail price or as a fixed sum per tom of the finished produce, etc. During the 19th century the prevalent idea was that taxes should serve mainly to finance the government. In earlier times, and again today, governments have utilized taxation for other than merely fiscal purposes. Current theories suggests that governments should not use the tax instrument as a revenue-raising device exclusively. Taxes are considered to have three functions: (1) fiscal or budgetary, to cover government expenditures in so far as they are not financed from other sources (fees, profits from public enterprises, the issue of public debt, the creation of money); (2) economic, to promote such general goals as full development, monetary stability, and a satisfactory rate of economic growth within the framework of a market economy; and (3) social or redistributive, to lessen inequalities in the distribution of income and wealth to the extent they are considered excessive and unjust. Since these three functions are interrelated, there are likely to be conflicts among them. Thus the level or composition (or both) of taxes considered necessary for budgetary reasons may tend to hold back the rate of economic growth. Or taxes that are highly redistributive may also conflict with the desired goal of economic growth. On the other hand, a relatively high and steady rate of economic growth will bring with it higher tax revenues, which in turn will enable the government to pursue other aims, fiscal and redistributive. Aside from its main functions, taxation has many lesser purposes. Certain consumption goods considered undesirable, such as alcoholic beverages and cigarettes may be taxed heavily on the grounds of national health (though more often than not this justification had been put forward to conceal a purely fiscal desire for more revenue). Income taxes and succession duties have been used since ancient times to affect population growth; the most conspicuous examples are bachelor taxes and income taxes on childless couples graduated according to the length of time they have been married. It is doubtful whether such tax inducements actually achieve the objectives sought; even if they do, there are probably more efficient ways of influencing human behavior. 57. What does this text touch on? A) The classification of taxation. B) The nature and purpose of taxation. C) The history of legislation. D) The functions of taxation. TEXT J First read the question. 58. What does the title suggest? A. The relationship between the parents and children could be that of partners . B. The relationship between the parents and children should be that of partners. C. The relationship between the parents and children are actually that of partnerships. D. All of above. Now go through TEXT J quickly to answer question 58. A BOY AND HIS FATHER BECOME PARTNERS I like all kinds of chocolate. Best of all, though, I like bitter baking chocolate. Mother had bought a bar of it, and somehow I couldnt stop thinking about it. I was helping Father on the winnower. It was right then I got the idea. I could whack a chunk off the end of that bar of chocolate. Mother would be sure to miss it, but before she had any idea who had done it, I could confess Id taken it. Probably I would not even get a spanking. I waited until Mother was out feeding the chickens. Then I told Father I thought Id go in for a drink of water. I got the bar down, but I heard Mother coming just when I had the knife ready to whack. So slipped the chocolate into the front of my shirt and left quickly. Before I went back to help Father, I went to the barn and hid the chocolate there. All the rest of afternoon, I didnt like to look at Father. Every time he spoke it made me jump. My hands began shaking so much that he asked me what was the matter. I told him it was just that my hands were cold. I knew he didnt believe me, and every time he looked my way my heart started pounding. I didnt want the chocolate anymore. I just wanted a chance to put it back without being caught. On the way out for the cows, I calmed down a little and could think better. I told myself that I hadnt really stolen the whole bar of chocolate, because I meant to take only a little piece. Thats as much as I would have taken, too, if Mother hadnt come along when she did. If I put back the whole bar, I wouldnt have done anything wrong at all. I nearly decided to put it all back. But just thinking so much about chocolate made my tongue almost taste the smooth bitterness of it. I got thinking that if I sliced about half an inch off the end with a sharp knife, Mother might never notice it. I was nearly out to where the cows were when I remembered what Father had said once——some of the family money was mine because I had helped to earn it. Why wouldnt it be all right to figure the bar of chocolate had been bought with my own money? That seemed to fix everything. But by the time I had the cows headed home, I had begun to worry again. We were nearly to the railroad tracks when I decided to leave the whole matter to the Lord. I picked up a dried soap weed stalk with seed-pods on it and decided I would throw it up into the air and take my orders from the way it landed. If it pointed west, Id take the whole bar back. If it pointed south, Id take half an inch off the end. If it pointed east, Id bought the bar with my own money and it wouldnt be stealing to keep it. I swung the pod stalk as high as I could. When it came down, it pointed mostly west——but a little south. That night I couldnt sleep. I kept trying to remember how much that stalk had really been pointing to the south. At last I got up, slipped out into the yard, and took the ax from the chopping block. Then I went into the barn and got the chocolate. I took it outside and laid it on the lower rail of the corral fence. The moon gave enough light for me to see what I was doing. Just as I was starting to cut, Father said: "Son!" I couldnt think of a thing to day. I grabbed up the bar of chocolate and hid next to my chest before I turned around. Father picked me up by the shoulder straps of my overalls and took me over to the wood-pile. I didnt know anybody could spank as hard as he did! Then he stood me on my feet and asked if I thought I had deserved it. He said it wasnt so much that Id taken the chocolate, but that Id tried to hide it from him. "Son," he said, "I know you help to earn the family money. We might say the chocolate was yours in the first place. You should have had it if youd asked for it, but I wont have you being sneaky about things. Now, do you want to keep your money separated from mine——or are we partners?" I never knew till then how much I wanted my money to go in with Fathers. When I went to sleep my hand was still hurting —— from where he squeezed it when we shook hands. 58. What does the title suggest? A) The relationship between the parents and children could be that of partners . B) The relationship between the parents and children should be that of partners. C) The relationship between the parents and children are actually that of partnerships. D) All of above. TEXT K First read the question. 59. How many percent of high schools reported violent incidents in America? A. 10% B. 45% C. 74% D. 77% 60. What measures does the author advise schools to take? A. Extending the school day. B. Guiding students to solve conflict and manage anger. C. Requiring students to wear school uniforms. D. All of above. Now go through TEXT K quickly to answer question 59 and 60. Making School Safe For Kids Americans have seen the news footage and heard the testimonies of the children of Jonesboro, Ark,; Paducah, Ky.; Springfield, Ore.; and Pearl, Miss. These stories now serve as reminders that kids can become killers and that terrible tragedy can happen anywhere, at any time, for seemingly no reason. A crisis had reached Americas schools, and it is time to take a serious look at the problem and devise ways to make sure such tragedies never occur again. Right now, it appears there is much to do. Surveys have found that: 10% of all public schools experienced one or more serious violent crimes (i.e., murder, rape or other sexual battery, suicide, physical attack or fight with a weapon, or robbery) that were reported to police or other law enforcement officials during the 1996-97 school year. 45% of elementary schools, 74% of middle schools, and 77% of high schools reported one or more violent incidents. The percentage of students reporting street gang presence at school nearly doubled between 1989 and 1995, increasing from 15 to 28%. The rate of firearm deaths among children under 13 is nearly 12 times higher in the U.S. than in 25 other industrialized countries combined. What possible can explain these alarming trends? Though it is true that the proportion of adolescents perpetrating violent offenses is just slightly up in recent years, it is necessary to stay on top of the problem to make sure there isnt a resurgence. Furthermore, violent acts that result in serious injury or death have risen. Since 1988, the adolescent homicide rate had more than doubled. To explain this trend, experts point to the increase in handgun use. Studies have found that an estimated 1,000,000 children between 6th and 12th grade have carried guns to school at some point during the last school year. Other explanations look at what elements are influencing youngsters. Violence or neglect at home, violence on TV and in movies, drug and alcohol use, and underdeveloped conflict management skills all are contributors. In September, 1998, about 60 mayors from the United States Conference of Mayors Leadership met in Salt City, Utah, with Attorney General Janet Reno; police chiefs; education experts; health, parks, recreation, and arts officials; representatives from the entertainment industry and news media; and students. They spent an entire day hammering out a National Action Plan on School Violence and Kids. They looked at "best practices"-what programs are in place and working in cities around the country —— and brainstormed about what typed of things have not been tried and should be. In October, the Action Plan was brought to Pres. Clintons White House Conference on School Safety, where it won overwhelming support from all the participating parties. The measures proposed include actions that can be taken at the local level, as well as initiatives that require the Federal government to pass a law or provide funding. Preventing outbreaks of violence is the goal, while keeping in sight the importance of a quality education and meeting childrens basic needs. An emphasis on violence prevention does not have to focus solely on metal detectors and stricter punishments. Examined were ways which provide enriching activities for youngsters and how to ensure that every child receives the emotional and physical things he or she needs. To mount a truly comprehensive attack on the problem, families, schools, communities, local governments, and even the President have a role to play. At home, parents can prevent their offspring from turning to violence by becoming more involved in their childrens lives. They can volunteer in schools, monitor what the kids are watching on TV, and discuss the consequences of violence. In homes where domestic violence exists, parents need to realize that children have to be removed from that environment and authorities should be allowed to do so. Many measures can be taken by schools to help students get a better educational experience. For example, schools can consider later starting times to meet childrens learning patterns better and could extend the school day to reduce those hours in the afternoon when kids are vulnerable and tempted to turn to crime and violence. All schools should follow the example of Long Beach, Calif. and institute school uniforms, which can promote discipline and have been proved to cut down on violence activity. Schools can add conflict resolution and anger management techniques to their curriculum, starting as early as kindergarten, and teachers need to be trained to be effective classroom managers and to enforce discipline fairly. When teachers are not occupied completely with handling out-of-control kids, they can spread more time on class lessons. 59. How many percent of high schools reported violent incidents in America? A) 10% B) 45% C) 74% D) 77% 60. What measures does the author advise schools to take? A) Extending the school day. B) Guiding students to solve conflict and manage anger. C) Requiring students to wear school uniforms. D) All of above. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 世界上有好多国家种植茶树，生产茶叶，但茶的名称不是叫“tea”，就是叫“cha”。“Tea”原是闽南话，据说茶从海路传到国外就叫做“tea”。“Cha”是中国北方话的说法， 据说外国人从陆路得到的茶就称为“cha”。这说明茶是从中国传到世界各地的，中国是茶 的故乡。 在古代，中国人最初用野生茶叶来治消化不良等疾病，后来又发现茶是一种很好 的饮料。早在公元前200年，中国人就会种植茶树了，并且掌握了制作茶叶的方法，喝茶的 风气也已经相当普遍。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. I know what is being said about me and you can take my side or theirs. Its my word against Eunices and Olivia-Anns, and it should be plain enough to anyone with two good eyes which one of us had their wits about them. I just want the citizens of the U.S.A. to know the facts, thats all. The facts: on Sunday, August 12, this year of our Lord, Eunice tried to kill me with her papas Civil War sword and Olivia Ann cut up all over the place with a fourteen-inch hog knife. This is not even to mention lots of other things. It began six months ago when I married Marge. That was the first thing I did wrong. We were married in Mobile after an acquaintance of only four days. We were both sixteen and she was visiting my cousin Georgia. Now that Ive had plenty of time to think it over, I cant for the life of me figure how I fell for the likes of her. She has no looks, no body, and no brains whatsoever. But Marge is a natural blonde and maybe thats the answer. Well, we were married going on three months when Marge ups and gets pregnant; the second thing I did wrong. Then she starts hollering that shes got to go home to Man——only she hasnt got no mama, just these two aunts, Eunice and Olivia-Ann. So she makes me quit my perfectly swell position clerking at the Cashs Carry and move here to Admirals Mill which is nothing but damn gap in the road any way you care to consider it. PART V WRITING Directions: In modern societies, people are faced with a flood of advertisements. Some people argue that it is unnecessary to spend such large sums on advertising while the others dont think so. If There Were No Advertisements Write an essay of about 300 words within 60 minutes. After presenting the two different ideas about advertisements you should state your own opinion about this topic and give the reason why. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. 08 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. The sexual harassment of problem of women in Navy was interfered in by ____ in 1987. A) the Pentagon B) the White House C) the Parliament D) the Grand Jury 2. Two recent reports are about problems ____. A) in the Pacific region B) in the Atlantic region C) in Florida and Maryland D) in Boston and Hawaii 3. About ____ of act-duty Naval personnel are now women. A) 5% B) 10% C) 15% D) 20% 4. What happened in the U.S. Naval Academy? A) A female midshipman was raped. B) A female midshipman was dismissed. C) A female midshipman was given a letter of reprimand. D) A female midshipman was taken to a man' bathroom. 5. Which of the following is not suggested in the talk? A) There should be more women in the Navy. B) There are some old attitudes towards women. C) Some senior officer should be blamed. D) The punishment for offenders is not severe enough. SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. Where does the conversation take place? A) In a workshop B) In a meeting room C) In a friend's house D) In a pub 7. Which of the following is not true about Richard? A) He is a driver. B) He has two kids. C) He is now unemployed. D) His wife is a secretary. 8. How much does the manager get a week? A) '100. B) '66.50. C) '44. D) '140. 9. What's the manager's problem? A) Work. B) House. C) Marriage. D) Children. 10. How much does a person get in unemployment benefits? A) About '25 a week. B) About '35 a week. C) About '20 a week. D) About '40 a week. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. The Impact of Technology on Popular Arts in the U.S. "Popular" means "(16)" and desirable to large numbers of people, and "art" mean such things as (17), film, poems, and the like. Only since the early nineteenth century has technology been able to provide two necessary factors for the wide (18) arts. To be popular, products must be produced in virtually, (19) numbers at a low cost. And secondly, products must be transmitted to large number of people (20). Before about 1830, most printing was done by hand press. The (21) press was invented in about 1830. This press was attached to a steam engine. It could produce thousands of impressions in an hour. At the same time, (22) making process in the early 19th century were improved. People began to use pulp and (23), so that paper became cheaper. Machines were made to gather, back, (24), and sew books together. Meanwhile, methods were developed of (25) and later color-printing processes. All this had great impact on arts. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors .Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit Because the air in the country is really clean, we ought to live there much as is possible. Since, however, a great deal of the worlds (26) work must be done indoor in cities, it is important that we take every (27) precaution to ventilate our houses properly. Some people have thought that night air is injurious. But careful study shows that night air is identical with that which we breath during the day. In face the (28) proper ventilation of a bedroom is one of the first necessity for good (29) health. Since the exhaled air is usually warmer and lighter than the inhaled air, it rises to the top of the room. Therefore it is better to open a window both at the top to let the warm up air out and also at (30) the bottom to admit the fresh air in. Of course, this does not mean (31) that one should sleep in a strong draft. In many places it is feasible to sleep out-of-the-doors on a sleeping porch and so to secure perfect (32) ventilation. In recent years we have seen steady progress made in the development of equipments to supply proper conditioned air not only in large (33) auditoriums, class-rooms, and factories, but also in railroad trains and in private homes. This equipment cleans the air off dust, keeps (34) the temperature comfortable, holds the humidity at the right point, and keeps the air in the motion. Such a condition is conductive to (35) efficiency as well as good health. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A Where Have the Good Jobs Gone? Last years economy should have won the Oscar for best picture. Growth in gross domestic product was 4.1 percent; profits soared; exports flourished; and inflation stayed around 3 percent for the third year. So why did so many Americans give the picture a lousy B rating? The answer is jobs. The macroeconomic situation was good, but the microeconomic numbers were not. Yes, 3 million new jobs were there, but not enough of them were permanent, good jobs paying enough to support a family. Jobs insecurity was rampant. Even as they announced higher sales and profits, corporations acted as if they were in a tailspin, cutting 516, 069 jobs in 1994 alone, almost as many as in the recession year of 1991. Yes, unemployment went down. But over one million workers were so discouraged they left the labor force. More than 6 million who wanted full-time work were only partially employed; and another large group was either overqualified or sheltered behind the euphemism of self-employment. We lost a million good manufacturing jobs between 1990 and 1995, continuing the trend that has reduced the blue-collar work force from about 30 percent in the 1950s to about halt that today. White-collar workers found out they were no longer immune. For the fist time, they were let go in numbers virtually equal to those for blue-collar workers. Many resorted to temporary work-with lower pay, fewer benefits and less status. All this in a country where people meeting for the first time say, "What do you do?" Then there is the matter of remuneration. Whatever happened to wage gains four years into a recovery. The Labor Department recently reported that real wages fell 2.3 percent in the 12-month period ending this March. Since 1973, wages adjusted for inflation have declined by about a quarter for high school dropouts, by a sixth for high school graduates and by about 7 percent for those with some college education. Only the wages of college graduates are up, by 5 percent, and recently starting salaries, even for this group, have not kept up with inflation. While the top 5 percent of the population was setting new income records almost every year, poverty rates rose from 11 percent to 15 percent. No wonder this is beginning to be called the Silent Depression. What is going on here? In previous business cycles, companies with rising productivity raised wages to keep labor. Is the historical link between productivity improvements and income growth severed? Of all the reasons given for the wage squeeze —— international competition, technology, deregulation, the decline of unions and defense cuts —— technology is probable the most crucial. It has favored the educated and skilled. Just think that in 1976, 78 percent of auto workers and steelworkers in good mass production jobs were high school dropouts. But these jobs are disappearing fast. Education and job training are what count. These days college graduates can expect to earn 1.9 times the likely earnings of high school graduates, up from 1.45 times in the 1970s. The earning squeeze on middle-class and working-class people and the scarcity of "good, high-paying" jobs will be the big political issue of the 1990s. Americans have so far responded to their falling fortunes by working harder. American males now toil about a week and a half longer than they did in 1973, the first time this century working hours have increased over an extended period of time. Women, particularly in poorer families, are working harder, too. Two-worker families rose by more than 20 percent in the 1980s. Seven million workers hold at least two jobs, the highest proportion in half a century. America is simply not growing fast enough to tighten the labor market and push up real wages. The danger of the information age is that while in the short run it may be cheaper to replace workers with technology, in the long run it is potentially self-destructive because there will not be enough purchasing power to grow the economy. To avoid this dismal prospect, we must get on the virtuous cycle of higher growth and avoid the vicious cycle of retrenchment. Otherwise, an angry, disillusioned and frustrated population —— whose rage today is focused on big government, excess taxes, immigration, welfare and affirmative action —— may someday be brought together by its sense of diminished hopes. Then we will all be in for a very difficult time. 36. How many people were partially employed last year? A) 1 million. B) 3 million. C) 6 million. D) 7 million. 37. What are the reasons for cut for wages? A) Deregulation, fierce competition, technology. B) International competition, technology, decline of unions, defense cuts, deregulation. C) Loss of manufacturing jobs, international competition, productivity improvements, deregulation. D) Productivity improvement, rise of poverty rates, international competition, technology. 38. The scarcity of good jobs in American is because of ____. A) the vicious cycle of retrenchment B) the failure of the government to tighten the labor market C) the threat of information age D) All of above TEXT B Adam Smith and His "Invisible Hand" Theory Adam Smith, the Scottish professor of moral philosophy, was thrilled by his recognition of order in the economic system. His book, the Wealth of Nations (1776), is the germinal book in the field of economics which earned him the title "the father of economics". In Smiths view, a nations wealth was dependent upon production, not agriculture alone. How much it produced, he believed, depended upon how well it combined labor and the other factors of production. The more efficient the combination, the greater the output, and the greater the nations wealth. The essence of Smiths economic philosophy was his belief that an economy would work best if left to function on its own without government regulation. In those circumstances, self-interest would lead business firms to produce only those products that consumers wanted, and to produce them at the lowest possible cost. They would do this, not as a means of benefiting society, but in an effort to outperform their competitors and gain the greatest profit. But all this self interest would benefit society as a whole by providing it with more and better goods and service, at the lowest prices. Smith said in his book: "Every individual endeavors to employ his capital so that its produce may be of greatest value. He generally neither intends to promote the public interest, nor knows how much he is promoting it. He intends only his own security, only his gain. And he is in this led by an invisible hand to promote that which was no part of his intention. By pursuing his own interest he frequently promotes that of society more effectually than when he really intends to promote." The "invisible hand" was Smiths name for the economic forces that we today would call supply and demand, Smith agreed with the physiocrats and their policy of "laissez faire", letting individuals and businesses function without interference from government regulation. In that way the "invisible hand" would be free to guide the economy and maximize production." Smith was very critical of monopolies which restricted the competition that he saw as vital for economic prosperity. He recognized that the virtues of the market mechanism are fully realized only when the checks and balances of perfect competition are present. Perfect competition refers to a market in which no firm or consumer is large enough to affect the market price. The invisible hand theory is about economies in which all the markets are perfectly competitive. In such circumstances, markets will produce an efficient allocation of resources, so that an economy is on its production-possibility frontier. When all industries are subject to the checks and balances of perfect competition, markets can produce an efficient bundle of products with the most efficient techniques and using the minimum against amount of inputs. But when monopolies become pervasive, the remarkable efficiency properties of the invisible economic philosophy? 39. What is the pith of Adam Smith's economic philosophy? A) Self-interest is the life-line of economic activities. B) Government shouldn't intervene in the economy. C) Competition will benefit the society for consumers' needs are tended. D) Economic forces should be intended to promote public interest. 40. What does the "invisible hand" refer to? A) Supply and demand. B) Laissez faire. C) Self-interest. D) Market mechanism. 41. In Smith's view, monopolies ____. A) will lead the economy to cessation B) can hardly realize the checks and balances of competition C) may bring about a vicious circle of high production and low demand D) both A and B 42. It can be inferred from the text that ____. A) an efficiency allocation of resources can only be achieved in a free market B) perfect competition can be realized in a free market C) self-interest can help to maximize production and minimize inputs D) both A and B TEXT C Is Mathematics an Art? What, can rigid, cold calculating mathematics possibly have in common with subtle, creative, lofty, imaginative art? This question faithfully mirrors the state of mind of most people, even of most educated people, when they regard the numbers and symbols that populate the world of mathematics. But the great leaders of mathematics thought have frequently and repeatedly asserted that the object of their pursuit is just as much an art as it is a science, and perhaps even a fine art. Maxime Bocher, and eminent mathematician living at the beginning of this century, wrote: "I like to look at mathematics almost more as an art than as a science; for the activity of the mathematician, constantly creating as he is, guided although not controlled by the external world of the senses, bears a resemblance, not fanciful, I believe, but real, to the activities of the artist —— of a painter, let us say. Rigorous deductive reasoning on the part of the mathematician may be likened here to the technical skill in drawing on the part of the painter. Just as one cannot become a painter without a certain amount of skill, so no one can become a mathematician without the power to reason accurately up to a certain point. "Yet these qualities, fundamental though they are, do not make a painter or a mathematician worthy of the name, nor indeed are they the most important factors in the case. Other qualities of a far more subtle sort, chief among which in both cases is imagination, go into the making of a good artist or a good mathematician." If mathematics wants to lay claim to being an art, however, it most show that it possesses and makes use of at least some of the elements that go to make up the things of beauty. Is not imagination, creative imagination, the most essential elements of an art? Let us take a geometric object, such as the circle. To the ordinary man, this is the rim of a wheel, perhaps with spokes in it. Elementary geometry has crowded this simple figure with radii, chords, sectors, tangents, diameters, inscribed and circumscribed polygons, and so on. Here you have already an entire geometrical world created from a very rudimentary beginning. These and other miracles are undeniable proof of the creative power of the mathematician; and, as if this were not enough, the mathematician allows the whole circle to "vanish", declares it to be imaginary, then keeps on toying with his new creation in much the same way and with much the same gusto as he did with the innocent little thing you allowed him to start out with. And all this, remember please, is just elementary plane geometry. Truly, the creative imagination displayed by the mathematician has nowhere been exceeded, not even paralleled, and, I would make bold to say, now even closely approached anywhere else. In many ways mathematics exhibits the same elements of beauty that are generally acknowledged to be the essence of poetry. First let us consider a minor point: the poet arranges his writings on the page in verses. His poem first appeals to the eye before it reaches the ear or the mind; and similarly, the mathematician lines up his formulas and equations so that their form may make an aesthetic impression. Some mathematicians are given to this love of arranging and exhibiting their equations to a degree that borders on a fault. Trigonometry, a branch of elementary mathematics particularly rich in formulas, offers some curious groups of them, curious in their symmetry and their arrangement: sin (a+b) = sin a cos b + cos a sin b cos (a+b) = cos a cos b - sin a sin b sin (a-b) = sin a cos b - cos a sin b cos (a-b) = cos a cos b + sin a sin b The superiority of poetry over other forms of verbal expression lies first in the symbolism used in poetry, and secondly in its extreme condensation and economy of words. Take a poem of universally acknowledged merit, say, Shelleys poem "To Night". Here is the second stanza: Wrap thy form in a mantle gray, star-in wrought! Blind with thine hair the eyes of Day; Kiss her until she be wearied out; Then wander oer city, and sea, and land, Touching all with thine opiate wand —— Come, long-sought! Taken literally, all this is, of course, sheer nonsense and nothing else. Night has no hair, night does not wear any clothes, and night is not an illicit peddler of narcotics. But is there anybody balmy enough to take the words of the poet literally? The words here are only comparisons, only symbols. For the sake of condensation the poet doesnt bother stating that his symbols mean such and such, but goes on to treat them as if they were realities. The mathematician does these things precisely as the poet does. Take numbers, for example, the very idea of which is an abstraction, or symbol. When you write the figure 3, you have created a symbol for a symbol, and when you say in algebra that a is a number, you have condensed all the symbols for all the numbers into one all-embracing symbol. These, like other mathematical symbols, and like the poets symbols, are a condensed, concentrated way of stating a long and rather complicated chain of simple geometrical, algebraic, or numerical relations. Another avenue by which mathematics approaches the arts is the care of exercises in regard to technique of execution. You do not enjoy a poem that is strained on the choice of words, where the rhymes are forced, a poem that bears on its face the marks of labor of the poet. Of course, we all know the stories of poem, with every line of the poem. But the result must be such that those labors are hidden behind an appearance of effortless ease, for it is only then you will grant that the poem is beautiful. The same is true in music, where we are quite apt to enjoy a rather mediocre piece if it presents considerable technical difficulties and the performer can make it look simple. Mathematicians are just as exacting with their technique of execution as any poet or artist; they are constantly preoccupied with the elegance of their proofs or the solutions of their problems. Any mathematician will instantly assign any of his proofs to the scrapheap if he can think of another way to get the same result with less apparent effort, with the accent on "apparent". He does not hesitate to spend a great deal of extra time on the solutions; and when he succeeds, when he has found this simplicity, he has the artistic satisfaction of having brought forth an elegant solution. Nor is this effort limited to the individual; mathematicians as professionals are always at work making the exposition of their science aesthetically more satisfying. The success they achieve in this labor is often remarkable. Some of the results that the original discovers have obtained in the most laborious way, making use of the most advanced and complicated branches of the science, may become, with a generation or two, very simple, very elegant, and based on almost elementary considerations. The beauty of this new way of execution becomes then the joy and the pride of the profession. The mathematician —— and especially the expert in geometry —— is an incorrigible daydreamer. The geometrician, like the poet, needs nothing at all for his work —— no laboratory, no brushes and paints, no studio; nothing but a scrap of paper and a pencil to help out his imagination by a rough and fragmentary sketch of the fleeting and complex creations he allows his imagination to play with, you may accuse both of them of absentmindedness if you wish, but either of them would give up his daydreams for anything the world could offer in exchange. These solitary dreams, these soaring flights of the excited imagination, make the geometrician, like the poet, obvious to everything around him, forgetful of his duties, his friends, his own self, but they are to him the most cherished happenings, the most precious moments of life. Are they art? 43. In the writer's opinion, what is the most fundamental element that makes a good artist or mathematician? A) Numerical skills. B) Imagination. C) Creation. D) Sense of beauty. 44. In what way do mathematicians exhibit the same elements of beauty as poet? A) Mathematicians would like to spare no effort to make their proofs elegant. B) Mathematicians love to arrange their formulas and equations so that they take a beautiful form. C) Mathematicians often arrange their formulas and equations in symmetry. D) Both B and C 45. Poetry is superior to other forms of expression for its ____. A) unusual diction B) imaginative expression C) symbolism, condensation and economy of words D) condensation and imaginative diction TEXT D Frustration and Displacement In 1948, Seattle authorities feared that a race riot would break out in a run-down housing area. A thousand families —— 300 of them black —— were jammed into temporary barracks built for war workers. Tension was in the air, rumors rife, a stabbing reported. The University of Washington, called on for advice, rushed 25 trained interviewers to the scene. The interviewers went from door to door, trying to discover the extent of racial hatred. They were surprised to find very little. Ninety percent of the whites and blacks interviewed said that they felt "about the same" of "more friendly" toward the other group since moving into the area. What, then, was eating them？ These families were angry about the ramshackle buildings, the back-firing kitchen stoves and the terrible roads inside the property. Many were worried about a strike at Boeing Airplane Co. In short, a series of frustrations from other causes had infected the whole community, and could have resulted in a race riot. Fast work by the authorities staved off this disaster. Once the true causes were discovered, buildings were repaired, new equipment installed, the roads improved. The crisis passed. This case is a dramatic application of a challenging theory about human behavior exhaustively demonstrated by a group of Yale scientists in an old book, Frustration and Aggression, which has become a classic. Since reading it some years ago, I have met many of my personal problems with better understanding, and gained fresh insight into some big public questions as well. A common result of being frustrated, the Yale investigator have shown, is an act of aggression, sometimes violent. To be alive is to have a goal and pursue it —— anything from cleaning the house, or planning a vacation, to saving money for retirement. If someone or something blocks goal, we begin to feel pent up and thwarted. Then we get mad. The blocked goal, the sense of frustration, aggression action —— this is the normal human sequence. If we are aware of what is going on inside us, however, we can save ourselves a good deal of needless pain and trouble. Everyone has encountered frustration on the highways. You are driving along a two-lane road behind a big trailer-truck. Youre in a hurry, while the truck driver seems to be enjoying the scenery. After miles of increasing frustration you grow to hate him. Finally you step on the gas and pass him defiantly, regardless of the chance you may be taking. This kind of frustration must cause thousands of accidents a year. Yet, if you realized what was going on in your nervous system, you could curb such dangerous impulses. The aggressive act that frustration produces may take a number of forms. It may be turned inward against oneself, with suicide as the extreme example. It my hit back directly at the person or thing causing the frustration. Or it may be transferred to another object —— what psychologists call displacement. Displacement can be directed against the dog, the parlor furniture, the family or even total strangers. A man rushed out of his front door in Brooklyn one fine spring morning and punched a passerby on the nose. In court he testified that he had had a quarrel with his wife. Instead of punching her he had the bad luck to punch a police detective. Aggression is not always sudden and violent; it may be devious and calculated. The spreading of rumors, malicious gossip, a deliberate plot to discredit, are some of the roundabout forms. In some cases frustration leads to the opposite of aggression, a complete retreat from life. The classic pattern of frustration and aggression is nowhere better demonstrated than in military life. GIs studied by the noted American sociologist Samuel A. Stouffer in the last war were found to be full of frustration due to their sudden loss of civilian liberty. They took it our verbally on the brass, often most unjustly. But in combat, soldiers felt far more friendly toward their officers. Why? Because they could "discharge their aggression directly against the enemy". Dr. Karl Menninger, of the famous Menninger Foundation at Topeka, pointed out that children in all societies are necessarily frustrated, practically from birth, as they are broken into the customs of the tribe. A babys first major decision is "whether to holler or swaller" —— when it discovers that the two acts cannot be done simultaneously. Children have to be taught habits of cleanliness, toilet behavior, regular feeding, punctuality; habits that too often are hammered in. Grownups with low boiling points, said Dr. Menninger, probably got that way because of excessive frustration in childhood. We can make growing up a less difficult period by giving children more love and understanding. Parents in less "civilized" societies, Menninger observes, often do this. He quote a Mohave Indian, discussing his small son: "Why should I strike him? He is small, I am big. He cannot hurt me." When we do experience frustration, there are several things we can do to channel off aggression. First, we can try to remove the cause which is blocking our goal. An individual may be able to change his foreman, even his job or his residence, if the frustration is a continuing one. If this cannot be done, then we can seek harmless displacements. Physical outlets are the most immediately helpful. Go out in the garden and dig like fury. Or take a long walk, punch a bag in the gym, make the pins fly in a bowling alley, cut down a tree. The late Richard C. Tolman, a great physicist, once told me that he continued tennis into his 60s because he followed it so helpful in working off aggressions. As a writer I receive pan letters as well as fan letters, and some of them leave me baffled and furious. (Some, I must admit, are justified.) Instead of taking it out on the family, I write the critic the nastiest reply I can contrive. That makes me feel a lot better. Next morning I read it over with renewed satisfaction. Then I tear it up and throw it in the wastebasket. Aggression gone, nobody hurt. But perhaps the best way of all to displace aggressive feelings is by hard, useful work. If both body and mind can be engaged, so much the better. The world is filled today with a great surplus of anger and conflict. We are far from knowing all about the sources of these destructive feelings, but scientists have learned enough to clear up quite a load of misery. Their findings can help us reduce that load and even utilize its energy, through a better understanding of ourselves and our neighbors. 46. According to the Yale investigators, if a person feel frustrated, he will ____. A) try to remove the obstacle on his way by all means B) find an outlet for his rancor C) take aggressive or even violent acts D) indulge in despair to some extent 47. The aggressive acts usually take the following forms except ____. A) hurting oneself B) suicide C) hitting back directly D) displacement 48. Why were GIs much more friendly towards their officers in combats according to Stouffer? A) Because they were afraid their officers might order them to assume dangerous tasks. B) Because they could release their pent up frustration against the enemy. C) Because they were more like equals and friends in face of enemy. D) All of the above. 49. Why are some adults easy to lost their temper according to Dr. Menninger? A) They probably grow up in grim circumstances. B) They are born to have a low boiling point. C) They probably grow up from families where love and understanding is lacking. D) They may have received undue frustrations in childhood. 50. What is the best way suggested by the author to discard aggressive feelings? A) Be more understanding and considerate. B) Care more about others. C) Cultivate one's character and widen one's interests. D) Engage in hard work to forget one's troubles. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. The main theme of this passage is that ____. A. Asia has come out of the economic slump B. old rivals renew between Singapore and Hong Kong C. Singapore competes against Hong Kong in economy D. Singapore and Hong Kong strive for Asias top business and financial center Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. Singapore —— As Asia starts shaking off a two-year economic slump, Singapore and Hong Kong are reviving up their old rivalry to become Asias top business and financial hub. Many claim Hong Kong has an overwhelming built-in advantage, with an economy twice as big as Singapores and the mammoth Chinese mainland market next door. But others insist that clever micromanagement by Singapores government gives this city the edge. "I really enjoy the working environment here in Singapore. It is effective," said Tobias Pelzer, Singapore managing director for the German software firm Netlife, which made the city-state its Asian headquarters last year. "I got off the plane here once as the first or second person. I came to the belt and my suitcase was there. How do they manage that?" Pelzer said. Singapore leaders say such efficiency come largely from strict regulations. They pervade nearly every aspect of Singapore society. In Hong Kong it is a different story. "This is such a cowboy town. I could probably print up business cards labeling myself as a brain surgeon and talk my way into an operating room," said Mike Carlson, managing editor of the Hong Kong lifestyle weekly HK Magazine. Carlson, who has lived in both cities, said Hong Kongs grimy bustle and cramped living conditions sometime leave him pining for Singapores cleaner air, cheaper rents and elegant street side cafes. Hong Kong residents tend to shun the red tape and social controls that are a way of life in Singapore. Thousands of small entrepreneurs find it easier to flourish in hands-off Hong Kong and this draws in banks, telecommunications firms and other big service providers, said Michael Enright, an economist at Hong Kong University. "Lots of HK firms have no fixed assets other than a cellular phone. You go in the morning and youre registered as a company by afternoon," Enright said. Hong Kongs tax rate is fixed at 16 percent. Singapores is 26 percent. But Singapore selectively huge tax cuts to companies that locate their headquarters on the island. With the worst of Asias crisis apparently past, both cities are showing signs of reheating their competition. Singapore is cautiously letting foreign competitors into its banking and telecommunications sectors, and establishing a billion-dollar fund as seed money for high-tech entrepreneurs. Hong Kong is converting its taxis to burn liquefied petroleum gas to fight worsening pollution, and is holding talks with Walt Disney Co about building a theme park. It also set up its own multimillion-dollar fund for high-tech firms. 51. The main theme of this passage is that ____. A) Asia has come out of the economic slump B) old rivals renew between Singapore and Hong Kong C) Singapore competes against Hong Kong in economy D) Singapore and Hong Kong strive for Asia's top business and financial center TEXT F First read the questions. 52. The primary purpose of this passage is ____. A. to trace out the development of universities in United States B. to compare American universities with European universities before the turn of the century C. to criticize the conditions of American universities in the 19th century D. to describe and explain the upheaval in American higher education in the later 1800s 53. Which of the following is NOT a new course opened up according to the passage? A. The history of the fine arts. B. Advanced Spanish. C. Classical Philology. D. Classical Literature. Now go through TEXT F quickly to answer question 52 and 53. To produce the upheaval in the United States that changed and modernized the domain of higher education from the mid-1860s to the mid-1880s, three primary causes interacted. The emergence of a half-dozen leaders in education provided the personal force that was needed. Moreover, an outcry for a fresher, more practical, and more advanced kind of instruction arose among the alumni and friends of nearly all of the old colleges and grew into a movement that overrode all conservative opposition. The aggressive "Young Yale" movement appeared, demanding partial alumni control, a more simultaneously rallied to relieve the colleges poverty and demand new enterprise. Education was pushing toward higher standards in the East by throwing off church leadership everywhere, and in the West by finding a wider range of studies and a new sense of public duty. The old-style classical education received its most crushing blow in the citadel of Harvard College, where Dr. Charles Eliot, a young captain of thirty-five, son of a former treasure of Harvard, led the progressive forces. Five revolutionary advances were made during the first years of Dr. Eliot administration. They were the elevation and amplification of entrance requirements, the enlargement of the curriculum and the development of the elective system, the recognition of graduate study in the liberal arts, the raising of professional training in law, medicine and engineering to a postgraduate level, and the fostering of greater maturity in student life. Standards of admission were sharply advanced in 1872-1873 and 1876-1877. By the appointment of a dean to take charge of student affairs, and a wise handling of discipline, the undergraduates were led to regard themselves more as young gentlemen and less as young animals. One new course of study after another was opened up —— science, music, the history of the fine arts, advanced Spanish, political economy, physics, classical philology, and international law. 52. The primary purpose of this passage is ____. A) to trace out the development of universities in United States B) to compare American universities with European universities before the turn of the century C) to criticize the conditions of American universities in the 19th century D) to describe and explain the upheaval in American higher education in the later 1800's 53. Which of the following is NOT a new course opened up according to the passage? A) The history of the fine arts. B) Advanced Spanish. C) Classical Philology. D) Classical Literature. TEXT G First read the question. 54. The writer of this letter ____. A. makes a complaint and demands the company to finish the work to his satisfaction B. requires the company to compensate for his losses C. attempts to sign a contract with the company for the installation of dry walls D. tries to persuade Mr. Black into reinstalling the walls Now go through TEXT G quickly to answer question 54. Dear Mr. Blank: Last October I signed a contract with your company for the installation of dry walls and the renovation of a bathroom in my home at the above address. I am now appealing to you to have this work completed in a satisfactory manner. I have spoken to your Quincy, Mass, store manager on several occasions, to the plumbing department manager, to your maintenance people, and to anyone else who seemed to be in a position to assist in completing the work. I have received considerate responses followed by service people trying to do the necessary work. Nevertheless, I have had expensive broadloom rugs badly stained; I have had water pour through my kitchen ceiling at least six times after your people left my home with everything supposedly in order; and I now again have leaks, grout falling out, and other defects. I have experienced nothing but trouble with your workmanship and materials from the outlet. I will illustrate with details —— an incomplete list —— which your records should confirm. 1. An expensive vanity was delivered with doors assembled upside down and doors catches not functioning properly. 2. The dry wall work was left in such rough condition that your installers had to return several times. In some areas sanding was overlooked; in others, dry wall taping was not used, and molding was left incomplete. (The next few paragraphs listed additional defects.) Mr. Blank, I had your service people come to the house at least six were denials of responsibility. Children were blamed, etc. And in each case, it was finally established that the installation was faulty. At this writing, water is again leaking to the floor below when the shower is used. Frankly, I believe I have reached the point of no return in dealing with your local staff. I now want to have my bathroom completed in a workmanlike manner, even if it means removing the entire installation. In the event that any removal is necessary, I will not accept a patched-up finish. For a job that costs about 2500, your performance has been outrageously bad. I expect the courtesy of a prompt reply from you, and the necessary inspections and corrections from qualified personnel. Sincerely yours, Howard Gerber 54. The writer of this letter ____. A) makes a complaint and demands the company to finish the work to his satisfaction B) requires the company to compensate for his losses C) attempts to sign a contract with the company for the installation of dry walls D) tries to persuade Mr. Black into reinstalling the walls TEXT H First read the questions. 55. What made the mass production of automobiles possible? A. Standardization of parts. B. The idea of assembly line. C. Standardization of parts and assembly line. D. The revolutionary rise of workers wages. 56. Why do some Americans consider the automobiles as a mixed blessing? A. The automobile provides much convenience and people cant live without it. B. Despite its advantages and conveniences, man have to tackle its severe consequences such as traffic accidents, air pollution, etc. C. The automobile is convenient but inconsiderable in peoples lives. D. It is not clearly stated. Now go through TEXT H quickly to answer question 55 and 56. America on Wheels Early automobiles were sometimes only "horseless carriages" powered by gasoline or steam engines. Some of them were so noisy that cities often made laws forbidding their use because they frightened horses. Many countries helped to develop the automobiles. The internal-combustion engine was required in Austria, and France was an early leader in automobile manufacturing. But it was in the United States after 1900 that the automobiles was improved most rapidly. As a large and growing country, the United States needed cars and trucks transportation in places not served by trains. Two brilliant ideas made possible the mass production of automobiles. An American inventor named Eli Whitney thought of one of them, which is known as "standardization of parts." In an effort to speed up production in his gun factory, Whitney decided that each part of a gun could be made by machines so that it would be exactly like all the others of its kind. For example, each trigger would be exactly like all other triggers. A broken trigger could then be replaced immediately by an identical one. After Whitneys idea was applied to automobile production, each part no longer had to be made by hand. Machines were developed that could produce hundreds, even thousands, of identical parts that would fit into place easily and quickly. Another American, Henry Ford, developed the idea of the assembly line. Before Ford introduced the assembly line, each car was built by hand. Such a process was, of course, very slow. As a result, automobiles were so expensive that only rich people could afford them. Ford proposed a system in which each worker would have a special job to do. One person for example, would make only a portion of the wheels. Another would place the wheels on the car. And still another would insert the bolts that held the wheels to the car. Each worker needed to learn only one or two routine tasks. But the really important part of Fords idea was to bring the work to the worker. An automobile frame, which looks like a steel skeleton, was put on a moving platform. As the frame moved past the workers, each worker could attach a single part. When the car reached the end of the line, it was completely assembled. Oil, gasoline, and water were added, and the car was ready to be driven away. With the increased production made possible by the assembly line, automobiles became much cheaper, and more people were able to afford them. Today it can be said that wheels rum America. The four rubber tires of the automobile move America through work and play. Wheels spin, and people drive off to their jobs. Tires turn, and people shop for the weeks food at the big supermarket down the highway. Hubcaps whirl, and the whole family spends a day at the lake. Each year more wheels crowd the highways as 10 million new cars roll out of the factories. One out of every six American works at assembling cars, driving trucks, building roads, or pumping gas. America without cars? Its unthinkable. But even though the majority of Americans would find it hard to imagine what life could be like without a car, some have begun to realize that the automobile is a mixed blessing. Traffic accidents are increasing steadily, and large cities are plagued by traffic congestion. Worst of all, perhaps, is the air pollution caused by the internal-combustion engine. Every car engine burns hundreds of gallons of fuel each year and pumps hundreds of pounds of carbon monoxide and other gases into the air. These gases are one source of the smog that hangs over large cities. Some of these gases are poisonous and dangerous to health, especially for someone with a weak heart or a respiratory disease. One answer to the problem of air pollution is to build a car that does not pollute. Thats what several major automobile manufacturers are trying to do. But building a clean car is easier said than done. So far, progress has been slow. Another solution is to eliminate car fumes altogether by getting rid of the internal-combustion engine. Inventors are now working on turbine-powered cars, as well as on cars powered by steam and electricity. But most of us wont be driving cars run on batteries on boiling water for a while yet. Many auto makers believe that it will take years to develop practical models that are powered by electricity or steam. To rid the world of pollution —— pollution caused not just by cars, but by all of modern industrial life —— many people believe we must make some fundamental changes in the way many of us live. Americans may, for example, have to cut down on the number of privately owned cars and depend more on public mass transit systems. Certainly the extensive use of new transit systems could cut down on traffic congestion and air pollution. But these changes do not come easily. Sometimes they clash head on with other urgent problems. For example, if a factory closes down because it cannot meet government pollution standards, a large number of workers suddenly find themselves without jobs. Questioning the quality of the air they breathe becomes less important than worrying about the next paycheck. But drastic action must be taken if we are to reduce traffic accidents, traffic congestion, and air pollution. While wheels have brought better and more convenient transportation, they have also brought new and unforeseen problems. Progress, it turned out, has more than one face. 55. What made the mass production of automobiles possible? A) Standardization of parts. B) The idea of assembly line. C) Standardization of parts and assembly line. D) The revolutionary rise of workers' wages. 56. Why do some Americans consider the automobiles as a mixed blessing? A) The automobile provides much convenience and people can't live without it. B) Despite its advantages and conveniences, man have to tackle its severe consequences such as traffic accidents, air pollution, etc. C) The automobile is convenient but inconsiderable in people's lives. D) It is not clearly stated. TEXT I First read the question. 57. The writer gives us suggestions on ____. A. how to relax in a crowd B. how to present oneself before a crowd C. how to tackle touchy problems in stressful situations D. how to establish good relationship with strangers Now go through TEXT I quickly to answer question 57. Recently I was invited to lecture on anxiety to several hundred mental-health professionals. My talk was scheduled to follow those of a number of prominent psychiatrists. When my turn came, I was especially nervous because the speaker before me had been particularly impressive and charming. As I approached the podium, my heart pounded and my mouth went completely dry. What am I doing here? I asked myself. Making matters worse, my presentation partly dealt with fear of public speaking. To calm myself, I tried an unconventional tactic. I asked the audience, "How many of you feel nervous when you give a speech?" Nearly every hand went up. "Well, thats exactly how I feel right now!" The audience responded with laughter. I relaxed and was able to move into my presentation. At times, we all find ourselves in situations that make us nervous. Perhaps youre afraid of saying foolish things at a cocktail party, stumbling over a presentation at work or having your mind go blank on a test. For some of us, the anxiety is so severe that it is incapacitating. And nearly everyone has experienced mild forms of social anxiety. Over the years, my work with hundreds of patients has taught me that anyone can increase his or her social confidence, even in the most stressful situations. Here are a few simple but helpful tips: 1. Take off the false front. When my wife and I moved into a new neighborhood, our daughter began playing with a girl who lived nearby in a mansion. One night, clad in jeans and an old T-shirt, I stopped by to pick up my daughter. Sue, the friends mother, who was dressed like a model out of Vogue, invited me into a large hallway filled with expensive antiques and oil paintings. It was like a museum. I felt very awkward. Noticing my uneasiness, Sue asked if something was wrong. I had the urge to deny how I felt but instead confessed, "Im not used to being in such a fancy house." "Why, I didnt think psychiatrists ever felt insecure," she said with a laugh. I believe my openness made us both feel more comfortable. Denying how I felt would only have added to the tension and made me appear phony. As with the mental-health speech, I was frank about my insecurities. Such frankness is a good way to bring others closer to us. 2. Tackle your fears one step at a time. While affiliated with Pennsylvania State University, psychologist J. Mahoney and gymnastics coach Marshall Avener investigated the impact of anxiety on gymnasts at the 1976 U.S. Olympic Team trials. Who do you think experienced more anxiety before competition —— the athletes who went on to win, or those who ended up losing? The researchers discovered that both groups were equally anxious. What distinguished the winners from the losers was how they coped. Less successful dwelled on their fears, arousing themselves to state of near panic as they imagined a disastrous performance. The winners typically ignored their anxiety, concentrating instead on what they had to do: Take a deep breath, or now reach up and grip the bar. They controlled their fears by breaking the task down into a series of small steps. This technique will work with virtually anything you have to accomplish. 3. Focus on others. Many of us focused to talk to people in uncomfortable situations. Maybe its your new boss at a company party or your future in-laws. What do you say when your mind does blank? Make the other person the focus of the conversation. Ask a few questions: "How did you get interested in such-and-such?" or "Will you tell me more about it?" All most people want is for you to pay attention to them. Psychiatrists and psychologists make handsome livings just by nodding their heads knowingly and asking a few questions. If they can get away with it, so can you. 4. Turn anxiety into energy. Everybody gets nervous before performing in public, whether making a business presentation or acting in a school play. The trick is to let your nerves work for you. 5. Stop comparing yourself. One of our biggest social cripples is the fear of not measuring up. Perhaps you feel you wont impress others because they are more confident , successful, intelligent or attractive than you. Such thinking is wrong-headed. The secret of doing well with others is accepting yourself. 57. The writer gives us suggestions on ____. A) how to relax in a crowd B) how to present oneself before a crowd C) how to tackle touchy problems in stressful situations D) how to establish good relationship with strangers TEXT J First read the question. 58. Ghirardelli square is mentioned in the passage to illustrate ____. A. the construction of new buildings to solve the problem of physical decay of old buildings B. the demolition of old buildings to make way for new buildings C. the restoration of old buildings to turn them to commercial purposes D. the tendency to endow old cities new identity and character Now go through TEXT J quickly to answer question 58. In spite of the wealth of examples of urban architecture in older cities, both in Europe and in the United States, solutions to current problems of the physical decay of cities in the United States have come slowly. The first reaction after the war was to bulldoze and build bright new towers and efficient roadways, but these solutions did not respond to people. By the close of the 1960s it became more common to deal gently with the existing urban fabric and to insert new buildings in such a way as to complement the physical and social environment; in other cases valued buildings have been rehabilitated and returned to economic productivity. A particularly striking example is the rehabilitation of Ghirardelli Square, San Francisco. This hillside mélange of nineteenth-century commercial buildings, clustered around a chocolate plant, was purchased in 1962 by William Roth to forestall wholesale development of the waterfront as a district of high-rent apartment towers. Nearly all of the nineteenth-century buildings were retained and refurbished, and a low arcade was added on the waterside. There are several levels, dotted with kiosks and fountains, which offer varied prospects of San Francisco Bay. Perhaps most telling is the preservation of the huge Ghirardelli sign as an important landmark; it is such improbable, irrational, and cherished idiosyncrasies which give cities identity and character. 58. Ghirardelli square is mentioned in the passage to illustrate ____. A) the construction of new buildings to solve the problem of physical decay of old buildings B) the demolition of old buildings to make way for new buildings C) the restoration of old buildings to turn them to commercial purposes D) the tendency to endow old cities' new identity and character TEXT K First read the question. 59. In the writers point of view, man is unique in ____. A. killing members of the same species habitually B. enjoying watching disgusting acts of violence C. gaining pleasure from brutally treating each other D. his savage impulse to torture members of the same species 60. The word "aggression" ____. A. is difficult to define because it covers a great variety of human activities B. is ambiguous because the dividing line between aggression and many other acts is unclear C. is so imprecise that it is pointless to define it D. Both A and B Now go through TEXT K quickly to answer question 59 and 60. Than man is an aggressive creature will hardly be disputed. With the exception of certain rodents, no other vertebrate habitually destroys members of his own species. No other animal takes positive pleasure in the exercise of cruelty upon another of his own kind. We generally describe the most disgusting examples of mans cruelty as brutal, implying by these adjectives that such behaviors is characteristic of less highly developed animals than ourselves. In truth, however, the extreme of "brutal" behavior are confined to man; and there is no parallel in nature to our savage treatment of each other. The depressing fact is that we are cruelest and most ruthless species that has ever walked the earth; and that, although we may shrink back in horror when we read newspaper or history book of the brutalities committed by man upon man, we know in our hearts that each one of us harbors within himself those same savage impulses which lead to murder, to torture and to war. To write about human aggression is a difficult task because the term is used so many different senses. Aggression is one of those words which every one knows, but which is nevertheless hard to define. As psychologists use it, it covers a very wide range of human behavior. The red-faced infant squalling for the bottle is being aggressive; and so is the judge who awards a thirty-year sentence for robbery. the guard in a concentration camp who tortures his helpless victim is obviously acting aggressively. Less manifestly, but no less certainly, so is the neglected wife who threatens or attempts suicide in order to regain her husbands affection. When a word becomes so diffusely applied that it is used both of the competitive striving of a footballer and also of the bloody violence of a murderer, it ought either to be dropped or else more closely defined. Aggression is a combine term which is fairly bursting at its junctions. Yet until we can more clearly designate and comprehend the various aspects of human behavior which are subsumed under this head, we cannot discard the concept. One difficulty is that there is no clear dividing line between those forms of aggression which we all deplore and those which we must not disown if we are to survive. When a child rebels against authority it is being aggressive; but it is also manifesting a drive towards independence which is a necessary and valuable part of growing up. The desire for power has, in extreme form, disastrous aspects which we all acknowledge; but the drive to conquer difficulties, or to gain mastery over the external world underlies the greatest of human achievements. Some writers define aggression as "that response which follows frustration", or as "an act whose goal-response is injury to an organism (or organism surrogate)". In the authors view these definitions impose limits upon the concepts of aggression word is attempting to express. It is worth noticing, for instance, that the words we use to describe intellectual effort are aggressive words. We attack problems, or get our teeth into them. We sharpen our wits, hoping that our mind will develop a keen edge in order that we may better divide a problem into its component parts. Although intellectual tasks are often frustrating, to argue that all intellectual effort is the result of frustration is to impose too negative a coloring upon the positive impulse to comprehend and master the external world. 59. In the writer's point of view, man is unique in ____. A) killing members of the same species habitually B) enjoying watching disgusting acts of violence C) gaining pleasure from brutally treating each other D) his savage impulse to torture members of the same species 60. The word "aggression" ____. A) is difficult to define because it covers a great variety of human activities B) is ambiguous because the dividing line between aggression and many other acts is unclear C) is so imprecise that it is pointless to define it D) Both A and B PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 可能没有其他地方会比一月份的哈尔滨更寒冷彻骨，但这并不意味着人们会因此只呆在家里不出门。相反，届时会有许多来自世界各地的人们相聚在冰天雪地的哈尔滨，庆祝一年 一度的冰雕节。冰雕节与每年的1月5日至2月25日举行，来自世界各地的参赛选手间参 加角逐，竞争最佳冰雪艺术奖。入夜，当千万盏闪烁的彩灯照亮冰雕时，五彩缤纷的冰雕显 得更加迷人了。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. Pushed by rural poverty, pulled by the hope of a better life in the cities, tens of millions of country people uproot themselves every year to join the swelling urban slums. The migrants find no houses waiting for them, no water supplies, no sewerage systems, no schools —— and no welcome. They are usually resented by wealthier citizens and ignored, at best, by the authorities. They have to settle on land no one else wants, land that is too wet, too dry, too steep or too polluted for normal habitation. They throw up makeshift hovels, made of whatever they can find —— sticks, fronds, cardboard, tarpaper or petrol tins. If they are lucky, they may use corrugated iron. Infant morality rates in city slums in Bangladesh are 50 times higher even than in the deprived countryside the migrants left behind; in Manilas slums they are three times higher —— and tuberculosis is nine times more common —— than in the rest of the city. Worldwide, the UN estimates, at least 250 million urban dwellers cannot get safe drinking water and many of those who do, have to rely on standpipes that run for only for a few hours a day. At least 400 million are without latrines for sanitation. By 2000, most children in Third World towns will be born to such desperately poor families. Already more than 100 million homeless children struggle to survive on the streets. PART V WRITING Directions: For this topic, different people have different ideas. Then whats yours? Write an essay of about 300 words within 60 minutes. My View on Opportunity In the first paragraph you should present your thesis statement and in the following paragraphs you should support your statement with appropriate details or examples. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. 09 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION Directions: In sections A, B, C you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. SECTION A TALK Directions: Questions 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given ONE minute to answer the following questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. Children in Britain will normally come to the age of _______ when they finish their primary school education. A) seven B) five C) ten D) eleven 2. Compulsory education in Britain is ________. A) from 7 to 11 B) from 5 to 16 C) from 4 to 16 D) from 5 to 15 3. The secondary education requires children to learn some foreign languages, but the first foreign languages is ________. A) German B) Italian C) Spanish D) French 4. Students who wish to go on college will have to take a two-leveled _______. A) General College Examinations B) General Course Examinations C) General Certificate Examinations D) General Compulsory Examinations 5. When you are a student at university, the state will pay for the cost of ________. A) your study only B) your living on campus only C) your study and living on campus D) your accommodation SECTION B INTERVIEW Directions: Questions 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview, you will be given ONE minute to answer the following questions. Now listen to the interview. 6. Actor Dallas McKennon pointed out that broadcast stations are granted a license to ______. A) entertain and advertise B) educate and advertise C) educate and entertain D) be informative and instructive 7. Dallas Mckennon said that one of the reasons he likes to act in cartoons is that ______. A) cartoons are a less violent medium B) cartoons are a violent medium C) cartoons are a more violent medium D) cartoons are an educative medium 8. Dallas Mckennon said that for cartoons, actors are selected ________. A) for the way they look, not the the way they sound B) both for the way they look and the way they sound C) for the way they sound, not the way they look D) both for the way they act their roles and the way they look 9. In talking about his career in Hollywood, Dallas Mckennon said that his work has been ________. A) exclusively in cartoons B) only in Disney feature films C) mainly in cartoons and in scientific films D) both in cartoons and in scientific films 10. According to Dallas Mckennon, the old way of making cartoons was to _________. A) do the drawings first, and then have the actors record the sound B) photograph the actors first, and then do the drawings C) record the sound first, and then photograph the actors D) find the actors first and then have the record the sound SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING Directions: In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONCE ONLY. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points,. Your notes will be marked but it is important that you yourself can understand them because you will need the information to complete a gap-filling task on a separate answer sheet after Part II. Proof Reading And Error Correction. Comets A comet is an object that resembles a fuzzy (16) and travels along a definite path through the solar system. Some of the brightest comets develop a long shining (17) when they come near the sun. Most comets cannot be seen without a (18). Some are visible to the unaided eye, but only for several weeks or months when they pass (19) to the sun. Halleys Comet is probably the best known comet. In 1973, Comet Kohoutek became the first comet to be (20) by men in space. Astronauts in the Skylab space station (21) it and so provided much new information about comets. People used to believe the coming of a comet would lead to a (22), such as a war or an epidemic. Halleys Comet revived these (23) in 1910, but the earth passed through the comets tail with no apparent harm. The pressure of the suns light may push the (24) dust particles and gas molecules away from the coma, forming one or more tails. This pressure makes a comets tail point away from the sun,. When a comet (25) the sun, the tail brings up the rear. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passages contains TEN errors. Each indicated line contains a maximum of ONE error. IN each case, only ONE word is involved. You should proof-read the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position if the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. Henry Fielding, the famous novelist who was also 26) a London magistrate, once made a night raid to two known hideouts in this city-within-a-city; he found seven men, women, and children packed away in a few tiny 27) stinking rooms. All of these people, included little children of five and six who were trained as pick-pockets, were wanted for crime. Conditions like these bred more criminals. One of the 28) typical cases was that Jack Shepard, whose execution in 1724 was watched by two hundred thousand people. Shepard, the son of honest working people, was an 29) apprentice in a respectful trade. He ran away from it because he fancied that he had been ill-treated, and soon 30) found it was easy to make more money by thieving 31) as his father had done by a lifetime of honest work. 32) In Shepards day highwaymen committed robberies at broad daylight, in sight of a crowd, and rode solemnly and 33) triumphantly through the town with danger of molestation. If they were chased, twenty or thirty armed men were ready 34) to come to their assistance. Murder was a everyday affair, 35) and there were many people who made heroes from the murderers. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS Directions: In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of fifteen multiple choice questions. Reading the passages and the mark your answers on your answer sheet. TEXT A Harrington Wilsons selling technique was simplicity itself. It was nothing more than a subtle manipulation of human vanity. He was aware that there were a number of people who professed to know a great deal about antiques, and even more who would rather not confess that they did not and who accordingly practiced little tricks and subterfuges to conceal their ignorance their neighbors. The women —— they were mainly women —— jostling round his stall, picking over his shoddy wares, would sometimes run a finger round the rim of a cup or hold it knowingly up to the light as if to the test its luster, and plates were invariably turned upside down in search of china marks. To such a customer, Harrington would lean forward, benevolent and confidential, and in a conspiratorial whisper would murmur: "No, madam. Im afraid its not genuine (Wedgwood, Sevres —— whatever it might be) but it is a superb copy —— no one would ever suspect that it was not real, unless, of course, you told them. I can let you have it for —— I could sell it for much more, but it would be unethical of me to try to pass it off as genuine „" The customer, overwhelmed by such honesty and privately determined not to be quite so honest about the article to heir friends, would then willingly pay 2 for something that had cost Harrington a few pence. The profit margin on these transactions was obviously so great that he was soon able to set up another stall and then a shop and yet another and so on. He enlarged his specialties, dealing in spurious Victoriana, Georgian silver, trinkets and bric-a-brac, eventually branching out into reproduction furniture and paintings. Without any deliberate intention of doing so, he acquired an extensive knowledge of the antique business and as time went on, was accounted one of the greatest experts of his time. 36. It seems that Harrington Wilson's initial success owed a great deal to _______. A) his apparent ingenuousness B) the good bargains he offered C) his air of gullibility D) the honesty of his methods 37. Among the people who patronized Harrington Wilson's stall, there were some who ______. A) had more knowledge than they appeared to have B) were less knowledgeable than they appeared C) did not trouble to conceal their ignorance D) dislike being thought intellectual snobs 38. When a woman customer held an article "knowingly up to the light" (line 7),she was trying to _______. A) demonstrate her expertise B) make sure she was not being cheated C) compare it with another article she had bought D) show her appreciation of its charm TEXT B Arid region in the southwestern United States have become increasingly inviting playgrounds for the growing number of recreation seeks who vehicles such as motorcycles or powered trail bikes and indulge in hill-climbing contests or in carving new trails in the desert. But recent scientific studies show that these off-road vehicles can cause damage to desert landscapes that has long-range effects on the areas water-conserving characteristics and on the entire ecology, both plant and animal. Research by scientists in the western Mojave Desert in California revealed that compaction of the sandy arid soil resulting from the passage of just one motorcycle markedly reduced the infiltration ability of the soil and created a stream of rain runoff water that eroded the hillside surface. In addition, the researchers discovered that the soil compaction cause by the off-road vehicles often killed native plants species and resulted in the invasion of different plant species within a few years. The native perennial species required many more years before they showed signs of returning. The scientists calculated that roughly a century would be required for the infiltration capacity of the Mojave soil to be restored after being compared by vehicles. 39. According to text, what is being damaged? A) Motorcycles. B) The desert landscape. C) Roads through the desert. D) New plant species. 40. According to the text, what is happening to native plants in these areas? A) They are becoming more compact. B) They are adapting. C) They are invading other areas. D) They are dying. TEXT C Without regular supplies of some hormones our capacity to behave would be seriously impaired; without others we would soon die. Tiny amounts of some hormones can modify our moods and our actions, our inclination to eat or to drink, our aggressiveness or submissiveness, and our reproductive and parental behavior. And hormones do more than influence adult behavior; early in life they help to determine the development of bodily form and may even determine an individuals behavioral capacities. Later in life the changing outputs of some endocrine glands and the bodys changing sensitivity to some hormones are essential aspects of the phenomena of aging. Communication within the body and the consequent integration of behavior were considered the exclusive province of the nervous system up to the beginning of the present century. The emergence of endocrinology as a separate discipline can probably be traced to the experiments of Bayliss and Starling on the hormone secretion. This substance is secreted from cell in the intestinal walls when food enters the stomach; it travels through the bloodstream and stimulates the pancreas to liberate pancreatic juice, which aids in digestion. By showing that special cells secret chemical agents that are conveyed by the bloodstream and regulate distant target organs or tissues. Bayliss and Starling demonstrated that chemical integration can occur without participation of the nervous system. The term "hormone" was first used with reference to secretion. Starling derived the term form the Greek hormone, meaning "to excite or set in motion." The term "endocrine" was introduced shortly thereafter. "Endocrine" is used to refer to glands that secrete products into the bloodstream. The term "endocrine" contrasts with "exocrine," which is applied to glands that secrete their products through ducts to the site of action. Examples of exocrine juice through a duct into the intestine. Exocrine glands are also called duct glands, while endocrine glands are called ductless. 41. What is the author's main purpose in the text? A) To explain the specific functions of various hormones. B) To provide general information of about hormones. C) To explain how the term "hormone" evolved. D) To report on experiments in endocrinology 42. Which of the following is NOT mentioned as an effect hormones? A) Modification of behavior. B) Sensitivity to hunger and thirst. C) Aggressive feelings. D) Maintenance of blood pressure. 43. The text supports which of the following conclusions? A) The human body requires large amounts of most hormones. B) Synthetic hormones can replace a person's natural supply of hormones if necessary. C) The quantity of hormones produced and their effects on the body are related to a person's age. D) The short child of tall parents very likely had a hormone deficiency early in life. 44. According to the text, another term for exocrine glands is _______. A) duct glands B) endocrine glands C) ductless glands D) intestinal glands TEXT D To get a chocolate out of a box requires a considerable amount of unpacking; the box has to be taken out of the paper bag in which it arrived; the cellophane wrapper has to be torn off, the lid opened and the paper removed; the chocolate itself then has to be unwrapped from its own piece of paper. But this insane amount of wrapping is not confined to luxuries. It is now becoming increasingly difficult to buy anything that is not done up in cellophane, polythene, or paper. The package itself is of no interest to the shopper, who usually throws it away immediately, unless wrapping accounts for much of the refuse put out by the average London household each week. So why is it done? Some of it, like the cellophane on meat, is necessary, but most of the rest is simply competitive selling. This is abused. Packaging is using up scarce energy and resources and messing up the environment. Little reach is being carried out on the costs of alternative types of packaging. Just how possible is it, for instance, for local authorities to salvage paper, pulp it, and recycle it as egg-boxes? Would it be cheaper to plant another forest? Paper is the material most used for packaging —— 20 million paper bags are apparently used in Great Britain each day —— but very little is salvaged. A machine has been developed that pulps paper then processes it into packaging, e.g. egg-boxes and cartons. This could be easily adapted for local authorities use. It would mean that people would have to separate their refuse into paper and non-paper, with a different dustbin for each. Paper is, in fact, probably the material that can be most easily recycled; and now, with massive increases in paper prices, the time has come at which collection by local authorities could be profitable. Recycling of this kind is already happening with milk bottles, which are returned to the dairies, washed out, and refilled. But both glass and paper are being threatened by the growing use of plastic. More and more dairies are experimenting with plastic bottles, and British dairies would be producing the equivalent of enough plastic tubing to encircle the earth every five or six days! The trouble with plastic is that it does not rot. Some environmentalists argue that only solution to the problem of ever growing mounds of plastic containers is to do away with plastic altogether in the shops, a suggestion unacceptable to many manufacturers who say there is no alternative to their handy plastic packs. It is evident that more research is needed into the recovery and re-use of various material and into the cost of collecting and recycling containers as opposed to producing new ones. Unnecessary packaging, intended to be used just once, and making things look better so more people will guy them, is clearly becoming increasingly absurd. But it is not so much a question of doing away with packaging as using it sensibly. What is needed now is a more unimportant function. 45. The "local authorities" are ________. A) the Town council B) the police C) the paper manufacturer D) the most influential citizens 46. If paper is to be recycled ________. A) more forests will have to be planted B) the use of paper bags will have to be restricted C) people will have to use different dustbins for their rubbish D) the local authorities will have to reduce the price of paper 47. The environmentalists think that ________. A) more plastic packaging should be used B) plastic is the most convenient form of packaging C) too much plastic is wasted D) shops should stop using plastic containers TEXT E For me, scientific knowledge is divided into mathematical sciences, natural sciences or sciences dealing with the natural world (physical and biological sciences), and sciences dealing with mankind (psychology, sociology, all the sciences of cultural achievements, every kind of historical knowledge). Apart from these sciences is philosophy, about which we will talk later. In the first place, all this is pure or theoretical knowledge, sought only for the purpose of understanding, in order to fulfill the need to understand that is intrinsic and consubstantial to man. What distinguishes man from animal is that he knows and needs to know. If man did not know that the world existed, and that the world was of a certain kind, that he was in the world and that he himself was of a certain kind, he wouldnt be a man. The technical aspects or applications of knowledge are equally necessary for man and of the greatest importance, because they also contributing to defining him as man and permit him to pursue a life increasingly more truly human. But even while enjoying the results of technical progress, he must defend the primacy and autonomy of pure knowledge. Knowledge sought directly for its practical applications will have immediate and foreseeable success, but not the kind of important result whose revolutionary scope is in large part unforeseen, except by the imagination of the Utopians. Let me recall a well-known example. If the Greek mathematicians had not applied themselves to the investigation of conic sections zealously and without the least suspicion that it might someday be useful, it would not have been possible centuries later to navigate far from shore. The first men to study the nature of electricity could not imagine that their experiments, carried on because of mere intellectual curiosity, would eventually lead to modern electrical technology without which we can scarcely conceive of contemporary life. Pure knowledge is valuable for its own sake, because the human spirit cannot resign itself to ignorance. But , in addition, it is the foundation for practical results that would not have been reached if this knowledge had not been sought disinterestedly. 48. The most important advance made by mankind come from ________. A) technical applications B) apparently useless information C) the natural sciences D) philosophy 49. In the paragraph that follows this passage, we may except the author to discuss ________. A) the value of technical research B) the value of pure research C) philosophy D) unforeseen discoveries 50. The title below that best expressed the ideas of this passage is ________. A) Technical Progress B) A Little Learning is a Dangerous Thing C) Man's Distinguishing Characteristics D) Learning for its Own Sake SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING Directions: In this section there are seven passages followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your answer sheet. TEXT F First read the following question. 51. The painting discussed in the passage can be found in ________. A. Paris, France B. Washington C. New York D. Moscow, Russia Now, go though TEXT E quickly in order to answer question 31. Russian-born Max Weber grew up in New York, studied art there, and then went back to Europe to familiarize himself with contemporary artistic developments. On returning to the United States, Weber worked in the new styles he had discovered in Paris and soon become recognized as a pioneer of American abstract painting. An example of his work at the National Gallery of Art in Washington D.C. is a 1915 painting entitled "Rush Hour, New York." Using abstract, geometrical forms, Weber has expressed the movement, noise, and vibrancy of the great metropolis. The picture blends elements of two European styles: cubism, which shows objects from a number of different angles of vision at the same time, and futurism, which portrays speed and objects in motion. Forceful lines and spiky forms throughout the composition convey the energy and vitality to the city. Weber expresses the citys diversity by juxtaposing forms with rounded and angular shapes to suggest specific elements of the urban landscape: skyscrapers, flashing lights, and hurrying people. 51. The painting discussed in the passage can be found in ________. A) Paris, France B) Washington C) New York D) Moscow, Russia TEXT G First read the following questions. 52. According to the first advertisement, anyone who ________ would receive ten shillings. A. found the umbrella B. gave a message C. left the umbrella at No. 10 Broad Street D. left the umbrella in the City Church 53. This is a story about ________. A. a useless advertisement B. how to make an effective advertisement C. how the man lost and found his umbrella owner D. what the merchant did for the umbrella owner Now read the text quickly and answer questions 33 and 34. A man once said how useless it was to put advertisements in the newspapers. "Last week," said he, "my umbrella was stolen from a London church. As it was a present ,I spent twice its worth in advertising, but I didnt get it back." "How did you write your advertisement?" asked one of the listeners, a merchant. "Here it is," said the man, taking out of his pocket a slip cut from a newspaper. The other man took it and read, "Lost from the City Church last Sunday evening, a black silk umbrella. The gentleman who finds it will receive ten shillings on leaving it at No. 10 Broad Street." "Now," said the merchant, "I often advertise, and find that it pays me well. But the way in which an advertisement is expressed is of extreme importance. Let us try for your umbrella again, and if it fails, Ill buy you a new one." The merchant then took a slip of paper out of his pocket and wrote:" If the man who was seen to take an umbrella from the City Church last Sunday evening doesnt wish to get into trouble, he will return the umbrella to No. 10 Broad Street. He is well known." This appeared in the paper, and on the following morning, the man was astonished when he opened the front door. In the doorway lay at least twelve umbrellas of all sizes and colors that had been thrown in, and his own was among the number. Many of them had notes fastened to them saying that they had been taken by mistake, and begging the loser mot to say anything about the matter. 52. According to the first advertisement, anyone who ________ would receive ten shillings. A) found the umbrella B) gave a message C) left the umbrella at No. 10 Broad Street D) left the umbrella in the City Church 53. This is a story about ________. A) a useless advertisement B) how to make an effective advertisement C) how the man lost and found his umbrella owner D) what the merchant did for the umbrella owner TEXT H First read the following questions. 54. What is the wingspan of the Gossamer Albatross? A. 33 kilograms B. 100 meters. C. 30 meters. D. Half of the wingspan of a DC-9. 55. How much power did the Gossamer Albatross need to keep it flying? A. As much as a DC-9. B. Less than one horsepower. C. Thee horsepower. D. Thirty horsepower. Now go through TEXT H quickly in order to answer 33 and 34 In June 1979, Bryan Allen, a biologist from California who is also a hang-gliding enthusiast and an amateur racing cyclist, made history by pedaling across the English Channel in the Gossamer Albatross, a super-light, propeller-driven aircraft invented by Dr. Paul McCready. The Gossamer Albatross, a 33-kilogram (72-pound) aircraft with a polythene-covered fuselage and a wingspan of 30 meter (100 feet ), the same as that of a DC-9 jet airliner, was driven mostly by conventional bicycle components. Allen sat on a bicycle saddle inside the transparent fuselage and pedaled a bicycle crank and chain-wheel that turned a special urethane chain geared through two more chain-wheels to a propeller mounted aft of the wing. Shortly after dawn that June day, the Albatross rolled down a harbored runway in Folkstone, England. Pedaling hard, Allen got the aircraft aloft and churned his way toward France. After almost three hours of pedaling to produce a constant output of about 0.3 horsepower , he landed on a beach near Calais, the first person to fly a human-powered craft across the Channel. Allen and an American team led by Dr. McCready were awarded the 100,000 prize by Henry Kremer, a British industrialist, for the first successful nonstop human-powered flight across the English Channel. Allen and McCready were no strangers to human-power flight. They and the American team had previously won the 25,000 Kremer prize for the first such sustained flight when they had successfully flown a one-mile figure-eight course in McCreadys Gossamer Condor. 54. What is the wingspan of the Gossamer Albatross? A) 33 kilograms B) 100 meters. C) 30 meters. D) Half of the wingspan of a DC-9. 55. How much power did the Gossamer Albatross need to keep it flying? A) As much as a DC-9. B) Less than one horsepower. C) Thee horsepower. D) Thirty horsepower. TEXT I First read the following questions. 56. Insects are classified by ________. A. the environment in which they live B. the food they eat C. the structure of the mouth D. the number and type of wings 57. The purpose of the maxillae is to ________. A. bite or sting B. drill through surface to find nourishment C. put food between the jaws D. oak up nourishment like a sponge. Now go through TEXT J quickly in order to answer question 37 and 38. Features of the mouth pars are very helpful in classifying the many kinds of insects. A majority of insects have biting mouth parts or mandibles as in grasshoppers and beetles. Behind the mandibles are the maxillae which serve to direct food into the mouth between the jaws. A labrum above and a labium below are similar to an upper and lower lip. In insects with sucking mouth parts, the mandibles, mandibles, maxillae, labrum, and labium are modified to provide a tube through which liquid can be drawn. In a butterfly or moth the coiled drinking tube is called the proboscis. Composed chiefly of modified maxillae fitted together, the proboscis can be extended to reach nectar deep in a flower. In a mosquito or an aphid, mandibles and maxillae are modified to sharp styles with which the insect can drill through surfaces to reach juice. In a housefly, the expanding labium forms a sponge-like mouth pad used to stamp over the surface of food. 56. Insects are classified by ________. A) the environment in which they live B) the food they eat C) the structure of the mouth D) the number and type of wings 57. The purpose of the maxillae is to ________. A) bite or sting B) drill through surface to find nourishment C) put food between the jaws D) oak up nourishment like a sponge. TEXT J First read the following questions. 58. In order for you to transfer, permission must be granted by an official at the ________. A. foreign student advisors office B. new university C. Immigration office D. passport office Now go through TEXT J quickly in order to answer question 39. A green I-538 form is used by international students in order to obtain permission from the Immigration and Naturalization Service to transfer from one university to another in the United States. If you are planning to transfer, remember that you must complete the form I-538, have it signed by the foreign student advisor, and submit it to the District Office of the Immigration and Naturalization Service together with the form I-20 from your new school and the small, white form I-94 that was affixed to your passport when you entered the country. Submitting the signed I-538 and other documents does not insure permission to transfer. Only and official of Immigration can decide each case. Students who have not completed the term of study at the school that insure them their first I-20 are not advised to file for permission to transfer until they have complete one term. 58. In order for you to transfer, permission must be granted by an official at the ________. A) foreign student advisor's office B) new university C) Immigration office D) passport office TEXT K First read the following question. 59. According to the passage, the group against individualized curriculum is composed primarily of __________. A. retired educators B. parents and students C. administrators and teachers D. teachers and parents 60. This passage might be found in which of the following? A. A sociology textbook. B. A newspaper. C. An educational journal. D. An entertainment magazine. Now go through TEXT K quickly in order to answer question 40. There are two schools of thought on setting a mandatory curriculum for high school students. One group, which is composed primarily of parents and teachers, feels that students of high school age are incapable of knowing what they want to do with their lives and therefore of choosing their own subjects to study. They claim that adults should set the subjects to be studied due to their experience and knowledge. This group has proposed that high schools be changed to five-year program, one year being devoted entirely to mathematics and computers as those subjects are critical to a persons success these days. The second group is composed of students. Most students of high school age consider themselves adults, and feel capable of choosing their own subjects. They state that they are concerned that a standard curriculum would hurt the individuality of the students, and turn all students into scientists, rather than into humanists. The members of this group are adamantly opposed to changing the current three-year term of high school to a five-year term, stating that most students do not make the best use of their time in high school as it is now. This groups members claim that the best experience for students would be to go on to college, to get away from home, and to be able to choose their own subjects to study. The National Union of Educators has invited both groups to address its annual convention this summer. The chairwoman of NUE has also invited three "neutral" parties to speak. One of those parties is the Dean or Education of a small, Latin American country that has throughout its history allowed high school students to pick their own subjects to study. He will be discussing the follow-up surveys his students have participated in and show the results if giving the students such freedom of choice. A second "neutral" party is students unless they had a certain curriculum, which would take five full years to complete and which emphasized. mathematics. 59. According to the passage, the group against individualized curriculum is composed primarily of __________. A) retired educators B) parents and students C) administrators and teachers D) teachers and parents 60. This passage might be found in which of the following? A) A sociology textbook. B) A newspaper. C) An educational journal. D) An entertainment magazine. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following text into Chinese. In the past year the United Nation has been actively engaged in an unprecedented wide range of problems. In terms of hours worked, meetings held or journeys made, there has never been a more active or more arduous year. While the purpose of some of its moat important activities may be rather to prevent the worst from happening than to achieve a spectacular solution, the Organization has also achieved notable progress this year on some extremely difficult problems. The pragmatic and realistic approach which has begun to emerge over the last few years, has resulted in practical and to develop its capacity. This is encouraging in terms of the problems themselves and also for the future of the United Nation. SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following text into English. 完全入了冬天状态；山峦看见雪的日子多了。风也吹得厉害。但是大概说来，初冬得野景非常绕于趣味。霜的苍白比之雪更多浓意而带哀趣。与此相对的，是霜解后土色的深浓， 比之初夏雨霁后土色还要潮湿。还有成了乾肤肤的绿苔沾润了霜水后照着朝阳的时候，大地 色彩之美真的到了绝顶。这时候的绿苔比之什么绿还要鲜艳而有生气，恰象敲碎了的绿玉抛 弃在那里一样。又好像看了印象派的画布一样。我在孤寂的冬天幻想中，能够见到这样美丽 的景色，真是设想不到的。 PART V WRITING In the first part of your writing you should present your thesis statement, and in the second part you should support the thesis statement with appropriate details. In the last part you should bring what you have written to a natural conclusion with a summary. Marks will be awarded for content, organization, grammar and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. Write your response on ANSWER SHEET. Just as an Chinese proverb says," One inch of time is more precious than one inch of gold". Perhaps everyone knows the value of time, while they choose different ways of spending it. Write an essay of about 300 words on how to use time and support your view with your own experience. 10 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. The best word to describe people's attitudes towards the opening of the new museum is ____. A) welcome B) against C) indifferent D) controversial 2. The museum is located ____. A) in an art center B) in a business district C) in California University D) near Hollywood 3. Which of the following is not the characteristic of the museum? A) Box-shaped. B) Five-story tall. C) Grandiose. D) White and gray. 4. The museum belongs to ____. A) a petroleum millionaire B) a famous artist C) Los Angles County D) California Art Center 5. Kasamere Malaviz is ____. A) the director of the new museum B) a Russian artist C) chairman of the Occidental Petroleum Cooperation D) the Los Angeles County Museum director SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. According to the interviewee, what category does she belong to? A) Non-smoker. B) Light-smoker. C) Heavy-smoker. D) Chain smoker. 7. From Mrs. Bradley's point of view, what kind of people smoke a pipe? A) Nervy people. B) Restless people. C) Calm contented type. D) The upper-class people. 8. How many times did Mrs. Bradley try to give up smoking? A) Once. B) Twice. C) Three times. D) Many times. 9. When does Mrs. Bradley smoke most? A) When she is doing housework. B) When she is watching TV. C) When she is reading. D) When she is with friends. 10. Why does Mrs. Bradley smoke? A) In order to relax. B) In order to be excitable. C) In order to feel important. D) In order to keep herself awake. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. Higher Education In The United States In the United States, a student who has finished high school may want to continue in hihger education. There are several ways to continue higher education in the United States. There are (16), colleges, (17) colleges and technical or (18) schools. A university usually has several colleges. There may be a college of liberal arts, where (19), social science, natural science and mathematics are taught. There may be a college of (20) or education. A college is also like a university in the kind of students it has, but a college usually has only one or two kinds of programs and does not have (21) or professional programs. Like the university, a college may be funded publicly, or (22), or by a religious group. Community colleges are quite different. Their program lasts only (23) years. Not all the subjects are the usual school subjects. Many students are adults with children. When they complete a two-year program, they receive an associate of arts or associate of science degree. They must go to a college or a university for two more years to get the (24) degree. The technical school has only job training. Some programs may take six months, while others may take two years or more. The school provides training for work in areas such as electronics, (25), pluming and others. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors. Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit I think it is true to saying that, in general, language teachers (26) have paid little attention to the way sentences are used in combination to form stretches of disconnected discourse. They have tended to take (27) their cue from the grammarian and have concentrated to the teaching (28) of sentences as self-contained units. It is true that these are often represented in "contexts" and strung together in dialogues and (29) reading passages, but these are essentially setting to make the formal properties of the sentences stand out more clearly, properties which are then established in the learners brain(30) by means of practice drill and exercises. Basically, the language teaching unit is the (31) sentence as a formal linguistic object. The language teachers view of what that constitutes knowledge of a language is essentially the same (32) as Chomskys knowledge of a syntactic structure of sentences, (33) and of the transformational relations which hold them. Sentences are seen as paradigmatically rather than syntagmatically related. Such a knowledge "provides the basis for the actual use of language by the speaker-hearer". The assumption that the language appears to make (34) is that once this basis is provided, then the learner will have no difficulty in the dealing with the actual use of language. (35) 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A When imaginative scientists first suggested the possibility that one person cold speak directly to another over a long distance, few people took them seriously. Among the few who did was a Scots born American named Alexander Craham Bell, who was one of the first to develop a telephone in 1876. Now the most common means of voice communication in the world, the telephone of today is infinitely more sophisticated and effective than the crude instrument developed by Bell, and it is being used in ways he could not possibly have foreseen. Today, communication is being seriously considered a communications service "on the move". Because America is such a highly mobile society —— a society on wheels —— telephones in cars and trucks are becoming as essential as those in homes and offices. Industry have predicted that mobile communications service will soon be comparable in many respects to the service provided by telephones that do not move. Another area rapidly being expanded is oversea telephone service. In 1927, when overseas telephone service was inaugurated with a radio telephone call between New York and London, the occasion was heralded as thrilling. Today, many, many telephone users regard international calls as routine, and overseas service, thanks largely to undersea cables and communications satellites, has undergone extraordinary improvement. Transmission has been made clearer, charges have been greatly reduced, and dependability has been improved. Overseas telephone service has now been extended to nearly 250 countries and areas throughout the world. The introduction of direct distance dialing in 1951 was one of the most significant developments in the effort of improving long-distance service. Direct distance dialing is not only fast and convenient for the caller, it has also enabled telephone companies to handle the extraordinary growth of telephone use that has occurred since the 1950s. Between 1950s and 1973, the number of telephones in the United States more than tripled, with the addition of 90 million telephones. For the Bell Telephone System alone long-distance calls in the same period have increased from 1.4 billion to 8.5 billion, and indications are that long-distance traffic will continue to increase significantly in the years ahead. In 1972, 77 percent of the 8.5 billion long-distance messages were dialed by the customer. Another very significant development in telephone use is in the area of data communications. Here is an example of how medical data are being transmitted. In a small town in the western part of the United States about 300 people gathered in the local school to undergo tests for lung and respiratory diseases such as emphysema. The procedures followed marked a major advance in detecting emphysema and allied diseases by providing almost instantaneous computer diagnosis over long distance telephone lines. First, technicians at the school used touch-tone telephones to send vital statistics on the person being tested to the exhaled into a Spiro meter, which measures volume and rate of air exhalation, and these measurements were automatically transmitted to the computer. The computer instantly calculated the results and within two seconds relayed them back to the testing center. Normally, it takes hours or even weeks to evaluate Spiro meter measurements —— and a lapse of weeks in detecting emphysema can seriously affect the outcome of treatment. By utilizing a computer and communications. However, the time lag is reduced to seconds. Moreover, people in a remote community are put within arms length of the most up-to-date medical facilities available. 36. What does "communication service on the move" mean? A) Communication enables the world move more efficiently so that we are living in a mobile society. B) Communication can be carried on almost anywhere in the world. C) Mobile communication service. D) Communication has been upgraded ever since the first telephone was invented. 37. What are the advantages of direct distance dialing? A) It's fast and convenient for the caller. B) It's easy to handle either for the caller or the telephone company, as well as (A). C) It lowers the cost of telephone service. D) All of the above. 38. The selection can be best categorized as ____. A) argumentation B) objective description. C) exposition. D) narration. TEXT B Ups and Downs I was convinced that roller coasters were invented in Nazi Germany to conduct fiendish experiments on unsuspecting children who did not ear their vegetables. My earliest memory of riding a "death machine" was when I was 9. A friend of my parents was going to Astro World and invited us to come along. Being the natural adventures that we were, my sister, brother and I decided to journey with them. After arriving there, I somehow found myself waiting in line to ride the notorious Texas Cyclone. Yes, the roller coaster with the sign that should read: PLEASE SECURE ALL LOOSE ITEMS SUCH AS GLASSES; DENTURES; HAIRPIECES; VITAL ORGANS; SMALL, ORIENTAL 9-YEAR-OLDS; ETC. IF YOU HAVE NO WISH OF DYING, THEN GET OUT OF LINE NOW. THANK YOU. "Oh, its a lot of fun," said Lan, one of the older girls I was with. I was beginning to worry, nonetheless. "This is a wooden roller coaster?" I asked. "Yeah, its one of the last ones around," boasted Lan. She reassured me a few more times that the ride was perfectly safe and that the odds of getting killed were as slim as something comparable to „„ ohhh, living past the age of 9. I smiled to show her that I was totally relaxed and ready for the ride. But deep in the left lobe of my brain I was thinking. "WHADDAYA MEAN WOOD?!! WHAT ABOUT TERMITES?!! Has it not occurred to you that the reason the Cyclone was one of the last wooden coasters around was that people have better things to do than die by being flung from a few stories up off the rails at a gazillions miles an hour?" I stood in line watching others, with the sun filtering through the rafters, twitching my leg nervously. The heat sought us out through the patches of sun, and my legs began to ache from standing. For some odd reason I stayed in line. Ill try to explain this phenomenon as best as I can. You see, all males are forced by some masculine gland, located next to the pancreas, to get on a roller coaster even if they are scared to the point of a bladder-control loss. We are obliged by the girls standing behind us in line to get on the ride or risk the girls thinking that we, the studs we are, are of their gender if we dont. I finally got onto the ride hoping for a quick end. I actually prayed (honest, Im not lying) and people in line laughed. I thought it eased the situation a bit. I stepped into the car and put the safety bar over my lap. A mad dash for the exit was impossible. There were girls around, so I couldnt leave. The ride attendants checked the bars in the seats to see if they were secure by giving a little tug on each of them. I gulped loudly and grabbed hold of the bars firmly enough to choke a horse. The cars shoved off as we headed of to "concussion city." Clank. Clank. Clank. We approached the dropping point. For a split second I could see the whole park, and then WHOOSH! My stomach hit the ceiling of my skull and was about to escape via my ears as we hit the bottom. The ride did not stop until the end of the Reagan administration. I could hardly recall what happened because I was about to lose consciousness and depart my physical body. I did not breathe for the duration of the ride, and my pale, white knuckles could have been pried off the safety bar only with a crowbar and several power tools. I would cry this fear of roller coaster and dropping at great height for the next eight years. I tried my best to stay away from the larger rides and always took the "easy" ride with no steep drops. Embarrassment followed me every time I was near a roller coaster. I suffered a form of uncanny acrophobia commonly referred to by leading medical researchers as well "chicken". This past summer I found myself at the prestigious Kings Island Amusement Park (also known as Spend-All-Your-Money-To-Us-Park) in Cincinnati, Ohio, with my relatives. I decided that in order to conquer my fear I had to, like any rational person would, totally avoid it. However, for some odd reason, the dormant masculine gland resurfaced, and I was forced to get on a ride with girls waiting in line behind me. I took my younger cousin with me, also. This was so I could sit in the designated "41 wuss-section" (or the middle) of the looping Pirate Ship and not be embarrassed because I had a small child with me. I pretended to act cool by talking through the whole ride to my cousin, who was concentrating on not dispersing the contents of these words: Me: WHOOOAHH! Here comes another one! Him: Uh huh. Me: WHOOOAHH! MOMMY! Him: Blurgh! (sound of him vomiting) People below: Look out! In coming! Before long I found myself on the ride, not assuming the fatal position. That day I went to some other big rides and managed to seem (in the least sense of the word) "manly". I credited my conquering the rides to my masculine gland. You know, it could have been my stupidity gland. 39. The tone of the passage can most probably be described as ____. A) tragic B) comic C) nostalgic D) facetious 40. Which of the following statement is True according to the passage? A) Roller coasters were invented by a German. B) Oriental children are not allowed to ride a roller coaster. C) The speed of the roller coaster is two gazillion miles per hour. D) The writer did not ride another roller coaster for eight years after his first ride. 41. How did the writer conquer his fear? A) It should be attributed to his masculine gland. B) He pretended to seem manly to the roller coaster, and nothing serious happened, so he was no longer scared at it. C) He has outgrown the childish fear of big ride. D) He had to pretend to be manly before his cousin. TEXT C Whats Right About Being Left-Handed Imagine you are Alice, stepping through the looking glass. Suddenly everything is reversed. Doorknobs are on the wrong side of the door. The gearshift in your car is in the wrong place. Handles on can openers are on the wrong side and turn the wrong way. Millions of people wake up every day in just such a predicament. They are left-handed and must face the built-in bias of a world designed for the right-handed majority. In a society of rights (from Anglo-Saxon right for "direct, upright, correct") and righteousness, the southpaw is left. (Anglo-Saxon left, for "weak") with leftovers and left-handed compliments. Why we are left- or right-handed remains one of the great unsolved mysteries of science. We know that nearly two out of three lefties are male and that left-handedness runs in families. According to one study, almost half the offspring of two left-handed parents will be southpaws. The Scot-Irish family Kerr (from the Gaelic word for "left") produced so many left-handers that in 1470 the family built its castles spiral stairways with a reverse twist to favor southpaw swordsmen. On the other hand, heredity alone cannot explain lefties. At least 84 percent of them are born of two right-handed parents. And in 12 percent of genetically identical twins, one will be be right-handed, the other left. Perhaps the greatest puzzle of all is not why some people are left-handed, but rather why so few are. In virtually every other species, from chimpanzees to chinchillas, roughly equal numbers of individuals will favor either the right or the left. However, scientists are trying to set things right, and they are beginning to gain insight into the many ways southpaws differ from "northpaws", by considering how their brains work. Many of the circuits in the human central system operate through crossed laterality —— that is, the right hand is "wired" to the left side of the brain, and vice versa. In at least 95 percent of right-handers, the speech-language center is in the brains left hemisphere. Yet only about 15 percent of left-handers are similarly hooked up, with speech controlled by the opposite, or right, hemisphere. According to Jerre Levy, a biopsychologist at Illinois University of Chicago, about 70 percent of left-handers have speech controlled by the left side of the brain, while the remaining 15 percent have their language-control centers in both hemisphere. Broadly speaking, the left side of the brain is thought by some scientists to process linear, logical information, while the right side tends more toward processing emotion and mood. This may be why lefties are at significantly higher risk of schizophrenia, phobias and manic-depression, and in one study were shown to be three times more likely to attempt suicide. Southpaws can be more sensitive to a variety of drugs, too. Peter Irwin, a senior clinical research scientist at Sansoz Institute in East Hanover, New Jersey, found that, after taking such medications as aspirin, antidepressants, sedatives and antihistamines, lefties had greater changes in electrical activity in the brain than righties did. As if this werent enough, southpaws, appear to be twice as prone to autoimmune diseases, including diabetes, ulcerative colitis, rheumatoid arthritis and myasthenia gravis. With such liabilities, how have left-handers managed to survive at all? The good news is that there is a very high side to being a left. Camilla Benbow, associate professor of psychology at Iowa State University, surveyed students who scored in the top 100th of one percent in math on Americas Scholastic Aptitude Test. She discovered that fully 20 percent of these math geniuses were left-handed-double the proportion of lefties in the population. Mensa, the high-I.Q. society, estimates that 20 percent of its members are left-handed. Indeed, the ability to integrate what some researchers call the more "logical" left side of the brain and the more "intuitive" or "artistic" right side may have helped lefties excel. Among historys most famous left-handed warriors were Alexander the Great, Julius Caesar, Charlemagne, Joan of Arc and Napoleon (as well as his consort, Josephine). Michelangelo sculpted David holding, in his left hand, the sling used to slay Goliath. (The Bible makes note of some 700 lefties who could "sling stones at a hairbreadth and not miss.") Though most people believe that handedness is a simple either/or proportion, this is incorrect. Chances are that you are more nearly ambidextrous than you realize. You can, for example, probably write quite well with your left hand even if you have always been right-handed. To find our, take a large piece of paper, turned sideways, and pick up a pencil in each hand. With your right hand, slowly sign your name, and with your left hand match each movement in reverse, with both hands moving in opposite directions away from the papers center. After a few tries, hold your left-handed reverse signature up to a mirror. Youll be surprised how much it resembles your forward right-handed writing. For years, many lefties have felt they were targets of discrimination. But they have begun to assert their rights. In 1980, when part-time police officer Franklin W. "Woody" Winborn was fired in Riverside, Missouri, activists rallied to his cause. A southpaw, Winborn had refused to wear his gun holster on his right side. In Seattle, a postal clerk and lefty named Robert B. Green was told to follow the usual procedure of holding mail in the left hand and sorting with the right. Winborn settled his case out of court, and Green was permitted to continue his left-handed sorting. Lefthanders International of Topeka, Kansas, took a keen interest in both protest. Its founder, Dean Campbell, asks, "Why must the left-handed live in a world designed to handicap us?" His group has issued a "Bill of Lefts", which asserts in part that "left-handers shall be entitled to offer their dominant hand in a handshake, salute or oath." Says Campbell, smiling impishly, "If the right side of the body is controlled by the left side of the brain, and vice versa, then we left-handed people are the only ones in our right mind." 42. What is the most bewildering thing about the lefties? A) Why are there so few left-handed people? B) In what way do southpaws differ from northpaws? C) Why are left-handed people smarter? D) How have left-handers managed to survive? 43. Why are left-handed more likely to commit suicide? A) They are often targets of discrimination. B) There is a built in bias in the world designed for the right-handed majority. C) The left-handers are more apt to process emotion and mood. D) All of the above. 44. Why does Campbell say that "we left-handed people are the only ones in our right mind"? A) He prides himself on being a left-hander because lefthanders usually have higher I.Q. B) Because lefthanders have better control over their right side of the brain than the others. C) Because left-handed people tend to be conceited and contemptuous. D) Because the right side of the brain of the southpaw is acuter than the left side of the brain. 45. Which of the following statement can be inferred from the text? A) The speech-language center is in the brain's left hemisphere. B) Whether a person is right-handed or left-handed is not a clear-cut matter. C) Lefthanders are more likely to outperform others if they can combine the "logical" and the "intuitive" side of the brain. D) None of the above. TEXT D Fairy Tales and Modern Stories The shortcoming of the realists stories with which many parents have replaced fairy tales is suggested by a comparison of two such stories —— "The Little Engine That Could" and "The Swiss Family Robison" —— with the fairy tale of "Rapuzel". "The Little Engine That Could" encourages the child to believe that if he tries hard and does not give up, he will finally succeed. A young adult has recalled how much impressed she was at the age of seven when her mother read her this story. She became convinced that ones attitude indeed affects ones achievements —— that if she would now approach a task with the conviction that she could conquer it, she would succeed. A few days later, this child encountered in first grade a challenging situation: she was trying to make a house out of paper, gluing various sheets together. But her house continually collapsed. Frustrated, she began to seriously doubt whether her idea of building such a paper house could realized. But then the story of "The Little Engine That Could" came to her mind; twenty years later, she recalled how at that moment she began to sing to herself the magic formula "I think I can, I think I can, I think I can „" So she continued to work on her paper house, and it continued to collapse. The project ended in complete defeat, with this little girl convinced that she had failed where anybody else could have succeeded, as the Little Engine had. Since "The Little Engine That Could" was a story set in the present, using such common directly in her daily life, without any fantasy elaboration, and had experienced a defeat that still rankled twenty years later. Very different was the impact of "The Swiss Family Robison" on another little girl. The story tells how a shipwrecked family manages to live an adventurous, idyllic, constructive, and pleasurable life —— a life very different from this childs own existence. Her father had to be away from home a great deal, and her mother was mentally ill and spent protracted periods in institutions. So the girl was shuttled form her home to that of aunt, then to that of a grandmother, and back home again, as the need arose. During these years, the girl read over and over again the story of this happy family who lived on a desert island, where no member could be away from the rest of the family. Many years later, she recalled what a warm, cozy feeling she had when, propped up by a few large pillows, she forgot all about her present predicament as she read this story. As soon as she had finished it, she started to read it over again. The happy hours she spent with the Family Robison in that fantasy land permitted her not to be defeated by the difficulties that reality presented to her. She was able to counteract the impact of harsh reality by imaginary gratifications. But since the story was not a fairy tale, it merely gave her a temporary escape from her problems; it did not hold our any promise to her that her life would take a turn for the better. Consider the effect that "Rapunzel" had on a third girl. This girls mother had died in a car accident. The girls father, deeply upset by what had happened to his wife (he had been driving the car), withdrew entirely into himself and handed the care of his daughter over to a nursemaid, who was little interested in the girl and gave her complete freedom to do as she liked. When the girl was seven, her father remarried, and, as she recalled it, it was around that time that "Rapunzel" became so important to her. Her stepmother was clearly the witch of the story, and she was the girl locked away in the tower. The girl recalled that she felt akin to Rapunzel because the witch had "forcibly" taken possession of her, as her stepmother had forcibly worked her way into the girls life. The girl felt imprisoned in her new home, in contrast to her life of freedom with the nursemaid. She felt as victimized as Rapunzel, who, in her tower, had so little control over her life. Rapunzels long hair was the key to the story. The girl wanted her hair to grow long, but her stepmother cut it short; long hair in itself became the symbol of freedom and happiness to her. The story convinced her that a prince (her father) would come someday and rescue her, and this conviction sustained her. If life became too difficult, all she needed was to imagine herself as Rapunzel, her hair grown long, and the prince loving and rescuing her. "Rapunzel" suggests why fairy tales can offer more to the child than even such a very nice childrens story as "The Swiss Family Robison". In "The Swiss Family Robison", there is no witch against whom the child can discharge her anger in fantasy and on whom she can blame the fathers lack of interest. "The Swiss Family Robison" offers escape fantasies, and it did help the girl who read it over and to forget temporarily how difficult life was for her. But it offered no specific hope for the future. "Rapuzel", on the other hand, offered the girl a chance to see the witch of the story as so evil that by comparison even the "witch" stepmother at home was not really so bad. "Rapunzel" also promised the girl that her rescue would be effected by her own body, when her hair grew long. Most important of all, it promised that the "prince" was only temporarily blinded —— that he would regainhis sight and rescue his princess. This fantasy continued to sustain the girl, though to a less intense degree, until she fell in love and married, and then she no longer needed it. We can understand why at first glance the stepmother, if she had known the meaning of "Rapunzel" to her stepdaughter, would have felt that fairy tales are bad for children. What she would not have known was that unless the stepdaughter had been able to find that fantasy satisfaction through "Rapunzel", she would have tried to break up her fathers marriage and that without the hope for the future which the story gave her she might have gone badly astray in life. It seems quite understandable that when children are asked to name their favorite fairy tales, hardly any modern tales are among their choices. Many of the new tales have sad endings, which fail to provide the escape and consolation that the fearsome events in the fairy tale require if the child is to be strengthened for meeting the vagaries of his wife. Without such encouraging conclusions, the child, after listening to the story, feels that there is indeed no hope for extricating himself from his despairs. In the traditional fairy tale, the hero is rewarded and the evil person meets his well-developed fate, thus satisfying the childs deep need for justice will be done to him, who so often feels unfairly treated? And how else can he convince himself that he must act correctly, when he is so sorely tempted to give the asocial prodding of her desires? 46. What is the most important similarity between the Little Engine That Could and The Swiss Family Robinson? A) They are both set in the present. B) Both of them can provide a temporary escape from a child's problems. C) Neither of them can offer the imaginary gratifications a child needs. D) There is no promise of hope and no encouraging endings in these stories. 47. What is the most important differences between The Little Engine That Could and The Swiss Family Robison? A) One exhibits the shortcoming of modern stories while the other is to the contrary. B) The Swiss Family Robison has a beneficial effect on adults as well as children. C) The impact of the two differs in that one fails to encourage the children the other enables the children to counteract the harsh reality only temporarily. D) The Swiss Family Robinson is an adventurous story while The Little Engine That Could is a more realistic one. 48. It is quite probable that Rapunzel's long hair ____. A) helps to extricate the poor girl from her misery B) is the major symbol in the story C) is significant in the development of the story D) All of above. 49. According to the author, without "Rapunzel", the girl might have gone astray in life because ____. A) she has to discharge her pent up anger B) without the fantasy satisfaction through "Rapunzel" the girl would turn to reality to find an outlet C) nothing can convince her that she has to act correctly D) All of the above. 50. Why so fairy tales benefit readers more than modern stories? A) Modern stories can't satisfy the child's need for justice and encouragement, while fairy tales can. B) Modern stories usually have sad endings which often dispirit the children. C) Fairy tales can brace the children to face up to the harsh reality. D) Fairy tales can lead the children on the right way. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. This letter is intended to ____. A. inform the addressee that he is selected as a candidate for a United States Government graduate award B. require the addressee to do several things so as to partake in the competition for the award C. offer the addressee a trip to Tokyo D. ask the addressee to fill out a application forms of a physical examinations Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. THE UNITED STATES EDUCATIONAL COMMISSION IN JAPAN FULBRIGHT HOUSE 15 SHINSAKA-MACHI, AKASAKA, MJINATO-KU, TOKYO November 11, 1954 My dear Mr. Takahashi, This is regard to your candidacy for a 1955-56 United States Government all-expense graduate study award. Following the personal interview which you had with the bi-national Tokyo Regional Screening Committee, your application was selected to be further considered along with the applications of those candidates recommended by the other Regional Committees. This does not mean that you will necessarily be successful in receiving an award, but merely that your application will be receiving further consideration. At this stage in the competition, you are requested to: Fill out the enclosed application forms and bring them with you to the United States Educational Commission in Japan (Fulbright House) in Tokyo on the date of your physical examination (see no: 2 bellow). An instruction sheet for filling out the application documents is attached. For guidance, one of your original applications is also enclosed. Please return this with your other documents. IMPORTANT- The application form must be typewritten. Take a physical examination at Saint Lukes International Hospital, located at 19 Aksashicho, Chuo-ku, Tokyo, on November 18. You can receive your examination at your convenience between the hours of 9:00 a.m. and 2:00 p.m. on the above date. It is necessary that you receive your physical examination from Dr. Gentaro Kimura of Saint Lukes International Hospital and not from any other physician. A certificate of health form will be furnished at the hospital. If you have any chest X-ray photographs taken within the past three years, you are requested to bring them with you to Saint Lukes International Hospital. For those candidates who must travel to Tokyo, the third-class round trip railway fare will be refunded at the Fulbright office after the physical examination. However, you must bear the expense of the physical examination, which will be 1,600. Upon completion of the physical examination, you must come to the Fulbright House, located at 15 Shinsaka-machi. Akasaka, Minato-ku, Tokyo, to return your completed application forms. I regret that we are giving you such short notice, but please do not ask for exceptions to the above requests and time schedule. Your full cooperation will be greatly appreciated. Wishing you continued success in this completion, I am, Very truly yours, Koji Kobayashi Executive Secretary 51. This letter is intended to ____. A) inform the addressee that he is selected as a candidate for a United States Government graduate award B) require the addressee to do several things so as to partake in the competition for the award C) offer the addressee a trip to Tokyo D) ask the addressee to fill out a application forms of a physical examinations TEXT F First read the questions. 52. Most tropical soils have a low organic content because of ____. A. soil erosion by wind and water B. reduced transpiration and precipitation C. the loss of the soils capacity to provide benefits D. reduced absorption of CO2 by depleted plant life Now go through TEXT F quickly to answer question 52. WORLD ECOLOGICAL AREA PROGRAM A PROPOSAL TO SAVE THE WORLDS TROPICAL RAIN FORESTS. The worlds remaining tropical forests are being destroyed so fast that, at current trends, by the end of this century, only the most inaccessible will remain. This terrible tragedy will mean: the destruction of the way of life of the indigenous peoples who inhabit these areas which must lead to their systematic pauperization i.e. to their transformation into a marginal, largely unemployed proletariat leading a miserable and precarious existence in the shanty towns surrounding already drastically over-crowed cities: the disappearance of a considerable proportion of the worlds trees and plant species, many of which have not been identified: the disappearance in the world of much of the worlds remaining wildlife, including large cats such as the tiger and clouded leopard and primates such as the gorilla and orange-tuna: the loss of an inestimable reservoir of genetic resources that could be exploited to provide new foods, medicines, textiles, etc„„ and raw materials including bases for fuels which could be of vital importance in a largely unforeseeable future: soil erosion by wind and water —— as most tropical soils have a low organic content and may become little more than dust, while others become brick-like late rite once they are deprived of their tree cover —— in any cases leading to eventual desertification: massively increased run-off to rivers and, in particular, when their beds have been raised following erosion form the mountains above, to floods in the surrounding plains —— since only a fraction of the rainwater that can be stored around the root system of a tropical forest can be related in the eroded soils of bare mountainsides: reduced transpiration and hence precipitation, with a further reduction in water availability: increase in the CO2 released into the atmosphere but reduced absorption of C02 by depleted plant life with climatic consequences that are likely to be detrimental to world food production: the loss of the soils capacity to provide timber and other benefits on a more realistic but sustainable basis: an aesthetic and scientific loss of unparalleled dimensions. What, we might ask, will the countries who are cutting down their forests obtain in exchange? The answer is foreign currency largely to pug for imported consumer products that only a minority can afford and raw materials required for industrial development, which occurring as it must, in decreasingly propitious conditions, seem doomed to be short-lived. 52. Most tropical soils have a low organic content because of ____. A) soil erosion by wind and water B) reduced transpiration and precipitation C) the loss of the soil's capacity to provide benefits D) reduced absorption of CO2 by depleted plant life TEXT G First read the question. 53. How does the author evaluate the theories on the origin of language in the passage? A. They are only speculations, up to now we have no way to disprove them. B. They all have flaws, but if combined, they can successfully explain the origin of human language. C. None of them is satisfactory. D. They have some explanatory power except that they are out-of-date. Now go through TEXT G quickly to answer question 53. The Origins of Language Apart from the rote miming of parrots and myna birds, no animal can speak a human-like language. Many animals make complex sounds, of course, among them dolphins and chimpanzees, but only in humans do these sound represent objects and events in an arbitrary yet symbolic way. Though the words vary from dialect to dialect, they have specific meanings in each case and are solely the inventions of the human mind. Since preserving the human voice was an innovation of modern times, the sounds voiced by our distant ancestors left no tangible trace. But by studying the size and shape of fossil hominid brains scientists can obtain a clue to the neural machinery that is necessary for the development and organization of language. The development of language was a slow and laborious process that seems to have begun with the forerunners of modern man, Homo erectus, some 1.5 million years ago. Studies of the cranial capacity of early man indicate that his brain possessed a left hemisphere (which in modern man is the seat of language) slight large than the right hemisphere. Homo erectus also had a well-developed frontal section of the brain, now known as Brocas Area, which coordinates the muscles of the mouth and throat that we use when we speak. Thus, early man was not hampered by a lack of speech apparatus; in fact, he possessed an anatomical structure capable of producing the entire spectrum of vocal effects available to us today. Whether or not he actually used it is unknown. In the total absence of any clue to the speech patterns of prehistoric man, scholars can offer only speculation about how language originated. Several theories have been in and out of vogue. The Bow-Wow Theory, as named and proposed by the German-born British philologist Friedrich Max Muller in 19th century, posits that language grew our of mans attempts to imitate natural sounds, as an infant calls a locomotive a choo-choo or a cow a moo. According to this suggestion, mans first utterances were onomatopoetic or echoic words that emulated the sounds of what was happening around him —— for example, thunder, bump, sneeze, splash, slosh, sizzle, moan, and mumble. The Pooh-pooh Theory holds that speech originated from the spontaneous exclamations and interjections of early humans: cries of fear, surprise, anger, pain, disgust, despair, and joy. The Yo-He-Ho theory suggests that language evolved form reflex utterances —— grunts, gasps, glottal contractions —— evoked by strenuous physical exertion, such as hacking up a carcass after a successful hunt or dragging a heavy log through underbrush. The Sing-Song Theory contends that human speech arose form primitive rhythmic chants associated with ritualistic dance. Standing alone, each of these theories has flaws, and even combined, their composite effect cannot account for the full complexity of human language. This is particularly true because language as we know it is more the product of the human mind than it is the product of the human vocal cords. At one time linguists believed that language originated merely to facilitate communication so that one individual could relate to another what the he or she should be doing next in the practical matters of daily life. Today, however, it is widely thought that language originated so that early man could think more effectively. For without the acquisition of words, and the structure of language to string them together in logical and meaningful order, there can be no such thing as complex human thought. This is evident in human languages most supreme attribute: its limitless creativity. Even today language grows at a rapid pace with the use of what words coined from technology or derivatives of old words attached to trends. Alone of all the creatures on earth, humans can say things that have never been said —— and still be understood. Animals can only repeat the same limited utterances over and over again, as their progenitors have done for millions of years. Mans accomplishment has bestowed on him the capacity to create something new ever time he speaks. 53. How does the author evaluate the theories on the origin of language in the passage? A) They are only speculations, up to now we have no way to disprove them. B) They all have flaws, but if combined, they can successfully explain the origin of human language. C) None of them is satisfactory. D) They have some explanatory power except that they are out-of-date. TEXT H First read the questions. 54. If you want to sell a used color TV, you can call ____. A. 62429991 B. 1371801367 C. 59766119 D. 64748821 55. If you are proficient in Chinese water painting and need a part-time job, you can contact ____. A. at boycolour@hotmail.com B. at GMoates@aol.com C. at andylg@beer.com D. at xueyini@public4.sta.net.cn Now go through TEXT H quickly to answer question 55 and 55. If anyone has a copy of the latest Macintosh OS 8.5 would you mind sending me a note: reastman@uninet.com.cn? I have the following items for sale: computer IBM233, with fax/modem RMB5000. Hayes 33.6 voice/fax/modem RMB300, mobile Ericson 788 RMB2000. Contact: Franlin mail: mosterd@online.sh.cn pager: 54887 X 1936000. Our company is sourcing of rubbish bags for export, we need to contact with manufactures, we need quotations, and samples. Contact: Peter. E-mail: mosterd@online.sh.cn. Fax: 58604681 TV: We are looking for a used color TV in good condition „„ please call 59766119. BP for sell: A Motorala Adividor Beeper for sell, in Chinese Characters. 54888 station. Asking for 400RMB. Please Contact 1272341383 or hsu2597@hotmail.com. DEHUMIDIFIER: 1 Air Dehumidifier PHILIPS, HR 4163/A, 430 W Power. For further information/inspection, feel free to contact us by email alexstr@uninet.com.cn or through fax 6262 0542 rmb. Would consider part exchange Call 1371801367. Used piano wanted: We like to buy a used Piano (not an upright one). Color black or white including bench. Xiaomei on 6270-9342, fax 6270-9341 Ruediger-kabas@homail.com. We speak English, German, Mandarin and Shanghainese. Baby Stuff For sale: All high quality German or Italian products in very good condition: Babystoller, with top and removable carrier, changeable to push chair, sterilizer, toys & anything a newborn baby needs. Xiaomei Ruediger-kabas@homail.com. We speak English, German, Mandarin and Shanghainese. For sale: "Life Fitness" available, both commercial at 6270-9342, fax 6270-9341 and consumer using, treadmil, exercising cycle, stair climber and strength machine O all certificated by ISO 9001. Frank at 138-179-1604 or Fax 6472-8821. For sale: A Hewlett Packard C30 "Photo Smart" Digital Camera, with a MS "Picture It! 99" CD, a HP 1 MP Digital Camera Photo Finishing Software CD, and a 200 rebate offer on purchase of a HP scanner. Never used, all this and more for a mere US 430 (what I paid for it). 6471-6459 or omega@fudan.edu.cn Moving Sale: Polar Bear distiller, manual treadmill, VCRs, 17in. TV, fax, 2-color ink jet printers, scanner, 2 childrens laminate bed sets, chest freezer, fridge „„ 5897-3311 or Fax 5897-3322. TEACHING English-Chinese: A local girl is seeking a native English speaker as language exchange partner. Lin at hanazen@hotmail.com. English-Chinese: A software engineer, 24, male, smart, energetic and humorous, is looking for a foreigner to practice English in exchange of Chinese. Native English speaker is preferred. He can teach you many things other than Chinese. Email: andylg@beer.com. Japanese-Chinese: Seeking a native Japanese speaker who wants to practice his/her Mandarin with a Chinese girl. Yanmingli@hotmail.com. English-Chinese: Im looking for a language exchange partners to improve my English and your Chinese. Vannisa Bp: 53996 X 147185. English Teacher wanted: Shanghai lady, 25, is looking for an experienced native English speaking teacher for English lesson. British is better. Reasonable pay. Jasmine at jcXjB@hotmail.com Need a nice and patient girl to teach you Chinese? Call BP: 58315831 X 872262. I bet you will speak Chinese better than Shanghai people. Yoga/Chinese Water painting Tutor wanted: Contact me at xueyini@pulic4.sta.net.cn or 5874-8064. Only request you can speak a little English and the salary is quite reasonable. Painting Tutor: A young artist, speaking English, want to be your painting tutor to each sketch, watercolor and stylish art. boycolor@hotmail.com. Tai Chi Lessons wanted: Any information on where or when. Individual instructors are welcome. Email: GMoates@aol.com, or phone, Home: 6278-3435, Mobile: 137-184-4416. Free Lessons: on how to iron shirts, how to cook western style Chinese food, how to use Chinese taxi drivers to teach destinations, etc, for Englishman in Gubei. English language in return. 6270-5438 or green@dircon.co.uk. Introduction to Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine: Part-time course at the Shanghai University (TCM). Includes clinical practice and basic theories with certificate on completion. Contact by 20 June. Ingrid at 6472-1105 or charlottejane@yahoo.com. 54. If you want to sell a used color TV, you can call ____. A) 62429991 B) 1371801367 C) 59766119 D) 64748821 55. If you are proficient in Chinese water painting and need a part-time job, you can contact ____. A) at boycolour@hotmail.com B) at GMoates@aol.com andylg@beer.com D) at xueyini@public4.sta.net.cn C) at TEXT I First read the questions. 56. Which of the following is the most appropriate title for this passage? A. When to keep your mouth shut. B. The importance of silence. C. How to talk to kids. D. How to avoid embarrassment in talk. 57. What has troubled Ben for fifteen years? A. He has to eat the aspic served by his brother-in-law, which he doesnt like at all. B. He is often offended by his brother-in-laws wife for she is outspoken and garrulous. C. His unthinking flattery of his brothers wife leaded to undesirable results. D. He can hardly zip his lip and often hurt others. Now go through TEXT I quickly to answer question 56 and 57. The owner of a printing business was delighted when another company wanted to buy one of his used printing machines. After careful calculations, he fixed a price of 2.5 million and formulated his arguments. When he sat down to negotiate, however, an inner voice told him, "Wait." The buyers quickly filled the silence with a rundown of the machines strengths and weakness. The seller said nothing. Then the buyers said, "Well give you 3.5 million, but not a penny more." Less than an hour later, the deal was made. Opportunities to improve a situation by "zipping your lip" come up all the time in everyday dealings with others. Sometimes the benefits of keeping your mouth shut may be that you wont have to eat your words. Take my friend Ben. Like many of us when we are unsure of ourselves or trying to be polite, Ben sometimes blurts out things that come back to haunt him. The first time he was invited to dinner by his brothers new wife, she served to tomato aspic. Ben hated the stuff but wanted to compliment her. So he raved, "The aspic is great!" She was so flattered that she remembered and served it to him every time he visited for the next 15 years! Sometimes an unthinking remark, no matter how innocently made, can have more serious consequences. Harold and his wife once ran into neighbors in their apartment building late at night. Startled, he tried to be friendly and said, "I hear congratulations are in order." There was an awkward silence. Later Harolds wife reminded him that the women had recently miscarried. "Nowadays," Harold says, "if Im momentarily thrown, I count to ten before I say anything." Not only is there wisdom is knowing when to keep your mouth shut; there are practical advantages as well. Lawyers tell a story about a man accused of biting off another fellows ear in a brawl. A defense attorney spent the morning challenging the prosecutions main witness. He thought he had destroyed the mans story but couldnt resist final verbal blow. "Youve admitted that you were not very close to the scene of the alleged crime and that you didnt see my client bite off the ear. How can you possibly testify against him?" the defense attorney demanded. The witness paused, then smiled and said, "I saw him spit it out." In the past, psychologists used to day that we should "talk things out" with others. But, increasingly, I find that getting along with another human being sometimes demands tolerance and silence. Adele Faber, co-author of How to Talk So Kids Will Listen and Listen So Kids Will Talk, tells how silence conquered the nightly battle over bedtime between a mother and her eight-year-old son, Jonathan. One night Jonathan came downstairs as usual after being tucked into bed. "Mom, I cant sleep!" he said. "Oh, you cant sleep. Hmmm," his mother replied. She stopped, looked at him with compassion and waited. A full minute passed without a word. At last Jonathan spoke. "I think Ill put on my favorite pajamas." he said. "Then Ill sleep better." And off he went to bed. Its not always easy to let those you love experience pain, frustration or anger. You want to relieve their problems instead of letting them find their own solutions. Jonathan, Fabers teenage daughter, came home one day looking distressed. Faber said, "Jonathan, something happened," and her daughter burst into tears. "We sat on the sofa, and I held her while she sobbed," recalls Faber. "Ten minutes later she took a deep breath, looked at me and sighed. "Thanks, Mom," she said. Then she got up and left." Faber never did find out what was wrong. A long, attentive, loving embrace was what Jonathan wanted most. Then she would solve her problem on her own. "Your silence support can provide the soil in which the other persons solutions begin to grow," says Faber. "Silence is not withdrawal. Silence comes out of respect. It says, "I am here for you, but Im not going to get in the way." Like a composer who knows that the space between the notes is as important as the notes themselves, each of us must realize that our silences can be as expressive as the words we choose. The result is greater harmony and effectiveness. 56. Which of the following is the most appropriate title for this passage? A) When to keep your mouth shut. B) The importance of silence. C) How to talk to kids. D) How to avoid embarrassment in talk. 57. What has troubled Ben for fifteen years? A) He has to eat the aspic served by his brother-in-law, which he doesn't like at all. B) He is often offended by his brother-in-law's wife for she is outspoken and garrulous. C) His unthinking flattery of his brother's wife leaded to undesirable results. D) He can hardly zip his lip and often hurt others. TEXT J First read the question. 58. What did the writer learn form her first teaching experience? A. Every child has great potentials, but dismal environment may hinder them. B. The life of the people in poverty forms a vicious circle. C. The poor have a silent rage against society. D. Words have power. Now go through TEXT J quickly to answer question 58. In 1986, my first teaching experience took me to a small Catholic school in a poor section of North Philadelphia. There, poverty surrounded people like a heavy smog. Tragedy, sickness, illiteracy, and bad luck were as prevalent and tangible to my students as the empty beer cans that cluttered their streets. Accustomed to their dismal environment, my students nonchalantly kicked away bad days and beer cans. They brushed off daily injustices. Tyrone was different. Like the others, it was obvious he from a home laced with poverty. He often came to school wearing the same clothes every day of the week. But, unlike the others, his destitute life filled him with hate. In his mind, he was destined to spend eternity in an employment line like his father, and he didnt like it. It filled him with a silent rage. As a new English teacher full of energy and hope, I promised Tyrone that reading and writing could transport him to a different "world". It was obvious he didnt like the one he was in. I offered him a variety of worlds through reading. He was skeptical at first, but he trusted me. I presented with a cornucopia of literary classics. After a small taste, he politely let me know that they were dull and he wasnt interested. I was crushed. But I didnt give up hope. I figured maybe he didnt like my literary choices because they werent relevant to his life experiences. Anxious to instill in him my love of literature, I went back to the drawing board. From my own personal library, I grabbed entire collections of books by James Baldwin, and Paul Laurence Dunbar. Reluctantly, Tyrone read them, and raised one eyebrow. "These books area little better," he said. "But books arent for me because they arent about real times. None of this literature stuff is for me. You dont know how I live. You dont know what its like." Fed up, I said, "Well, why dont you tell me! If you think you face more injustices than what these men have experienced, write about them. Tell the world your feelings. Let it out. I wasnt sure what I was doing. It was one of those teaching moments that I could never tell my principle. It was one of those moments that you never face as a student teacher. I was determined to get this troubled teen to love reading and writing. After that day, Tyrone was absent a week. When he returned, he sat silently in class as usual. After class, he lingered at his desk for a while, then he approached me. I asked how he was doing. Erupting in a smile, he dropped a handful of tattered papers on my desk. I picked them up and read them. I was thrilled with the effort —— but shocked at the content. Tyrones collection of essays and poems illustrated the anguish and turmoil he had experienced in just 12 short years. His poems and essays were laced with risqué images and sassy similes. No matter. His work was as honest as a newborn and as solemn as death. Anxious to show the world his talent, Tyrone wanted to publish his creative works. Tyrone and I decided to submit his writing to various magazines, some of which published his work. Ten years passed. Tyrones an adult now. He enjoys reading and makes his living as a writer. From my work with Tyrone, I learned a lesson thats stuck with me since: Young people write words loud enough to move mountains, part seas, and change worlds. Im still not sure if the world is ready. 58. What did the writer learn form her first teaching experience? A) Every child has great potentials, but dismal environment may hinder them. B) The life of the people in poverty forms a vicious circle. C) The poor have a silent rage against society. D) Words have power. TEXT K First read the questions. 59. The tome of the passage can be described as ____. A. dubious B. sardonic C. pessimistic D. critical 60. Why would the author like to go back to school? A. She intends to further her studies. B. She is fed up with the dull, routine life as a housewife. C. She wants to enrich her life and enjoy the freedom as a student. D. Shed like to support herself and even the family because education can provide the means. Now go through TEXT K quickly to answer question 59 and 60. I Want a Wife I belong to that classification of people known as wives. I am A Wife, and, not altogether incidentally, I am a mother. Not too long ago a male friend of mine appeared on the scene fresh from a recent divorce. He had one child, who is, of course, with his ex-wife. He is obviously looking for another wife. As I thought about him while I was ironing one evening, it suddenly occurred to me that I, too, would like to have a wife. Why do I want a wife? I would like to go back to school so that I can become economically independent, support myself, and, if need be, support those dependent upon me. I want a wife who will work and send me to school. And to keep track of mine, too. I want a wife to make sure my children are properly and are kept clean. I want a wife who will wash the childrens clothes and keep them mended. I want a wife who is a good nurturing attendant to my children, who arranges for their schooling, makes sure that they have an adequate social life with their peers, takes them to the park, the zoo, etc. I want a wife who takes care of the children when they are sick, a wife who arranges to be around when the children need special care, because, of course, I can not miss classes at school. My wife must arrange to lose time at work and not lost the job. It may mean a small cut in my wifes income from time to time, I guess I can tolerate that. Needless to say, my wife will arrange and pay for the care of the children while my wife is working. I want a wife who will take care of my physical needs. I want a wife who will keep my house clean. A wife who will pick up after me. I want a wife who will keep my clothes clean, ironed, mended, replaced when need be, and who will see to it that my personal things are kept in their proper place so that I can find that I need the minute I need it. I want a wife who cooks the meals, a wife who is a good cook. I want a wife who will plan the menus, do the necessary grocery shopping while I do my studying. I want a wife who will care for me when I am sick and sympathize with my pain and loss of time from school. I want a wife to go along when our family takes a vacation so that someone can continue to care for me and my children when I needed a rest and change of scene. I want a wife who will not bother me with rambling complaints about a wifes duties. But I want a wife who will listen to me when I feel the need to explain a rather difficult point I have come across in my course of studies. And I want a wife who will type my papers for me when I have written them. I want a wife who will take care of the details of my social life. When my wife and I are invited out by my friends, I want a wife who will take care of the babysitting arrangements. When I meet people at school that I like and want to entertain, I want a wife who will have the house clean, will prepare a special meal, serve it to me and my friends. I want a wife who will have arranged that the children are fed and ready for bed before my guests arrive so that the children do not bother us. I want a wife who takes care of the needs of my guests so that they feel comfortable, who makes sure that they have an ashtray, that they are passed the horsed oeuvres, that they are offered a second helping of the food, that their wine glasses are replenished when necessary, that their coffee is served to them as they like it. And I want a wife who knows that sometimes I need a night out by myself. I want a wife who is sensitive to my sexual needs, a wife who makes love passionately and eagerly when I feel like it, a wife who makes sure that I am satisfied. And, of course, I want a wife who will not demand sexual attention when I am not in the mood for it. I want a wife who assumes the complete responsibility for birth control, because I do not want more children. I want a wife who will remain sexually faithful to me so that I do not have to clutter up my intellectual life with jealousies. And I want a wife who understands that my sexual needs may entail more than strict adherence to monogamy. I must, after all, be able to relate to people as fully as possible. If, by chance, I find another person more suitable as a wife than the wife I already have. I want the liberty to replace my present wife with another one. Naturally, I will expect a fresh, new life; my wife will take the children and be solely responsible for them so that I am left free. When I am through with school and have a job, I want a wife to quit working and remain at home so that my wife can more fully and completely take care of a wifes duties. My God, who wouldnt want a wife? 59. The tome of the passage can be described as ____. A) dubious B) sardonic C) pessimistic D) critical 60. Why would the author like to go back to school? A) She intends to further her studies. B) She is fed up with the dull, routine life as a housewife. C) She wants to enrich her life and enjoy the freedom as a student. D) She'd like to support herself and even the family because education can provide the means. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 我们历来不大相信裁军谈判会有什么效果，但是我们是赞成谈判的。有人说中国好战，其实中国最希望和平。中国希望至少二十年不打仗。我们面临发展和摆脱落后的任务。我们 摆在第一位的任务是在本世纪末实现现代化的一个初步目标，这就是达到小康水平。如果能 实现这个目标，我们的情况就比较好了。更重要的是我们取得了一个新起点，在花三十年到 五十年时间，接近发达国家的水平。我们不是说赶上，更不是超过，而是接近。所以我们希 望有一个和平的国际环境。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. My own first hint of spring comes when the greatest Balm of Gilead tree across the meadow from my kitchen window puts on a golden corona of buds. Then I know I can put on boots and mittens to climb to where the alpine flowerets are pushing their mauve way up through the snow, hundreds of hundreds of tiny blossoms clustered together, their feel trembling in icy moss. Lower along the creek ways and in boggy places beside the roads, the little red willows make purple shadows on the blue-white snow. The air is still chill (it is March), but the promise has been made. The creeks are low, but air pockets under the ice let small chuckling sounds through. April comes, fierce with buffeting winds and lashings of icy rain, and one begins to see the earth, brown and soggy beneath honeycombed snow banks. Horses, shaggy in their winter coats, roll in the fields, leaving patches of hair that the birds will pick up for their nests. Little colts appear as if by magic, and sheep men are up night after night with the lambing. As the laden cold begins to life, people seem warmer, too. "Think sprig will ever come." They shout to one another. The next day, it snows, covering the first timid crocuses, and the startled birds complain plaintively. Then a week of sunshine, pale and wan perhaps, but sun, nevertheless. And the earth knows. The snow retreats, exposing long, humped tunnels of pocket gophers and moles. Tiny two-bladed plants poke their way up, strong enough to push aside good-sized pebbles. PART V WRITING Directions: Write an essay of about 300 words within 60 minutes. In the first paragraph you should present the advantages of studying abroad. In the second paragraph you should put forth the disadvantages of studying abroad. And in the last paragraph you should clearly state your own opinion about whether you prefer to study abroad or study in your own country. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. Advantages And Disadvantages of Studying Abroad 11 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. The trio began their career in a ____. A) museum B) coffee house C) concert hall D) school 2. Which of the following is not their song? A) Walking in the Rain. B) Blowing in the Wind. C) Puff the Magic Dragon. D) If I had a Hammer. 3. Which of the following is not their concert in 1969? A) Civil Right. B) The Vietnam War. C) World Hunger. D) Apartheid. 4. Their song Light One Candle ____. A) gives their accounts of the events in Central America B) gives support to Soviet Jews C) gives support to Martin Luther King D) support the homeless 5. The singer's latest song is ____. A) Early Morning Rain B) Leaving on a Jet Plane C) El Salvador D) Flowers and Stones SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. Where did these people meet? A) In a library B) On a bus C) In a supermarket D) At the newsagent's 7. Where did Mr. Mercer advise the couple to go? A) France. B) Majorca. C) Jamaica. D) Geneva. 8. What was the basic cost two weeks for two persons? A) '360. B) '500. C) '250. D) '460. 9. Which of the following was suggested by Mr. Mercer? A) "Don't get too familiar with the hotel staff." B) "Keep a check on your spending." C) "Don't sit down at a bar." D) "Book your hotel right away." 10. What happened to Jim at the end of the conversation? A) He bumped into someone. B) He narrowly escaped an accident. C) He ran into a lamp-post. D) he got run over. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. Nineteenth Century Science The nineteenth century produced three important theories: the conservation of (16), the conservation of (17), and (18). The first two pointed towards (19), the third produced a revolution in thought, and science began to split up into the (20) we know today. A French philosopher evolved a system called "(21)" in which science finally took the place of theology and metaphysics. The great scientific principles of (22) of matter and the conservation of energy led to the view that the essential reality of the universe was matter, and thoughts are the results of chemical activities in the brain. Railways and steamships made great changes possible in systems of transports. The first London (23) exchanges was set up in 1879. The first station to supply electricity to private users began to operate in New York. French science was often perfect in form and thought; English science was individualistic and highly (24); German science was (25) and very well organized. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors .Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit The changes in language will continue forever, but no one knows sure (26) who does the changing. One possibility is that children are responsible. A professor of linguistic at the University of Hawaii, (27) explores this in one of his recent books. Sometimes around 1880, a (28) language catastrophe occurred in Hawaii when thousands of emigrant (29) workers were brought to the islands to work for the new sugar industry. These people speaking different languages were unable to communicate with each other or with the native Hawaiians or the dominant English-speaking owners of the plantations. So they first spoke in Pidgin English —— the sort of thing such mixed language (30) populations have always done. A pidgin is not really a language at all. It is more like a set of verbal signals used to name objects and (31) without the grammatical rules needed for expressing thought and ideas. And then, within a single generation, the whole mass of mixed people began speaking a totally new tongue: Hawaiian Creole. The (32) new speech was contained ready-made words borrowed form all the (33) original tongues, but beared little or no resemblance to the (34) predecessors in the rules used for stringing the words together. Although generally regarded as primitive language, Hawaiian Creole (35) had a highly sophisticated grammar. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A Green EFL Stresses the Environment As environment protection becomes a global issue, a new term —— "Green EFL" is working its way into our vocabulary. What does it mean? The Project in the English Country School in southern England gives you some idea and shows how environment protection and language teaching can be combined together. In this school, there are projects on the classification of trees and their leaves, on insects and other invertebrates, pond and river life, flowers and hedgerows. There are air pollution surveys, littler surveys, recycling projects, acid rain surveys, farm visits, countryside walks, sculpture and colleges created from natural materials. It is all backed up in the classroom with EFL materials about the environment —— the rain forests, biological diversity, global warming —— and with materials which concentrate on the students immediate environment under the general heading of "Health": smoking, alcohol and during abuse, diet and exercise. For example, the topic of pollution will involve the students searching the local environment to find out what has been thrown away. This is then classified according to the type of material found and whether it is recyclable or not. The students follow instructions to set up simple experiments to detect air and water pollution. They investigate mosses and lichens, looking up their findings in field guides, to determine the number and quality of species. They compare and collate their findings, producing diagrams, writing up their results and drawing conclusions. They then practice language work on topics such as the Greenhouse Effect and Global Warming. How do the students benefit from this? In common with all project work, leaner autonomy, cooperation and motivation is fostered. The language practice takes place in a natural and enjoyable setting. As a result the students develop an appreciation of and an alertness and sensitivity toward their surroundings. Another advantage of Green EFL is that the environment is a global issue: What happens in one country affects what happens in another. The environment thus spans borders and cultures. We can teach the language, English, through the environment, without teaching "Englishness", or "Americanness", or whatever other culture values we might accidentally or deliberately put across to our students. Finally, through an understanding of the global environment, and the issues which affect it, students will be better able to meet challenges in the future. For the teacher interested in teaching English through environmental studies, there is a surprising amount of material available. The Cambridge Advanced English exam, with its emphasis on scientific/authentic English, had encouraged authors to include texts on various environmental issues. Sue O Connells "Focus on Advanced English", for example, includes a chapter called "Paradise Lost" about the rain forests; "Passport to Cambridge Advanced English" discusses the Greenhouse Effect and Global Warming; "Cambridge Advanced English" by Leo Jones, has a chapter about Green peace and The Antarctic; and so on. Environmental topics in Childrens EFL textbooks are also catching on. Book 3 of Collin "Mode" series is particularly useful. 36. The Green EFL ____. A) is a teaching program which combines protection and language teaching B) is practical is southern England C) is a newly coined term which addresses the global issue of environmental protection D) All of above 37. How can students detect air and water pollution? A) They look for mosses and lichens and draw the conclusion according to the number and quality of the species. B) They go to the fields to measure the quality of air and water. C) They set up experiments to investigate the substances in air and water. D) They look for several kinds of species in the field, produce diagrams and draw conclusions. 38. According to the author, the second advantage of Green EFL is that ____. A) students will not be confined to learn a particular culture value B) students may develop sensitivity toward their surroundings C) students can learn values through Green EFL D) students shall have a better understanding of the global issue TEXT B What is it that brings about such an intimate connection between language and thinking? Is there no thinking without the use of language, namely in concepts and concept-combinations for which words need not necessarily come to mind? Has not everyone of us struggled for words although the connection between "thing" was already clear? We might be inclined to attribute to the act of thinking complete independence from language if the individual formed or were able to form his concepts without the verbal guidance of his environment. Yet most likely the mental shape of an individual, growing up under such conditions, would be very poor. Thus we may conclude that the mental development of the individual and his way of forming concepts depend to a high degree upon language. This makes us realize to what extent the same language means the same mentality. In this sense thinking and language are linked together. What distinguishes the language of science from language as we ordinarily understand the word? How is it that scientific language is international? What science strives for is an utmost acuteness and clarity of concepts as regards their mutual relation and their correspondence to sensory data. As an illustration, let us take the language of Education geometry and Algebra. They manipulate with a small number of independently introduced concepts, respectively symbols, such as the integral number, the straight line, the point, as well as with signs which designate the fundamental operations, that is the connections between those fundamental concepts. This is the basis for the construction between concepts and statements on the one hand and sensory data on the other hand is established through acts of counting and measuring whose performance is sufficiently well determined. The super-national character of scientific concepts and scientific language is due to the fact that they have been set up by the best brains of all countries and all times. In solitude and yet in cooperative effort as regards the final effect they created the spiritual tools for the technical revolutions which have transformed the life of mankind in the last centuries. Their system of concepts has served as a guide in the bewildering chaos of perceptions so that we learned to grasp general truths from particular observations. What hopes and fears does the scientific method imply for mankind? I do not think that this is the right way to put question. Whatever this tool in the hand of man will produce depends entirely on the goals alive in this mankind. Once these goals exist, the scientific method furnishes means to realize them. Yet it can not furnish the very goals. The scientific method itself would not have led anywhere, it would not even have been born without a passionate striving for clear understanding. Perfections of means and confusion of goals seem —— in my opinion —— to characterize our age. If we desire sincerely and passionately the safety, the welfare and the free development of the talents of all men, we shall not be in want of the means of approach such a state. Even if only a small part of mankind strives for such goals, their superiority will prove itself in the long run. 39. How does the writer draw the conclusion that mental development of an individual depends on much upon language? A) He studies statistics revealed by researchers. B) By reasoning. C) It is consensus. D) He merely asserts it to be the case. 40. What determines the super-national character of scientific language? A) Acuteness and clarity of scientific concepts. B) The fact that it is introduced by the smartest brains. C) Its correspondence to sensory data. D) Its function as the spiritual tools. 41. With which of the following statements would the writer probably favor? A) Scientific method only provide mankind means to attain our goal. B) Scientific method would lead us to doom and chaos. C) Scientific method is like a two-edged sword, it can produce welfare as well as warfare. D) Both A and C TEXT C "See Spot Run": Teaching My Grandmother To Read When I was 14 years old and very impressed with my teenage status (looking toward to all the rewards it would bring), I set for myself a very special goal —— that to differentiate me from my friends that I dont believe I told a single one. As a teacher, I was expected to have deep, dark secrets, but I was not supported to keep them from my friends. My secret was a project that I undertook every day after school for several months. It began to when I stealthily made my way into the local elementary school —— horror of horrors should I be seen; I was now in junior high. I identified myself as a graduate of the elementary school, and being taken under wing by a favorite fifth grade teacher, I was given a small bundle from a locked storeroom —— a bundle that I quickly dropped into a bag, lest anyone see me walking home with something from the "little kids" school. I brought the bundle home —— proudly now, for within the confines of my home, I was proud of my project. I walked into the living room, and one by one, emptied the bag of basic reading books. They were thin books with colorful covers and large print. The words were monosyllabic and repetitive. I sat down to the secret task at hand. "All right", I said authoritatively to my 70-year-old grandmother, "today we begin our first reading lesson". For weeks afterwards, my grandmother and I sat patiently side by side roles reversed as she, with a bit of difficulty, sounded out every word, then read them again, piece by piece, until she understood the short sentences. When she slowly repeated the full sentence, we both would smile and clap our hands —— I felt so pound, so grown up. My grandmother was born in Kalamata, Greece, in a rocky little farming village where nothing much grew. She never had the time to go to school. As she oldest child she was expected to take care of her brother and sister, as well as the house and acclimating exceptions, and her father scratched out what little he could form from the soil. So, for my grandmother, schooling was out. But she had big plans for herself. She had heard about America. About how rich you could be. How people on the streets would offer you a dollar just to smell the flower you were carrying. About how everyone lived in nice houses —— not stone huts on the side of mountains —— and had nice clothes and time for school. So my grandmother made a decision at 14 —— just a child, I realize now —— to take a long and sickening 30-day sea voyage alone to the United States. After lying about her age to the passport officials, who would shake their heads vehemently at anyone under 16 leaving her family, and after giving her favorite gold earrings to her cousin, saying "In America, I will have all the gold I want", my young grandmother put herself on a ship. She landed in New York in 1916. No need to repeat the story of how it went for years. The streets were not made of gold. People werent interested in smelling flowers held by strangers. My grandmother was a foreigner. Alone. A young girl who worked hard doing piecework to earn money for meals. No leisure time, no new gold earrings —— and no school. She learned only enough English to help her in her daily business as she traveled about Broonklyn. Socially, the "foreigners" stayed in neighborhoods where they didnt feel like foreigners. English came slowly. My grandmother had never learned to read. She could make out a menu, but not a newspaper. She could read a street sign, but not a shop directory. She could read only what she needed to read as, through the years, she married, had five daughters, and helped my grandfather with this restaurant. So when I was 14 —— the same age that my grandmother was when she left her family, her country, and everything she knew —— I took it upon myself to teach my grandmother something, something I already knew how to do. Something with which I could give back to her some of the things she had taught me. And it was slight repayment for all she taught me. How to cover the fig tree in tar paper so it could survive the winter. How to cultivate rose bushes and magnolia trees that thrived on her little piece of property. How to make baklava, and other Greek delights, working from her memory. ("Now we add some milk?" "How much?" "Until we have enough.") Best of all, she had taught me my ethnic heritage. First, we phonetically sounded out the alphabet. Then, we talked about vowels —— English is such a difficult language to learn. I hadnt even begun to explain the different sounds "gh" could make. We were still at the basics. Every afternoon, we would sit in the living room, my grandmother with an afghan converting her knees, giving up her crocheting for her reading lesson. I, with the patience that can come only from love, slowly coached her from the basic reader to the second-grade reader, giving up my telephone gossiping. Years later, my grandmother still hadnt learned quite enough to sit comfortably with a newspaper or magazine, but it felt awfully good to see her try. How we used to laugh at her pronunciation mistakes. She laughed more heartily than I. I never knew whether I should laugh. Here was this old woman slowly and carefully sounding out each word, moving her lips, not saying anything aloud until she was absolutely sure, and then, loudly, happily saying, "Look at spot. See Spot run." When my grandmother died and we faced the sad task of emptying her home, I was going through her night-table drawer and came upon the basic readers. I turned the pages slowly, remembering. I put them in a paper bag, and the next day returned them to the "little kids" school. Maybe someday, some teenager will request them again, for the same task. I will make for a lifetime of memories. 42. The girl got books from ____ to teach her grandmother. A) the local elementary school B) the library C) the bookstore D) her own bookcase 43. Ever since the girl took up the task to teach her grandmother, she gave up the habit of ____. A) cultivating rose bushes B) reading adventurous stories C) prattling on telephone D) playing chess with her schoolmates 44. How did the girl feel about the experience of teaching her grandmother? A) She was proud for she was even able to teach her grandmother. B) She felt it a pleasant secret. C) She treasured the special experience. D) All of the above. 45. What is the main theme of this text? A) It's never too late to learn. B) An old woman had a rough but rewarding life. C) The love between the grandmother and her granddaughter is profound. D) A girl can teach an old woman the hard-to-learn skill of reading English. TEXT D Jefferson Today Thomas Jefferson, who died in 1826, looms ever larger as a figure of special significance. Americans, of course, are familiar with Jefferson as an early statesman, author of the Declaration of Independence, and a high-ranking presidential Founding Father. But there is another Jefferson less well known. This is the Jefferson who, as the outstanding American philosopher of democracy, has an increasing appeal to the worlds newly emerging peoples. There is no other man in history who formulated the ideas of democracy with such fullness, persuasiveness, and logic. Those interested in democracy as a poetical philosophy and system —— even those who do not accept his postulates or are critical of his solutions —— must reckon with his thought. What, then, is his thought, and how much of it is still relevant under modern conditions? Of all the ideas and beliefs that make up the political philosophy known as Jefferson democracy, perhaps three are paramount. These are the idea of equality, the idea of freedom, and the idea of the peoples control over government. Underlying the whole, and serving as a major premise, is confidence in man. To Jefferson, it was virtually axiomatic that the human being was essentially good, that he was capable of constant improvement through education and reason. He believed that "no definite limit could be assigned" to mans continued progress from ignorance and superstition to enlightenment and happiness. Unless this kept in mind, Jefferson can not be understood properly. What did he mean by the concept of equality, which he stated as a "self-evident" truth? Obviously, he was not foolish enough to believe that all men are equal in size or intelligence or talents or moral development. He never said that men are equal, but only that they come into the world with "equal rights". He believed that equality was a political rather than a biological or psychological or economic conception. It was a gift that man acquired automatically by coming into the world as a member of the human community. Intertwined with equality was the concept of freedom, also viewed by Jefferson as a "natural tight." In the Declaration of Independence he stated it as "self-evident" that liberty was one of the "inherent" and "unalienable rights" with which the Creator endowed man. "Freedom", he summed up at one time, "is the gift of Nature." What did Jefferson mean by freedom and why was it necessary for him to claim it as an "inherent" or "natural" right? In Jefferson thought there are two main elements in the idea of freedom. There is, first, mans liberty to organize his own political institutions and to select periodically the individuals to run them. The other freedom is personal. Foremost in the area of individual liberty, Jefferson believed, was the untrammeled right to say, think, write, and believe whatever the citizen wishes —— provided, of course, he does not directly injure his neighbors. It is because political and personal freedom are potentially in conflict that Jefferson, in order to make both secure, felt the need to found them on "natural right". If each liberty derives from an "inherent" right, then neither could justly undermine the other. Experience of the past, when governments, were neither too strong for the ruled or too weak to rule them, convinced Jefferson of the desirability of establishing a delicate natural balance between political power and personal rights. This brings us to the third basic element in the Jeffersonian idea: the peoples control over government. It is paradoxical that Jefferson, who spent most of his adult years in politics, had an ingrained distrust of government as such. For the then-existing governments of Europe, virtually all of them hereditary monar chies, he had antipathy mixed with contempt. His mistrust of strong and unchecked government was inveterate. "I am not," he said, "a friend to a very energetic government. It is always oppressive." Government being a necessity for civilized existence, the question was how it could be prevented from following its tendency to swallow the rights of the people. Jeffersons answer to this ancient dilemma was at variance with much traditional thinking. He began with the postulate that government existed for the people, and not vice versa; that it had no independent being except as an instrument of the people; and that it had no legitimate justifications for existence except to serve the people. From this it followed, in Jeffersons view, that only the people, and not their rulers or the privileged classes, could and should be relied upon as the "safe depositories" of political liberty. This key idea in the Jeffersonian political universe rested on the monumental assumption that the people at large had the wisdom, the capability, and the knowledge exclusively to carry the burden of political power and responsibility. The assumption was, of course, widely challenged and vigorously denied in Jeffersons day, but he always asserted his confidence in it. Confidence in the people, however, was not enough, by itself, to serve as a safeguard against the potential dangers inherent in political power. The people might become corrupted or demoralized or indifferent. Jefferson believed that the best practice for the avoidance of tyranny and the preservation of freedom was to follow two main policies. One was designed to limit power, and the other to control power. In order to put limits on power, Jefferson felt, it was best to divide it by scattering its functions among as many entities as possible —— among states, countries, and municipalities. In order to keep it in check, it was to be impartially balanced among legislative, executive, and judicial branches. Thus, no group, agency, or entity would be able legitimately to acquire power for abuse. This is, of course, the theory that is embedded in the Constitution and that underlies the American federal system with its "check and balance". For the control of power or, more specifically, the governmental apparatus itself, other devices had to be brought into play. Of these, two are of special importance: suffrage and elections. Unlike many contemporaries, Jefferson believed in virtually universal suffrage. His opinion was that the universal right to vote was the only "rational and peaceable instrument" of free government. Next to the right to vote, the system of free elections was the foremost instrument for control over government. This involved, first, the election by the people of practically all high government officials, and, secondly, fixed and regular periods of polling, established by law. To make doubly sure that this mechanism would work as an effective control over power, Jefferson advocated frequent elections and short terms of office, so that the citizens would be enabled to express their "approbation or rejection" as soon as possible. This, in substance, is the Jeffersonian philosophy —— faith in the idea of equality, of freedom, and in the right to and need for popular control over government. What, in all this, is relevant to peoples without a democratic tradition, especially those who have recently emerged in Asia and Africa? The rejection of democratic procedures by some of these peoples has been disheartening to believers in freedom and democracy. But it is noteworthy that democratic and parliamentary government has been displaced in areas where the people had no background in freedom or self-rule, and where illiteracy is generally high. Even there it is significant that the new dictatorships are usually proclaimed in the name of the people. The Jeffersonian assumption that men crave equality and freedom has not been denied by events. Special conditions and traditions may explain non-democratic political methods for the achievement of certain purposes, but these remain unstable wherever the notion of liberty has begun to gain ground. "The disease of liberty", Jefferson said, "is catching." The proof of this is to be found even in such societies as the Spanish and the Islamic, with their ancient traditions of chieftainships where popular eruptions against dictatorial rule have had an almost tidal constancy. But it is a slow process, as Jefferson well knew, "The ground of liberty", he said, "is to be gained by inches; we must be contented to secure what we can get, from time to time, and eternally press forward for what is yet to get. It takes time to persuade men to do even what is for their own good." Does Jefferson survive? Indeed he does. 46. What are the three most paramount ideas in Jeffersonian democracy? A) Equality, freedom and people's control over government. B) Equality, confidence in man and people's control over government. C) Equality, freedom and confidence in man. D) Freedom, confidence in man and people's control over government. 47. How did Jefferson interpret the concept of equality? A) He asserted that it was a political concepts as well as a biological and economic concept. B) He believed that men were born with equal rights. C) Equality is a gift of Nature. D) Both B and C 48. In Jefferson's opinion, what could prevent tyranny and preserve freedom? A) Suffrage and election. B) Checks and balances. C) The two politics to limit power and to control power. D) The dividing of functions among many entities. 49. Which of the following statements would the writer probably Not support? A) The rejection of democratic procedures is partly attributed to ignorance. B) Jefferson's ideas of democracy are often distorted by some people on purpose. C) Universal suffrage is the cardinal instrument for control over government. D) Once the concept of liberty is accepted by the majority, a democratic society will be strongly demanded. 50. The primary purpose of this text is to ____. A) explain Jefferson's ideas of democracy B) exalt Jefferson as an outstanding philosopher C) illustrate Jefferson's influence on modern politics D) view Jeffersonian democracy under modern conditions SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. What is the main point of this passage? A. Automobile ownership is still just a dream for most people. B. Chinese banks starts to offer car loans. C. Car price will probably go down as a result of the efforts Chinese Government spends to boost consumer spending. D. The automobile industry in Shanghai is not promising. Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. Shanghai —— Shanghai advertising executive Sun Gang stole time from the office and fought his way through an unruly scrum of visitors queuing to see the newest cars from the world industry at the June 15 to 20 Auto Shanghais 99 exhibition. "I am a car lover," he said, casting an appreciative glance over a sleek Honda sedan as he struggled to keep several manufactures brochures under his arm. But the suggestion that he might drive home his own, with the help of auto loans more available than ever under a Chinese government campaign to boost consumer spending, brought only a bitter chuckle. "If somebody was willing to give me this (car) for no money at all, I could hardly afford to pay the license-plate fee," he said. "I have a good job now, and my wifes salary isnt bad either „„ We thought about applying, but it just didnt make sense." Chinese banks have started offering car loans to help boost the Chinese economy and allow domestic banks to prepare for competition after Chinas possible entrance to the World Trade Organization (WTO). Banks nationwide have only issued some 10,000 such loans since the policy came into play in the second half of 1998, Xinmin Evening News said. Car prices are so high that the short term allowed, five yeas at maximum, make monthly payments an unacceptably heavy burden, the newspaper said. Even in Shanghai where incomes are the highest in China, the average employed person would have to spend every penny they earned for nearly 16 years to pay the 187,000 Yuan price of the cheapest sedan from Shanghai Volkswagen. Making matters worse, the countrys distribution of wealth limits the helpfulness of car buyer financing. Few consumers are in the income bracket where an auto purchase is only slightly out of reach, said Michael Dunne, the president of Automotive Resource Asia, an industry consultancy. Unlike the "bell curve" seen in the US economy, where the majority of potential buyers are in the middle-income range, the Chinese market is "a camel model", he said. Demand is either from the wealthy elite who can afford luxury cars or the masses —— people who could only afford a car at vastly lower price. "There isnt much in-between," he said. According to a recent analysis by the Shanghai Financial News daily, only about 7-8 percent of households in Shanghai could realistically consider financing a car purchase. Xu Zhengye, an official at the Shanghai car-loan center of the Industrial and Commercial Bank of China, said business was also poor because extraneous monthly car ownership costs deterred applicants. "There are between 1,000 and 2,000 Yuan in non-loan monthly costs," he said, referring to parking, insurance, road-user taxes, petrol and maintenance. "It would be cheaper to take a taxi everyday," he said. Local governments further depress demand by limiting distribution of license plates and charging exorbitant fees for their issue, according to an official at the Shanghai Auto Industry Sales General Co. Consumers in the city can freely obtain licenses for cars built in Shanghai for 20,000 Yuan, but must bid at auctions held by the Public Security Bureau to get one for any other model. The latter licenses, issued only occasionally in small batches, regularly go for 100,000 Yuan, the official said. "Of course no producer wants to see such high license fees," he said, adding that the city government uses them to prevent traffic congestion and control air pollution 51. What is the main point of this passage? A) Automobile ownership is still just a dream for most people. B) Chinese banks starts to offer car loans. C) Car price will probably go down as a result of the efforts Chinese Government spends to boost consumer spending. D) The automobile industry in Shanghai is not promising. TEXT F First read the questions. 52. The Japanese translation of the American car "Randan" is ____. A. star B. idiot C. killer D. monkey 53. As a conclusion, what does the writer suggest multinational corporations to do in order to avoid mistakes and losses? A. Study foreign market in which the product will be plunged into. B. Prudent planning. C. Package modification. D. Both A and B. Now go through TEXT F quickly to answer question 52 and 53. The Language Barrier A close examination of foreign markets and language differences is necessary and should be required before a products domestically successful name is introduced abroad. Unfortunately, this step is sometimes neglected in a companys enthusiasm to plunge into overseas marketing operations. Sometimes, the company or product name may require alteration because it conveys the wrong message in a second language. Large and small firms alike have discovered this. For example, when the Coca-Cola Company was planning its marketing strategy for China in the 1920s, it wanted to introduce its product with the English pronunciation of "Coca-Cola." A translator used a group of Chinese characters that, when pronounced, sounded like the product name. These characters were placed on the cola bottles and marketed. Was it any wonder sales levels were low? The characters actually translated to mean "bite the wax tadpole." Since the product was new, sound was unimportant to the consumers; meaning was vital. Today Coca-Cola is again marketing its cola in China. The new characters used on the bottle translated to "happiness in the mouth." From its first marketing attempts, Coca-Cola learned a valuable lesson in international marketing. General Motors was faced with a similar problem. It was troubled by a lack of enthusiasm among Puerto Rican auto dealers for its recently introduced Chevrolet "Nova" about ten years ago. The name "Nova" means star when literally translated. However, when spoken it sounded like "no va" which, in Spanish, means "it doesnt go". This obviously did little to increase consumer confidence in the vehicle. To remedy the situation, General Motors changed the automobile name to "Caribe", and sales increased. Comparable situations have also be experienced by other car manufacturers. In fact, problems with the names used in international automobile promotions seem to crop up frequently. For example, the American Motors Corporations car "Matador" might conjure up images of virility and strength in America, but in Puerto Rico it means "killer" —— not a favorable connotation in a place with a high traffic fatality rate. A U.S. company was taken by surprise when it introduced its product in Latin American and learned that the name meant "jackass oil" in Spanish. Another well-intentioned firm sold shampoo in Brazil under the name "Evitol". Little did it realize that it was claiming to be selling a "dandruff contraceptive". One manufacturing company sold its machines in the Soviet Union under the name "Bardak" —— a word that signifies a brothel in Russian. The name of an American product that failed to capture the Swedish market translated to "enema", which the product was not! Of course, foreign firms can make mistakes, too. A Finnish brewery introduced two new beverages in the United States —— "Koff" beer and "Siff" beer. Is it any wonder that sales were sluggish? Another name Americans found unappealing was on packages of a delicious chocolate-and-fruit product sold in German and other European delicatessens. The chocolate concoction had the undesirable English name "Zit"! Many times the required name change is a rather simple one. Wrigley, for example, merely altered the spelling of its "Spearmint" chewing gum to "Speermint" to aid in the German pronunciation of the flavor. "Maxwell House" proved slightly more difficult: the name was changed to "Maxwell Kaffee" in Germany, to "Legal" in France, and to "Monkey" in Spain. Product names are not the only ones that can generate company blunders. If a firms name is misinterpreted or incorrectly translated, it, too, can have the same humorous, obscene, offensive, or unexpected connotations. For example, a private Egyptian airline, Misair, proved to be rather unpopular with the French nationals. Could the fact that the name, when pronounced, meant "misery" in French have contributed to the airlines flight? Another airline trying to gain acceptance in Australia only complicated matters when it chose the firm name "EMU". The emu is an Australian bird incapable of flying. When Esso realized that its name phonetically meant "stalled car", it understood why it had had difficulties in the Japanese market. As a final illustration, consider the trade magazine that promoted giftware and launched a worldwide circulation efforts. The magazine used the word "gift" in its title and as part of its name. When it was latter revealed that "gift" is the German word for "poison", a red-faced publishing executive supposedly retorted that the Germans should simply find a new word for poison! Of course, some company names have traveled quite well. Kodak may be the most famous example. A research team deliberately developed this name after carefully searching for a word that was pronounceable everywhere but had no specific meaning anywhere. Exxon is another such name that was reportedly accepted only after a lengthy and expensive computer-assisted search. Multinational corporations have experienced many unexpected troubles concerning company or product names, and even attempts to alter names have led to blunders. It should be evident that careful planning and study of the potential market is necessary because name adaptation can be every bit as important a product or package modification. 52. The Japanese translation of the American car "Randan" is ____. A) star B) idiot C) killer D) monkey 53. As a conclusion, what does the writer suggest multinational corporations to do in order to avoid mistakes and losses? A) Study foreign market in which the product will be plunged into. B) Prudent planning. C) Package modification. D) Both A and B TEXT G First read the question. 54. What kind of working experience did the applicant get from the year 1968 to 1969? A. Clerical assistant in chemistry Department of Chicago University. B. Laboratory assistant in Chicago Downtown Hospital. C. Staff member in chemistry club in Chicago University. D. All of the above. Now go through TEXT G quickly to answer question 54. Resume of Marjorie B. Major 120 Main Street Centerville, Ky. Telephone: MA 1-2345 OBJECTIVE Laboratory Technician SCHOLASTIC RECORD-COLLEGE 1966-1970 University of Chicago Chicago, Ill. B.Sc., 1970 Minored in Mathematics Scholastic Average: B plus Scholarships: 1966-1970: Half-tuition scholarship 1967-1970: Full-tuition scholarships Working Experience: 1968-1969 Laboratory Assistant, Chicago Downtown Hospital. Work involved blood, urine analyses; record-keeping. Average 10 hours per week during the school year. Worked full-time during summers of 1968 and 1969. 1966-1968 Clerical Assistant, Chemistry Department, University of Chicago. Maintained records of Ford Foundation project on the body chemistry of twins. Extracurricular activities: 1966-1970: Chemistry Club; Treasurer 1968 1966-1970: Womens Tennis Team; co-captain 1969, 1970 Sorority: Alpha Alpha Alpha, Honorary Society of Chemistry Department SCHOLASTIC RECORD-HIGH SCHOOL 1962-1966 Centerville High School Centerville, Ky. Scholastic Average: A minus Scholastic Recognition: In 1966, won Kentucky Science Fair prize for an exhibit on the spectroscopic analysis of the stars. Extracurricular activities: Tennis Club; 1962-1966 Orchestra; 1962-1963 Glee Club; 1964-1966 PERSONAL (Followed model on P.212) References School, working, and personal references available. 54. What kind of working experience did the applicant get from the year 1968 to 1969? A) Clerical assistant in chemistry Department of Chicago University. B) Laboratory assistant in Chicago Downtown Hospital. C) Staff member in chemistry club in Chicago University. D) All of the above. TEXT H First read the question. 55. The tone implied in the title of this text is ____. A. nostalgic B. euphemistic C. sarcastic D. pungent Now go through TEXT H quickly to answer question 55. Darkness at Noon Blind from birth, I have never had the opportunity to see myself and have been complete dependent on the image I create in the eye of the observer. To date it has not been narcissistic. There are those who assume that since I cant see, I obviously also can not hear. Very often people will converse with me at the top of their lungs, enunciating each word very carefully. Conversely, people will also often whisper, assuming that since my eyes dont work, my ears dont either. For example, when I go to the airport and ask the ticket agent for assistance to the plane, he or she will invariably pick up the phone, call a ground hostess and whisper: "Hi, Jane, weve got a 76 here." I have concluded that the word "blind" is not used for one of two reasons: Either they fear that if the dread word is spoken, the ticket agents retina will immediately detach, or they are reluctant to inform me of my condition of which I may not have been previously aware. On the other hand, others know that of course I can hear, but believe that I cant talk. Often, therefore, when my wife and I go out to dinner, a waiter or waitress will ask Kit if "he would like a drink" to which I respond that "indeed he would". This point was graphically driven home to me while we were in England. I had been given a years leave of absence from my Washington law firm to study for a diploma in law degree at Oxford University. During the year I became ill and was hospitalized. Immediately after admission, I was wheeled down to the X-ray room. Just at the door sat an elderly woman —— elderly I would judge from the sound of her voice. "What is his name?" the woman asked the orderly who had been wheeling me. "What is your name?" the orderly repeated to me. "Harold Krents", I replied. "Harold Krents", he repeated. "When was he born?" "When were you born?" "November 5, 1994", I responded. "November 5,1994", the orderly intoned. This procedure continued for approximately five minutes at which point even my saint-like disposition deserted me. "Look," I finally blurted out, "this is absolutely ridiculous. Okay, granted I cant see, but its got to have become pretty clear to both of you that I dont need an interpreter." "He says he doesnt need an interpreter," the orderly reported to the woman. The toughest misconception of all is the view that because I cant see, I cant work. I was turned down by over forty law firms because of my blindness, even though my qualifications included a cum laude degree from Harvard College and a good ranking in my Harvard Law School class. The attempt for employment, the continuous frustration of being told that it was impossible for a blind person to practice law, the rejection letters, not based on my lack of ability but rather on my disability, will always remain one of the most disillusioning experiences of my life. Fortunately, this view of limitation and exclusion is beginning to change. On April 16, 1976, the Department of Labor issued regulations that mandate equal-employment opportunities for the handicapped. By and large, the business communitys response to offering employment to the disabled has been enthusiastic. I therefore look forward to the day, with the expectation that it is certain to come, when employers will view their handicapped workers as a little child did me years ago when my family still lived in Scarsdale. I was playing basketball with my father in our backyard according to procedures we had developed. My father would stand beneath the hoop, shout, and I would shoot over his head at the basket attached to our garage. Our next-door neighbor, aged five, wandered over into our yard with a playmate. "Hes blind," our neighbor whispered to her friend in a voice that could be heard distinctly by Dad and me. Dad shot and missed; I did the same. Dad hit the rim: I missed entirely: Dad shot and missed the garage entirely. "Which one is blind?" whispered back the little friend. I would hope that in near future when plant manager is touring the factory with the foreman and comes upon a handicapped an nonhandicapped person working together, his comment after watching them work will be, "Which one is disabled?" 55. The tone implied in the title of this text is ____. A) nostalgic B) euphemistic C) sarcastic D) pungent TEXT I First read the question. 56. Which of the following statements is Not true according to the text? A. World chess champion is competing against the world through Internet. B. It is expected to be the largest interactive competition in the history of the Internet. C. Kasparovs opponents are unskilled amateurs even including a five-year-old boy. D. Kasparov is eager to win the tournament. Now go through TEXT I quickly to answer question 56. Kasparov against the World via Internet New York —— World chess champion Garry Kasparov made his first move against the world on June 21 in a Manhattan park, with a one-meter-high pawn linked to the Internet. His opponent: anyone who can click a mouse and knows the rules of chess. The "Kasparov vs the world" interactive tournament "will be a success no matter what the outcome", said the 36-year-old champion as he addressed an audience of young chess fans in Brant Park, Playing white, he simulated his online opening move —— king pawn to E4 —— which he called "the most traditional move", on a giant board. It was posted to the Web site www.msn.com, which then started immediately fielding countermoves from around the world. Visitors to the site have 24 hours to vote for their sides move. Kasparov will then reply with another 24 hours, and so on, until the conclusion of the match, expected to take most of the summer. Kasparovs opponents can even include unskilled amateurs, as long as they "know the rules of the game," he said. The "World Team" is being guided by five young chess experts who are suggesting their own possible moves and tactics. Before each move is actually played, all site visitors may vote for the move of their choice; the most popular one will be the "World Team" move. This chess tournament is the marriage of an ancient game and a high-tech world —— a paring not foreign to Kasparov, the Russian grand master billed as the greatest chess player ever. Two years ago, he lost to an IBM computer. He says this cutting-edged encounter "is a more pleasant event for the human race." After all, hell pitted against human minds, not the computer chips that once beat him. The five players leading the opposing team are among the worlds finest young chess players. They include Irina Krush, the 15-year-old US womens chess champion; Etienne Bacrot, 16, of France, who became the youngest grand master in history at age 14; Florin Felecan, a 19-year-old who is the highest-rated American chess player under age 21; and Elizabeth Pahtz, 14, of Erfurt, Germany, who is ranked eighth in the World Championship of youngsters. The Moscow-based Kasparov cut a deal with Microsoft Corp to play the current match in the "Gaming Zone" of Microsofts MSN network of Internet services. The teams of the deal were not disclosed. The world-scale interactive game "will make it possible to play the world champion from your own living room", said Yusuf Mehdi, directory of Microsofts Consumer and Commerce Group. After each move, the site will air live "chats" on coaches strategies and options. On June 21 at 8 am, Kasparov answered questions on the Internet from fans around the world. In the highly publicized 1997 "Deep Blue" tournament, he was defeated by the IBM supercomputer —— a "man vs machine" victory that left his pride wounded. When asked what attracted him to chess as a 5-year-old in Soviet Azerbaijan, he said, "I like to win." Hes 100 international points ahead —— way ahead —— of his nearest competitor, he said, so "I dont think about my rating. It doesnt matter." 56. Which of the following statements is Not true according to the text? A) World chess champion is competing against the world through Internet. B) It is expected to be the largest interactive competition in the history of the Internet. C) Kasparov's opponents are unskilled amateurs even including a five-year-old boy. D) Kasparov is eager to win the tournament. TEXT J First read the questions. 57. What does the word "epigram" originate from? A. Epitaph in ancient Rome. B. Concise, pointed or sarcastic saying in the Greek Anthology. C. Words carved on stones, etc, usually terse, sage or sarcastic. D. A figure of speech in writing. 58. If wisely used, epigram can ____. A. add a philosophical touch to the article B. deliver the implied sense of the article C. shorten the article as well as intensify its theme D. All of the above Now go through TEXT J quickly to answer question 57 and 58. The word "epigram" is from Greek, meaning "inscription, to write upon or to carve upon". Thus it refers to the words carved on stones, monument or statue, normally concise, pointed or sarcastic. It has about the same contents as epitaph. Later, many writers adopted it as a figure in verse, prose or poem. Early at the beginning of the century, Roman authors, especially Martial composed epigrams. Many epigrams are gathered in the Greek Anthology. However, the verse epigram has become relatively rare in more recent time. But very many have used the form in prose or speech to express something tersely or wittily, especially from the 16th century onwards. Epigram was much cultivated in the 17th century in England by Johnson, Donne, Herrick, Dryden, Swift „ In the 18th century and 19th century, Pope, Burns, Blake, Landon and others can be taken as the experts of using epigram. Thus, epigram has developed from the inscription on a gravestone, into a figure of speech in writing. An epigram is concise, or sarcastic saying. It is a terse, sage witty and often paradoxical line. It states a simple truth pitifully and pungently and usually arouses interest and surprise by its deep insight into certain aspects of human behavior of feeling. Among all the figures, epigram is remarkable for its philosophical touch and double meaning transferring ability. Therefore, authors often appeals to epigram when they want to express their political idea in an implied way. Generally speaking, this figure, when wisely used, can shorten the spaces of your article, can deepen the meaning of the sentence, can touch the reader in a richer way, can deliver the subtle sense of the writer philosophically. Partially, epigram mingles with Paradox in wit; antithesis in giving force; satire in sharpness; epitaph in initial usage. An epitaph differs from an epigram in being a kind of valediction which may be solemn, complimentary or even flippant. It follows epigrammatic style. Epigram is the same as oxymoron and antithesis in clever diction and neatness. In Chinese, epigram has been an outstanding figure in literature for ages. Especially in ancient Chinese, it appeared so frequently that it almost was the way to write articles of philosophy. Epigram can be translated directly, only occasionally the meaning can not be put through owing to the different habit, custom or anecdote between nations. Besides, it is rare for us to put an English epigram into a Chinese one. 57. What does the word "epigram" originate from? A) Epitaph in ancient Rome. B) Concise, pointed or sarcastic saying in the Greek Anthology. C) Words carved on stones, etc, usually terse, sage or sarcastic. D) A figure of speech in writing. 58. If wisely used, epigram can ____. A) add a philosophical touch to the article B) deliver the implied sense of the article C) shorten the article as well as intensify its theme D) All of the above TEXT K First read the questions. 59. This text deals with ____. A. the scope of sociolinguistics B. the development of sociolinguistics C. the nature of sociolingustics D. the achievement of sociolinguistics 60. Which of the following statement is Not true according to the text? A. Socioliguistics is a new interdisciplinary field. B. The study of language and society with purely sociological objectives does not belong to sociolinguistics. C. The ethnography of speaking is an area which explores the ways language is used in different cultures. D. Chapter 9 in this book will introduce some basics of social dialectology. Now go through TEXT K quickly to answer question 59 and 60. Sociolinguistics views language as a social-cultural phenomenon which should be studied in relation to society. Linguists, anthropologists, sociologists, psychologists and educationalists are interested in enquiring in the relationship between language, and culture and society. All of them have made very important contributions to the emergence and development of the discipline. Sociolingusistics is a new interdisciplinary field. The term sociolinguistics means many different things to many different people. This multiplicity of interpretations is due to the fact that, while everybody would agree that sociolinguistics has something to do with language and society, it is clearly also not concerned with everything that could be considered "language and society". Therefore, different scholars draw the line between language and society, and sociolinguistics in different places and hence a number of areas of study have appeared. In terms of objectivities, it is possible to divide studies of language and society into three groups: those where the objectives are purely sociological; those where they are partly sociological and partly linguistic; and those where the objectives are wholly linguistic. The first group does not belong to sociolinguistics. The second category is where the main problem with the term sociolinguistics lies: some people would include the whole of this area within sociolinguistics; others would exclude it totally; yet others would include some areas but not all. In the case of the third category, the term sociolinguistics is uncontroversial. In this book we will introduce you to some aspects of the last two categories. And now we will highlight five of the major areas of study in this interdisciplinary field as follows. The sociology of language is a label applied to courses taught in linguistics departments in the United States, and it is a field whose objectives are at least partly linguistic. The term is most prominently associated with the work of Joshua Fishman. The sociology of language focuses upon the social organization of language behavior, including not only language usage but also language attitudes. The sociology of language most typically studied topics such as bilingualism or multilingualism, diglossia, verbal repertoire, code-switching, language loyalty and language planning, etc. Descriptions in this field typically concentrate on, in Fishmans words, "who speaks (or writes) what language (or what language variety) to whom and when and to what end?" (Fishman 1969, in Giglioli 1972: 46). In this book we will highlight some aspects of the above topics in Chapter 5, 6, 12 and 13. The ethnography of speaking refers to an area whose objectives are clearly both linguistic and social. As employed first by Hymes in the 1960s, this term is applied to a field which looks at the role of language in the "communicative conduct of communities" —— the ways is which language is actually used in different cultures. It examines the functions and uses of styles, dialects and languages, and looks at the way in which speech acts are interpreted and carried through in particular societies. It also tends to be cross-cultural in emphasis. It involves elements from sociology, social anthropology, education, folklore and poetics, as well as linguistics. There is no clear boundary between the ethnography of speaking and the sociology of language, and they overlap with each other in many respects. Chapter 9 in this book will introduce some basics of the ethnography of speaking. Social dialectology addresses itself to issues such as the relationship between language and social class. However, the general heading of "language and society" presupposes some kind of social interaction i.e. conversational discourse. This can not be fully identified with "discourse analysis" where it is understood to mean simply text grammar or the grammatical analysis of units larger than then sentence. There are many studies in conversational analysis which are concerned with the organization of conversation. Some researchers have looked more specifically at the structures of discourse, and pointed out that stretches of discourse are no more unstructured sequences of utterances than sentences are unstructured sequences of words. Other researches have examined the nature of the cohesion of conversational discourse. Yet other scholars have been concerned with what has been referred to as "rules for discourse". Chapter 10 and 11 in this book will highlight some important approaches to the discourse analysis. Discourse analysis belongs to the second category of the studies on language and society. Some discourse analysts would refer to their own work as falling under the heading of sociolinguistics but others would not. The analysis of discourse under main objectives has not been to learn more about a particular society. Rather, it has been concerned to learn more about language. It examines the uses of language; the mechanism of language change; the nature of linguistic systems, etc. Therefore, this type of work is sometimes referred to as "sociolinguistics proper". Labor is the major founder of social dialectology. His survey of the social dialects of New York city in the 1960s is regarded as the pioneering work and The Social stratification of English in New York City (1966) is the representative work in this area. Chapter 2, 3, and 4 of this book will be devoted to some aspects of this area. 59. This text deals with ____. A) the scope of sociolinguistics B) the development of sociolinguistics C) the nature of sociolingustics D) the achievement of sociolinguistics 60. Which of the following statement is Not true according to the text? A) Socioliguistics is a new interdisciplinary field. B) The study of language and society with purely sociological objectives does not belong to sociolinguistics. C) The ethnography of speaking is an area which explores the ways language is used in different cultures. D) Chapter 9 in this book will introduce some basics of social dialectology. PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 中国是一个地域辽阔，有着数千年悠久历史的多民族国家，有着秀丽的自然风光、众多的名胜古迹和丰富多彩的灿烂文化，旅游资源十分丰富。改革开放以来，中国经济以年平均 近10%的速度持续增长，各项事业蓬勃发展，人民生活水品显著提高，为旅游业的兴旺奠定了坚实的基础。中国政治稳定，经济发展，市场繁荣，中国政府坚持对外开放，积极发展与 世界各国的关系，也为旅游业的发展创造了极为有利的条件。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. And that is part of this same, unremarkable theme: spring does come. In the garden the rue anemones come marching out, bright as toy soldiers on their parapets of stone. The dogwoods float in casual clouds among the hills. This is the Resurrection time. That which was dead, or so it seemed, has come to life again —— the stiff branch, supple; the brown earth, green. This is the miracle: There is no death; there is in truth eternal life. So, in the spring, we plunge shovels into the garden plot, turn under the dark compost, rake fine the crumbling clods, and press the interest seeds into orderly rows. These are the commonest routines. Who could find excitement here. But look! The rain falls, and the sun warms, and something happens. It is the germination process. Germ of what? Germ of life, germ inexplicable, germ of wonder. The dry seeds ruptures and the green leaf uncurls. Here is a message that transcends the rites of any church or creed or organized religion. I would challenge any doubting Thomas in my pea patch. Everywhere, spring brings the blessed reassurance that life goes on, that death is no more than a passing season. The plan never falters; the design never changes. It is all ordered. It has all been always ordered. Look to the rue anemone, if you will, or to the pea patch, or to the stubborn weed that thrusts its shoulders through a city street. This is how it was, is now, and ever shall be, the world without end. In the serene certainty of spring recurring, who can fear the distant fall? PART V WRITING Directions: Physical recreation and intellectual activities are two important ways people usually take in their leisure time. Then which one is more preferable for you? Write an essay of about 300 words within 60 minutes. After presenting the two different ideas about advertisements you should state your own opinion about this topic and give the reason why. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. 12 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION Directions: In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Questions 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. Who is called the father of aeronautics? A) Sir George Cayley. B) William Henson. C) Professor Langley. D) Wilbur and Orville Wright. 2. How did Sir George Cayley make the plane lighter? A) By using solid piece of wood. B) By using diagonal bracing. C) By using plastic planks. D) By using a propeller-driven engine. 3. What was true of Stringfellow's model plane? A) It was 10 meter long. B) There was no engine equipped. C) It made a flight as far as 40 yards. D) It made over 2000 successful flights. 4. What is true of Wright brothers' plane? A) It weighed about 852 pounds. B) It had got a 4-cylinder engine. C) It made 12 successful flights in one day. D) It remained in the air for 59 minutes on the last flight of the day. 5. Which of the following statements is Not true? A) Sir George Cayley was an Englishman in the early 19th century. B) The Lilienthal brothers lost their lives in the experiment flight. C) Professor Langley was a mathematician. D) It was the Wright brothers who made the first successful flight. SECTION B INTERVIEW Questions 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. What is true of Saturday's match? A) Very exciting. B) Very dull. C) It was between the Gunners and the Leeds. D) It was won by the Wolves. 7. Alan thinks that the Gunners should have scored ____. A) 1 goal. B) 2 goals. C) 3 goals. D) 5 goals. 8. What is Not true of of the Gunners? A) They scored three in the first half. B) They should have done better last Saturday. C) They are second in the table now. D) They didn't do well in the second half of the season last year. 9. Why are the Gunners likely to finish top of the league? A) Because they have got good players. B) Because the combination of the forwards is good. C) Because they have got an excellent coach. D) Because they have beaten Leeds at home. 10. What do we learn from the interview? A) The performance of the Gunners so far is satisfactory. B) The commentator likes joking. C) The Gunners are at the top of the league. D) The Gunners will play Leeds at home after Christmas. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING Directions: In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. Chemistry plays an important role in our life. The (16) of a clock, the clothes we wear, and or leathers are all made (17). The water we drink is chemically purified. The glass, (18) if the mirror, the manufacturing of light bulbs, the paint and plaster on our walls require chemistry. The cooking, digestion and assimilation of the food are all chemical (19). The construction of an automobile may require many kinds of chemically made (20). Chemistry and its (21) have helped us to live longer. The science of medicine also (22) heavily upon chemistry. And with (23) and antiseptics, survey is no longer crude and limited. Our increasing knowledge of the chemical (24) that take place in the human body results in great strides in modern medicine. Fortunately, most of us do not need a profound knowledge of chemistry, but some understanding of chemistry should be a part of the (25) of every educated person. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION Directions: The following passage contains ten errors. Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit Whenever you see the old film, even on made as early (26) as ten years before, you cant help being strucked (27) by the appearance of the woman taking part. Their hair-styles and make-up look dated; their shirts look either too long nor too short; their general appearance (28) is, in fact, slightly ludicrous. The men taking part, on the other hand, are clearly recognizable. There is something about their appearance to suggest they belong (29) to an entirely different age. This illusion is created by changed fashions. Over the years, the great (30) majority of men has successfully resisted all attempts (31) to make them to change their style of dress. The (32) same cannot be said for women. Each year a few so-call top designers in Paris and London lay down (33) on the law and women the whole world over run to (34) obey. The decrees of the designers are unpredictable and dictatorial. Sometimes they decide arbitrarily that skirts will be short and waists will be height; hips (35) are in and buttons are out. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS Directions: In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A Despite Denmarks manifest virtues, Danes never talk about how proud they are to be Danes. This would sound weird in Danish. When Danes talk to foreigners about Denmark, they always begin by commenting on its tininess, its unimportance, the difficulty of its language, the general small-mindedness and self indulgence of their countrymen and the high taxes. No Dane would look you in the eye and say "Denmark is a great country". You are supposed to figure this out for yourself. It is the land of the silk safety net, where almost half the national budget goes toward smoothing out lifes inequalities, and there is plenty of money for schools, day care, retraining programs, job seminars —— Danes love seminar: three days at a study center hearing about waste management is almost as good as a ski trip. It is a culture bombarded by English, in advertising, pop music, the Internet, and despite all the English that Danish absorbs —— there is no Danish Academy to defend against it —— old dialects persist in Jutland that can barely be understood by Copenhageners. It is the land where, as the saying goes, "Few have too much and fewer have too little", and a foreigner is struck by the sweet egalitarianism that prevails, where the lowliest clerk gives you a level gaze, where Sir and Madame have disappeared from common usage, even Mr. and Mrs. Its a nation of recyclers —— about 55% of Danish garbage gets made into something new —— and no nuclear power plants. Its a nation of tireless planners. Trains run on time. Things operate well in general. Such a nation of overachievers —— a brochure from the Ministry of Business and Industry says, "Denmark is one of the worlds cleanest and most organized countries, with virtually no pollution, crime, or poverty. Denmark is the most corruption-free society in the Northern Hemisphere." So, of course, ones heart lifts at any sighting of Danish sleaze: skinhead graffiti on buildings ("Foreigners Out of Denmark!"), broken beer bottles in the gutters, drunken teenagers slumped in the park. Nonetheless, it is an orderly land. You drive through a Danish town, it comes to an end at a stone wall, and on the other side is a field of barley, a nice clean line: town here, country there. It is not a nation of jaywalkers. People stand on the curb and wait for the red light to change, even if its 2 a.m. and theres not a car in sight. However, Danes dont think of themselves as a waiting-at-2-a.m.-for-the-green-light-people —— that is how they see Swedes and Germans. Danes see themselves as jazzy people, improvisers, more free spirited than Swedes, but the truth is (though one should not say it) that Danes are very much like Germans and Swedes. Orderliness is a main selling point. Denmark has few natural resources, limited manufacturing capability; its future in Europe will be as a broker, banker, and distributor of goods. You send your goods by container ship to Copenhagen, and these bright, young, English-speaking, utterly honest, highly disciplined people will get your goods around to Scandinavia, the Baltic States, and Russia. Airports, seaport, highways, and rail lines are ultramodern and well-maintained. The orderliness of the society doesnt mean that Danish lives are less messy or lonely than yours or mine, and no Dane would tell you so. You can hear plenty about bitter family feuds and the sorrows of alcoholism and about perfectly sensible people who went off one day and killed themselves. An orderly society can not exempt its members from the hazards of life. But there is a sense of entitlement and security that Danes grow up with. Certain things are yours by virtue of citizenship, and you shouldnt feel bad for taking what you have entitled to, you are as good as anyone else. The rules of the welfare system are clear to everyone, the benefits you get if you lose your job, the steps you take to get a new one; and the orderliness of the system makes it possible for the country to weather high unemployment and social unrest without a sense of crisis. 36. The author thinks Danes adopt a ____ attitude towards their country. A) boastful B) modest C) deprecating D) mysterious 37. Which of the following is Not a Danish characteristic cited in the passage? A) Fondness of foreign culture. B) Equality in society. C) Linguistic tolerance. D) Persistent planning. 38. The author's reaction to the statement by the Ministry of Business and Industry is ____. A) disapproving B) approving C) noncommittal D) doubtful 39. According to the passage, Danish orderliness ____. A) sets the people apart from Germans and Swedes B) spare Danes social troubles besetting other peoples C) is considered economically essential to the country D) prevents Danes from acknowledging existing troubles 40. At the end of the passage the author states all the following Except that ____. A) Danes are clearly informed of their social benefits B) Danes take for granted what is given to them C) the open system helps to tide the country over D) orderliness has alleviated unemployment TEXT B But if language habits do not represent classes, a social stratification into something as bygone as "aristocracy" and "commons", they do still of course serve to identify social groups. This is something that seems fundamental in the use of language. As we see in relation to political and national movements, language is used as a badge or a barrier depending on which may we look at it. The new boy at school feels out of it at first because he does not know the right words for things, and awe-inspiring pundits of six or seven look down on him for not being aware that racksy means "dilapidated", or hairy "out first ball". The miner takes a certain pride in being "one up" on the visitor or notice who calls the cage a "lift" or who thinks that men working in a warm seam are in their "underpants" when anyone ought to know that the garments are called hoggers. The "insider" is seldom displeased that his language distinguishes him from the "outsider". Quite apart from specialized terms of of this kind in groups, trades and professions, there are all kinds of standards of correctness at which most of us feel more or less obliged to aim, because we know that certain kinds of English invite irritation or downright condemnation. On the other hand, we know that other kinds convey some kind of prestige and bear a welcome cachet. In relation to the social aspects of language, it may well be suggested that English speakers fall into three categories: the assured, the anxious and the indifferent. At one end of this scale, we have the people who have "position" and "status", and who therefore do not feel they need worry much about their use of English. Their education and occupation make them confident of speaking an unimpeachable form of English: no fear of being criticized or corrected is likely to cross their minds, and this gives their speech that characteristically unselfconscious and easy flow which is often envied. At the other end of the scale, we have an equally imperturbable hand, speaking with a similar degree of careless ease, because even if they are aware that their English is condemned by others, they are supremely indifferent to the fact. The Mrs. Mops of this world have active and efficient tongues in their heads, and if we happened not to like their ways of saying things, well, we "can lump it". That is their attitude. Curiously enough, writers are inclined to represent the speech of both these extreme parties with -in for ing. On the one hand, "Were goin huntin, my dear sir;" on the other, "Were goin racin, mate." In between, according to this view we have a far less fortunate group, the anxious. These actively try to suppress what they believe to be bad English and assiduously cultivate what they hope to be good English. They live their lives in some degree of nervousness over their grammar, their pronunciation, and their choice of words: sensitive, and fearful of betraying themselves. Keeping up with the Joneses is measured not only in houses, furniture, refrigerators, cars, and clothes, but also in speech. And the misfortune of the "anxious" does not end with their inner anxiety. Their lot is also the open or veiled contempt of the "assured" on the side of them and of the "indifferent" on the other. It is all too easy to raise an unworthy laugh at the anxious. The people thus uncomfortably stilted on linguistic high heels so often form part of what is, in many ways, the most admirable section of any society: the ambitious, tense, inner-driven people, who are bent on "going places and doing things". The greater the pity, then, if a disproportionate amount of their energy goes into what Mr. Sharpless called "this shabby obsession" with variant forms of English —— especially if the net result is (as so often) merely to sound affected and ridiculous. "Here", according to Bacon, "is the first distemper of learning, when men study words and not matter „„ It seems to me that Pygmalions frenzy is a good emblem „„ of this vanity: for words are but the images of matter; and except they have life of reason and invention, to fall in love with them is to fall in love with a picture." 41. The attitude held by the assured towards language is ____. A) critical B) anxious C) self-conscious D) nonchalant 42. The anxious are considered a less fortunate group because ____. A) they feel they are socially looked down upon B) they suffer from internal C) they are inherently nervous and anxious people D) they are unable to meet standards of correctness 43. The author thinks that the efforts made by the anxious to cultivate what they believe is good English are ____. A) worthwhile B) meaningless C) praiseworthy D) irrational TEXT C Fred Cooke of Salford turned 90 two days ago and the world has been beating a path to his door. If you havent noticed, the backstreet boy educated at Blackpool grammar styles himself more grandly as Alastair Cooke, broadcaster extraordinaire. An honorable KBE, he would be Sir Alastair if he had not taken American citizenship more than half a century ago. If it sounds snobbish to draw attention to his humble origins, it should be reflected that the real snob is Cooke himself, who has spent a lifetime disguising them. But the fact that he opted to renounce his British passport in 1941 —— just when his country needed all the wartime help it could get —— is hardly a matter of congratulation. Cooke has made a fortune out of his love affair with America, entrancing listeners with a weekly monologue that has won Radio 4 many devoted adherents. Part of the pull is the developed drawl. This is the man who gave the world "midatlantic", the language of the disc jockey and public relations man. He sounds American to us and English to them, while in reality he has for decades belonged to neither. Cookes world is an America that exists largely in the imagination. He took ages to acknowledge the disaster that was Vietnam and even longer to wake up to Watergate. His politics have drifted to the right with age, and most of his opinions have been acquired on the golf course with fellow celebrities. He chased after stars on arrival in America, fixing up an interview with Charlie Chaplin and briefly becoming his friend. He told Cooke he could turn him into a fine light comedian; instead he is an impressionists dream. Cooke liked the sound of his first wifes name almost as much as he admired her good looks. But he found bringing up baby difficult and left her for the wife of his landlord. Women listeners were unimpressed when, in 1996, he declared on air that the fact that 4 % of women in the American armed forces were raped showed remarkable self restraint on the part of Uncle Sams soldiers. His arrogance in not allowing BBC editors to see his script in advance worked, not for the first time, to his detriment. His defenders said he could not help living with the 1930s values he had acquired and somewhat dubiously went on to cite "gallantry" as chief among them. Cookes raconteur style encouraged a whole generation of BBC men to think of themselves as more important than the story. His treaty tones were the model for the regular World Service reports From Our Own Correspondent, known as FOOCs in the business. They may yet be his epitaph. 44. At the beginning of the passage the writer sounds critical of ____. A) Cooke's obscure origins B) Cooke's broadcasting style C) Cooke's American citizenship D) Cooke's fondness of America 45. The following adjectives can be suitably applied to Cooke Except ____. A) old-fashioned B) sincere C) arrogant D) popular 46. The writer comments on Cooke's life and career in a slightly ____ tone. A) ironic B) detached C) scathing D) indifferent TEXT D Mr. Duffy raised his eyes from the paper and gazed out of his window on the cheerless evening landscape. The river lay quiet beside the empty distillery and from time to time a light appeared in some house on Lucan Road. What an end! The whole narrative of her death revolted him and it revolted him to think that he had ever spoken to her of what he held sacred. The cautious words of a reporter won over to conceal the details of a commonplace vulgar death attacked his stomach. Not merely had she degraded herself; she had degraded him. His souls companion! He thought of the hobbling wretches whom he had seen carrying cans and bottles to be filled by the barman. Just God, what an end! Evidently she had been unfit to live, without any strength of purpose, an easy prey to habits, one of the wrecks on which civilization had been reared. But that she could have sunk so slow! Was it possible he had deceived himself so utterly about her? He remembered her outburst of that night and interpreted it in a harsher sense than he had ever done. He had no difficulty now in approving of the course he had taken. As the light failed and his memory began to wander he thought her hand touched his. The shock which had first attacked his stomach was now attacking his nerves. He put on his overcoat and hat quickly and went out. The cold air met him on the threshold; it crept into the sleeves of his coat. When he came to the public-house at Chapel Bridge he went in and ordered a hot punch. The proprietor served him obsequiously but did not venture to talk. There were five or six working-men in the shop discussing the value of a gentlemans estate in County Kildare. They drank at intervals from their huge pint tumblers, and smoke, spitting often on the floor and sometimes dragging the sawdust over their heavy boots. Mr. Duffy sat on his stool and gazed at them, without seeing or hearing them. After a while they went out and he called for another punch. He sat a long time over it. The shop was very quiet. The proprietor sprawled on the counter reading the newspaper and yawning. Now and again a tram was heard swishing along the lonely road outside. As he sat there, living over his life with her and evoking alternately the two images on which he now conceived her, he realized that she was dead, that she had ceased to exist, that she had become a memory. He began to feel ill at ease. He asked himself what else could he have done. He could not have lived with her openly. He had done what seemed to him best. How was he to blame? Now that she was gone he understood how lonely her life must have been, sitting night after night alone in that room. His life would be lonely too until he, too, died, ceased to exist, became a memory —— if anyone remembered him. 47. Mr. Duffy's immediate reaction to the report of the women's death was that of ____. A) disgust B) guilt C) grief D) compassion 48. It can be inferred from the passage that the reporter wrote about the woman's death in a ____ manner. A) detailed B) provocative C) discreet D) sensational 49. We can infer from the last paragraph that Mr. Duffy was in a(n) ____ mood. A) angry B) fretful C) irritable D) remorseful 50. According to the passage, which of the following statement is Not true? A) Mr. Duffy once confided in the woman. B) Mr. Duffy felt an intense sense of shame. C) Mr. Duffy wanted to end the relationship. D) Mr. Duffy estranged probably after a quarrel. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING Directions: In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. In the passage Bill Gates mainly discusses ____. A. a persons opportunity of a lifetime B. the success of the computer industry C. the importance of education D. high school education in the US Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. Hundreds of students send me e-mail each year asking for advice about education. They want to know what to study, or whether its OK to drop out of college since thats what I did. My basic advice is simple and heartfelt. "Get the best education you can. Take advantage of high school and college. Learn how to learn." Its true that I dropped out of college to start Microsoft, but I was at Harvard for three years before dropping out —— and Id love to have the time to go back. As Ive said before, nobody should drop out of college unless they believe they face the opportunity of a lifetime. And even then they should reconsider. The computer industry has lots of people who didnt finish college, but Im not aware of any success stories that began with somebody dropping out of high school. I actually dont know any high school dropouts, let alone any successful ones. In my companys early years we had a bright part-time programmer who threatened to drop out of high school to work full-time. We told him no. Quite a few of our people didnt finish college, but we discourage dropping out. College isnt the only place where information exists. You can learn in a library. But somebody handing you a book doesnt automatically foster learning. You want to learn with other people, ask questions, try out ideas and have a way to test your ability. It usually takes more than just a book. Education should be broad, although its fine to have deep interests, too. In high school there were periods when I was highly focused on writing software, but for most of my high school years I had wide-ranging academic interests. My parent encouraged this, and Im grateful that they did. One parent wrote me that her 15-year old son "lost himself in the hole of the computer." He got an A in Web site design, but other grades were sinking, she said. This boy is making a mistake. High school and college offer you the best chance to learn broadly —— math, history, various sciences —— and to do projects with other kids that teach you firsthand about group dynamics. Its fine to take a deep interest in computers, dance, language or any other discipline, but not if it jeopardizes breadth. In college its appropriate to think about specialization. Getting real expertise in an area of interest can lead to success. Graduate school is one way to get specialized knowledge. Choosing a specialty isnt something high schools students should worry about. They should worry about getting a strong academic start. There is not a perfect correlation between attitudes in high schools and success in later life, of course. But its a real mistake not to take opportunity to learn a huge range of subjects. to learn to work with people in high school, and to get the grades that will help you get into a good college. 51. In the passage Bill Gates mainly discusses ____. A) a person's opportunity of a lifetime B) the success of the computer industry C) the importance of education D) high school education in the US TEXT F First read the questions. 52. The passage focuses on ____. A. the history and future of London B. Londons manufacturing skills C. Londons status as a financial center D. the past and present roles of London Now go through TEXT F quickly to answer question 52. What is London for? To put the question another way why was London, by 1900, incomparably the largest city in the world, which it remained until the bombardments of the Luftwaffe? There could be many answers to this question, but any history of London will rehearse three broad explanations. One is the importance of its life as a port. When the Thames turned to ice in February 1885, 50,000 men were put out of work, and there were bread riots from these whose livelihoods had been frozen with the river. Today the Thames could be frozen for a year without endangering the livelihoods of any but a few pleasure boatmen. The second major cause of Londons wealth and success was that it was easily the biggest manufacturing center in Europe. At the beginning of the Industrial Revolution, Dutch looms and the stocking knitting frame were first pioneered in London. The vast range of Londons manufacturing skills is another fact; almost any item you can name was manufactured in London during the days of its prosperity. In 1851, 13.75 percent of the manufacturing work-force of Great Britain was based in London. By 1961, this had dramatically reduced. By 1993, there were a mere 328,000 Londoners engaged in manufacturing. In other words, by our own times, two of the chief reasons for Londons very existence —— its life as a port and as a center of manufacture —— had dwindled out of existence. Londons third great function, since the seventeenth century, has been that of national and international bourse: the exchange of stocks and shares, banking, commerce and, increasingly, insurance. Both Inwood and Francis Sheppard, in London: A history, manage to make these potentially dry matters vivid to the general reader, and both authors assure us that "The City" in the financial sense is still as important as ever it was. Both, however, record the diminution of the City as architectural and demographic entity, with the emptying of many city offices (since the advent of the computer much of the work can be done anywhere) and the removal distinctive landmarks. 52. The passage focuses on ____. A) the history and future of London B) London's manufacturing skills C) London's status as a financial center D) the past and present roles of London TEXT G First read the question. 53. The primary purpose of the passage is to ____. A. discuss the impact of the internet B. forecast the future roles of the bookstore C. compare the publisher with the editor D. evaluate the limitation of the printed page Now go through TEXT G quickly to answer question 53. Since the advent of television people have been prophesying the death of the book. Now the rise of the World Wide Web seems to have revived this smoldering controversy from the ashes. The very existence of paper copy had been brought into question once more. It might be the bookstore, rather than the book itself, that is on the brink of extinction. Many of you will have noted lots of bookseller websites popping up. They provide lists of books and let you read sample chapters, reviews from other customers and interviews with authors. What does all this mean? Browsing a virtual bookstore may not afford you the same dusty pleasure as browsing round a real shop, but as far as service, price and convenience are concerned, there is really no competition. This may change before long, as publishers websites begin to offer direct access to new publications. Perhaps it is actually the publisher who is endangered by the relentless advance of the Internet. There are a remarkable number of sites republishing texts online —— an extensive virtual library of materials that used to be handled primarily by publishing companies. From the profusion of electronic-text sites available, it looks as if this virtual library is here to say unless a proposed revision to copyright law takes many publications out of the public domain. However, can electronic texts still be considered books? Then again, it might be the editor at risk, in danger of being cut out of the publishing process. The web not only makes it possible for just about anyone to publish whatever they like —— whenever they like —— there are virtually no costs involved. The editors would then be the millions of Internet users. And there is little censorship, either. So possibly is the printed page, with its many limitations, that is perishing as the implications of new technologies begin to be the fully realized. Last year Stanford University published the equivalent of a 6,000-page Business English dictionary online. There seem to be quite obvious benefits to housing these multi-volume reference sets on the Web. The perceived benefits for other books, such as the novel, are perhaps less obvious. 53. The primary purpose of the passage is to ____. A) discuss the impact of the internet B) forecast the future roles of the bookstore C) compare the publisher with the editor D) evaluate the limitation of the printed page TEXT H First read the questions. 54. The reviewers attitude towards the book is ____. A. ambiguous B. objective C. doubtful D. hostile Now go through TEXT H quickly to answer question 54. The 1990s have witnessed a striking revival of the idea that liberal democratic political systems are the best basis for international peace. Western statesmen and scholars have witnessed a worldwide process of democratization, and tend to see it as a sounder basis for peace than anything we have had in the past. Central to the vision of a peaceful democratic world had been the proposition that liberal democracies do not fight each other, that they may and frequently do get into fights with illiberal states, but not with other countries that are basically similar in their political systems. The proposition appeals to political leaders and scholars as well. Yet it is doubtful whether the proposition is strong enough to bear the vast weight of generalization that has been placed on it. Among the many difficulties it poses, two stand out: first, there are many possible exceptions to the rule that democracies do not fight each other, and second, there is much uncertainty about why democracies have, for the most part, not fought each other. Liberal Peace, Liberal War: American politics and international security by John M. Owen is an attempt to explain the twin phenomena of liberal peace (why democracies do not fight each other) and liberal war (why they fight other states, sometimes with the intent of making them liberal). Owens analysis in the book strongly suggests that political leaders on all sides judged a given foreign country largely on the basis of its political system; and this heavily influenced decisions on whether or not to wage war against it. However, he also shows that military factors, including calculations of the cost of going to war, were often influential in tipping the balance against war. In other words, democratic peace does not mean the end of power politics. Owen hints at, but never address directly, a sinister aspect of democratic peace theory: its assumption that there would be peace if only everybody else was like us. This can lead only too easily to attempts to impose the favored system on benighted foreigners by force - regardless of the circumstances and sensibilities that make the undertaking hazardous. Owens central argument is not strengthened by the occasional repetition nor by the remorselessly academic tone of the more theoretical chapters. However, most of the writing is succinct; the historical accounts are clear and to the point; and the investigation of the causal links between liberalism and war is admirably thorough. There are several grounds on which the books thesis might be criticized. The most obvious is that some twentieth-century experience goes against the argument that liberal states ally with others, above all, because they perceive them as fellow liberals. In our own time, several liberal democracies have maintained long and close relations with autocracies. However, Owens argument for a degree of solidarity between liberal states provides at least part of the explanation for the continuation and even expansion of NATO in the post-Cold War era. 54. The reviewer's attitude towards the book is ____. A) ambiguous B) objective C) doubtful D) hostile TEXT I First read the questions. 55. In ____, the table of contents of the magazine was placed on its back cover. A. 1922 B. 1948 C. the 1930s D. the 1960s 56. The magazine was criticized for failing to ____. A. appeal to the young. B. attract old people. C. interest readers aged 47. D. captivate readers in their 50s. Now go through TEXT I quickly to answer question 57. NEW YORK —— Readers Digest, the most widely read magazine in the world, will get a new look in a bid to attract younger readers, Readers Digest Association Inc. Announced on March 29. Beginning with the May issue, the worlds largest-circulation magazine will move its table of contents off the front cover to modernize its look and make it easier for readers to navigate, editor in chief Christopher Willcox said. "When you have the table of contents on the cover, it limits what you can say about whats in the magazine", Willcox said. The magazines familiar table of contents will be replaced with a photograph. The small size and focus of the editorial content will be unchanged, publisher Gregory Coleman said. "It will be a much more visual magazine, with more photography and less illustration," he said in an interview. Readers Digest was first published in 1922, with line drawings on the covers, and in the 1930s begun listing the contents on the front. For a couple of years in the 1960s, Willcox said, the table of contents was shifted to the back cover. The May issue will feature a cover photo of a woman firefighter in San Francisco for an excerpt from a new book, "Fighting Fire." The names of a few articles are listed on the cover, but the full table of contents will be on pages 2 and 3. The issue began reaching subscribers on April 10 and will be on newsstands two weeks later. All 48 of the Digests worldwide editions —— 27 million copies in 19 languages —— are making the change. Publisher Gregory Coleman said he expected the redesign to boost advertising sales. "Weve done a lot of research, and have tested the concept in the US, Sweden, and New Zealand," Coleman said. The move comes as Readers Digest Association Inc. has struggled to boost profits. But industry analysis said its problems stretch beyond changed that were needed at the magazine. Publishing industry executives and Wall Street analysts have criticized the magazine for failing to attract the next generation of readers. The company says its average reader is about 47, the same as the age for weekly new magazines. "Theyve been looking for ways to make the magazine a little bit more the 90s than the 50s," said Doug Arthur at Morgan Stanley Dean Witter & Co. "The company has to be addressing the response rate on its direct marketing campaign," where its main problem lie. The company earned US 133.5 million on sales of USD 2.8 billion in the year which ended last June. But it said, when it reported results, that profits would fall in the current year. In answer to a question, Coleman said the redesign was not done because of advertisers, although they were enthusiastic about the changes. "This is being done from a reader-driven standpoint," he said. 55. In ____, the table of contents of the magazine was placed on its back cover. A) 1922 B) 1948 C) the 1930s D) the 1960s 56. The magazine was criticized for failing to ____. A) appeal to the young. B) attract old people. C) interest readers aged 47. D) captivate readers in their 50s. TEXT J First read the questions. 57. Words in both the OWF and Longman Activator are ____. A. listed according to alphabetical order B. listed according to use frequency C. grouped according to similarities only D. grouped according to differences only 58. To know the correct word for "boiling with a low hear", you will probably turn to ____ first. A. page 10 B. page 99 C. page 100 D. page 448 Now go through TEXT J quickly to answer questions 58 and 59. The Oxford Wordfinder (OWF) is a "production dictionary" designed for learners of English at Intermediate level and above. It is a useful tool with which to discover and encode (produce) meaning, rather than just to simply check the meaning, grammar and pronunciation of words. The OWF encourages a reversal of the traditional role of the language learners dictionary which is normally to help decode and explain aspects of words that appear in a text. The OWF is based upon similar lines to the ground breaking Longman Activator in that words in each dictionary are not simply listed in alphabetical order. Instead, they are grouped according to their similarities and differences in both meaning and use. Twenty-three main groups of 630 "keywords" (concept) in alphabetical order, assist the learner in exploring semantic areas such as: "People", "Food and drink", and "Language and Communication". Each of these rather large areas contains cross-referencing in order to provide further helpful lexical information. Some of the keywords helpfully direct the learner to another keyword. Most keywords, however, have an index that shows how lexical items and their related terms are organized. Other keywords point to smaller sub-section headings whilst a few contain sections labeled "More", which deal with less frequent occurring vocabulary. The majority of words in the OWF are group together because they are clearly related in meaning. Examples include: "rucksack", "suitcase", "truck" and "hold-all", on page 28, under the keyword "Bag". Other words are grouped together because statistically they tend to "collocate", i.e. appear in English very near if not next to each other. The reader would, more often than not, find them in the same sentence or phrase. Examples include those for "butter", "spread" and "melt", and those for Television on page 448: "watching", "turn on/off" and "program". The OWF is an ideal supplementary resource for learners to engage in word-building activities during topic based lessons. How is it best used? Lets say the learner wishes to know the correct word for "boiling with a low heat". The intermediate learner, who will probably begin her search under "Cook" on page 99, locates the sub-section: "cooking food in water" and finally finds the definition followed by the word: —— to boil slowly and gently: simmer. With the help of the OWF teachers could design a variety of such vocabulary exercises for a class, or even go on to designing a vocabulary-based syllabus. Definitions in the OWF are, as with all good dictionaries, concise but clear. They are obviously written according to a controlled defining vocabulary. Linguistic varieties are also taken into consideration: formal/informal labels are provided and, where it occurs, American English (AmE) is pointed out, e.g. for alcohol, liquor in AmE. on page 10. The OWF also contains many drawings that outline meaning where words could not possibly do so or would require too much space. Items chosen for inclusion in the OWF, along with example phrases outlining meaning are, it is assumed, based on evidence of frequency from a carefully constructed linguistic corpus, although this is not made clear. 57. Words in both the OWF and Longman Activator are ____. A) listed according to alphabetical order B) listed according to use frequency C) grouped according to similarities only D) grouped according to differences only 58. To know the correct word for "boiling with a low hear", you will probably turn to ____ first. A) page 10 B) page 99 C) page 100 D) page 448 TEXT K First read the questions. 59. Students who wish to take courses in Dutch or French ____. A. should pass the TOFEL test first B. must speak Dutch or French fluently C. may receive language training D. must have a good command of English 60. Belgian universities do NOT offer courses on ____. A. medical sciences B. computer sciences C. political and social sciences D. archaeology and art sciences Now go through TEXT K quickly to answer questions 59 and 60. To qualify to study in Belgium, it is essential to meet relevant requirements in (1) academic credentials, (2) linguistic skills, (3) academic objectives and (4) financial resources. Let us review these four points: 1. Academic credentials Equivalence and admissibility of degrees will be assessed according to Belgian law and individual university regulations. Please submit a copy of your degree with a translation to the chosen universitys admission board. 2. Language skills Chinese students who wish to follow courses in Dutch or French must realize that a superficial knowledge of the language will not do. The ability to speak Dutch or French is imperative in order to follow lectures and to pass examinations. A preparatory year of language instruction is available in some universities for already enrolled students. Please apply for information at university of your choice. Students who wish to attend lectures in English (post-academic training international courses) must of course have a good command of that language. Universities will inform you about their individual TOFEL requirements. 3. Programs Belgium universities offer basic academic courses, advance academic training courses, doctoral programs, post-academic training and various international study programs (Masters) in the fields of technology, law, economics and applied economies, political and social sciences, dentistry, pharmaceutical sciences, language and literature/history, archaeology and art sciences, psychology and educational sciences, medical sciences, engineering and applied biological sciences. 4. Financing Although precise determination of study and living expenses depends on individual life style, one can assess that about 350,000 Belgian Francs (BEF) (about 88,000 RMB) is necessary for one years study. This amount should include books, housing, food, transport, and health insurance. It does not include registration fees which can vary from about 25,000 BEF for a student under scholarship to 290,000 BEF for a self financing student, according to the chosen study program. 59. Students who wish to take courses in Dutch or French ____. A) should pass the TOFEL test first B) must speak Dutch or French fluently C) may receive language training D) must have a good command of English 60. Belgian universities do NOT offer courses on ____. A) medical sciences B) computer sciences C) political and social sciences D) archaeology and art sciences PART IV TRANSLATION Directions: Translate the following part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 我们住的是临河一幢房子的顶层，那天晚上河上狂风怒号，连房子都震动了，好似遭到了炮击或海涛的拍打。后来狂风又带来了骤雨，击打在玻璃窗台上，抬眼看时，窗子都在摇 晃，恍若置身在一座风雨飘摇的灯塔中一般。有时候，壁炉里的烟会从烟囱里倒灌进来，似 乎受不住屋外风雨的侵凌。我打开门，往往楼下，楼梯上的灯已经扑灭；握手搭凉棚，透过 漆黑的玻璃窗朝外一望（在这种风侵雨虐的夜晚，休说开窗，连一丝风儿也露不得），只见 院子里的灯也扑灭了，桥上和岸边的灯也都在瑟瑟发抖，狂风从驳船上的炉子里刮起了阵阵 火星，有若一阵阵风雨。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Directions: Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. Youve been in love of course! If not youve got it to come. Love is like the measles; we all have to go through it. Also like the measles, we take it only once. One never need be afraid of catching it a second time. The man who has had it can go into the most dangerous places, and play the most fool-hardy tricks with perfect safety. He can, to see the last of a friend, venture into the very jaws of the marriage ceremony itself. He can keep through the whirl of a ravishing waltz, and rest afterwards in a dark conservatory, catching nothing more lasting than a cold. No, we never sicken with love twice. Cupid spends no second arrow on the same heart. Loves handmaids are our life-long friends. Respect and Admiration, and Affection, our doors may always be left open for, but their great celestial master, in his royal progress, pays but one visit and departs. Meteor-like, it blazes for a moment, and light with its glory the whole world beneath. Happy those who, hastening down again before it dies out, can kindle their earthly altars at its flame. Love is too pure a light to burn long among the noisome gases that we breathe, but before it is chocked out we may use it as a torch to ignite the cozy fire of affection. PART V WRITING Directions: Account for the boom in adult education and discuss the main reasons within 60 minutes. The length of your essay should be about 300 words. In the first part of your writing you should present a brief description of adult education boom and in the following part you should present the reasons with appropriate examples. In the last part you may state your own view on this topic. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. Adult Education Boom 13 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION In Section A, B and C you will hear everything ONLY ONCE. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response to each question on the Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Questions 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. Before you go to mountain climbing, you should ____. A) spend some time on simple safety tips. B) let someone know your plan, e.g. your destination and time. C) take provisions for a long hike. D) both A) and B) 2. When you walk through the woods, it is of particular importance that you ____. A) know where the nearest ranger station is. B) look for landmarks. C) are properly equipped. D) follow telephone poles and the wires. 3. If you do get lost, you could ____. A) climb a tree. B) whistle loudly. C) go downhill if you are in a hilly country. D) both A) and B) 4. It can be inferred from the article that a signal fire ____. A) can be used for many purposes. B) is easy to flare out of control. C) may be difficult to light. D) All of the above. 5. The article suggests that the most exciting thing in mountain climbing is ____. A) the thrilling experience during the trip. B) cautiously approaching the goal and finally reaching it. C) freedom, relaxation in the wild. D) All of the above. SECTION B INTERVIEW Questions 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. Does President Clinton regret not being able to prove his version of events in court? A) He'd like to have such a chance, but it is not regrettable. B) He has mixed feelings, for the double role he plays, both as a private citizen and as President of the country. C) He is more concerned with the public interest, so he doesn't regret. D) There's no need for him to disprove the allegations in court. 7. Does Clinton ever regret about involving in the embarrassing and compromising situation in the Jones case? A) As President, it is inevitable to confront with such situations, so he is ready to cope with it instead of regretting about it. B) Obsessed with public concerns, he has no time to regret personal troubles. C) He refuses to comment on it. D) It's no use crying over spilt milk. 8. What impact would the case have on Clinton's career according to the court? A) It's unpredictable. B) His presidency could be influenced. C) They tried to help Clinton to minimize it. D) Nothing serious. 9. How did Clinton feel about the Jones case when he first heard the news? A) he didn't believe it. B) He was concerned about it. C) He told Hillary and talked about it with friends at dinner. D) He would like to let it be. 10. How does Clinton feel about Senator McCain's tobacco compromise? A) It's not satisfactory in some respects. B) It's a big step and follows the right direction. C) Speaker Gingrich is going to do something that Clinton is pleased with. D) All of the above. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. When I was nine years old, I found an ad for selling greeting cards in a childrens magazine. I begged my mother to allow me to send for the kit. When the kit arrived two weeks later, I (16) off the brown wrapper, dashed from the house with the cards. Three hours later, I came back home with a pocket of money. A (17) was born. When I was twelve, my father took me to attend Zig Zieglers lecture. In the dark auditorium he raised everybodys (18) up to the ceiling. I left there feeling I would do everything. I told my father I wanted to be a (19) speaker just like Mr. Zigler. A dream was born. Recently, I picked up my dream. I left my company at the height of my career. Many people were surprised and wondered why I would risk everything for a dream. I was determined to pursue my dream after attending a (20) sales meeting. The vice-president of our company asked us, "If a genie would grant you three wishes what would they be?" After a moment he continued to ask, "Why do you need a genie?" The (21) I felt was so great at that moment that I would never forget. I realized that everything I had achieved had prepared me for this moment. I did not need a genies help. When I told my plans to my boss in tear, he replied "Go on with (22) abandon and you will succeed." One week after I gave my (23), my husband was (24) from his job. We were confronted with lots of difficulties. It was attractive to go back to my former company, but I knew that once I went back, I would never leave. In spite of the hardships I preserved. In a short time period, my husband found a better job. We didnt miss a (25) payment. And I booked several speaking engagements with new clients. I held fast to my dream, and it was realized. To celebrate my success I had an artist paint my new office as a garden. At the top of a wall she stenciled. "The world always makes way for the dreamer." 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION The following passage contains ten errors. Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit When Zhou liang answered the doorbell recently, he was rather astonished to see what he had purchased on the Internet only two days before sitting on his doorstep. "I never expected to get my books so quickly," he told Business (26) weekly. Li Qiang, an employee of a Beijing-based electronics company shared Zhous experience. He said online shopping was very good and always offered comparatively lower prices than ordinary retailer (27) stores. Along with Chinas rapidly developing IT industry, online shopping is attracting the interest of more and more people. Wang Juntao, general manager of the Electronic Business Department of Beijing-based Federal Software Co Ltd, said online shopping had tremendous market potential giving Chinas large (28) population. In mid-March, Wangs company established an online shopping center for Internet surfers. More than 14,000 kinds of goods are available on the Federal website, including computers, software, books and daily necessity. (29). Its online service cover 13 cities in China including Beijing, Shanghai and Nanjing. "We have achieved great success in the three months since we launched the service," he said. Figures from the company show that by mid-June, the sales volume of the website reached more than 2 million Yuan (US 240,000). Daily visitors to the site surged from 10,000 in March to 30,000 in June. With the increase in the number of Chinas Internet users, that figure is likely to multiple," Wang said. (30) Industry experts say that because of the lack of appropriate payment tools, online shopping is still at a primitive stage. The Federal site is reportedly the first Chinese website that combines online shopping with online payment. Sources from the company say that customers can use credit cards from several banks including Bank of China and the Industrial and Commercial Bank of China. "The application of online payment marks up a milestone for (31) the development of the online industry," Wand said. However, problems such as a limited pot of Internet users, (32) comparatively high charges on Internet surfing and traditional views (33) on shopping have hindered the development of online shopping. "There is still a long way to go for us to become a competent online shopping company both in and outside China," Wang said. He said the company planned to invest 200 million Yuan (US 24 million) on its shopping website by the end of 2000. (34). "We are going to seek cooperation with domestic and oversea companies to extend the variety of our online products," he said. (35). 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A There are known to be at least a thousand completely different languages in Africa. There are 200 in Nigeria alone. English has remained the official language in most countries which were once British colonies, because except for Swahili, spoken in East Africa, most African languages are local, or tribal, if they wish to do business in Lagos or any of the other big cities, they have to speak English —— except in the north, where nearly everybody speaks Hausa. In fact, in business and politics and universities, English is the official language. Africans in ex-British colonies who go to live in the growing cities must learn English if they want to get on, and more and more country people are moving to the cities to find work. College students listen to lectures delivered in English by African as well as British lectures, and in the city bookshops there is a wide variety of books and journals published in English as well as in Swahili and Hausa. Africans, particularly in Nigeria, are producing excellent writers, whose books —— written in English —— are read throughout the English-speaking wor4ld. The following are all known internationally: Chinua Achube, novelist, and Wole Soyinka, poet and dramatist, both of Nigeria; James Ngugi, Kenyan novelist; Amos Tutuola, a great Nigerian storyteller and very readable. Soyinka won the Nobel Prize for Literature in 1986. The people of Senegal, Benin, Ivory Coast and other ex-French colonies still speak French. Ever since the 18th century, when French was the lingua franca of Europe, the French have been jealous of the competition of English, which is the language of the commonwealth. At Commonwealth meetings, English is the only common language. English is valuable, too, at Pan-African meetings. In East Africa a completely different, non-European language has been the lingua franca of Africans for many centuries. This is Swahili, which is a mixture of Arabic and African languages. The word "Swahili" comes from the Arabic word "sawahili", meaning "of the coast". Swahili is used as the lingua franca of Kenya and Tanzania. The Portuguese traded on the East African coast for 200 years, but added no Portuguese words to Swahili. During the great colonial drive of the late 19th century, each European power introduced its own language as the official language of its new colonies. But even where English is not the official language, it has remained an important link between people who speak different languages. The leaders and most members of the governments speak it fluently. Swahili, which all British officials in East Africa had to learn, has some strange grammatical rules. For example, "mtu"="person", but in the plural this becomes "wa-tu"="people". All of the other words then begin with "W-/wa-". "Swahili has borrowed a number of words from English. For example, "a traffic island" has become "kiplefiti" (from "keep left"), but the plural, "traffic islands", obeys Swahili grammar. Singular words which begin with "ki" begin in the plural with "vi", so "viplefiti" is the plural of "keplefiti". English and African are the official language of South Africa. South African English has a slight African accent, but is otherwise like standard English. A few African words have found a place in the Oxford English Dictionary. "Trek" is used throughout the English-speaking world. Most of the Cape coloreds (people who are not whites or Africans) speak English. The Africans, who are known as the "Bantu" by South Africans, speak Zulu, Xhosa or one or more other African languages as well as English and/or Africans. African languages have given very few words to European languages. On the other hand, since many Africans now live in closer contact with the European style of life, they have had to find words for common objects and common verbs. For example in the Kxoe language of South West Africa, they call a watch "anmmuxo" which translated means "sun-see-on-thing", and "kuru" is used for "drive" (a car), which translated means to "press the bellows". In Kxoe there are words for one, two, three, but after that they have to use images. For example, "four" is "the finger with one licks out the pot" 36. From the passage we learn that Swahili is ____. A) a language in East Africa B) a local language in Africa C) a tribal language in Africa D) a language in North Africa 37. According to the passage, lingua franca means ____. A) French language B) English language C) native language D) common language 38. Which of the following is NOT correct? A) English is the popular language in the African cities. B) English is the common language in the African Colleges. C) English is commonly used by African writers. D) English is widely used in the countryside. 39. In Swahili, "keplefiti" means "a traffic island" while "viplefiti" means ____. A) "keep fit" B) "traffic island" C) "Swahili grammar" D) "singular words" 40. Which of the following is Not correct? A) African is an official language in South Africa. B) African is one of the two official language in South Africa. C) African is not he same as English. D) African is accepted as standard English in the Oxford English Dictionary. TEXT B For one brief moment in April, Larry Ellison came within a few dollars of being the richest man in the world. The computer tycoon was holding a global conference call on a Wednesday morning, when the value of his company surged. It was the moment he almost overtook Bill Gates, founder of Microsoft, as the wealthiest on the planet. For a few seconds, as share of traders marked Microsoft down and Oracle up, Ellison came within US 200,000 of Gates. The self-proclaimed "bad boy" of Silicon Valley found himself worth more than US 52 billion, up from a mere US 10 billion this time last year. Then Microsofts share price, which had plunged in recent weeks, recovered and the moment passed. Once, Ellison, founder of the software company Oracle, would have danced around his desk cursing like a pirate at failing to bring down Gates, a rival he had constantly made fun of in public. But Silicon Valley insiders said he remained calm, and muttered: "One day, one day very, very soon." He knew his moment was close. Unlike Gates, he is not big on charity, preferring to spend his money his way. He has his own private air force, a military-style crew based at San Jose airport near Redwood City, to help him fly his Gulfstream V jet (with two marbled bathrooms), a Marchetti fighter plane imported from Italy, and a handful of other aircraft, including a trainer for his son. He also plans to import a Russian Mig-29 fighter (capable of 1,500 mph). Why does he want one? So that, he joked, he can blast Gates home near Seattle. Cars are cheap and cheerful by comparison. He has a relatively-modest Porsche Boxster, two specially altered Mercedes and a US 900,000 silver McLaren. In San Francisco he owns a magnificent house in Pacific Heights, one of Western Americas most expensive stretches of real estate. The house is a technical marvel: When he inserts his key, the opaque glass door turns transparent, revealing a Japanese garden in the middle of the house. For reasons he knows best, Ellison is obsessed with Japanese culture. Though he says he once briefly dated the actress Sharon Stone, Ellison is better known for the number than the fame of his wives. It is said he introduced himself with: "Can I buy you a car?" In one year he gave at least four US 50,000 cars to young ladies. While Gates comes from a strong family, Ellison still does not know who his father was. He was born to an unmarried mother and adopted by his Russian uncle and aunt. A brilliant but unpredictable self-promoter, he dropped out of college, drove to California in a battered Thunderbird car and ended up working with computer technicians at a bank. "He always had a champagne lifestyle on beer money," his first wife said. He set up Oracle in 1977 as a super-salesman with 3 programmers, creating software for businesses. It almost collapsed when it promised more than it could deliver, but since then its fortunes have soared. Now it employs 43,000 people and has designed data-processing systems used by Britains M15 spy service as well as big western companies. Oracles software is more Internet-friendly than Gates Windows, one factor behind the companys recent share price rise. Since his company got big, Ellison has promised shareholders that he will spend more time in the office. But can he escape being the thrill-seeker he is at heart? As summer approaches, he may find it hard to resist the lure of his yachts, Sakura, one of the longest in the world, and Sayonara (Japanese for "see you later"), which he races furiously. It is dangerous sport, even for guests. Media tycoon Rupert Murdoch once nearly lost a finger when he grabbed a rope during a race onboard the Sayonara. Ellison joked at least he could "still wrote checks". Regardless of distractions, Ellison will not give up in his battle against Gates. He hates to lose. Ellison declares that any such dominance by one man, like Microsoft in computer industry, in unhealthy. He has obviously forgotten his own plan for a global empire, which he wanted to call the Universal Titanic Octopus Corporation. 41. In the stock market, _______. A) Ellison is as rich as Bill Gates B) Ellison has US ' 200,000 less than Bill Gates C) Ellison is richer than Bill Gates D) Oracle has more money than Microsoft 42. Which of the following is not correct? A) Ellison has had many wives. B) Ellison's wives are famous. C) Ellison is more famous for many wives than for money. D) Ellison is more famous for many wives than for their popularity. 43. Which of the following is true? A) Ellison doesn't like one-man dominance in computer industry. B) Ellison doesn't like one-man dominance by Bill Gates, but really like one-man dominance by himself. C) Ellison wants to be as famous as Bill Gates. D) Ellison often forgets his plan. TEXT C The third branch of the federal government, the judiciary, consist of a system of courts spread throughout the country, headed by the Supreme Court of the United States. A system of state courts existed before the Constitutional Convention as to whether a federal court system was needed, and whether it should supplant the state courts. As in other matters under debate, a compromise was reached in which the state courts were continued while the Constitution mandated a federal judiciary with limited power. Article III of the Constitution states the basis for the federal court system: The judiciary of power of the United States shall be vested in one Supreme Court, and such inferior courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish. With this guide, the first Congress divided the nation into districts and created federal courts for each district. From that beginning has evolved the present structure: the Supreme Court, 11 courts of appeals, 91 district courts, and three courts of special jurisdiction. Congress today retains the power to create and abolish federal courts, as well as to determine the number of judges in the federal judiciary system, It cannot, however, abolish the Supreme Court. The Judicial power extends to cases arising under the Constitution; laws and treaties of the United States; admiralty and wartime access; cases affecting ambassadors, ministers and consuls of foreign countries in the United States; controversies in which the US government is a party; and controversies between states (or their citizens) and foreign nations (or their citizens or subjects). The 11th Amendment removed from federal jurisdiction cases in which citizens of one state were the plaintiffs and the government of another state was the defendant. It did not disturb federal jurisdiction in cases in which a state government is a plaintiff and a citizen of another state the defendant. The power of the federal courts extends both to civil actions for damages and other redress, and to criminal cases arising under federal law. Article III has resulted in a complex set of relationships between state and federal courts. Ordinarily, federal courts do not hear cases during under the laws of individual states. However, some cases over which federal courts have jurisdiction may also be heard and decided by state courts. Both court systems thus have exclusive jurisdiction in some areas and concurrent jurisdiction in others. The Constitution safeguards judicial independence by providing that federal judges shall hold office "during good behavior" —— in practice, until they die, retire or resign, although a judge who commits an offense while in office may be impeached in the same way as the president or other officials of the federal government. US judges are appointed by the president and confirmed by the Senate. Congress also determines the pay scale of judges. 44. By Article III of the Constitution,_______. A) the Congress, as an inferior court, has judicial power B) only the Supreme Court has the judicial power C) lower level courts established by law have judicial power D) the Supreme Court is inferior to the Congress 45. US Congress doesn't have the power to _______. A) create federal courts B) abolish federal courts C) determine the number of judges in the federal judiciary system D) abolish the Supreme Court 46. Federal jurisdiction has power to deal with cases except _______. A) admiralty and maritime cases B) cases affecting ambassadors, ministers and consuls of foreign countries in the US C) controversies in which the US government is a party D) cases in which citizens of one state were the plaintiffs and the government of another state was the defendant TEXT D Steven Spielberg has taken Hollywoods depiction of war to a new level. He does it right at the start of Saving Private Ryan, in a 25 minute sequence depicting the landing of American forces on Omaha Beach in 1944. This is not the triumphant version of D-Day were used to seeing, but an inferno of severed arms, spilling intestines, flying corpses and blood-red tides. To those of us who have never fought in a war, this reenactment —— newsreel-like in its verisimilitude, hallucinatory in its impact —— leaves you convinced that Spielberg has taken you closer to the chaotic, terrifying sights and sounds of combat than any filmmaker before him. This prelude is so strong, so unnerving, that I feared it would overwhelm the rest of the film. When the narrative proper begins, theres an initial feeling of diminishment: its just a movie, after all, with the usual banal music cues and actors going through their paces. Fortunately, the feeling passes. "Saving Private Ryan" reasserts its grip on you and, for most of its 2 hour and 40 minute running time, holds you in thrall. Our heroes are a squad of eight soldiers lucky enough to survived Omaha Beach. Now they are sent, under the command of Captain Miller (Tom Hanks), to find and safely return from combat a Private Ryan (Matt Damon), whose three brothers have already died in action. Why should they risk their lives to save one man? The question haunts them, and the movie. The squad is a familiar melting-pot assortment of World War Two grunts —— the cynical New Yorker (Edward Burns) who doesnt want to risk his neck; the Jew (Adam Goldberg); the Italian (Vin Diesel); the Bible-quoting sniper from Tennessee (Barry Pepper); the medic (Giovanni Ribisi). The most terrified is an inexperienced corporal (Jeremy Davies) brought along as a translator. Davies seems to express every possible variety of fear on his eloquently scrawny face. Tom Sizemore is also impressive as Millers loyal second in command. As written by Robert Rodat, they could be any squad in any war movie. But Spielberg and his actors make us care deeply about their fate. Part of the movies power comes form Hanks quietly mysterious performance as their decent, reticent leader (the men have a pool going speculating about what he did in civilian life). Theres an unhistrionic fatalism in Captain Miller; he just wants to get the job done and get home alive, but his eyes tell you he doesnt like the odds. The level of work in "Private Ryan" —— from the acting to Janusz Kaminskis brilliantly bleached-out color cinematography to the extraordinary sound design by Gary Rydstorm —— is state of the art. For most of "Saving Private Ryan", Spielberg is working at the top of his form, with the movie culminating in a spectacularly staged climactic battle in a French village. The good stuff is so shattering that it overwhelms the lapses, but you cant help noticing a few Hollywood moments. Sometimes Spielberg doesnt seem to trust how powerful the material is, and crosses the line into sentimentality. Theres a prelude and a coda, set in a military cemetery, that is written and directed with a too-heavy hand. But the truth is, this movie so wiped me out I have little taste for quibbling. When you emerges from Spielbergs cauldron, the world doesnt look quite the same. 47. The movie "Saving Private Ryan" is up to a new level because _______. A) it depicts the landing of American forces on Omaha Beach in 1944 B) the landing is not successful C) it reproduces the terrible pictures of severed arms, spilling intestines etc. D) it is a 25-minute sequence 48. Which of the following is correct? A) The prelude is more unnerving than the rest of the film. B) The prelude is as unnerving as the rest of film. C) The prelude is less unnerving than the rest of the film. D) The prelude is as unnerving as most of the remaining part of the film. 49. The squad is a familiar melting-pot assortment of World War Two grunts because the squad consist of _______. A) 8 common soldiers from different ethnic groups in the US B) 8 soldiers who often complain the war C) 8 soldiers who don't want to risk their necks D) 8 soldiers who are lucky to have survived the war 50. According to the last 2 sentences of the passage, the movie made the author of the passage _______. A) disappointed B) carried away C) find faults with the movie D) quibbling the movie SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51.According to the passage, the author seems to ______. A. favor the fear of strangers B. disagree to the fear of strangers C. remain neutral to the fear of strangers D. show no feeling to the fear of strangers Now go though Text E quickly to answer question 51. At the beginning of this century, as steamers poured into American ports, their steerages filled with European immigrants, a Jew from England named Israel Zangwill penned a play whose story line has long been forgotten, but whose central theme has not. His production was entitled "The Melting Pot" and its message still holds a tremendous power on the national imagination —— the promise that all immigrants can be transformed into Americans, a new alloy of forged in a crucible of democracy, freedom and civic responsibility. In 1908, when the play opened in Washington, the United States was in the middle of absorbing the largest influx of immigrants in its history —— Irish and Germans, followed by by Italians and East Europeans, Catholics and Jews —— some 18 million new citizens between 1890 and 1920. Today, the United States is expecting its second great wave of immigration, a movement of people that has profound implications for a society that by tradition pays homage to its immigrant roots at the same time it confronts complex and deeply ingrained ethnic and racial divisions. The shift, according to social historians, demographers and others studying the trends, will severely test the premise of the fabled melting pot, the idea, so central to national identity, that this country can transformed people of every color and background into "one American". Just as possible, they say, is that the nation will continue to fracture into many separate, disconnected communities with no shared sense of commonality or purpose. Or perhaps it will evolve into something in between, a pluralistic society that will hold on to some core ideas about citizenship and capitalism, but with little meaningful interaction among groups. The demographic changes raise other questions about political and economic power. Will that power, now held disproportionately by whites, be shared in the new America? What will happen when Hispanics overtake blacks as the nations single largest minority? Fear of strangers, of course, is nothing new in American history. The last great immigration wave produced a bitter backlash, epitomized by the Chinese Exclusion Act of 1882 and return, in the 1920s, of the Ku Klux Klan, which not only targeted blacks, but Catholics, Jews and immigrants as well. But despite this strife, many historians argue that there was a greater consensus in the past on what it meant to be an American, a yearning for a common language and culture, and a desire —— encouraged, if not coerced by members of the dominant white Protestant culture —— to assimilate. Today, they say, there is more emphasis on preserving ones ethnic identity, of finding ways to highlight and defend ones culture roots. 51. According to the passage, the author seems to ______. A) favor the fear of strangers B) disagree to the fear of strangers C) remain neutral to the fear of strangers D) show no feeling to the fear of strangers TEXT F First read the question. 52.Wine industry in America and European was saved by ______. A. grafting European grape cuttings onto American roots B. the hardy native roots in America C. eliminating the disease D. cutting the vines Now go through TEXT F quickly to answer question 52. Vineyards stretch along the gentle, sunny slopes of the Coast Ranges, north and south of San Francisco, where the rich soil and warm sunshine give every possible assurance to crops in Californias eight major wine-producing areas. Spanish missionaries who brought their knowledge and their seedlings from their native country were the first to grow vines here. They did not sell their wine, but travelers who stopped at the missions praised its special flavor. It was not until 1824 that settlers began to make wine commercially from Spanish mission grapes. Experimenting with different varieties, growers both tried to improve the strong-flavored native grapes and also imported more delicate European varieties. But often the imported vines would die in the new soil, or the change in climate and conditions would give the grapes a different flavor. For many years, the growers were unsuccessful. Then, in 1870, a disease of vine roots suddenly ravaged the vineyards of Europe. The disease was traced to small insects on the roots of American vines which a European winemaker had introduced into his own fields for experimental growing. In turn, the insects returned to America —— this time in European vine cuttings and like the vineyards of Europe, the California fields were almost destroyed by the disease. The hardy native roots had resisted the disease before. Could they resist it against? In desperation, growers grafted European vines upon American roots and by the success of the experiment, saved the wine industry of both continents. Years of hard labor were necessary since all the vines had to be completely replaced. But ever since winegrowers in France, California and other wine-producing countries have been grafting European grape cuttings onto American roots. 52. Wine industry in America and European was saved by ______. A) grafting European grape cuttings onto American roots B) the hardy native roots in America C) eliminating the disease D) cutting the vines TEXT G First read the question. 53.The audience can get classical music online ______. A. as soon as the agreement is reached B. before the agreement is reached C. after January 31, 2002 D. we are not sure of the time Now go through TEXT G quickly to answer question 53. Bits of Bach. Bytes of Beethoven. Browsers with Brahms. Attending a symphony concert in cyberspace could become commonplace under a first-of-its-kind agreement allowing orchestras to distribute live and recorded music on the Internet. Management and musicians from 66 of the nations orchestras and opera and ballet companies are expected to vote in mid-July on the agreement. They hope it will bring classical music to a larger adult audience and serve as an educational tool for children and teachers. "We want to reach out to people and keep our institutions alive. So the question was, How are we going to use this new Internet technology to be able to fill seats and to generate new audiences?", said Florence Nelson, director of symphonic services for the American Federation of Musicians, which negotiated on behalf of union members. Under the tentative agreement announced last week, orchestras would make two kinds of performances available on the Internet: Live and unrecordable "streaming audio" or prerecorded music to be download. Once approved, the agreement will run until January 31, 2002. It covers groups including the Philadelphia Orchestra, the San Francisco Symphony, Cleveland Orchestra, Houston Grand Opera, Nashville Symphony and New York City Ballet Orchestra. "It creates a direct link between the artist and the consumer," said St. Louis Symphony Orchestra contrabassoonist Brad Buckley, who was involved in the negotiations. The deal would not replace current agreements governing television programs, production of compact disks or audio and video tapes for recording companies. But it may change the way orchestras handle their recording in the future and the way the public buys classical music. "Instead of licensing the music to the recording company, the rights will be retained by the musicians and the orchestras," said Philadelphia Orchestra president Joseph H. Kluger, who represented the interests of orchestra managers in the talks. Officials were unsure how long it would take for orchestra to go online once the agreement is reached, and the technology also needs to improve. 53. The audience can get classical music online ______. A) as soon as the agreement is reached B) before the agreement is reached C) after January 31, 2002 D) we are not sure of the time TEXT H First read the question. 54.William enjoys______. A. freedom at Eton. B. freedom at university C. becoming the future king D. being linked with Britney Spears Now go through TEXT H quickly to answer question 54. Price William, Britains future king and a teenage heartthrob for girls around the world, had confessed he hates being under the media spotlight. William, whose late mother Diana was hounded by prying lenses wherever she went, pleaded for the media to leave him alone at university and refused to say if he had a girlfriend. "I like to keep my private life private." This child, whom many believe his mothers life will live on in, seems to have grown into a strong and sensible young man. "We have a king-in-waiting who is well-mannered, charming and seems eminently ready to embark on the next stage of his life," historian Andrew Roberts wrote in the days leading up to Williams birthday on June 21. But William has two big problems that are his alone: He knows that, one day, the future of the British monarchy and its declining popularity will be in his hands. And he knows he must —— much sooner —— face the press. With tabloid interest fever pitch on the eve of his 18th birthday this week, William agreed to a written interview that covered everything from his future plans to his pet dogs puppies. In a special celebration cartoon for his birthday, US pop star Britney Spears, who has long expressed her admiration for the prince, is taking off Prince Williams trousers as she pursued him. It was not in real life, of course. Britains Channel Four television is taking an irreverent look at the prince in an animated film to be aired on June 21, the day he turns 18. Asked about being linked with teenage US pop star Britney Spears, he said: "There has been a lot of nonsense put about by some. I dont like being exploited in this way, but as I get older it is going to be increasingly hard to prevent." But how does one of the worlds most eligible young bachelors cope with the constant pressure form girls? "In my own way," he said. William, who has inherited his mothers stunning good looks, is clearly uncomfortable with the voracious media appetite for endless gossip. "I dont like the attention. I feel uncomfortable with it," Prince Charles eldest son said. But he was grateful the media had left him and his 5-year-old brother Harry alone at the private school of Eton. "I have particular appreciated being left alone at Eton which has allowed me to concentrate on my school work and enjoy being with my friends without being followed by cameras," William said. Then he made a heartfelt plea: "I am grateful to the media for helping to protect my privacy and I hope I can enjoy the same freedom at university." William revealed that he planned to take a year off between school and university —— but he would not say what he would be doing. "I prefer to keep the details private until all the arrangements have been settled." The teenager being groomed to be king said it was far too early to say what career plan he had. "At this stage I just want to get through university." William, a fan of dance and pop music, enjoys water polo, football and rugby. "I enjoy being with my friends, going to the cinema and watching football and rugby matches." 54. William enjoys______. A) freedom at Eton. B) freedom at university C) becoming the future king D) being linked with Britney Spears TEXT I First read the questions. 55.The book is to ______. A. retell the history of American-Soviet relations B. analyze the policy of American and the Soviet Union C. recall what the American diplomat saw and experienced D. relate the history of US presidents, Secretaries of State 56.Selection had to be somewhat brutal because______. A. the author was brutal in his career B. the author was brutal to the Soviet Union C. the author was brutal to his associates D. the author cut off too many the details in selecting the material for the book Now go through TEXT I quickly to answer questions 55 and 56. This book is a collection of personal reminiscences and observations based on nearly forty years in the United States Foreign Service. It is a memoir of a diplomat lucky enough to have witnessed and participated in every major development in American-Soviet relations from 1929 to 1969. This book is not, nor does it attempt to be, a history of American-Soviet relations, although every paragraph is wrapped in the history of those momentous years. While fate presented me with an unusual observation point, at the side of great leaders as they made decisions of incalculable consequences, every witness is limited. Other eyes see a different picture; other ears hear a different sound; other minds conceive a different situation. Thus I recognize that this book cannot truly be a balanced history. This book is also not an analysis of the merits and demerits of American and Soviet policy, although I have not hesitated to point out mistakes that were made by myself, as well as others. My memoirs are not designed to be an apology for American policy or an attack on revisionist historians. I have tried only to relate, explain, and interpret events as I saw them. The impressions I have sought to convey of the men I worked for in the American government —— President, Secretaries of State, and other high officials —— are contemporary with their periods of service. I have sought whenever possible to avoid hindsight and ex post facto judgement of individuals. Therefore, my appraisals of them who led the United States during this period should not be considered conclusive. They represent the opinion of one who had the privilege of working closely with them. Because the material I had to work with was so vast, selection had to be somewhat brutal. Personal experiences were included only if they were germane to the general theme of American-Soviet relations. My ambassadorships to the Philippines and France were given relatively less space than the years there would seem to call for. It was not possible to mention all my associates. Therefore I would like tribute here to the excellence and Embassies I headed, in Moscow, Manila, and Paris, as well as my assistants during my routs of duty in the Department of State. My thanks also go to Evan Thomas, vice-president of W.W. Norton & Company, who encouraged me to write the book and helped me over many a hump. Finally, I find it difficult to express my deep gratitude to Robert H. Phelps, news editor of the Washington Bureau of The New York Times, without whose invaluable assistance and constant help this book would never have been written. 55. The book is to ______. A) retell the history of American-Soviet relations B) analyze the policy of American and the Soviet Union C) recall what the American diplomat saw and experienced D) relate the history of US presidents, Secretaries of State 56. Selection had to be somewhat brutal because______. A) the author was brutal in his career B) the author was brutal to the Soviet Union C) the author was brutal to his associates D) the author cut off too many the details in selecting the material for the book TEXT J First read the questions. 57. New Zealand used to drink ______. A. a lot around 6 oclock in the hovels B. a lot around 6 oclock in the pretty good pubs C. Australian beer in the hovels D. little around 6 oclock 58.For some time, that stout town was "dry" because ______. A. there was little water in the town B. there were many pubs in the town C. alcoholic drinks were prohibited D. the pubs were Trust operated Now go through TEXT J quickly to answer questions 57 and 58. New Zealanders are great drinkers and the beer is good although not so strong as Australian beer. The pubs are generally pretty good, not all bare hovels as so many Australian pubs are, theyre improving too as the old 6 0clock swill days recede into the past. Lion and DB are the main brands, (in fact all the beer is now brewed by only two companies), but down in the deep south youll see some different labels —— Speights, Southland Bitter, Bavarian. Bavarian used to be brewed by a private company before it was taken over by one of the two giants, as was much of New Zealands beer. Many a true Bavarian drinker will tell you its not the same as in the good old days. Cans arent very popular, a lot of beer is sold in bottles (cheaper than cans and refundable), but in a pub it is cheapest to buy it on tap. Ask for "7" (a "7" was seven fluid ounces —— now youll get a 200 ml glass, the nearest metric equivalent, but often called "7"-old ways die hard —— about 40c), a "handle" (a halt liter or liter mug, with a handle-about 82c) or a "jug" (just that-about 1.65). It might seem a bit incongruous saying a handle is a half liter or liter, but giving only one price. In New Zealand public bars are the cheapest (where youd get a liter for 80c), while lounge or other bars tend to mark their drinks up more (so you may spend 80c on only a half handle). In public bars you can wear anything, but lounge bars have a lot of "neat dress required" signs around —— you sometimes get the feeling they are determined to be the last home of the necktie. The bars with the action (as in entertainment) are normally lounge bars, which make things a bit awkward for the traveler with his jeans, sandals and T-shirt at times, while the public bars have the other sort of action (fights) —— actually generally theyre OK; cheaper booze, relaxed; theres just a few of them its best to steer clear of. A New Zealand invention is the Trust operated pub which started in Invercargill. For some time that stout town was "dry" and when the prohibition was repealed they decided that pubs should be publicly owned and the profits go to the community. It worked so well that many other pubs around the country are also Trust operated. New Zealand also had a thriving wine producing industry, Never thought about the Auckland vineyards did you? Like Australian wine the local product once had a pretty terrible name, but it has improved in recent years, although some people say the reds still have a long way to go. But one traveler, loud in his praise and an ardent red drinker, went into a right rave about the seven or eight clarets and burgundies he tried. His favorite was the Woodbourne Cabernet Sauvignon at 5.50. Anyway, try some while youre in NZ and make up your own mind. Keep clear of the bubbly, its ludicrously expensive whether its quality stuff or piss. Another drop to tickle the taste buds is kiwifruit wine; there are lots of different varieties —— still and bubbly, sweet and dry —— not least of which is a liqueur. You may not like it, but NZs the best place to try it. Its also an interesting way to while away a few hours —— taking a look at a kiwifruit winery and having a free tasting in pleasant surroundings. The ever resourceful Kiwis even grow a little dope —— it may not rival Acapulco Gold —— but its still very pleasant stuff. 57. New Zealand used to drink ______. A) a lot around 6 o'clock in the hovels B) a lot around 6 o'clock in the pretty good pubs C) Australian beer in the hovels D) little around 6 o'clock 58. For some time, that stout town was "dry" because ______. A) there was little water in the town B) there were many pubs in the town C) alcoholic drinks were prohibited D) the pubs were Trust operated TEXT K First read the questions. 59.According to the first paragraph, if a company doesnt use Internet, the company will ______. A. be eliminated in the competition B. lose the opportunity to use Internet C. redefine the way the world does business D. not be suitable to the digital economy 60.If a Chinese student wants to study at the university, he or she should have the following except ______. A. a Bachelors degree B. a minimum of 2 years work experience C. a TOFEL score of 600 D. a minimum of 2 years specialized computing experience Now go through TEXT K quickly to answer questions 59 and 60. In five years time all companies will be Internet companies or they wont be companies at all, according to Andy Groves, chief executive of the Intel Corporation. The digital economy is a reality and it is redefining the way the world does business. Major Chinese Internet brands like Myweb.com, Dangdang.com and sohu.net are beginning to emerge. Indeed, businesses in China are going on-line at the rate of two a day, according to the China Internet Network Information Center. One of the issues threatening to hold back this growth is the lack of suitably qualified people to manage e-business processes. Now Liverpool John Moores University, one of the United Kingdoms largest universities is offering an MBA e-commerce course specially designed to help students take advantage of the new opportunities. The course aims to develop students existing management skills in the area of finance, information, people and operations within the context of the e-commerce environment. John Vaughan, MBA director at Liverpool John Moores University said, "We have not simply added new modules to our program, we have completely refocused it. Graduates from this course will be able to project-manage an e-commerce activity and have the knowledge to co-operate with specialists in technology and design." Courses within the MBA include: Managing E-commerce Solutions, Managing Finance, Managing Information, Design for E-commerce, Marketing and the Internet, Strategies Management, Networked Information Systems and others. The program have lasts for one year and begins in September or January. Students will be taught by university staff as well as by a series of guests from many leading companies involved in the e-business environment. Applicants do not need any specialized computing background. However, students are required to have a Bachelors degree, a minimum of two years work experience and a TOFEL score of 600. Many Chinese students choose to follow business or engineering programs. 59. According to the first paragraph, if a company doesn't use Internet, the company will ______. A) be eliminated in the competition B) lose the opportunity to use Internet C) redefine the way the world does business D) not be suitable to the digital economy 60. If a Chinese student wants to study at the university, he or she should have the following except ______. A) a Bachelor's degree B) a minimum of 2 years' work experience C) a TOFEL score of 600 D) a minimum of 2 years' specialized computing experience PART IV TRANSLATION Translate the following part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 1935年，在民族危亡的紧急关头，清华大学学生在中国共产党的领导下，同其他学校 一起发动了划时代的“一二.九”运动，走上了抗日救亡的第一线。许多优秀学生在抗日战 争中显出了年轻的生命，一批“一二.九”运动中的骨干，经过革命斗争的锤炼，成长为新 中国各个方面的领导人。 抗日战争时期，清华大学、北京大学、南开大学组成的西南联合 大学，继承中国学生光荣的革命传统，被誉为“大后方的民主堡垒”。抗日战争胜利后，为 了反对国民党反对派的独裁统治和内战政策，西南联大的师生与1945年12月，发动了声势 浩大的“一二.一”运动，在全国掀起了争民主反内战的热潮。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. He stood out splendidly above all my uncles because he did not stand out at all. That was his distinction. He was the averagest man I ever knew. you should never pick him out in a crowd. He became just another man the minute he was in one. So many people pounds of man. Good solid pounds, but just pounds. You would never remember his hair or his chin, or the shape of his ears. If he said something, you would agree with it, and, an hour later, you would be sure you had said it yourself. Sometimes I think men like that get along about the best. They are the easiest on their houses, their wives, and their children. They are easiest on the world. They slide along without having to do any thing about it as small boys do on their breeches after they have slid on them enough to wear them down smooth. The world is all so much pine needles under them. Uncle Amos was easy on his wives and children. He had three of them , in all. Wives, I mean. I never did get the count of his children straight, there were too many assortments of myself, having to stand on my head and work my legs, or bung stones at cherry birds, to keep the attention of just one girl for a month. PART V WRITING Directions: There are many differences between human beings and animals. Write an essay of about 300 words presenting some main differences within 60 minutes. Write an essay of about 300 words within 60 minutes. After presenting the two different ideas about advertisements you should state your own opinion about this topic and give the reason why. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. The differences between human beings and animals 14 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION Directions: In Sections A, B and C you will hear everything once only. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response for each question on your Colored Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Question 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following five questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. The speaker thinks that ____. A) car causes pollution only in some cities. B) 60% of the cities are affected by car pollution. C) 90% of the city residents suffer from car pollution. D) car is the main contributing factor in polluting air. 2. Which of the following is NOT mentioned as a cause of car pollution? A) Car tyres. B) Car engines. C) Car horns. D) Car brakes. 3. Which of the following is NOT cited as a means to reduce the number of cars? A) To pass laws to control the use of cars. B) To improve public transport systems. C) To increase car tax and car price. D) To construct effective subway systems. 4. One of the mechanical solutions to car pollution is ____. A) to change the chemical structure of fuel. B) to improve on the exhaust pipe. C) to experiment with new engines. D) to monitor the amount of chemicals. 5. According to the speaker, a sensible way to solve car pollution is that we should ____. A) focus on one method only. B) explore some other alternatives. C) improve one of the four methods. D) integrate all of the four methods. SECTION B INTERVIEW Question 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following question. Now listen to the interview. 6. The interviewee's first job was with ____. A) a newspaper. B) the government. C) a construction firm. D) a private company. 7. The interviewee is not self-employed mainly because ____. A) his wife likes him to work for a firm. B) he prefers working for the government. C) self-employed work is very demanding. D) self-employed work is sometimes insecure. 8. To study architecture in a university one must ____. A) be interested in arts. B) study pure science first. C) get good exam results. D) be good at drawing. 9. On the subject of drawing the interviewee says that ____. A) technically speaking artists draw very well. B) an artist's drawing differs little from an architect's. C) precision is a vital skill for the architect. D) architects must be natural artists. 10. The interviewee says that the job of an architect is ____. A) more theoretical than practical. B) to produce sturdy, well-designed buildings. C) more practical than theoretical. D) to produce attractive, interesting buildings. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING Directions: In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. LAND USE A problem related to the competition for land use is whether crops should be used to produce food or fuel. [16] areas will be examined in this respect. Firstly, the problem should be viewed in its [17] perspective. When oil prices rose sharply in the 1970s, countries had to look for alternatives to solve the resulting crisis. In developing countries, one of the possible answers to it is to produce alcohol from [18] material. This has led to a lot of research in this area particularly in the use of [19]. The use of this material resulted from two economic reasons: a [20] in its price and low[21] costs. There are other starchy plants that can be used to produce alcohol, like the sweet [22] or the cassava plant in tropical regions, and [23] and sugar beet in non-tropical regions. The problem with these plants is that they are also the peoples staple food in many poor countries. Therefore, farmers there are faced with a choice: crops for food or for fuel. And farmers naturally go for what is more [24]. As a result, the problems involved are economic in nature, rather than technological. This is my second area under consideration. Finally, there have already been practical applications of using alcohol for fuel. Basically, they come in two forms of use: pure alcohol as is the case in [25], and a combination of alcohol and gasoline known as gasohol in Germany. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION Directions: The following passage contains ten errors .Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit WATER The second most important constituent of the biosphere is liquid water. This can only exist in a very narrow range of temperatures, since water freezes at 0? and boils at 100?. This is only a tiny range compared with the low temperatures of some other planets and the hot interior of the earth, let the temperature of the sun. [26] As we know, life would only be possible on the face [27] of a planet had temperatures somewhere within this [28] range. The earths supply of water probably remains quite fairly [29] constant in quantity. A certain number of hydrogen atoms, which are one of the main constituents of water, are lost by escaping from the atmosphere to out space, but they are probably just about replaced by new [30] water rising away from the depths of the earth during [31] volcanic action. The total quantity of water is not known, and it is about enough to cover the surface of the globe [32] to a depth of about two and three-quarter kms. Most of it —— 97% —— is in the form of the salt waters of the oceans. The rest is fresh, but three quarter of this is [33] in the form of ice at the Poles and on mountains, and cannot be used by living systems when melted. Of the [34] remaining fraction, which is somewhat fewer than 1% of the [35] whole, there is 10-20 times as much stored as underground water as is actually on the surface. There is also a minor, but extremely important, fraction of the water supply which is present as water vapor in the atmosphere. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS Directions: In this section there are four reading passages followed by fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT A STAYING HEALTHY ON HOLIDAY Do people who choose to go on exotic, far-flung holidays deserve free health advice before they travel? And even if they pay, who ensures that they get good, up-to-date information? Who, for that matter, should collect that information in the first place? For a variety of reasons, travel medicine in Britain is a responsibility nobody wants. As a result, many travelers go abroad ill prepared to avoid serious disease. Why is travel medicine so unloved? Partly theres an identity problem. Because it takes an interest in anything that impinges on the health of travelers, this emerging medical specialism invariably cuts across the traditional disciplines. It delves into everything from seasickness, jet lag and the hazards of camels to malaria and plague. But travel medicine has a more serious obstacle to overcome. Travel clinics are meant to tell people how to avoid ending up dead or in a tropical diseases hospital when they come home. But it is notoriously difficult to get anybody to pay out money for keeping people healthy. Travel medicine has also been colonized by commercial interests —— the vast majority of travel clinics in Britain are run by airlines or travel companies. And while travel concerns are happy to sell profitable injections, they may be less keen to spread bad news about travelers diarrhea in Turkey, or to take the time to spell out preventive measures travelers could take. "The NHS finds it difficult to define travelers health," says Ron Behrens, the only NHS consultant in travel and tropical medicine and director of the travel clinic of the Hospital for Tropical Diseases in London. "Should it come within the NHS or should it be paid for? Its a gray area, and opinion is split. No one seems to have any responsibility for defining its role," he says. To compound its low status in the medical hierarchy, travel medicine has to rely on statistics that are patchy at best. In most cases we just dont know how many Britons contract diseases when abroad. And even if a disease is linked to travel there is rarely any information about where those afflicted went, what they ate, how they behaved, or which vaccinations they had. This shortage of hard facts and figures makes it difficult to give detailed advice to people, information that might even save their lives. A recent leader in the British Medical Journal argued: "Travel medicine will emerge as a credible discipline only if the risks encountered by travelers and the relative benefits of public health interventions are well defined in terms of their relative occurrence, distribution and control." Exactly how much money is wasted by poor travel advice? The real figure is anybodys guess, but it could easily run into millions. Behrens gives one example. Britain spends more than ￡1 million each year just on cholera vaccines that often dont work and so give people a false sense of security: "Information on the prevention and treatment of all forms of diarrhea would be a better priority," he says. 36. Travel medicine in Britain is ____. A) not something anyone wants to run. B) the responsibility of the government. C) administered by private doctors. D) handled adequately by travel agents. 37. The main interest of travel companies dealing with travel medicine is to ____. A) prevent people from falling ill. B) make money out of it. C) give advice on specific countries. D) get the government to pay for it. 38. In Behren's opinion the question of who should run travel medicine ____. A) is for the government to decide. B) should be left to specialist hospitals. C) can be left to travel companies. D) has no clear and simple answer. 39. People will only think better of travel medicine if ____. A) it is given more resources by the government. B) more accurate information on its value is available. C) the government takes over responsibility from the NHS. D) travelers pay more attention to the advice they get. TEXT B THE HISTORICAL BACKGROUND OF SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY While the roots of social psychology lie in the intellectual soil of the whole western tradition, its present flowering is recognized to be characteristically an American phenomenon. One reason for the striking upsurge of social psychology in the United States lies in the pragmatic tradition of this country. National emergencies and conditions of social disruption provide special incentive to invent new techniques, and to strike out boldly for solutions to practical social problems. Social psychology began to flourish soon after the First World War. This event, followed by the great depression of the 1930s, by the rise of Hitler, the genocide of Jews, race riots, the Second World War and the atomic threat, stimulated all branches of social science. A special challenge fell to social psychology. The question was asked: How is it possible to preserve the values of freedom and individual rights under condition of mounting social strain and regimentation? Can science help provide an answer? This challenging question led to a burst of creative effort that added much to our understanding of the phenomena of leadership, public opinion, rumor, propaganda, prejudice, attitude change, morale, communication, decision-making, race relations, and conflicts of war. Reviewing the decade that followed World War II, Cartwright [1961] speaks of the "excitement and optimism" of American social psychologists, and notes "the tremendous increase in the total number of people calling themselves social psychologists." Most of these, we may add, show little awareness of the history of their field. Practical and humanitarian motives have always played an important part in the development of social psychology, not only in America but in other lands as well. Yet there have been discordant and dissenting voices. In the opinion of Herbert Spencer in England, of Ludwig Gumplowicz in Austria, and of William Graham Sumner in the United States, it is both futile and dangerous for man to attempt to steer or to speed social change. Social evolution, they argue, requires time and obeys laws beyond the control of man. The only practical service of social science is to warn man not to interfere with the course of nature [or society]. But these authors are in a minority. Most social psychologists share with Comte an optimistic view of mans chances to better his way of life. Has he not already improved his health via biological sciences? Why should he not better his social relationships via social sciences? For the past century this optimistic outlook has persisted in the face of slender accomplishment to date. Human relations seem stubbornly set. Wars have not been abolished, labor troubles have not abated, and racial tensions are still with us. Give us time and give us money for research, the optimists say. 40. Social psychology developed in the USA ____. A) because its roots are intellectually western in origin. B) as a direct response to the great depression. C) to meet the threat of Adolf Hitler and his policy of mass genocide. D) because of its pragmatic traditions for dealing with social problems. 41. According to the author, social psychology should help man to ____. A) preserve individual rights. B) become healthier. C) be aware of history. D) improve material welfare. 42. Who believed that man can influence social change for the good of society? A) Cartwright. B) Spencer. C) Sumner. D) Comte. TEXT C GOD AND MY FATHER I thought of God as a strangely emotional being. He was powerful; He was forgiving yet obdurate, full of warmth and affection. Both His wrath and affection were fitful, they came and they went, and I couldnt count on either to continue: although they both always did. In short God was much such a being as my father himself. What was the relation between them, I wondered —— these two puzzling deities? My fathers ideas of religion seemed straightforward and simple. He had noticed when he was a boy that there were buildings called churches; he had accepted them as a natural part of the surroundings in which he had been born. He would never have invented such things himself. Nevertheless they were here. As he grew up he regarded them as unquestioningly as he did banks. They were substantial old structures, they were respectable, decent, and venerable. They were frequented by the right sort of people. Well, that was enough. On the other hand he never allowed churches —— or banks —— to dictate to him. He gave each the respect that was due to it from his point of view; but he also expected from each of them the respect he felt due to him. As to creeds, he knew nothing about them, and cared nothing either; yet he seemed to know which sect he belonged with. It had to be a sect with the minimum of nonsense about it; no total immersion, no exhorters, no holy confession. He would have been a Unitarian, naturally, if hed lived in Boston. Since he was a respectable New Yorker, he belonged in the Episcopal Church. As to living a spiritual life, he never tackled that problem. Some men who accept spiritual beliefs try to live up to them daily; other men who reject such beliefs, try sometimes to smash them. My father would have disagreed with both kinds entirely. He took a more distant attitude. It disgusted him where atheists attacked religion: he thought they were vulgar. But he also objected to having religion make demands upon him —— he felt that religion was too vulgar, when it tried to stir up mens feelings. It had its own proper field of activity, and it was all right there, of course; but there was one place religion should leave alone, and that was a mans soul. He especially loathed any talk of walking hand in hand with his Savior. And if he had ever found the Holy Ghost trying to soften his heart, he would have regarded its behavior as distinctly uncalled for; even ungentlemanly. 43. The writer says his father's idea of religion seemed straightforward and simple because his father ____. A) had been born in natural surroundings with banks and churches. B) never really thought of God as having a real existence. C) regarded religion as acceptable as long as it did not interfere. D) regarded religion as a way that he could live a spiritual life. 44. The writer's father would probably agree with the statement that ____. A) both spiritualists and atheists are vulgar. B) being aware of different creeds is important. C) religion should expect heart and soul devotion. D) churches like banks are not to be trusted. TEXT D ETIQUETTE In sixteenth-century Italy and eighteenth-century France, waning prosperity and increasing social unrest led the ruling families to try to preserve their superiority by withdrawing from the lower and middle classes behind barriers of etiquette. In a prosperous community, on the other hand, polite society soon absorbs the newly rich, and in England there has never been any shortage of books on etiquette for teaching them the manners appropriate to their new way of life. Every code of etiquette has contained three elements; basic moral duties; practical rules which promote efficiency; and artificial, optional graces such as formal compliments to, say, women on their beauty or superiors on their generosity and importance. In the first category are considerations for the weak and respect for age. Among the ancient Egyptians the young always stood in the presence of older people. Among the Mponguwe of Tanzania, the young men bow as they pass the huts of the elders. In England, until about a century ago, young children did not sit in their parents presence without asking permission. Practical rules are helpful in such ordinary occurrences of social life as making proper introductions at parties or other functions so that people can be brought to know each other. Before the invention of the fork, etiquette directed that the fingers should be kept as clean as possible; before the handkerchief came into common use, etiquette suggested that after spitting, a person should rub the spit inconspicuously underfoot. Extremely refined behavior, however, cultivated as an art of gracious living, has been characteristic only of societies with wealth and leisure, which admitted women as the social equals of men. After the fall of Rome, the first European society to regulate behavior in private life in accordance with a complicated code of etiquette was twelfth-century Provence, in France. Provence had become wealthy. The lords had returned to their castle from the crusades, and there the ideals of chivalry grew up, which emphasized the virtue and gentleness of women and demanded that a knight should profess a pure and dedicated love to a lady who would be his inspiration, and to whom he would dedicate his valiant deeds, though he would never come physically close to her. This was the introduction of the concept of romantic love, which was to influence literature for many hundreds of years and which still lives on in a debased form in simple popular songs and cheap novels today. In Renaissance Italy too, in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, a wealthy and leisured society developed an extremely complex code of manners, but the rules of behavior of fashionable society had little influence on the daily life of the lower classes. Indeed many of the rules, such as how to enter a banquet room, or how to use a sword or handkerchief for ceremonial purposes, were irrelevant to the way of life of the average working man, who spent most of his life outdoors or in his own poor hut and most probably did not have a handkerchief, certainly not a sword, to his name. Yet the essential basis of all good manners does not vary. Consideration for the old and weak and the avoidance of harming or giving unnecessary offence to others is a feature of all societies everywhere and at all levels from the highest to the lowest. 45. One characteristic of the rich classes of a declining society is their tendency to ____. A) take in the recently wealthy. B) retreat within themselves. C) produce publications on manners. D) change the laws of etiquette. 46. Which of the following is NOT an element of the code of etiquette? A) Respect for age. B) Formal compliments. C) Proper introductions at social functions. D) Eating with a fork rather than fingers. 47. According to the writer which of the following is part of chivalry? A knight should ____. A) inspire his lady to perform valiant deeds. B) perform deeds which would inspire romantic songs. C) express his love for his lady from a distance. D) regard his lady as strong and independent. 48. Etiquette as an art of gracious living is quoted as a feature of which country? A) Egypt. B) 18th century France. C) Renaissance Italy. D) England. TEXT E CONFLICT AND COMPETITION The question of whether war is inevitable is one which has concerned many of the worlds great writers. Before considering the question, it will be useful to introduce some related concepts. Conflict, defined as opposition among social entities directed against one another, is distinguished from competition, defined as opposition among social entities independently striving for something which is in inadequate supply. Competitors may not be aware of one another, while the parties to a conflict are. Conflict and competition are both categories of opposition, which has been defined as a process by which social entities function in the disservice of one another. Opposition is thus contrasted with cooperation, the process by which social entities function in the service of one another. These definitions are necessary because it is important to emphasize that competition between individuals or groups is inevitable in a world of limited resources, but conflict is not. Conflict, nevertheless, is very likely to occur, and is probably an essential and desirable element of human societies. Many authors have argued for the inevitability of war from the premise that in the struggle for existence among animal species, only the fittest survive. In general, however, this struggle in nature is competition, not conflict. Social animals, such as monkeys and cattle, fight to win or maintain leadership of the group. The struggle for existence occurs not in fights, but in the competition for limited feeding areas and for the occupancy of areas free from meat-eating animals. Those who fail in this competition starve to death or become victims to other species. The struggle for existence does not resemble human war, but rather the competition of individuals for jobs, markets, and materials. The essence of the struggle is the competition for the necessities of life that are insufficient to satisfy all. Among nations there is competition in developing resources, trades, skills, and a satisfactory way of life. The successful nations grow and prosper; the unsuccessful decline. While it is true that this competition may induce efforts to expand territory at the expense of others, and thus lead to conflict, it cannot be said that war-like conflict among other nations is inevitable, although competition is. 49. According to the author which of the following is inevitable? A) War. B) Conflict. C) Competition. D) Co-operation. 50. In the animal kingdom the struggle for existence ____. A) is evidence of the inevitability of conflict among the fittest. B) arises from a need to live in groups. C) is evidence of the need to compete for scarce resources D) arises from a natural desire to fight. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING In this section there are seven passage followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Answer Sheet. TEXT F ANGRY RESIDENTS First read the questions. 51. The writer believes the problems of chaos and noise will most probably only be solved by ____. A. the students themselves. B. the students parents. C. the college authorities. D. the newspaper. Now go through TEXT F quickly to answer the question. 12 Gradge Crescent Rudwick Sir, On two occasions since Rudwick College opened you have given front page reports on the chaotic conditions prevailing there „„ But whilst chaos and upheaval reigns in the college, what of the chaos and noise that local residents are subjected to? Cars are parked on the pavement, and, still worse, on the pavements at street corners. The noise from motor cycles is such that at times conversation is impossible. To add to this, our streets are littered with paper, Coca Cola tins and empty milk bottles. Huge transistor radios are carried by students at all times of the day, blasting out music so loudly that babies wake and old people are unable to take their afternoon naps. All in all, we have found students behavior to be quite intolerable. We appeal to students [whom we support financially via our local authority rates] to have some consideration for other people. And if the young people themselves wont listen to what we say, and we suspect they wont, then perhaps their parents should knock some sense into their heads. Yours faithfully, John Smith 51. The writer believes the problems of chaos and noise will most probably only be solved by ____. A) the students themselves. B) the students' parents. C) the college authorities. D) the newspaper. TEXT G RACE First read the question. 52. In the passage the writers tone is ____. A. critical. B. apathetic. C. sympathetic. D. neutral. Now go through TEXT G quickly to answer the question. About one-fifth of the high school students here are boycotting classes to protest the reinstatement of a principal who threatened to ban interracial couples from the prom. The boycott began on Monday as classes resumed after spring break for the 680 students at Randolph County High School. It was also the first day back for the principal, Hulond Humphries, a white man who was reinstated by a 4-to-2 vote of the school board after being suspended on March 14. Mr. Humphries, 55, who has been principal for 25 years, declined to comment on the boycott. The boycott was organized by the school boards only black member, Charlotte Clark-Freison. Parents who attended a meeting on Monday night decided to keep their children out of school today, said Ms. Clark-Freison. A group of parents traveled today to Montgomery, about 90 miles to the southwest, to meet with state education officials and ask about setting up an alternative school during the boycott, Ms. Clark-Freison said. School Superintendent Dale McKay said he did not know how many students were absent from class either on Monday or today. Tawanna Mize, a white senior, said school attendance sheets showed 157 absent students, 115 of them black. Ms. Clark-Freison said about 200 black students boycotted today. She did not know how many white students stayed away. Many black students gathered on Monday and today at two churches to discuss multicultural issues and non-violent protests. Many of the boycotting students wore black-and-white ribbons. The boycotters included ReVonda Bowen, who filed a civil rights lawsuit against Mr. Humphries for saying at a school assembly on Feb. 24 that she was "a mistake" because her father is white and her mother is black. At the same assembly, Mr. Humphries announced that mixed-race couples would not be allowed at the prom and that the dance would be cancelled if they showed up. The next day, Mr. Humphries withdrew the threat to close the prom if mixed-race couples showed up, and he said his comments had been misunderstood. 52. In the passage the writer's tone is ____. A) critical. B) apathetic. C) sympathetic. D) neutral. TEXT H USA/IRAN First read the questions. 53. The writer advises that the problems between Iran and the USA might be best dealt with in the UN by getting the support of ____. A. Americas NATO allies in the West. B. Islamic Third World countries. C. Russia. D. Britain. Now go through TEXT H quickly to answer the question. Sir, The present quarrel between the US and Iran seems to be drifting dangerously near to a confrontation between the West and the Third World. It is understandable that the US should seek support from her allies within NATO but the result of this could be seen as an attempt by a group of powerful industrial countries to bully the people of a Third World country which, in recent years, had no cause to be grateful for the policies of the US. Surely the appropriate forum in which to search out a settlement to this extremely dangerous quarrel is the UN and the West should do its utmost, within that forum, to gather the greatest possible support from Third World, and particularly Islamic countries. I am well aware that the matter has been considered by the Security Council and the General Assembly and that the International Court of Justice has also pronounced in favor of the American case. I myself in no way support the behavior of the Iranians on this issue, which I believe to be dangerous and provocative. Nevertheless, it is my view that it would be wise for the Western powers to continue to use the quiet diplomacy of the UN and also, if this should prove practicable, the good offices of Islamic countries who have no desire to be caught up in a middle Eastern conflict arising from the present tension between Iran and the US. In addition to exploiting still further the use of the machinery of the UN, I also consider that European leaders ought to suggest that it would be helpful if a summit meeting could take place between the American and Russian leaders to exchange views about the whole situation in the Middle East. Such an exchange of views would be unlikely to produce instant solutions, but it might help the Russian and American governments to read each others minds and seek methods of backing away from the perilous trial of strength in that part of the world. Yours sincerely Frank Hooley, MP House of Commons, London SW1 53. The writer advises that the problems between Iran and the USA might be best dealt with in the UN by getting the support of ____. A) America's NATO allies in the West. B) Islamic Third World countries. C) Russia. D) Britain. TEXT I GOLD! GOLD! GOLD! First read the question. 54. The purpose of the passage is to ____. A. describe the mining of gold. B. describe mans pursuit of gold. C. determine the importance of gold. D. discuss the role of gold. Now go through TEXT I quickly to answer the question. Gold has enthralled man since the dawn of civilization. For centuries he braved arctic cold, tropic heat and inhuman privations to wrest gold from the earth. He used it for religious objects, sculpture, jewellery and as a symbol of wealth. Paradoxically, he often buried it —— for use in the afterlife, as the pharaohs did, or for safekeeping against the uncertainties of this life. Golds luster and rarity, which implied its owner possessed great power, gave it a musical quality from the start. Gold was considered divine in ancient Greece and was used to adorn temples and as an offering to the gods. Despite their reverence, the ancients were quick to recognize golds practical qualities, particularly its malleability, which made it ideal for jewellery. Even Cleopatra used gold ornaments to enhance her charm. However, it has been as a symbol of wealth —— of nations as well as individuals —— that gold has played its most dramatic role. The quest for gold changed the course of history —— shifting nations borders and opening wildernesses. The cry "Gold!" probably launched more ships than a hundred Helens of Troy. History books tell us Columbus expedition was inspired by his scientific curiosity. But it was also backed by Queen Isabella, who may have been motivated to donate her jewels by more than just sympathy for his cause or desire for a trade route to the East. Whatever the original motive might have been, certainly her royal spouse was moved by more than scientific triumph in 1511 when he wrote to his men in South America: "Get gold," he commanded, "humanely if possible, but at all hazards get gold." The intrinsic value of gold, perhaps enhanced by its mystique, made it a medium of exchange in many parts of the world. Payments were made in gold hundreds of years before 550 B.C., when the first known gold coins were cast. King Croesus of Lydia [western Turkey], whose legendary wealth inspired the phrase "rich as Croesus", is generally credited with that minting. However, gold played a relatively minor monetary role until the great 19th century gold rushes in California, Alaska, Canada and South Africa produced sufficient quantities to make wide-scale monetary use practical. The artistic, industrial and ornamental uses of gold have changed little since ancient times, but its monetary use has been transformed. Gold ducats, double eagles and sovereigns cant meet industrial societies need for convenient and efficient money. Modern nations use paper currency, base-metal coins, and checkbook balances to meet the needs of their fast-paced economies. As a rule, nations now keep gold for payments to each other. The "coin" used in these payments is a gold bar, often about the size and shape of a common building brick, weighing about 400 troy ounces [about 27 avoirdupois pounds] and valued at about 17,000 at todays official U.S. Government price. In the "free" market, where the forces of supply and demand constantly determine golds value, this same bar was worth about thirteen times as much in early 1981. When nations trade gold, it is done at the market price rather than at the official price. TEXT I GOLD! GOLD! GOLD! First read the question. 54. The purpose of the passage is to ____. A. describe the mining of gold. B. describe mans pursuit of gold. C. determine the importance of gold. D. discuss the role of gold. Now go through TEXT I quickly to answer the question. Gold has enthralled man since the dawn of civilization. For centuries he braved arctic cold, tropic heat and inhuman privations to wrest gold from the earth. He used it for religious objects, sculpture, jewellery and as a symbol of wealth. Paradoxically, he often buried it —— for use in the afterlife, as the pharaohs did, or for safekeeping against the uncertainties of this life. Golds luster and rarity, which implied its owner possessed great power, gave it a musical quality from the start. Gold was considered divine in ancient Greece and was used to adorn temples and as an offering to the gods. Despite their reverence, the ancients were quick to recognize golds practical qualities, particularly its malleability, which made it ideal for jewellery. Even Cleopatra used gold ornaments to enhance her charm. However, it has been as a symbol of wealth —— of nations as well as individuals —— that gold has played its most dramatic role. The quest for gold changed the course of history —— shifting nations borders and opening wildernesses. The cry "Gold!" probably launched more ships than a hundred Helens of Troy. History books tell us Columbus expedition was inspired by his scientific curiosity. But it was also backed by Queen Isabella, who may have been motivated to donate her jewels by more than just sympathy for his cause or desire for a trade route to the East. Whatever the original motive might have been, certainly her royal spouse was moved by more than scientific triumph in 1511 when he wrote to his men in South America: "Get gold," he commanded, "humanely if possible, but at all hazards get gold." The intrinsic value of gold, perhaps enhanced by its mystique, made it a medium of exchange in many parts of the world. Payments were made in gold hundreds of years before 550 B.C., when the first known gold coins were cast. King Croesus of Lydia [western Turkey], whose legendary wealth inspired the phrase "rich as Croesus", is generally credited with that minting. However, gold played a relatively minor monetary role until the great 19th century gold rushes in California, Alaska, Canada and South Africa produced sufficient quantities to make wide-scale monetary use practical. The artistic, industrial and ornamental uses of gold have changed little since ancient times, but its monetary use has been transformed. Gold ducats, double eagles and sovereigns cant meet industrial societies need for convenient and efficient money. Modern nations use paper currency, base-metal coins, and checkbook balances to meet the needs of their fast-paced economies. As a rule, nations now keep gold for payments to each other. The "coin" used in these payments is a gold bar, often about the size and shape of a common building brick, weighing about 400 troy ounces [about 27 avoirdupois pounds] and valued at about 17,000 at todays official U.S. Government price. In the "free" market, where the forces of supply and demand constantly determine golds value, this same bar was worth about thirteen times as much in early 1981. When nations trade gold, it is done at the market price rather than at the official price. 54. The purpose of the passage is to ____. A) describe the mining of gold. B) describe man's pursuit of gold. C) determine the importance of gold. D) discuss the role of gold. TEXT J WEATHER First read the question. 55. According to the passage, London recorded its coldest day in _____ years when the temperature dropped to -90?. A. 40 B. 41 C. 42 D. 43 56. How many people died in Poland because of the weather in the first half of January 1987? A. 77. B. 29. C. 48. D. 27. Now go through TEXT J quickly to answer the question. Severe winter weather during the first three weeks of January caused hundreds of deaths in Europe. A massive dome of cold air became entrenched over northern Scandinavia and northern USSR in mid-December of 1986. It migrated westward and southward so that by January 12 much of the continent was under its influence. On that day, central England had its coldest day since 1945, with London recording 160F [-90?]. In Leningrad, USSR, temperatures dipped to -490? [-450?], reportedly the coldest in 250 years. Coastal and river ice brought a halt to shipping in northern Europe. The cold was also accompanied by a major snowstorm that snarled rail and road transport in Western Europe on January 11 to 13. Snow fell as far south as the French Riviera. On January 14, East Berlin recorded an all-time record low of -130? [-110?], while Paris measured a snowfall of 5.5 inches [14 centimeters] —— the fourth heaviest on record. During the first two weeks of the month, the cold was blamed for 77 deaths in the USSR, including 48 from heating accidents and 29 from avalanches. In Poland, home fires claimed 27 lives. By the time the cold began easing around January 19, the total reported deaths from snow and cold across Europe and the USSR neared 350. The interior of North America was experiencing record mildness. Parts of Alberta, Canada, enjoyed the warmest January ever, with temperatures averaging up to 18? [10?] above normal. The January warmth turned out to be part of a remarkably persistent weather anomaly. From December 1986 through 1987, monthly average temperatures across a large area of Canada remained above normal. From December through April, readings averaged 110?[60?] above normal in an area extending from eastern Alberta to western Ontario. In Ontario, August was the first month with below-normal temperatures after eight consecutive months above normal. Localized areas had even more persistent warmth. At Vancouver International Airport, November was the 16th consecutive month with above-normal temperatures. the relative warmth across the continent is a feature often associated with warm ocean waters in the eastern tropical Pacific Ocean. 55. According to the passage, London recorded its coldest day in _____ years when the temperature dropped to -90?. A) 40 B) 41 C) 42 D) 43 56. How many people died in Poland because of the weather in the first half of January 1987? A) 77. B) 29. C) 48. D) 27. TEXT K WHOS WHO First read the question. 57. Which person won the Lenin Peace Prize? A. McGuigan. B. Mach. C. Machado. D. Machel. 58. Which person carried out research in the Amazon region? A. McGuigan. B. Mach. C. Machado. D. Machel. Now go through TEXT K quickly to answer the question. McGUIGAN, Hon. Thomas Malcolm; New Zealand, parliamentarian and business consultant; b 20 Feb 1921, Christchurch; m Ruth Deacon 1946; two s. one d.; ed. Christchurch Boys High School, Christchurch Tech. Evening School; served in Navy 1941-45; secretarial and accountancy posts in commerce 1946-54; House Man. Christchurch Hosp. 1955-57; Sr. Admin Officer, Princess Margaret Hosp., Christchurch 1958-69; M.P. 1969-75; Minister of Railways, Electricity and Civil Defence 1972-74, of Health and Public Trust Office 1974-75; J.P. 1953-; Pres. New Zealand Football Asscn. 1974-75. Leisure interests: golf, cricket, fishing, football, reading, music. Address: 71 Main Road, Christchurch 8, New Zealand. MACH, Stanislaw, M.ECON., C.SC; Polish politician; b 22 April 1938, Przychody, near Olkusz; economic studies; Chief Mechanic, Cart Factory, Sianow 1960-61, Voivodship Amalgamation of Establishments for Mechanization of Agric., Koszalin 1961-63; Branch Sec. Main Tech Org. [NOT], Koszalin 1963-68; Deputy Chair Voivodship Council of Trade unions, Koszalin 1968-71; mem. Polish United Workers Party [PZPR] 1961-; First Sec. PZPR District Cttee. Kolobrzeg 1971-72; Chair Presidium, Voivodship Nat. Council [WRN], Koszalin 1972-73, Voivode, Koszalin 1973-75; First sec. PZPR Voivodship Cttee., Slupsk 1975-77; Chair Presidium, WRN Slupsk 197577; Deputy mem. PZPR Cen. Cttee. 1975-; deputy to Seym [Parl.] 1976-80; Minister of Light Industry 1977-80; Deputy Chair. Council of Ministers Oct. 1980-; decorations include Knights Cross of Order Polonia Restituta. Address: Urzad Rady Ministrow, Al. Ujazdowskie 1/3, 00-583, Warsaw, Poland. MACHADO, Paulo de Almeida; Brazilian medical doctor; b. Minas Gerais; active in planning public health and sanitary services; Dir. Nat. Inst. for Research in the Amazon Region until 1974; Minister of Health 1974-78. Address: c/o Ministerio da Saude, Esplanada dos Ministerios, Bloco 11, Brasilia, D.F. Brazil. MACHEL, Samora Moises; Mozambique nationalist leader and politician; b. Oct. 1933, Lourenco Marques [now Maputo]; m. Grace Simbine 1975; trained as a male nurse; sent to Algeria for mil. training 1963; organized training camp programme in Tanzania; C.-in-C. army of Frente de Libertacao de Mocambique [FRELIMO] in guerilla war against Portugues 1966-74; Sec. of Defence, FRELIMO 1966-74, Pres. May 1970-; Pres. of Mozambique June 1975-; Joliot-Curie Gold Medal 1977, Lenin Peace Prize 1977, Order of Suhbuator [Mongolia] 1978, Order of Friendship 1980. Address: Officio do Presidento, Maputo, Mozambique. McHENRY, Donald F., M.Sc.; American diplomatist; b. 13 Oct 1936, St. Louis, Mo.; m Mary Williamson [divorced]; one s. two d.; ed Illinois State Univ., Southern Illinois and Georgetown Univs; taught Howard Univ., Washington 1959-62; active in civil rights movt., during 1960s; joined dept of State 1963. 57. Which person won the Lenin Peace Prize? A) McGuigan. B) Mach. C) Machado. D) Machel. 58. Which person carried out research in the Amazon region? A) McGuigan. B) Mach. C) Machado. D) Machel. TEXT L MILESTONES First read the following two questions. 59. Who among the following is a biographer? A. Tapie. B. El-Shinawwy. C. Haslip. D. Nazir-Ali. 60. Who among the following owns a soccer team? A. Tapie. B. Helu. C. Haslip. D. Nazir-Ali. Now, go through the text quickly in order to answer the questions. APPOINTED. MICHAEL NAZIR-ALI, 44, an assistant bishop in central London; as Bishop of Rochester, the first non-white diocesan bishop of the Church of England; in Kent. The general secretary of the Church Missionary Society, Nazir-Ali, who was ordained in Karachi in 1976 and holds dual Pakistani and British citizenship, has written several books on Islamic-Christian relations. Of his appointment he said "I think it reflects the way in which this country has changed." RANSOMED. ALFREDO HARP HELU, 50, billionaire president and co-owner of one of Latin Americas largest financial firms, Banamex-Accival; for about 30 million, paid by his family, after he was held 106 days by his kidnappers; in Mexico city. The release followed a dramatic TV appearance in which Harps son, accompanied by a family lawyer and a priest, accepted the kidnappers terms unconditionally. At the familys request, the police did not intervene, giving rise to fears that the huge ransom will encourage more kidnappings and adding to concerns about Mexicos stability. ARRESTED. BERNARD TAPIE, 51, flamboyant entrepreneur and one of Frances fastest rising political stars; only 12 hours after being stripped of his parliamentary immunity; on fraud and tax-evasion charges involving the use of his yacht, Phocea; in Paris. The Marseilles Deputy and former Urban Affairs Minister was already under investigation in four other cases, which involved defamation, embezzlement, fraud and a bribery scandal connected to his Olympique de Marseilles soccer team. If convicted on the latest charges, Tapie risks heavy fines and up to five years in prison —— yet his political support remains strong. DIED. MAMOUN EL-SHINNAWY, 80, master of the modern Arabic lyrical poetry who also wrote the words to more than 1,000 popular Egyptian songs; in Cairo. Originally a journalist noted for his lancing wit, El-Shinnawy co-founded a political-humor magazine in 1950 called Word and a Half, which was closed down during the 1952 revolution that brought Gamal Abdel Nasser to power. In the 60s El-Shinnawy penned the romantic verse that would bring him renown throughout the Arab world. DIED. JOAN HASLIP, 82, popular biographer of such historical figures as Frances Marie Antoinette and Emperor Maximilian of Mexico; in Bellosguardo, Italy. The British-born Haslip, who spent much of her life in Italy, made a precocious entrance into the world of letters, publishing two novels by the time she was 20. But after being called a "pretty, witty spendthrift writer" by V. S. Pritchett she turned to biography because she was "determined to be taken seriously". Critical and commercial success greeted her 1971 book on Maximilian, Imperial Adventurer, which became a best seller. Marie Antoinette, her 1987 portrait of the guillotined queen, was translated into 10 languages. 59. Who among the following is a biographer? A) Tapie. B) El-Shinawwy. C) Haslip. D) Nazir-Ali. 60. Who among the following owns a soccer team? A) Tapie. B) Helu. C) Haslip. D) Nazir-Ali. PART IV TRANSLATION SECTION A: CHINESE TO ENGLISH (30 MIN.) Translate the following part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE 近读报纸，对国内名片和请柬的议论颇多，于是想起客居巴黎时经常见到的法国人手中的名片和请柬，随笔记下来，似乎不无借鉴之处。 在巴黎，名目繁多的酒会，冷餐会是广 交朋友的好机会。在这种场合陌生人相识，如果是亚洲人，他们往往开口之前先毕恭毕敬地 用双手把自己的名片呈递给对方，这好象是不可缺少的礼节。然而，法国人一般却都不大主 动递送名片，双方见面寒喧几句甚至海阔天空地聊一番也就各自走开，只有当双方谈话投机， 希望继续交往时，才会主动掏出名片。二话不说先递名片反倒有些勉强。 法国人的名片讲 究朴素大方，印制精美，但很少有镶金边儿的，闪光多色的或带香味儿的，名片上的字体纤 细秀丽，本人的名字也不过分突出，整张纸片上空白很大，豪无拥挤不堪的感觉。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following underlined part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. Four months before election day, five men gathered in a small conference room at the Reagan-Bush headquarters and reviewed an oversize calendar that marked the remaining days of the 1984 presidential campaign. It was the last Saturday in June and at ten oclock in the morning the rest of the office was practically deserted. Even so, the men kept the door shut and the drapes carefully drawn. The three principals and their two deputies had come from around the country for a critical meeting. Their aim was to devise a strategy that would guarantee Ronald Reagans resounding reelection to a second term in the White House. It should have been easy. These were battle-tested veterans with long ties to Reagan and even longer ones to the Republican party, men who understood presidential politics as well as any in the country. The backdrop of the campaign was hospitable, with lots of good news to work with: America was at peace, and the nations economy, a key factor in any election, was rebounding vigorously after recession. Furthermore, the campaign itself was lavishly financed, with plenty of money for a top-flight staff, travel, and television commercials. And, most important, their candidate was Ronald Reagan, a president of tremendous personal popularity and dazzling communication skills. Reagan has succeeded more than any president since John. F. Kennedy in projecting a broad vision of America —— a nation of renewed military strength, individual initiative, and smaller federal government. PART V WRITING Directions: On a Chinese college campus, usually several college students share a dormitory. Unfortunately some college students do not pay enough attention to living in a shared environment. For instance, they may ignore the sanitation of their dormitory or they may suddenly start to play music while others are sound asleep. Hence the idea of making dormitory policies to curb these indecencies has become popular on campus. You are in favor of this idea and have therefore decided to write to your university campus radio a passage entitled: IN SUPPORT OF DORMITORY POLICIES Requirements: Write an essay of about 300 words within 60 minutes. After presenting the two different ideas about advertisements you should state your own opinion about this topic and give the reason why. Mark will be awarded for content, organization, grammar, and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. 15 PART I LISTENING COMPREHENSION Directions: In Sections A, B and C you will hear everything ONCE ONLY. Listen carefully and then answer the questions that follow. Mark the correct response for each question on your Coloured Answer Sheet. SECTION A TALK Questions 1 to 5 refer to the talk in this section. At the end of the talk you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following questions. Now listen to the talk. 1. In the Black Forest, the acid rain is said to attack all EXCEPT ____. A) firs. B) metals. C) leaves. D) soil. 2. The percentage of firs dying in the Black Forest is ____. A) 41%. B) 43%. C) 26%. D) 76%. 3. Germany is tackling part of the problem by introducing ____. A) new car designing schemes. B) new car production lines. C) a new type of smoke stacks. D) new car safety standards. 4. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT? A) Germany is likely to succeed in persuading her neighbors to reduce acid rain. B) The disastrous effects of acid rain are not confined to one area. C) German tourists are allowed to drive across their neighbors' borders. D) Germany's neighbors are in favor of the use of lead-free petrol. 5. On the issue of future solution of acid rain, the speaker's tone is that of ____. A) warning. B) pessimism. C) indifference. D) optimism. SECTION B INTERVIEW Questions 6 to 10 are based on an interview. At the end of the interview you will be given 15 seconds to answer each of the following questions Now listen to the interview. 6. What subject is Mr. Pitt good at? A) Art. B) French. C) German. D) Chemistry. 7. What does Mr. Pitt NOT do in his spare time? A) Doing a bit of acting and photography. B) Going to concerts frequently. C) Playing traditional jazz and folk music. D) Traveling in Europe by hitch-hiking. 8. When asked what a manager's role is, Mr. Pitt sounds ____. A) confident. B) hesitant. C) resolute. D) doubtful. 9. What does Mr. Pitt say he would like to be? A) An export salesman working overseas. B) An accountant working in the company. C) A production manager in a branch. D) A policy maker in the company. 10. Which of the following statements about the management trainee scheme is TRUE? A) Trainees are required to sign contracts initially. B) Trainees' performance is evaluated when necessary. C) Trainees' starting salary is 870 pounds. D) Trainees cannot quit the management scheme. SECTION D NOTE-TAKING AND GAP-FILLING Directions: In this section you will hear a mini-lecture. You will hear the lecture ONLY ONCE. While listening to the lecture, take notes on the important points. Your notes will not be marked, but you will need them to complete a 15-minute gap-filling task on ANSWER SHEET ONE after the mini lecture. Use the blank sheet for note-taking. ANSWER SHEET ONE Fill in each of the gaps with ONE suitable word. You may refer to your notes. Make sure the word you fill in is both grammatically and semantically acceptable. In business, many places adopt a credit system, which dates back to ancient times. At present, purchases can be made by using credit cards. They fall into two categories: one has (16) use, while the other is accepted almost everywhere. The application for the use of the latter one must be made at a (17). Once the customer starts using the card, he will be provided with a monthly statement of (18) by the credit company. He is required to pay one quarter to half of his credit (19) every month. Advantages. 1. With a card, it is not (20) to save up money before an actual purchase. 2. If the card is lost, its owner is protected. 3. A (21) and complete list of purchase received from the credit company helps the owner to remember the time and (22) of his purchase. 4. The cards are accepted in a(n) (23) by professional people like dentists, etc. Major disadvantage. The card owner is tempted to (24) his money. If this is the case, it will become increasingly difficult for the user to keep up with the required (25), which will result in the credit card being cancelled by the credit company. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. PART II PROOFREADING & ERROR CORRECTION Directions: The following passage contains ten errors. Each line contains a maximum of one error. In each case only one word is involved. You should proofread the passage and correct it in the following way: For a wrong word, underline the wrong word and write the correct one in the blank provided at the end of the line. For a missing word, mark the position of the missing word with a "^" sign and write the word you believe to be missing in the blank provided at the end of the line. For an unnecessary word, cross the unnecessary word with a slash "/" and put the word in the blank provided at the end of the line. EXAMPLE When ^ art museum wants a new exhibit, (1) an it (never/) buys things in finished form and hangs (2) never them on the wall. When a natural history museum wants an exhibition, it must often build it. (3)exhibit Classic Intention Movement In social situations, the classic Intention Movement is "the chair-grasp". Host and guest have been talking for some time, but now the host has an appointment to keep and can get away. His urge to go is [26] held in check by his desire not be rude to his guest. [27] If he did not care of his guests feelings he would [28] simply get up out of his chair and to announce his [29] departure. This is what his body wants to do, therefore [30] his politeness glues his body to the chair and refuses to let him raise. It is at this point that he [31] performs the chair-grasp Intention Movement. He continues to talk to the guest and listen to him, but leans forward and grasps the arms of the chair as about to push [32] himself upwards. This is the first act he would make if he were rising. If he were not hesitating, [33] it would only last a fraction of the second. He would [34] lean, push, rise, and be up. But now, instead, it lasts much longer. He holds his "readiness-to-rise" post and [35] keeps on holding it. It is as if his body had frozen at the get-ready moment. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. PART III READING COMPREHENSIONS SECTION A: READING COMPREHENSION (30 MIN.) Directions: In this section there are four reading passages followed by a total of fifteen multiple-choice questions. Read the passages carefully and then mark your answers on your Coloured Answer Sheet. TEXT A A magazines design is more than decoration, more than simple packaging. It expresses the magazines very character. The Atlantic Monthly has long attempted to provide a design environment in which two disparate traditions —— literary and journalistic —— can co-exist in pleasurable dignity. The redesign that we introduce with this issue —— the work of our art director, Judy Garlan —— represents, we think, a notable enhancement of that environment. Garlan explains some of what was in her mind as she began to create the new design: "I saw this as an opportunity to bring the look closer to matching the elegance and power of the writing which the magazine is known for." The overall design has to be able to encompass a great diversity of styles and subjects —— urgent pieces of reporting, serious essays, lighter pieces, lifestyle-oriented pieces, short stories, poetry. We dont want lighter pieces to seem too heavy, and we dont want heavier pieces to seem too pretty. We also use a broad range of art and photography, and the design has to work well with that, too. At the same time, the magazine needs to have a consistent feel, needs to underscore the sense that everything in it is part of one Atlantic world. The primary typefaces Garlan chose for this task are Times Roman, for a more readable body type, and Bauer Bodoni, for a more stylish and flexible display type (article titles, large initials, and so on). Other aspects of the new design are structural. The articles in the front of the magazine, which once flowed into one another, now stand on their own, to gain prominence. The Travel column, now featured in every issue, has been moved from the back to the front. As noted in this space last month, the word "Monthly" rejoins "The Atlantic" on the cover, after a decade-long absence. Judy Garlan came to the Atlantic in 1981 after having served as the art director of several other magazines. During her tenure here The Atlantic has won more than 300 awards for visual excellence, from the Society of illustrators, the American Institute of Graphic Arts, the Art Directors Club, Communication Arts, and elsewhere. Garlan was in various ways assisted in the redesign by the entire art-department staff: Robin Gilmore, Barnes, Betsy Urrico, Gillian Kahn, and Lisa Manning. The artist Nicholas Gaetano contributed as well: he redrew our colophon (the figure of Neptune that appears on the contents page) and created the symbols that will appear regularly on this page (a rendition of our building), on the Puzzler page, above the opening of letters, and on the masthead. Gaetano, whose work manages to combine stylish clarity and breezy strength, is the cover artist for this issue. 36. Part of the new design is to be concerned with the following EXCEPT ____. A) variation in the typefaces. B) reorganization of articles in the front. C) creation of the travel column. D) reinstatement of its former name. 37. According to the passage, the new design work involves ____. A) other artists as well. B) other writers as well. C) only the cover artist. D) only the art director. 38. This article aims to ____. A) emphasize the importance of a magazine's design. B) introduce the magazine's art director. C) persuade the reader to subscribe to the magazine. D) inform the reader of its new design and features. TEXT B WHY SHOULD anyone buy the latest volume in the ever-expanding Dictionary of National Biography? I do not mean that it is bad, as the reviewers will agree. But it will cost you 65 pounds. And have you got the rest of volumes? You need the basic 22 plus the largely decennial supplements to bring the total to 31. Of course, it will be answered, public and academic libraries will want the new volume. After all, it adds 1,068 lives of people who escaped the net of the original compilers. Yet in 10 years time a revised version of the whole caboodle, called the New Dictionary of National Biography, will be published. Its editor, Professor Colin Matthew, tells me that he will have room for about 50,000 lives, some 13,000 more than in the current DNB. This rather puts the 1,068 in Missing Persons in the shade. When Dr Nicholls wrote to The Spectator in 1989 asking for names of people whom readers had looked up in the DNB and had been disappointed not to find, she says that she received some 100,000 suggestions. (Well, she had written to "other quality newspapers" too.) As soon as her committee had whittled the numbers down, the professional problems of an editor began. Contributors didnt file copy on time; some who did sent too much: 50,000 words instead of 500 is a record, according to Dr Nicholls. There remains the dinner-party game of whos in, whos out. That is a game that the reviewers have played and will continue to play. Criminals were my initial worry. After all, the original edition of the DNB boasted: Malefactors whose crimes excite a permanent interest have received hardly less attention than benefactors. Mr„„ John Gross clearly had similar anxieties, for he complains that, while the murderer Christie is in, Crippen is out. One might say in reply that the injustice of the hanging of Evans instead of Christie was a force in the repeal of capital punishment in Britain, as Ludovie Kennedy (the author of Christies entry in Missing Persons) notes. But then Crippen was reputed as the first murderer to be caught by telegraphy (he had tried to escape by ship to America). It is surprising to find Max Miller excluded when really not very memorable names get in. There has been a conscious effort to put in artists and architects from the Middle Ages. About their lives not much is always known. Of Hugo of Bury St Edmunds, a 12th-century illuminator whose dates of birth and death are not recorded, his biographer comments: "Whether or not Hugo was a wall-painter, the records of his activities as carver and manuscript painter attest to his versatility". Then there had to be more women, too (12 per cent, against the original DBN s 3), such as Roy Strongs subject, the Tudor painter Levina Teerlinc, of whom he remarks: "Her most characteristic feature is a head attached to a too small, spindly body. Her technique remained awkward, thin and often cursory". Doesnt seem to qualify her as a memorable artist. Yet it may be better than the record of the original DNB, which included lives of people who never existed (such as Merlin) and even managed to give thanks to J. W. Clerke as a contributor, though, as a later edition admits in a shamefaced footnote, "except for the entry in the List of Contributors there is no trace of J. W. Clerke". 39. The writer suggests that there is no sense in buying the latest volume ____. A) because it is not worth the price. B) because it has fewer entries than before. C) unless one has all the volumes in his collection. D) unless an expanded DNB will come out shortly. 40. On the issue of who should be included in the DNB, the writer seems to suggest that ____. A) the editors had clear rules to follow. B) there were too many criminals in the entries. C) the editors clearly favored benefactors. D) the editors were irrational in their choices. 41. Crippen was absent from the DNB ____. A) because he escaped to the U.S. B) because death sentence had been abolished. C) for reasons not clarified. D) because of the editors' mistake. 42. The author quoted a few entries in the last paragraph to ____. A) illustrate some features of the DNB. B) give emphasis to his argument. C) impress the reader with its content. D) highlight the people in the Middle Ages. 43. Throughout the passage, the writer's tone towards the DNB was ____. A) complimentary. B) supportive. C) sarcastic. D) bitter. TEXT C Medical consumerism —— like all sorts of consumerism, only more menacingly —— is designed to be unsatisfying. The prolongation of life and the search for perfect health (beauty, youth, happiness) are inherently self-defeating. The law of diminishing returns necessarily applies. You can make higher percentages of people survive into their eighties and nineties. But, as any geriatric ward shows, that is not the same as to confer enduring mobility, awareness and autonomy. Extending life grows medically feasible, but it is often a life deprived of everything, and one exposed to degrading neglect as resources grow over-stretched and politics turn mean. What an ignominious destiny for medicine if its future turned into one of bestowing meager increments of unenjoyed life! It would mirror the fate of athletics, in which disproportionate energies and resources —— not least medical ones, like illegal steroids —— are now invested to shave records by milliseconds. And, it goes without saying, the logical extension of longevism —— the "abolition" of death —— would not be a solution but only an exacerbation. To air these predicaments is not anti-medical spleen —— a churlish reprisal against medicine for its victories —— but simply to face the growing reality of medical power not exactly without responsibility but with dissolving goals. Hence medicines finest hour becomes the dawn of its dilemmas. For centuries, medicine was impotent and hence unproblematic. From the Greeks to the Great War, its job was simple: to struggle with lethal diseases and gross disabilities, to ensure live births, and to manage pain. It performed these uncontroversial tasks by and large with meager success. Today, with mission accomplished, medicines triumphs are dissolving in disorientation. Medicine has led to vastly inflated expectations, which the public has eagerly swallowed. Yet as these expectations grow unlimited, they become unfulfillable. The task facing medicine in the twenty-first century will be to redefine its limits even as it extends its capacities. 44. In the author's opinion, the prolongation of life is equal to ____. A) mobility. B) deprivation. C) autonomy. D) awareness. 45. In the second paragraph a comparison is drawn between ____. A) medicine and life. B) resources and energies. C) predicaments and solutions. D) athletics and longevism. TEXT D The biggest problem facing Chile as it promotes itself as a tourist destination to be reckoned with, is that it is at the end of the earth. It is too far south to be a convenient stop on the way to anywhere else and is much farther than a relatively cheap half-days flight away from the big tourist markets, unlike Mexico, for example. Chile, therefore, is having to fight hard to attract tourists, to convince travelers that it is worth coming halfway round the world to visit. But it is succeeding, not only in existing markets like the USA and Western Europe but in new territories, in particular the Far East. Markets closer to home, however, are not being forgotten. More than 50% of visitors to Chile still come from its nearest neighbor, Argentina, where the cost of living is much higher. Like all South American countries, Chile sees tourism as a valuable earner of foreign currency, although it has been far more serious than most in promoting its image abroad. Relatively stable politically within the region, it has benefited from the problems suffered in other areas. In Peru, guerrilla warfare in recent years has dealt a heavy blow to the tourist industry and fear of street crime in Brazil has reduced the attraction of Rio de Janeiro as a dream destination for foreigners. More than 150,000 people are directly involved in Chiles tourist sector, an industry which earns the country more than US950 million each year. The state-run National Tourism Service, in partnership with a number of private companies, is currently running a world-wide campaign, taking part in trade fairs and international events to attract visitors to Chile. Chiles great strength as a tourist destination is its geographical diversity. From the parched Atacama Desert in the north to the Antarctic snowfields of the south, it is more than 5,000km long. With the Pacific on one side and the Andean mountains on the other, Chile boasts natural attractions. Its beaches are not up to Caribbean standards but resorts such as Vina del Mar are generally clean and unspoilt and have a high standard of services. But the trump card is the Andes mountain range. There are a number of excellent ski resorts within one hours drive of the capital, Santiago, and the national parks in the south are home to rare animal and plant species. The parks already attract specialist visitors, including mountaineers, who come to climb the technically difficult peaks, and fishermen, lured by the salmon and trout in the regions rivers. However, infrastructural development in these areas is limited. The ski resorts do not have as many lifts as their European counterparts and the poor quality of roads in the south means that only the most determined travelers see the best of the national parks. Air links between Chile and the rest of the world are, at present, relatively poor. While Chiles two largest airlines have extensive networks within South America, they operate only a small number of routes to the United States and Europe, while services to Asia are almost non-existent. Internal transport links are being improved and luxury hotels are being built in one of its national parks. Nor is development being restricted to the Andes. Easter Island and Chiles Antarctic Territory are also on the list of areas where the Government believes it can create tourist markets. But the rush to open hitherto inaccessible areas to mass tourism is not being welcomed by everyone. Indigenous and environmental groups, including Greenpeace, say that many parts of the Andes will suffer if they become over-developed. There is a genuine fear that areas of Chile will suffer the cultural destruction witnessed in Mexico and European resorts. The policy of opening up Antarctica to tourism is also politically sensitive. Chile already has permanent settlements on the ice and many people see the decision to allow tourists there as a political move, enhancing Santiagos territorial claim over part of Antarctica. The Chilean Government has promised to respect the environment as it seeks to bring tourism to these areas. But there are immense commercial pressures to exploit the countrys tourism potential. The Government will have to monitor developments closely if it is genuinely concerned in creating a balanced, controlled industry and if the price of an increasingly lucrative tourist market is not going to mean the loss of many of Chiles natural riches. 46. Chile is disadvantaged in the promotion of its tourism by ____. A) geographical location. B) guerrilla warfare. C) political instability. D) street crime. 47. Many of Chiles tourists used to come from EXCEPT ____. A) U.S B) the Far East. C) western Europe. D) her neighbors. 48. According to the author, Chile's greatest attraction is ____. A) the unspoilt beaches. B) the dry and hot desert. C) the famous mountain range. D) the high standard of services. 49. According to the passage, in which area improvement is already under way? A) Facilities in the ski resorts. B) Domestic transport system. C) Air services to Asia. D) Road network in the south. 50. The objection to the development of Chile's tourism might be all EXCEPT that it ____. A) is ambitious and unrealistic. B) is politically sensitive. C) will bring harm to culture. D) will cause pollution in the area. SECTION B SKIMMING AND SCANNING Directions: In this section there are seven passages followed by ten multiple-choice questions. Skim or scan them as required and then mark your answers on your Coloured Answer Sheet. TEXT E First read the question. 51. The main purpose of the passage is to ____. A. illustrate the features of willpower. B. introduce ways to build up willpower. C. explain the advantages of willpower. D. define the essence of willpower. Read the text quickly and then answer the question. Willpower isnt some immutable trait were either born with or not. It is a skill that can be developed, strengthened and targeted to help us achieve our goals. "Fundamental among mans inner powers is the tremendous unrealized potency of mans own will," wrote Italian psychologist Roberto Assagioli 25 years ago. "The trained will is a masterful weapon," added Alan Marlatt of the University of Washington, a psychologist who is studying how willpower helps people break habits and change their lives. "The dictionary defines willpower as control of ones impulses and actions. The key words are power and control. The power is there, but you have to control it." Here, from Marlatt and other experts, is how to do that: Be positive. Dont confuse willpower with self-denial. Willpower is most dynamic when applied to positive, uplifting purposes. Positive willpower helps us overcome inertia and focus on the future. When the going gets tough, visualize yourself happily and busily engaged in your goal, and youll keep working toward it. Make up your mind. James Prochaska, professor of psychology at the University of Rhode Island, has identified four stages in making a change. He calls them precontemplation (resisting the change), contemplation (weighing the pros and cons of the change), action (exercising willpower to make the change), and maintenance (using willpower to sustain the change). Some people are "chronic contemplators," Prochaska says. They know they should reduce their drinking but will have one more cocktail while they consider the matter. They may never put contemplation into action. To focus and mobilize your efforts, set a deadline. Sharpen your will. In 1915, psychologist Boyd Barrett suggested a list of repetitive will-training activities —— stepping up and down from a chair 30 times, spilling a box of matches and carefully replacing them one by one. These exercises, he maintained, strengthen the will so it can confront more consequential and difficult challenges. New Jersey Sen. Bill Bradley was a basketball star with the champion New York Knicks. On top of regular practice, he always went to the gym early and practised foul shots alone. He was determined to be among the best form of the foul line. True to his goal, he developed the highest percentage of successful free throws on his team. Expect trouble. The saying "Where theres a will, theres a way" is not the whole truth. Given the will, you still have to anticipate obstacles and plan how to deal with them. When professor of psychology Saul Shiffman of the University of Pittsburgh worked with reformed smokers whos gone back to cigarettes, he found that many of them hadnt considered how theyd cope with the urge to smoke. They had summoned the strength to quit, but couldnt remain disciplined. The first time they were offered a cigarette, they went back to smoking. If youve given up alcohol, rehearse your answer for when youre offered a drink. If youre expecting to jog but wake up to a storm, have an indoor workout program ready. Be realistic. The strongest will may falter when the goal is to lose 50 pounds in three months or to exercise three hours a day. Add failure undercuts your desire to try again. Sometimes its best to set a series of small goals instead of a single big one. As in the Alcoholics Anonymous slogan "One day at a time," divide your objective into one-day segments, then renew your resolve the next day. At the end of a week, youll have a series of triumphs to look back on. Be patient. A strong will doesnt develop overnight. It takes shape in increments, and there can be setbacks. Figure out what caused you to backslide, and redouble your efforts. When a friend of ours tried to give up cigarettes the first time, she failed. Analyzing her relapse, she realized she needed to do something with her hands. On her second try, she took up knitting and brought out needles and yarn every time she was tempted to light up. Within months she had knitted a sweater for her husband —— and seemed to be off cigarettes for good. Keep it up. A strong will becomes stronger each time it succeeds. If youve successfully mustered the willpower to kick a bad habit or leave a dead-end job, you gain confidence to confront other challenges. A record of success fosters an inner voice of confidence that, in the words of Assagioli, gives you "a firm foot on the edge of the precipice." You may face more difficult tasks, but youve conquered before, and you can conquer again. 51. The main purpose of the passage is to ____. A) illustrate the features of willpower. B) introduce ways to build up willpower. C) explain the advantages of willpower. D) define the essence of willpower. TEXT F First read the question. 52. The message of the passage is that shares can now be sold ____. A. through the computer. B. in the shop. C. at the bank. D. through the mail. Read the text quickly and then answer the question. Investors seeking a cheap, no-frills way to sell privatization shares need look no further than the post box. Most stockbrokers offer bargain-basement deals on postal trades. They are ideal for selling a small holding for the lowest possible commission. But the arrangements leave investors at the mercy of the Royal Mail and a seller will not know in advance how much a sale will produce. Data processing engineer Mark Stanistreet of Bradford sold by post after buying a few National Power and PowerGen shares when they were privatized. He says: "I didnt really know where to go to for help. An information slip with the shares gave details of Yorkshire Building Societys share shop service, which offered to sell for a flat fee of ￡5." "It was an ideal first step that showed me how easy and cheap it is to sell shares. I have been investing in a small way since then. "I use Yorkshires telephone service, which has a ￡9 minimum fee." Many stockbrokers offer postal deals as part of their usual dealing services, but clients may normally sell only big company or privatization shares this way. ShareLinks minimum postal commission is 7.50, Skipton Building Societys is 9 and NatWests is 9.95. 52. The message of the passage is that shares can now be sold ____. A) through the computer. B) in the shop. C) at the bank. D) through the mail. TEXT G First read the question. 53. In the passage the authors attitude towards the subject under discussion is ____. A. factual. B. critical. C. favorable. D. ambiguous. Read the text quickly and then answer the question. With increasing prosperity, Western European youth is having a fling that is creating distinctive consumer and cultural patterns. The result has been the increasing emergence in Europe of that phenomenon well known in America as the "youth market." This is a market in which enterprising businesses cater to the demands of teenagers and older youths in all their rock mania and pop-art forms. In Western Europe, the youth market may appropriately be said to be in its infancy. In some countries such as Britain, West Germany and France, it is more advanced than in others. Some manifestations of the market, chiefly sociological, have been recorded, but it is only just beginning to be the subject of organized consumer research and promotion. Characteristics of the evolving European youth market indicate dissimilarities as well as similarities to the American youth market. The similarities: The markets basis is essentially the same —— more spending power and freedom to use it in the hands of teenagers and older youth. Young consumers also make up an increasingly high proportion of the population. As in the United States, youthful tastes in Europe extend over a similar range of products —— records and record players, transistor radios, leather jackets and "wayout," extravagantly styled clothing, cosmetics and soft drinks. Generally it now is difficult to tell in which direction trans-Atlantic teenage influences are flowing. Also, a pattern of conformity dominates European youth as in this country, though in Britain the object is to wear clothes that "make the wearer stand out," but also make him "in," such as tight trousers and precisely tailored jackets. Worship and emulation of "idols" in the entertainment field, especially the "pop" singers and other performers is pervasive. There is also the same exuberance and unpredictability in sudden fad switches. In Paris, buyers of stores catering to the youth market carefully watch what dress is being worn by a popular television teenage singer to be ready for a sudden demand for copies. In Stockholm other followers of teenage fads call the youth market "attractive but irrational." The most obvious differences between the youth market in Europe and that in the United States is in size. In terms of volume and variety of sales, the market in Europe is only a shadow of its American counterpart, but it is a growing shadow. But there are also these important dissimilarities generally with the American youth market: In the European youth market, unlike that of the United States, it is the working youth who provides the bulk of purchasing power. On the average, the school-finishing age still tends to be 14 years. This is the maximum age to which compulsory education extends, and with Europes industrial manpower shortage, thousands of teenage youths may soon attain incomes equal in many cases to that of their fathers. Although, because of general prosperity, European youths are beginning to continue school studies beyond the compulsory maximum age, they do not receive anything like the pocket money or "allowances" of American teenagers. The European average is about 5 to 10 a month. Working youth, consequently, are the big spenders in the European youth market, but they also have less leisure than those staying on at school, who in turn have less buying power. 53. In the passage the author's attitude towards the subject under discussion is ____. A) factual. B) critical. C) favorable. D) ambiguous. TEXT H First read the question. 54. The passage mainly ____. A. discusses patterns in company car use. B. advertises famous British company cars. C. recommends inexpensive company cars. D. introduces different models of cars. Read the text quickly and then answer the question. Motorists would rather pay more tax than lose the place in the corporate pecking order conferred on them by their company cars. And it is the company car —— which accounts for half of all new motor sales each year —— which continues to be the key method of measuring your progress up the greasy pole. Although a Roll-Royce or Bentley is the ultimate success symbol, a Jaguar is still desired by most top directors, according to the survey by top peoples pay and perks experts at the Monks Partnership. About 40 per cent of company cars are perks rather than necessities for the job, even though the average company car driver with a 1500cc engine is paying more than three times as much in tax compared to a decade ago. Average cash allowances for a company car rise from ￡1,500 for those whose job requires them to have four wheels, to ￡4,000 for chief executives. For company chairmen, the BMW 7 series and Jaguars Daimler Double Six top the list of favored cars, with upper range Mercedes-Benz models close behind. The chief executives tastes follow a similar pattern with Jaguars Sovereign 4.0 litre and XJ6 3.2, Mercedes-Benzs 320/300 and the BMX 7-series proving most popular. Or other directors, the BMX 5 series is tops, followed by the Mercedes-Benz 200 series, Jaguars XJ6 3.2 and the Rover 800 series. Senior managers favor the BMX 3 and 5 series, depending on their rank and company size. Sales representatives drive the 1.8 and 1.6 liter Ford Mondeos, Rover 200 and 400 series and Peugeots 405. Top of the prohibited list are sports cars and convertibles. But British policies are being relaxed, with 64 per cent of companies offering Japanese cars. The practice of employees trading up by making cash contribution to the value of the car they want is becoming more common, with some firms reporting take-up rates in excess of 70 per cent. 54. The passage mainly ____. A) discusses patterns in company car use. B) advertises famous British company cars. C) recommends inexpensive company cars. D) introduces different models of cars. TEXT I First read the questions. 55. ____ deals with Marxs intellectual impact. A. Chapter I B. Chapter II C. Chapter III D. Chapter IV 56. The chapter that discusses an important source of learning in high-technology industries is ____. A. Chapter III. B. Chapter IV. C. Chapter V. D. Chapter VI. 57. The role of market forces in innovative activities is addressed in ____. A. Part I. B. Part II. C. Part III. D. Part IV. Read the text quickly and then answer the questions. The book opens with a broad survey, in part I, of the historical literature on technical change. It attempts to provide a guide to a wide range of writings that illuminate technological change as a historical phenomenon. The first chapter discusses aspects of the conceptualization of technological change and then goes on to consider what the literature has had to say on (1) the rate of technological change, (2) the forces influencing its direction, (3) the speed with which new technologies have diffused, and (4) the impact of technological change on the growth in productivity. A separate chapter is devoted to Marx. Marxs intellectual impact has been so pervasive as to rank him as a major social force in history as well as an armchair interpreter of history. Part II is, in important respects, the core of the book. Each of its chapters advances an argument about some significant characteristics of industrial technologies. Chapter 3 explores a variety of less visible forms in which technological improvements enter the economy. Chapter 4 explicitly considers some significant characteristics of different energy forms. It examines some of the complexities of the long-term interactions between technological change and energy resources. Chapter 5, "On Technological Expectations," addresses an issue that is simultaneously relevant to a wide range of industries —— indeed, to all industries that are experiencing, or are expected to experience, substantial rates of technical improvement. The last two chapters of Part II are primarily concerned with issues of greatest relevance to high-technology industries. Chapter 6, "Learning by Using," identifies an important source of learning that grows out of actual experience in using products characterized by a high degree of system complexity. In contrast to learning by doing, which deals with skill improvements that grow out of the productive process, learning by using involves an experience that begins where learning by doing ends. The final chapter in Part II, "How Exogenous Is Science?" looks explicitly at the nature of science technology interactions in high-technology industries. It examines some of the specific ways in which these industries have been drawing upon the expanding pool of scientific knowledge and techniques. The three chapters constituting Part III share a common concern with the role of market forces in shaping both the rate and the direction of innovative activities. They attempt to look into the composition of forces constituting the demand and the supply for new products and processes, especially in high-technology industries. Chapter 8 examines the history of technical change in the commercial aircraft industry over a fifty-year period 1925-75. Finally, the two chapters of Part IV place the discussion of technological change in an international context, with the first chapter oriented toward its long history and second toward the present and the future. Chapter 11 pays primary attention to the transfer of industrial technology from Britain to the world-wide industrialization, because nineteenth-century industrialization was, in considerable measure, the story of the overseas transfer of the technologies already developed by the first industrial society. The last chapter speculates about the prospects for the future from an American perspective, a perspective that is often dominated by apprehension over the loss of American technological leadership, especially in high-technology industries. By drawing upon some of the distinctive characteristics of high-technology industries, an attempt is made to identify possible elements of a future scenario. 55. ____ deals with Marx's intellectual impact. A) Chapter I B) Chapter II C) Chapter III D) Chapter IV 56. The chapter that discusses an important source of learning in high-technology industries is ____. A) Chapter III. B) Chapter IV. C) Chapter V. D) Chapter VI. 57. The role of market forces in innovative activities is addressed in ____. A) Part I. B) Part II. C) Part III. D) Part IV. TEXT J First read the questions. 58. Who can enter the contest? A. Postgraduates. B. Undergraduates. C. Journalists. D. Teachers. 59. Which of the following entry rules is NOT correct? A. Submissions had been published within a specified period. B. No limits are set on content or length of the submission. C. Each entrant can submit no more than one entry. D. A cover letter by the entrant is required. Read the text quickly and then answer the questions. THE FIFTH ANNUAL NATION/I.F. STONE AWARD FOR STUDENT JOURNALISM ENTRY DEADLINE: JUNE 29,1994 PURPOSE: The Nation Institute/I.F. Stone Award recognizes excellence in student journalism. Entries should exhibit the uniquely independent journalistic tradition of I.F. Stone. A self-described "Jeffersonian Marxist," Stone combined progressive politics, investigative zeal and a compulsion to tell the truth with a commitment to human rights and the exposure of injustice. As Washington editor of The Nation magazine and founder of the legendary I.F. Stones Weekly, he specialized in publishing information ignored by the mainstream media (which he often found in The Congressional Record and other public documents overlooked by the big-circulation dailies). ELIGIBILITY: The contest is open to all undergraduate students enrolled in a U.S. college. Articles may be submitted by the writers themselves or nominated by editors of student publications or faculty members. While entries originally published in student publications are preferred, all articles will be considered provided they were not written as part of a students regular course work. THE PRIZE: The article that, in the opinion of the judges, represents the most outstanding example of student journalism in the tradition of I.F. Stone will be published in a fall issue of The Nation. The winner will receive a cash award of 1,000. The Nation reserves the right to edit the winning article to conform to the space limitations of the magazine. Announcement of the winning article will be made in The Nation in the fall of 1994. DEADLINE: All entries must be postmarked by June 29, 1994. ENTRY RULES: All entries must have been written or published between June 30, 1993 and June 29, 1994. Please send 2 photocopies. Each writer may submit up to three separate entries. A series of related articles will be considered as a single entry. Investigative articles are particularly encouraged. There are no restrictions as to scope, content or length. Accompanying material in support of entries is not required, but entrants are encouraged to submit a cover letter explaining the context of the submitted story, along with a brief biographical note about the author. Elaborate presentations are neither required nor desired. Entries will not be returned. Judges reserve the right to authenticate, accept or disallow entries at their discretion. The decision of the judges is final. All entries must include the writers school, home address and telephone number. ALL ENTRIES SHOULD BE SENT TO: NATION/STONE AWARD, C/O THE NATION INSTITUTE, 72 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK, NY 10011 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, PLEASE CALL (212) 463-9270. A PROJECT OF THE NATION INSTITUTE 58. Who can enter the contest? A) Postgraduates. B) Undergraduates. C) Journalists. D) Teachers. 59. Which of the following entry rules is NOT correct? A) Submissions had been published within a specified period. B) No limits are set on content or length of the submission. C) Each entrant can submit no more than one entry. D) A cover letter by the entrant is required. TEXT K First read the question. 60. According to the holiday advertisement, 939 is for a ____. A. two-week holiday in October. B. two-week holiday in November. C. three-week holiday in November. D. three-week holiday in October. Read the text quickly and then answer the question. HAWAII What price paradise? Less than you could possibly imagine on this incredible value holiday with Page & Moy, the UKs No 1 tour operator to Hawaii. You can enjoy three weeks for the price of two at the Outrigger Village Hotel for just 899 during November or 939 in October. The Polynesians call Hawaii "paradise on earth". Youll soon see why, whilst enjoying the facilities of the Outrigger Village Hotel including pool, bars, restaurant and shopping arcade, and just a five minute walk from the legendary Waikiki beach. Life can be as busy or as relaxing as you like —— we can even help you create your own itinerary of excursions to the other islands, each stunningly beautiful but very different. To start your holiday you can choose a 2 night stay in San Francisco, Los Angeles or Las Vegas absolutely free. Join us in the tropical paradise of Hawaii —— 2 weeks from an unrepeatable price of 899 with a 3rd week free. ________________________________________________________________________ THE PRICE INCLUDES ________________________________________________________________________ 2 nights in San Francisco, Los Angeles or Las Vegas. Scheduled flights from London/Manchester/Birmingham. Transfers between airport and hotels (except Las Vegas). 14 nights accommodation in Hawaii —— 3rd week free. Traditional Lei greeting. Services of experienced local travel representatives. Free travel bag. Holiday Delay Insurance. 60. According to the holiday advertisement, '939 is for a ____. A) two-week holiday in October. B) two-week holiday in November. C) three-week holiday in November. D) three-week holiday in October. PART IV TRANSLATION SECTION A: CHINESE TO ENGLISH (30 MIN.) Translate the following part of the text into English. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. 来美国求学的中国学生与其他亚裔学生一样，大多非常刻苦勤奋，周末也往往会抽出一天甚至两天的时间去实验室加班，因而比起美国学生来，成果出得较多。我的导师是亚裔人， 嗜烟好酒，脾气暴躁。但他十分欣赏亚裔学生勤奋与扎实的基础知识，也特别了解亚裔学生 的心理。因此，在他实验室所招的学生中，除有一名来自德国外，其余5位均是亚裔学生。 他干脆在实验室的门上贴一醒目招牌："本室助研必须每周工作7天，早10时至晚12时， 工作时间必须全力以赴。"这位导师的严格及苛刻是全校有名的，在我所呆的3年半中，共 有14位学生被招进他的实验室，最后博士毕业的只剩下5人。1990年夏天，我不顾别人劝 阻，硬着头皮接受了导师的资助，从此开始了艰难的求学旅程。 SECTION B ENGLISH TO CHINESE Translate the following part of the text into Chinese. Write your translation on ANSWER SHEET THREE. Opera is expensive: that much is inevitable. But expensive things are not inevitably the province of the rich unless we abdicate societys power of choice. We can choose to make opera, and other expensive forms of culture, accessible to those who cannot individually pay for it. The question is: why should we? Nobody denies the imperatives of food, shelter, defense, health and education. But even in a prehistoric cave, mankind stretched out a hand not just to eat, drink or fight, but also to draw. The impulse towards culture, the desire to express and explore the world through imagination and representation is fundamental. In Europe, this desire has found fulfillment in the masterpieces of our music, art, literature and theatre. These masterpieces are the touchstones for all our efforts; they are the touchstones for the possibilities to which human thought and imagination may aspire; they carry the most profound messages that can be sent from one human to another. PART V WRITING Requirements: In the first part of your writing you should present your thesis statement, and in the second part you should support the thesis statement with appropriate details. In the last part you should bring what you have written to a natural conclusion with a summary. Marks will be awarded for content, organization, grammar and appropriacy. Failure to follow the above instructions may result in a loss of marks. Some people hold the view that a students success in university study follows the same pattern as that of farming, which is characterized by the sowing the seeds, nurturing growth and harvesting the rewards process. Write an essay of about 300 words on the topic given below to support this view with your own experience as a university student. SOWING THE SEEDS, NURTURING GROWTH AND HARVESTING THE REWARDS